ASFTY

About the Asset Safety Work Process
The Asset Safety Work Process is focused on maintaining safe processes. The Asset
Safety Work Process consists of the steps that are outlined in the following table.
Step Description
Details
Assess the
operating risks.
Allows you to define and organize the risks that are associated
with a system.
Determine Safety Allows you to select the appropriate risk reduction required for the
Integrity level
system to achieve an acceptable level of risk by determining the
(SIL)
Safety Integrity Level (SIL) for that system.
Validate
Allows you to define the instrumented functions that are
Instrument design associated with a safety instrumented system, create a visual
representation of the safety instrumented system, and validate that
the safety instrumented system meets the defined SIL for that
system.
Allows you to:
Consolidate Plan
to achieve SIL
Define, document, and maintain proof tests for the safety
instrumented system, including the supporting calibrations
and inspections for those proof tests as well as the
schedules on which the proof tests will be executed.
Define a maintenance plan for the safety instrumented
system.
Schedule reevaluations, audits, and redesigns of the safety

instrumented system, as needed.
Execute strategy Allows you to execute the activities associated with proof tests,
maintenance plans, recommendations, redesigns, and audits for the
safety instrumented systems as well as document any failures or
trips that occur during these activities.
Operator and
monitor
performance
Allows you to compare the actual failure rates with the design
failure rates via the work orders, proof test results, and trip reports
and make decisions based upon that data.
The following image shows an illustration of how all the steps in the Asset Safety Work
Process relate to one another. Each step in the work process is represented by an orange
circle. In addition, you can see that the entire work process is built upon the APM
Foundation Work Process, whose components are represented by the blue boxes.
Within the Meridium APM product, each of the steps listed above can be accomplished
using one or more of the following modules:
Hazards Analysis
SIS Management
Calibration Management
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.
Asset Safety System Requirements

Multiple licenses are required to take advantage of Asset Safety modules. In addition to
the following licenses, your system must contain the basic Meridium APM system
architecture:
Hazards Analysis
SIS Management
After you have configured the basic system architecture and licensed these modules, you
will need to perform configuration steps for each module.
First-Time Deployment Workflow

Deploying and configuring the Asset Safety Work Process for the first time includes
completing multiple steps, which are outlined in the table in this topic. All of these steps
are required to fully implement the Asset Safety Work Process. These steps provide all
the information that you need to deploy Asset Safety with the basic Meridium APM
system architecture.
Step Task
1
Configure the Hazards Analysis module.
Configure the SIS Management module.
Configure the Calibration Management

module.
Upgrade Workflow
You can upgrade to V3.6.0.0.0 using the instructions that are provided in the Installation,
Upgrade, and Configuration documentation for each Asset Safety module:
Hazards Analysis
SIS Management
Asset Safety User Instructions

The user instructions for Asset Safety modules are provided in the documentation for the
related module. Documentation for the Asset Safety dashboard is provided in the Asset
Safety Reference Information documentation.
Accessing the Asset Safety Dashboard

You can access the Asset Safety dashboard to view information about pieces of
equipment and locations that you analyze using Asset Safety modules.
To access the baseline Asset Safety Dashboard:
On the Meridium APM Framework main menu, click Go To, point to Asset Safety,
and then click Dashboard.
The Dashboard page appears, displaying the Asset Safety dashboard.
Aspects of the Asset Safety Dashboard

The Asset Safety dashboard contains sections that display information about pieces of
equipment and locations that you analyze using Asset Safety modules. The Asset Safety
dashboard contains the following sections:
Calibration Pass/Fail Results for Last 12 Months

Calibration Recommendations
Calibration Schedule
Content Filter
Hazard Analysis Schedule
Proof Tests Pass/Fail
Proof Test Schedule
Proven in Use Devices by Type
Quantity of Protective Instrument Loops
Quantity of SIF Trips
View SIL Distribution
Note: Your use of the Asset Safety dashboard will depend upon your role in the
organization and the Asset Safety modules that are associated with your role. For
example, you might choose to display certain sections and hide others depending on the
type of data that you want to view on the dashboard. This documentation does not assume
a workflow for using the Asset Safety dashboard. Instead, details on working with
dashboards in general and information on the sections that are displayed on the dashboard
and their supporting Catalog items are provided.
Content Filter
The Content Filter section is a configured Content Filter section that contains lists that
are used to filter the data that is displayed in other sections on the dashboard.
The Content Filter section contains the following lists:
Site
Area
Unit
Hazards Analysis Schedule

The Hazards Analysis Schedule section is a configured List - Query Result section that
displays the following columns:
Analysis ID: Displays a hyperlink for each Hazards Analysis record whose Next
Reevaluation Date value corresponds with a date in the past or a date that will
occur within the next 30 days.
Due Date: Displays the Next Reevaluation Date value for the corresponding
Hazards Analysis record.
The following image shows an example of the Hazards Analysis Schedule section.
You can click the hyperlinked Record ID of any Hazards Analysis record that appears in
the Analysis ID list to view that Hazards Analysis record in the Record Manager.
View SIL Distribution

The View SIL Distribution section is a configured Chart - Category section that displays a
pie chart that represents the sum of Instrumented Function records that exist in the
database. The chart is divided into sections based on the value in the Selected SIL Level
of these Instrumented Function records.
Each section represents the sum of Instrumented Function records whose Selected SIL
Level value is:
1
2
Below the pie chart, a legend displays the color that is associated with each value.
Additionally, Instrumented Function records whose Selected SIL Level field does not
contain a value are represented by a section and the value None.
The following image shown an example of the View SIL Distribution section. In this
example, the pie chart indicates that there are seven Instrumented Function records whose
Selected SIL Level field contains the value 2.
Quantity of Protective Instrumented

Loops
The Quantity of Protective Instrumented Loops section is a configured Chart - Category
section that displays a pie chart that represents the sum of Protective Instrument Loop
records that exist in the database. The chart is divided into sections based on the state of
Protective Instrument Loop records.
Each section represents the sum of Protective Instrument Loop records whose current
state is:
Approval
Design
In Service
Out of Service
Pending Approval
Below the pie chart, a legend displays the color that is associated with each state.
The following image shows an example of the Quantity of Protective Instrumented Loops
section. In this example, the pie chart indicates that 182 Protective Instrument Loop
records are in the Design state.
Proven in Use Devices by Type
The Proven in Use Devices by Type section is a configured Chart - Series section that
displays a bar graph that plots the number of devices by device type. The following
device types are displayed on the graph:
Sensor
Final Element
The following image shows an example of the Proven in Use Devices by Type section.
Proof Test Schedule

The Proof Test Schedule section is a configured List - Query Result section that displays
the following columns:
Task ID: Displays a hyperlink for each Task record whose:

o Task Type value is Proof Test.
-andNext Date value corresponds with a date in the past or a date that will
occur within the next 30 days.
Due Date: Displays the Next Date value for the corresponding Task record.
o
The following image shows an example of the Proof Test Schedule section.
You can click the hyperlinked Record ID of any Task record that appears in the Task ID
list to view that Task record in the Record Manager.
Proof Tests Pass/Fail
The Proof Tests Pass/Fail section is a configured Chart - Series section that displays a
bar graph that plots on a yearly basis, for the past five years, the number of SIS Proof
Test records that are related to a Functional Test Detail record whose Pass/Fail value is
either:
Pass.
-or
Fail.
Each of these scenarios is represented by a bar on the graph that is shaded according to
the legend that appears below the graph.
The following image shows an example of the Proof Tests Pass/Fail section.
Calibration Recommendations
The Calibration Recommendations section is a configured List - Query Result section that
displays the following columns:
Headline: Displays a hyperlink for each Calibration Recommendation record

whose Target Completion Date value corresponds with a date in the past or a date
that will occur within the next 30 days.
State: Displays the state of the corresponding Calibration Recommendation
record.
Due Date: Displays the Target Completion Date value of the corresponding
Calibration Recommendation record.
The following image shows an example of the Calibration Recommendations section.
You can click the hyperlinked Recommendation Headline value of any Calibration
Recommendation record that appears in the Headline list to view that Calibration
Recommendation record in the Record Manager.
Calibration Schedule
The Calibration Schedule section is a configured List - Query Result section that displays
the following columns:
Task ID: Displays a hyperlink for each Calibration Task record whose Next
Date value corresponds with a date in the past or a date that will occur within
the next 30 days.
Due Date: Displays the Next Date value in the corresponding Calibration Task
record.
The following image shows an example of the Calibration Schedule section.
You can click the hyperlinked Record ID of any Calibration Task record that appears in
the Task ID list to view that Calibration Task record in the Record Manager.
Calibration Pass/Fail Results for Last 12

Months
The Calibration Pass/Fail Results for Last 12 Months section is a configured Measures General section that displays the following measures that are associated with Calibration
records in the database whose Calibration Start Date value corresponds with a date that
has occurred in the previous 12 months:
Pass as Found: Displays the percentage of these Calibration records that contain
the value PASS in the Overall AF Pass/Fail field.
Pass as Left: Displays the percentage of these Calibration records that:
Contain the value PASS in the Overall AL Pass/Fail field.
-butDo not contain the value PASS in the Overall AF Pass/Fail field.
Pass: Displays the percentage of these Calibration records that contain the value
PASS in the Overall AL Pass/Fail or Overall AF Pass/Fail field.
o
The following image shows an example of the Calibration Pass/Fail Results for Last 12
Months section.

The Quantity of SIF Trips section is a configured Chart - Series section that displays a
bar graph that plots on a yearly basis, for the past five years, the number of SIS Trip
Report records whose Trip Type value is either:
Unsafe Demand (Unsafe).
-or
Spurious Trip (Spurious).
Each of these scenarios is represented by a bar on the graph that is shaded according to
the legend that appears below the graph.
The following image shows an example of the Quantity of SIF Trips section.
About Asset Safety Catalog Items
Asset Safety Catalog items are situated with their related modules within the Catalog
hierarchy. For more details about these Catalog items, consult the following sections of
the Meridium APM Help system:
Hazards Analysis Catalog Folder Structure

SIS Management Catalog Folder Structure
Calibration Management Catalog Folder Structure
For information about the Catalog items that return results on the Asset Safety dashboard,
see the Dashboard Queries Folder topic in the SIS Management Help.
Overview of Hazards Analysis

The Hazards Analysis module lets you examine the processes that are performed by the
equipment in a facility to identify existing and potential hazards that are associated with
those processes under both normal and abnormal conditions. Using Hazards Analysis, for
a given process, you can identify risks, which are events that might occur that threaten
safety, either of humans or the environment, and cause negative outcomes such as human
injury, death, or environmental degradation. You can then perform a risk assessment to
answer the following questions:
How probable is it that the risk will have a negative safety or environmental
impact?
How would I rate the severity of this safety or environmental impact?
For a given process, the combination of the risk and the risk assessment is defined as a
hazardous Scenario (sometimes referred to simply as a Scenario). Identifying these
Scenarios could mean the difference between life and death.
For example, suppose that in your facility, you have two tanks that are connected with a
tube, where hazardous chemicals in one tank are transferred to the other tank through the
tube. The continual process of monitoring the pressure in each tank, increasing or
decreasing it as needed, and transporting the chemicals from the source tank to the target
tank is a potentially hazardous process that presents risk. During this process, for
example, if the pressure monitor malfunctions, the pressure in the tube could increase too
rapidly and cause the chemicals in the source tank to leak out, causing damage to the
environment or personnel.
After you identify the hazardous Scenarios associated with a process, you can use
Hazards Analysis to:
Define the characteristics of the Scenarios, including the risks that they include.
Assess the likelihood of the risks in each Scenario actually occurring.
Identify ways to prevent the risk in each Scenario from occurring.
Make recommendations for actions that can be taken within the facility to prevent
the risks in each Scenario from occurring or to mitigate the risks in some way
(e.g., lower the severity of the safety or environmental impact).
For example, suppose that for the preceding process (transporting hazardous chemicals
between two tanks), you identify a risk that the pressure monitor will stop working and a
chemical spill will occur. Through a risk assessment, you also determine that the
chemical spill is very likely to cause a negative impact to both human safety and the
environment. Based on this assessment, you might determine that the only way to prevent
the risk is to be alerted when the pressure in the tank is increasing too quickly. In this
case, you may recommend that a safety system be put in place to alert someone if the
pressure in the tank is rising too quickly.
Using the Hazards Analysis module, you can conduct the following types of Hazards
Analyses:
Hazards and Operability (HAZOP) Analysis: Lets you document the known
hazardous Scenarios associated with a process, assess the likelihood of the
risks in those Scenarios occurring, and determine the best way to mitigate
the risk in those Scenarios.
What If Analysis: Lets you hypothesize about the possible hazardous Scenarios
and determine the risk associated with them and determine the best way to
mitigate those risks. D
The Meridium APM Hazards Analysis module and supporting documentation are dedicated in
memory of Steve Soos IV, Product Manager, whose knowledge, dedication, and vision are
realized therein.
Hazards Analysis System Requirements
The Hazards and Operability Analysis license is required to take advantage of Hazards
Analysis functionality. In addition, your system must contain the basic Meridium APM
system architecture.
In order to use the integration between Hazards Analysis and SIS Management, the SIS
Management license is also required.
Hint: Details on the system requirements for the basic Meridium APM system
architecture and activating licenses can be found in the Installation, Upgrade, and System
Administration section of the Meridium APM Help system.
After you have installed and configured the basic system architecture, you will need to
perform some configuration tasks specifically for the Hazards Analysis feature.
Components in Hazards Analyses

A Hazards Analysis is made up of records and links as defined by the Hazards Analysis
data model. But beyond understanding a Hazards Analysis at the entity level, it is helpful
to visualize it at a conceptual level, where groups of records and links make up the main
elements of the analysis, as defined in the following list:
Process: A series of actions that are performed by multiple pieces of equipment or

locations in a single system.
Scenario: For a given process, the combination of a risk and its risk assessment,
where a risk is any event that can occur that threatens safety, either human or the
environment, and the negative outcome associated with that event (e.g., human
injury). You can define multiple Scenarios for a single process.
While at a high level a Scenario is a combination of a risk and its risk assessment, each
Scenario can be broken down into the following more granular parts:
1.
Deviation: A condition that deviates from the normal behavior of the

process and directly leads to a risk.
Cause: The event that results from the deviation and leads to a negative
safety or environmental outcome.
Consequence: The negative safety or environmental outcome that results

from the cause.
Note: Together, the cause and the consequence define the risk.
1.
Risk Assessment: Identifies the probability that the risk will have a
negative safety or environmental impact and the severity of that negative
safety or environmental impact.
Safeguard: A safety instrumented system or other safety device that

prevents the risk from occurring or lowers the probability or severity
identified by the risk assessment.
Overview of the Hazards Analysis Data

Model
The Hazards Analysis data model uses families to represent the components of a Hazards
and Operability (HAZOP) Analysis or a What If Analysis. Meridium APM leverages its
fundamental entity and relationship family infrastructure to store data related to these
analyses. When attempting to understand and make sense of the Meridium APM Hazards
Analysis functionality, it is helpful to visualize the data model for the:
HAZOP Analysis (pronounced HazOp)
What If Analysis
Because you should already be familiar with the concept of records and viewing records
in the Meridium APM Record Manger, as you attempt to get your bearings in Hazards
Analysis, it may be useful to remember that Hazards Analysis is simply a customized
view of individual records that work together to make up a HAZOP Analysis or a What If
Analysis.
All HAZOP Analyses and What If Analyses begin with a Hazards Analysis record. Each
Hazards Analysis record will be linked to:
One or more Human Resource records.

One or more Reference Document records.
One or more Hazards Analysis System/Node records.
Depending on whether you are conducting a HAZOP Analysis or What If Analysis, each
Hazards Analysis System/Node record will be linked to:
One or more HAZOP Deviation records (for a HAZOP Analysis).
One or more What If records (for a What If Analysis).
-or-
Note: The record to which the Hazards Analysis System/Node record is linked is the only
difference between the HAZOP Analysis data model and the What If Analysis data
model.
Each HAZOP Deviation or What If record will be linked to one or more Hazards
Analysis Cause records.
Each Hazards Analysis Cause record will be linked to:
One Equipment or Functional Location record.
One or more Hazards Analysis Consequence records.
Each Hazards Analysis Consequence records will be linked to:
One or more Risk Assessment Recommendation records.
Note: Risk Assessment Recommendation records can be linked to Equipment records

through the Safety Analysis Has Equipment relationship. To simplify the data model
images, this relationship is not included in the images.
One Risk Assessment record.
One or more Hazards Analysis Safeguard records.
Each Hazards Analysis Safeguard record will be linked to:

One Instrumented Function record.
Note: Instrumented Function records are also used by SIS Management to store details on
the instrumented function for a given safety system.
In addition to the relationships explained above, families exist that are used by Hazards
Analysis to support Revision History. The family caption for these families matches the
source family name, appended with Revision to indicate that the family is a Revision
family. For details on these families and how they are related to one another, see the
Hazards Analysis Revision data model image.
Illustration of the HAZOP Analysis Data

Model
The following diagram illustrates the families that participate in a HAZOP Analysis.
In this image:
The shaded boxes represent entity families.
The solid arrows represent relationship families.
You can determine the direction of each relationship definition from the direction of the
arrow head: the box from which the arrow originates is the predecessor in that
relationship definition, and the box to which the arrow head points is the successor in that
relationship definition.
Illustration of the What If Analysis Data

Model
The following diagram illustrates the families that participate in a What If Analysis.
In this image:
The shaded boxes represent entity families.
The solid arrows represent relationship families.
arrow head: the box from which the arrow originates is the predecessor in that
relationship definition, and the box to which the arrow head points is the successor in that
relationship definition.
About Hazards Analysis Record States

When you are working with Hazards Analysis records for a HAZOP Analysis or What If
Analysis, you can use state management to facilitate a workflow that tracks the progress
of the analysis.
Above the Hazards Analysis datasheet, options appear that you can use to manage the
states for that record. You can follow the standard procedure for managing record states.
The following baseline record states are configured for the Hazards Analysis family:
Planning: Indicates that the analysis is in the planning state.

Active: Indicates that the analysis is active.
Review: Indicates that the analysis has been sent for review.
Pending Approval: Indicates that the analysis has been reviewed and is awaiting
approval.
Complete: Indicates that the analysis is complete. After a Hazards Analysis record
state is changed to Complete:
The numeric value in the Revision Number field in the Hazards Analysis
record is increased by one.
A Hazards Analysis Revision record is created, which stores a snapshot of
the Hazards Analysis record when the state was changed to Complete.
Note: To change the Hazards Analysis record state, you must be a Super User or a
member of the MI HA Owner Security Group or MI HA Facilitator Security Group.
Illustration of Hazards Analysis Record

States
By default, the following baseline State Configuration exists for the Hazards Analysis
family.
Initial State
The Planning state is the initial state of all new Hazards Analysis records.
Datasheet Configuration
By default, states and operations will appear on the datasheet when you are viewing a
Hazards Analysis record in Hazards Analysis, the Record Manager, or the Bulk Data
Form.
Reserved States and Operations

The following table lists the baseline states and operations and indicates which of these
states and operations are reserved. You cannot remove or modify reserved states or
operation. You can, however, add your own states and operations to the State
Configuration.
States
State
Is Reserved?
Planning
Yes
Active
Yes
Review
Yes
Pending Approval
Yes
Complete
Yes
Operations
Operation
Is Reserved?
Begin
No
Propose
No
Submit
No
Accept
No
Reject
No
Modify/Reassess
No
State Configuration Roles
The following table lists the baseline states and indicates which State Configuration
Roles are assigned to each state.
State
Planning
Active
Review
Security Groups
MI HA Facilitator
MI HA Owner
MI HA Facilitator
MI HA Owner
MI HA Facilitator
MI HA Owner
Pending Approval MI HA Owner

Complete
MI HA Owner
If desired, you can assign other State Configuration Roles to any state. In addition, for
each state, the Require a specific user to be assigned to a state check box is selected.
Example of a Hazardous Process

Consider the following image, which illustrates the process of transferring hazardous
chemicals from Tank A to Tank B. In the image, each step in the process is numbered to
indicate the chronological order of events that occur in the process.
From the numbers in the image, you can see that the process involves the following steps:
1. In Tank A, the pressure monitor tracks the pressure level in the tank.
2. Based on the pressure monitor readings for Tank A, the pressure switch opens or
closes to increase or decrease the pressure as it fluctuates due to changing
environments (e.g., the pressure rises when humidity increases).
3. Hazardous chemicals are transferred from Tank A to Tank B through the
connector.
4. In Tank B, the pressure monitor tracks the pressure level in the tank.
5. Based on the pressure monitor readings for Tank B, the pressure switch opens or
closes to increase or decrease the pressure as it fluctuates due to changing
environments (e.g., the pressure rises when humidity increases).
Note: This example represents a simplified process and is provided to explain the
terminology and concepts that you will need to understand in order to work with the
Hazards Analysis module. Depending on the types of processes in your facility, the
complexity of your analyses will differ. For example, your process might include multiple
deviations, or it might include deviations that are also causes of other deviations.
Example Scenario 1
From the example process of transporting hazardous chemicals from Tank A to Tank B,
consider a Scenario that includes the following risk and risk assessment:
Risk: Hazardous chemicals leak out of the connector, causing multiple fatalities.
Risk Assessment: The probability of multiple fatalities having a negative safety

impact is very high, and the severity of the impact is also very high. However,
multiple fatalities are not likely to cause a negative environmental impact.
The specific parts of the Scenario are outlined in the following list:
Deviation: Pressure builds up in Tank A.

Cause: Hazardous chemicals leak out of the connector.
Consequence: Multiple people around the connector at the time of the leak are
killed.
Risk Assessment: The probability of multiple fatalities having a negative safety

impact is very high, and the consequence of the impact is also very high.
However, multiple fatalities are not likely to cause a negative environmental
impact.
Safeguard: A toxicity detector, which sounds an alarm when the toxicity levels in
the facility reach high-risk levels.
Note: This example represents a simplified Scenario and is provided to explain the
complexity of your analyses will differ. For example, your Scenario might include
multiple deviations, or it might include deviations that are also causes of other deviations.
Example: Scenario 2
From the example process of transporting hazardous chemicals from Tank A to Tank B,
consider a Scenario that includes the following risk and risk assessment:
Risk: Hazardous chemicals leak out of the connector, causing environmental

degradation.
Risk Assessment: The probability of environmental degradation having a negative

safety impact is very low. However, the probability of environmental degradation
having a negative environmental impact if very high, but the severity of the
impact is medium.
The specific parts of the Scenario are outlined in the following list:
Deviation: Pressure builds up in Tank A.

Cause: Hazardous chemicals leak out of the connector.
Consequence: Environmental degradation.
Risk Assessment: The probability of environmental degradation having a negative

safety impact is very low. However, the probability of environmental degradation
having a negative environmental impact if very high, but the severity of the
impact is medium.
Safeguard: A toxicity detector, which sounds an alarm when the toxicity levels in
the facility reach high-risk levels.
Note: This example represents a simplified Scenario and is provided to explain the
complexity of your analyses will differ. For example, your Scenario might include
multiple deviations, or it might include deviations that are also causes of other deviations.
Accessing the Hazards Analysis Start

Page
The Hazards Analysis Start Page provides a starting point from which you can access the
features in Hazards Analysis. You can use this page to navigate to the features in the
Hazards Analysis module.
To access the Hazards Analysis Start Page:
and then click Hazards Analysis.
The Hazards Analysis Start Page appears.
Aspects of the Hazards Analysis Start

Page
The Hazards Analysis Start Page contains the following links:
HAZOP Analysis: Displays the HAZOP Analysis Search page, from which you
can open an existing HAZOP Analysis or create a new one.
What If Analysis: Displays the What If Analysis Search page, from which you can
open an existing What If Analysis or create a new one.
Manage Recommendations: Displays the Recommendation Management page,

where you can view a list of the Risk Assessment Recommendation records that
are associated with all HAZOP Analyses and What If Analyses.
Perform Administrative Tasks: Displays the Hazards Analysis Administration

page, where you can specify the queries that are used to search for existing
Hazards Analyses records for both HAZOP Analyses and What If Analyses. This
links appears only to Super Users and members of the MI HA Facilitator or MI
HA Owner Security Group.
Integration with SIS Management
After you asses risk for a Scenario in a Hazards Analysis, you can use that information in
the SIS Management module to assess risk for an instrumented function within an SIL
Analysis. To take advantage of this functionality, you will need to complete some
prerequisite steps in SIS Management.
Risk assessments from Hazards Analysis that are used in SIS Management in this way
cannot be modified via SIS Management. If you make changes to a risk assessment in the
Hazards Analysis module, and you want those changes to also appear in the SIS
Management module, you will need to assess the SIL Level again in the SIS Management
module using the modified Risk Assessment record.

Deploying and configuring Hazards Analysis for the first time includes completing
multiple steps, which are outlined in the table in this topic. The steps in this section of the
documentation provide all the information that you need to deploy and configure the
Hazards Analysis module on top of the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Whether a step is required or optional is indicated in the Required/Optional cell. Steps
are marked as Required if you must perform the steps to take advantage of Hazards
Analysis functionality.
The person responsible for completing each task may vary within your organization. We
recommend, however, that the steps be performed in relatively the same order in which
they are listed in the table.
Step Task
1
Review the Hazards Analysis data

model to determine which
relationship definitions you will
need to modify to include your
custom equipment or location
families. Modify any relationship
definitions as needed via
Configuration Manager.
Required/Optional Notes
Optional
This task is necessary only

if you store equipment or
location information in
families other than the
baseline Equipment and
Functional Location
families.
Required
2
Assign the desired Security Users to

one or more Hazards Analysis
Users will not be able to

access Hazards Analysis
Security Groups in Configuration

Manager.
unless they have

permissions to the Hazards
Analysis families.
Define alternate search queries.

if you do not want to use
the baseline search queries.
Optional
4
Associate HAZOP Analyses and

What If Analyses with a specific
site.
None
Optional
Activate the SIS Management

license in Configuration Manager.
Optional
Assign Security Users to the MI SIS

Administrator or MI SIS Engineer
Security Group in Configuration
Optional
Manager.
This is necessary only if

you want to take advantage
of the integration between
the SIS Management
module and Hazards
Analysis.
This is necessary only if
you want to take advantage
of the integration between
the SIS Management
module and Hazards
Analysis.
Upgrade Workflow
You can upgrade to V3.6.0.0.0 using the instructions that are provided in this section of
the documentation. To access these instructions, click the starting version from which you
are upgrading:
V3.5.1
V3.5.0 SP1 LP
V3.5.0
V3.4.5
Upgrading Hazards Analysis from

V3.5.1 to V3.6.0.0.0
The following table lists the steps that are required to upgrade and configure Hazards
Analysis for V3.6.0.0.0. These steps assume that you have completed the steps for
upgrading the components in the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Step Task

license in Configuration
Optional
Manager.
This is necessary only if you

want to take advantage of the
integration between the SIS
Management module and
Hazards Analysis.
Assign Security Users to the

MI SIS Administrator or MI
Optional
SIS Engineer Security Group
in Configuration Manager.

Hazards Analysis.

V3.5.0 SP1 LP to V3.6.0.0.0
Analysis for V3.6.0.0.0. These steps assume that you have completed the steps for
Step Task

Optional
Manager.

Hazards Analysis.

Optional

Hazards Analysis.

V3.5.0 to V3.6.0.0.0
Analysis for V3.6.0.0.0. These steps assume that you have completed the steps
for upgrading the components in the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Step Task

Optional
Manager.

Hazards Analysis.

Optional

Hazards Analysis.

V3.4.5 to V3.6.0.0.0
Analysis for V3.6.0.0.0. These steps assume that you have completed the steps
for upgrading the components in the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Step Task

Optional
Manager.

Hazards Analysis.

Optional

Hazards Analysis.
Accessing the Hazards Analysis

Administration Page
The Hazards Analysis Administration page lets you specify the queries that you want to
use to search for Hazards Analysis records for HAZOP and What If Analyses. To access
the Hazards Analysis Administration page, you must be a Super User or a member of the
MI HA Facilitator or MI HA Owner Security Group.
To access the Hazards Analysis Administration page:
On the Hazards Analysis Start Page, click the Perform Administrative Tasks link.
The Hazards Analysis Administration page appears.
Aspects of the Hazards Analysis

Administration Page
The Hazards Analysis Administration page contains the following text boxes:
HAZOP Analysis Search Query: Identifies the query whose results will appear on
the HAZOP Analysis Search page. The query \\Public\Meridium\Module\Hazards
Analysis\Queries\Hazop_Analysis_Search is specified for this setting by default.
What If Analysis Search Query: Identifies the query whose results will appear on
the What If Analysis Search page. The query \\Public\Meridium\Module\Hazards
Analysis\Queries\WhatIf_Analysis_Search query is specified for this setting by
default.
In either text box, you can specify a different query if desired.

At the bottom of the page, the following options appear:
Save: Saves your changes.
Exit: Displays the Hazards Analysis Start Page. If you have unsaved changes on
the Hazards Analysis Administration page, a message will appear, asking if you
want to save those changes, and then the Hazards Analysis Start Page appears.
The Hazards Analysis Administration page contains one task menu, Common Tasks.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Hazards Analysis Administration page contains the
following links:
Save: Saves your changes.

Send To: Displays a submenu with options that let you provide a link to the
current page on your desktop (create shortcut), in an email message, or on a Home
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the Hazards Analysis
Administration page.
Hazards Analysis Security Groups

The following Security Groups are provided for use with Hazards Analysis:
MI HA Administrator
MI HA Owner
MI HA Facilitator
MI HA Member
These groups are intended to support the three main types of users who will use Hazards
Analysis. Each of these groups has privileges assigned to it by default. The baseline
family-level privileges are summarized in the following table.
MI HA
Administrator
MI HA Owner
MI HA
Facilitator
Alert
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
None
Consequence
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
View
Equipment
View
View
View
View
Functional
Location
View
View
View
View
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Hazards Analysis View, Update,

Cause
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View

Consequence
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View

Safeguard
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View

System/Node
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
HAZOP
Deviation
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Human Resource
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Independent
View, Update,
View, Update,
View, Update,
View
Family
MI HA Member
Entity Families
Hazards Analysis
Protection Layer Insert, Delete
Insert, Delete
Insert, Delete
Instrumented
Function
View
View
View
View
Probability
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
View
Protection Level
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Insert
View, Insert
View, Insert
Reference
Document
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Risk Assessment
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Risk Assessment View, Update,

Recommendation Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Risk Category
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Risk Matrix
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Risk Rank
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Risk Threshold
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
View
Site Reference
View
View
View
View
What If
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Analysis Has
View, Update,
Human Resource Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Cause Has
View, Update,
View, Update,
View
Relationship Families
View, Update,
Consequence
Insert, Delete
Insert, Delete
Insert, Delete
Cause Revision View, Update,

Has Consequence Insert, Delete
Revision
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Consequence Has View, Update,

Safeguard
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Consequence
Revision Has
Safeguard
Revision
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, update,
Insert, Delete
View, update,
Insert, Delete
View
Deviation\What If View, Update,

Has Cause
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Deviation\What If View, Update,

Revision Has
Insert, Delete
Cause Revision
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Equipment Has
Equipment
View
View
View
View
Functional
Location Has
Equipment
View
View
View
View
Functional
Location Has
Functional
Location
View
View
View
View
Has Hazards
View, Update,
Analysis Revision Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has HAZOP
Reference
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
None
Has IF
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Functional
Location
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has
View, Update,
Recommendations Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Reference
Documents
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Reference
Values
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
View
Has Risk
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Risk
Category
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Risk Matrix
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Site
Reference
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View

Has Assets
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View

Revision Has
Insert, Delete
System/Nodes
Revisio
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View

Has
Insert, Delete
System/Nodes
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Is Independent
View, Update,
Protection Layer Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Mitigates Risk
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Safety Analysis
Has Equipment
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Safeguard
View, Update,
Revision Has IPL Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Revision
System/Node Has View, Update,
Deviations/What Insert, Delete
Ifs
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
System/Node Has View, Update,

Deviations/What Insert, Delete
Ifs Revis
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Specifying Different Search Queries

The following instructions provide details on specifying a different search query. You can
perform this task on the Hazards Analysis Administration page.
To specify a different search query:
1. Access the Hazards Analysis Administration page.
2. In the text box that corresponds to the search query that you want to specify (i.e.,
HAZOP Analysis or What If Analysis), click the
button.
The Select Query dialog box appears.

3. Navigate to the desired query, and then click the Open button.
The path to the desired query is displayed in the text box from which you accessed the
Select Query dialog box.
4. At the bottom of the Hazards Analysis Administration page, click the Save button.
Your changes are saved.
Associating HAZOP Analyses and What

If Analyses with a Specific Site
Some companies that use the Meridium APM software have facilities at multiple sites or
locations around the world. Each site contains unique equipment and locations.
If desired, you can define these sites and associated equipment or locations with the site
to which they belong. You can also associate risk matrices with specific sites. If a risk
matrix is associated with a site, you can specify which site you want to associate with a
HAZOP Analysis or a What If Analysis by selecting the ID of the desired Site Reference
record in the Site ID field of the Hazards Analysis record for that analysis.
After a HAZOP Analysis or a What If Analysis is associated with a site, when you create
a Risk Assessment record for a Hazards Analysis Safeguard or Hazards Analysis
Consequence record associated with an analysis, rather than seeing the default risk
matrix, you will see the risk matrix that is associated with that site.
Navigating Hazards Analysis

Hazards Analysis is context-driven, which means that each page that you view within the
module will contain data related only to the analysis with which you are currently
working. After you have opened a Hazards Analysis record on either the HAZOP
Analysis Definition or What If Analysis Definition page, the ID of the Hazards Analysis
record will appear on the site map and the title bar on each page within the module,
indicating the analysis with which you are currently working.
The Navigation menu appears on most pages in Hazards Analysis. You can use the links
on this menu to access the pages that contain the features that allow you to create and
conduct HAZOP Analyses or What If Analyses. After you open a Hazards Analysis
record on either the HAZOP Analysis Definition or What If Analysis Definition page, you
can use the links on the Navigation menu to facilitate a workflow for creating the
remaining records that make up that analysis.
For example, assume that the Hazards Analysis record B0007-009 Steam Boiler Analysis
appears on the HAZOP Analysis Definition page. The site map and the title bar contain
the text B0007-009 Steam Boiler Analysis, as shown in the following image.
To define the HAZOP Analysis team for the HAZOP Analysis B0007-009 Steam Boiler
Analysis, you would click the Team Members link on the Navigation menu and see that
the site map and title bar on the HAZOP Analysis Team Members page still contain the
Hazards Analysis ID B0007-009 Steam Boiler Analysis.
About Conducting a HAZOP Analyses

A Hazards and Operability (HAZOP) Analysis lets you document the known hazardous
Scenarios that are associated with a process, assess the likelihood of the risks in those
Scenarios occurring, and determine the best way to mitigate those risks.
Conducting a HAZOP Analysis includes completing the following steps:
1. Create one Hazards Analysis record, which stores the details of the HAZOP
Analysis that you want to perform, including the start and end dates for the
analysis.
2. Define the HAZOP Analysis team, who will conduct the analysis.
3. Link the Hazards Analysis record to reference documents, which contain
reference material relevant to the analysis.
4. Define Scenarios, which includes identifying the following items:
The system in which the hazardous Scenario originates.
The condition under which the Scenario may appear.
What causes the condition to occur.
The risks associated with that Scenario.
The safeguards that are currently in place to mitigate the risk in that
Scenario.
The probability and severity of the safety or environmental impact of the

risk associated with the Scenario if a safeguard is in place.
5. Define recommendations for actions that should be take to mitigate the risk in that
Scenario.
The Navigation Menu for a HAZOP

Analysis
The Navigation menu appears on most pages in Hazards Analysis when you are working
with a HAZOP Analysis and provides access to the Hazards Analysis features.
Note: The Navigation menu does not appear on the Hazards Analysis Administration
page or the HAZOP Analysis Search page.
A green arrow to the left of an option indicates the feature that you are currently viewing.
The following image shows the Navigation menu as it appears on the HAZOP Analysis
Definition page.
The Navigation menu in Hazards Analysis contains the following links:
Analysis Definition: Displays the HAZOP Analysis Definition page, where you
can manage Hazards Analysis records.
Team Members: Displays the HAZOP Analysis Team Members page, where you
can manage the HAZOP Analysis team.
Documents: Displays the Reference Documents page, where you can manage
Reference Document records that are associated with the HAZOP Analysis.
Systems/Nodes: Displays the HAZOP Nodes page, where you can define the
hazards that you want to analyze.
All Recommendations: Displays in Recommendation Management the list of all

Risk Assessment Recommendation records that are linked to the current Hazards
Analysis record.
Manage Assets: Displays the HAZOP Analysis Assets page, which contains a list
of all the Equipment and Functional Location records that are linked to the current
Revision History: Displays the Analysis Revision History page, where you can
manage the Hazards Analysis Revision records that exist for an analysis. This link
is enabled only if the state of the Hazards Analysis record with which you are
currently working has ever been set to Complete.
These links are enabled after you have created a new Hazards Analysis record or opened
an existing one (i.e., an Analysis ID appears in the title bar).
About Hazards Analysis Records and

the HAZOP Analysis
Hazards Analysis records store information about a HAZOP Analysis. Creating a Hazards
Analysis record is the first step in creating a HAZOP Analysis. All other records that you
create for the HAZOP Analysis will be linked directly or indirectly to the Hazards
Analysis record.
After you have defined the Hazards Analysis record on the HAZOP Analysis Definition
page, you can use the links on the Navigation menu to:
Define the HAZOP Analysis team.

Add reference documents to the analysis.
Define the existing Scenarios whose risk you want to assess.
Create Risk Assessment Recommendation records for actions that should be taken
to mitigate the risks in those Scenarios.
Accessing the HAZOP Analysis Search

Page
The HAZOP Analysis Search page lets you search for an existing Hazards Analysis record
for a HAZOP Analysis.
To access the HAZOP Analysis Search page:

1. Access the Hazards Analysis Start Page.
2. Click the HAZOP Analysis link.
The HAZOP Analysis Search page appears.
Aspects of the HAZOP Analysis Search

Page
The HAZOP Analysis Search page contains the results of the query that is specified in the
HAZOP Analysis Search Query text box on the Hazards Analysis Administration page.
This documentation assumes that you are using the baseline HAZOP_Analysis_Search
query, which contains two prompts that appear as lists at the top of the HAZOP Analysis
Search page:
State: Contains a list of record states that have been configured for the Hazards
Analysis family. You can choose from the following baseline states:
All: Displays all the existing Hazards Analysis records that are in any
state.
Active: Displays the Hazards Analysis records that are in the Active state.
Complete: Displays the Hazards Analysis records that are in the Complete
state.
Pending Approval: Displays the Hazards Analysis records that are in the
Pending Approval state.
Planning: Displays the Hazards Analysis records that are in the Planning
state.
Review: Displays the Hazards Analysis records that are in the Review
state.
Hazards Analysis Owner: Contains the value All and a list of names of the
HAZOP Analysis team members whose names appear in the Analysis Owner field
in Hazards Analysis records.
This query is run automatically using the default prompt value All. If you select different
criteria, you can click the Run Query button to run the query and display the results in the
grid at the bottom of the page. The query results will include hyperlinked Analysis IDs,
which you can use to open the Hazards Analysis record on the HAZOP Analysis
Definition page.
Below the query results are options that you can use to navigate the results.
The HAZOP Analysis Search page contains the following task menus:
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Common Tasks Menu
The Common Tasks menu on the HAZOP Analysis Search page contains the following
links:
Find Analysis: This link is disabled on the HAZOP Analysis Search page.
Create Analysis: Displays a new blank Hazards Analysis record on the HAZOP
Analysis Definition page.
Copy Analysis: Displays on the HAZOP Analysis Definition page a new Hazards
Analysis record, populated with information from the source record.
Open Analysis: Displays the currently selected record on the HAZOP Analysis
Definition page.
Delete: Displays a confirmation message, and then deletes the selected Hazards
Analysis record.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the HAZOP Analysis Search
page.
Searching for Hazards Analysis Records

on the HAZOP Analysis Search Page
To search for Hazards Analysis records on the HAZOP Analysis Search page:
1. Access the HAZOP Analysis Search page.
2. If desired, in the HAZOP Analysis Search workspace, in the State list, select the
record state by which you want to filter the query results.
3. If desired, in the Hazards Analysis Owner list, select the user ID of the desired
analysis owner.
4. Click the Run Query button.
The query results appear in the grid. At this point, you can open an existing Hazards
Analysis record, copy an existing Hazards Analysis record, or create a new Hazards
Analysis record.
Accessing the HAZOP Analysis

Definition Page
The HAZOP Analysis Definition page lets you create and modify Hazards Analysis
records.
To access the HAZOP Analysis Definition page:
2. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Create Analysis link.
-orIn the grid, in the Analysis ID cell in the row that contains the desired Hazards Analysis
record, click the hyperlinked Analysis ID.
The HAZOP Analysis Definition page appears.
Aspects of the HAZOP Analysis

Definition Page
The HAZOP Analysis Definition page displays the datasheet for a Hazards Analysis
record, where you can manage the properties of the HAZOP Analysis.
If you accessed the HAZOP Analysis Definition page by clicking the Create
Analysis link, a blank datasheet for a new Hazards Analysis record appears.
If you accessed the HAZOP Analysis Definition page by opening an existing

Hazards Analysis record, the datasheet for the selected record appears.
Above the datasheet, the following options are enabled:
Saves the current Hazards Analysis record.
Displays the Reference Documents window, where you can manage the Reference
Document records that are linked to the current Hazards Analysis record.
Displays the Field Change History dialog box, where you can view the revision
history for all fields for which revision history exists.
Note: If the revision history feature has not been enabled in the Configuration Manager
for any fields, a message will appear, indicating that no revision history is available.
Displays the State Assignments dialog box, where you can manage the Security
Users that are assigned to the states that are defined for the Hazards Analysis
family. To the right of the icon, the following items appear:
State indicator: Displays the current state of the Hazards Analysis record.
Operations menu: Displays the operations that are available for selection.
You can use this option to change the state of the Hazards Analysis record.
This link is enabled only when you are viewing an existing Hazards
Analysis record.
The HAZOP Analysis Definition page contains the following task menus:
Common Tasks
Navigation
Associated Pages
Using the HAZOP Analysis Definition page, you can:
Create new Hazards Analysis records.

Modify existing Hazards Analysis records.
Assign a Security User to a Hazards Analysis record state. Doing so will allow
this Security User to transition the Hazards Analysis record from the assigned
state to a successor state. A Security User must also be assigned to the successor
state before a Security User can transition to that state.
Transition the Hazards Analysis record state to a different state.
Common Tasks Menu
The Common Tasks menu on the HAZOP Analysis Definition page contains the following
links:
Find Analysis: Displays the HAZOP Analysis Search page, where you can search
for an existing Hazards Analysis record.
Copy Analysis: Displays a new Hazards Analysis record that is populated with
values from the Hazards Analysis record that you are currently viewing.
Save: Saves the current record.
Delete: Displays a confirmation message, and then deletes the current record.
Page.
Reports: Displays a submenu that contains the caption of the Catalog

item Hazards Analysis Report as a link. This link is enabled only when you are
viewing an existing Hazards Analysis record and displays the Hazards Analysis
Report in the Report Viewer.
Graphs: Displays a submenu that contains the caption of the Catalog item Hazards
Analysis Mitigated Risk as a link. This link is enabled only when you are viewing
an existing Hazards Analysis record and displays the Hazards Analysis Mitigated
Risk graph in the Graph Viewer.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the HAZOP Analysis
Definition page.
Creating New Hazards Analysis Records

To create a new Hazards Analysis record for a HAZOP Analysis:
1. Access the HAZOP Analysis Search page or the HAZOP Analysis Definition
page.
A new blank Hazards Analysis record appears on the HAZOP Analysis Definition page.
3. In the Analysis ID field, type a name for the HAZOP Analysis. This field is
required.
4. Provide values in the remaining fields as desired.
5. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Save link.
The record is saved.
Copying Hazards Analysis Records

When you copy an existing Hazards Analysis record, you are creating a new Hazards
Analysis record that will be populated with the values from the record that was copied.
The values in all the fields from the source record will be copied to the new record with
the exception of the following fields:
Analysis ID
Analysis Start Date
Analysis End Date field
Last Modified By
Last Modified Date
Revision Date field
Revision Number field
To copy a Hazards Analysis record to create a new one:

2. In the grid, select the row containing the record you want to copy.
3. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Copy Analysis link.
A new record appears on the HAZOP Analysis Definition page, which is populated
automatically with values from the selected record.
4. In the Analysis ID field, type a name for the HAZOP Analysis. This field is
required.
5. In the Analysis Start Date field, select a start date for the analysis, if desired. This
field is populated automatically with the current date.
6. In the Analysis End Date field, select an end date for the analysis, if desired. This
field is cleared when you copy an analysis.
Opening Existing Hazards Analysis

Records
To open an existing Hazards Analysis record for a HAZOP Analysis:
1. On the HAZOP Analysis Search page, search for the Hazards Analysis record that
you want to open.
2. In the search results, in the Analysis ID cell, click the hyperlinked ID for the
record that you want to open.
The selected record appears on the HAZOP Analysis Definition page.
Modifying Hazards Analysis Records

To modify a Hazards Analysis record for a HAZOP Analysis:
1. Open the Hazards Analysis record that you want to modify.
2. Modify the values in the fields as desired.
Flagging a Hazards Analysis as

Complete
If you are finished with a HAZOP Analysis and no longer want to see its Hazards
Analysis record in the query results on the HAZOP Analysis Search page, you can remove
the Hazards Analysis record from the query results via the Delete option on the Common
Tasks menu.
Using the Delete option does not delete the Hazards Analysis record from the database.
Instead, the Is Deleted check box in the record is selected, causing that record to no
longer appear in the query results.
You can remove a Hazards Analysis record from the query results on the HAZOP
Analysis Search page regardless of the state of the record. After a Hazards Analysis
record has been removed from the query results, you can still access the record via a
search or a custom query.
To remove a Hazards Analysis record from the HAZOP Analysis Search page:
1. On the HAZOP Analysis Search page, select the row containing the Hazards
Analysis record that you want to remove.
2. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Delete link.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to delete the Hazards Analysis
record and all the records linked to that record.
3. Click the Yes button.
The Hazards Analysis record is removed from the HAZOP Analysis Search page.
About the HAZOP Analysis Team

The HAZOP Analysis team is a group of individuals who will complete the HAZOP
Analysis. You can add Meridium APM users and non-Meridium APM users to the
HAZOP Analysis team.
Meridium APM users will have an existing Meridium APM Security User record
and an associated Human Resource record that was created automatically when
the Security user record was created.
Non-Meridium APM users will not have a Meridium APM Security User record
or a Human Resource record. To add a non-Meridium APM user to the HAZOP
Analysis team, you will need to create a Human Resource record for that user.
You can do so via the HAZOP Analysis Team Members page or by using the
Meridium APM Framework Tools.
Note: A Security User record is required for logging in to the Meridium APM Framework
application and using Hazards Analysis. HAZOP Analysis team members who do not
have a Security User account may participate in and contribute to the analysis but will not
be able to use the application.
Any member of the HAZOP Analysis team can be assigned a role within the HAZOP
Analysis team, which provides a reference of the tasks for which the team member is
responsible.
Accessing the HAZOP Analysis Team

Members Page
On the HAZOP Analysis Team Members page, you can add team members to the HAZOP
Analysis team and assign team members the role of Process Owner or Facilitator.
To access the HAZOP Analysis Team Members page:
1. Open the Hazards Analysis record that is included in the HAZOP Analysis whose
team you want to define.
2. On the Navigation menu, click the Team Members link.
The HAZOP Analysis Team Members page appears.
Aspects of the HAZOP Analysis Team

Members Page
The HAZOP Analysis Team Members page displays the Team Members workspace, which
consists of a modifiable grid that displays information about the HAZOP Analysis team
members. Each row in the grid represents one Human Resource record. For each Human
Resource record that appears in the grid, the following information is displayed by
default:
User ID: Contains a hyperlinked name of the team member as it appears in the
Human Resource record for that user. You can click any hyperlink to view the
datasheet for that Human Resource record.
Process Owner: Contains a check box that indicates whether or not the team
member has the role of Process Owner. You can select the check box in any row
to identify the team member that is the Process Owner. This check box can be
selected, however, for only ONE team member per HAZOP Analysis team.
Facilitator: Contains a check box that indicates whether or not the team member
has the role of Facilitator. You can select the check box in any row to identify the
team member that is the Facilitator. This check box can be selected, however, for
only ONE team member per HAZOP Analysis.
Below the grid, the following buttons appear:
Add New Member: Displays a new Human Resource record that you can define
and link to the Hazards Analysis record.
Add Existing Members: Displays the Find Items window, where you can search
for an existing Human Resource record and link it to the Hazards Analysis record.
Remove Members: After asking for confirmation, removes the selected user from
the team. This button is enabled only when records appear in the grid.
The HAZOP Analysis Team Members page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Common Tasks Menu
The Common Tasks menu on the HAZOP Analysis Team Members page contains the
following links:
Page.

item Hazards Analysis Report as a link. When you click this link, it displays the
Hazards Analysis Report in the Report Viewer.
Analysis Mitigated Risk as a link. When you click this link, it displays the
Hazards Analysis Mitigated Risk graph in the Graph Viewer.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the HAZOP Analysis
Definition page.
Creating New Users and Adding Them

to the HAZOP Analysis Team
When you create new users and add them to the HAZOP Analysis team, you are creating
new Human Resource records in the Meridium APM database and linking them to the
Hazards Analysis record. This option should be used for team members who are not
Meridium APM system users. If you want to add a team member who is already a
Meridium APM system user, see the topic for adding new team members who already
have Human Resource records.
To create a new user and add that user to the HAZOP Analysis team:
1. Access the HAZOP Analysis Team Members page.
2. At the bottom of the Team Members workspace, click the Add New Member
button.
A new Human Resource record appears.
3. Enter values in the fields on the datasheet as desired. Note that the Last Name
field is required.
4. Click OK.
The Human Resource record is saved, and the new HAZOP Analysis team member
appears in the Team Members workspace.
Adding New HAZOP Analysis Team

Members Who Already Have Human
Resource Records
When you add a new HAZOP Analysis Team Member who already has a Human
Resource record, you are linking an existing Human Resource record to the Hazards
Analysis record. This option should be used for team members who already have a
Human Resource record. If you want to add a new HAZOP Analysis team member who
does not already have a Human Resource record, see the topic for creating a new user to
add to the HAZOP Analysis team.
To add a new HAZOP Analysis team member who already has a Human Resource record:
2. At the bottom of the Team Members workspace, click the Add Existing Members
button.
The Find Items window appears, and the Human Resource family is selected in the
Search In list by default.
3. If desired, type your search criteria in the Look For text box, and then click the
Find Now button.
The search results appear.
4. Select the row containing the desired Human Resource record, and then click the
Open button.
The new HAZOP Analysis team member appears in the Team Members workspace.
About HAZOP Analysis Team Member

Roles
HAZOP Analysis team member roles serve as a reference of which HAZOP Analysis
team member is responsible for a given task related to the HAZOP Analysis. The
following roles are available for a HAZOP Analysis:
Process Owner: The team member who is responsible for managing the HAZOP
Analysis and seeing it through to completion. After you assign a team member the
role of Process Owner, that team member's name will appear in the Analysis
Owner field in the Hazards Analysis record. The Process Owner should be a
member of the MI HA Owner Security Group, which provides that user with the
ability to manage the Hazards Analysis record state.
Facilitator: The team member who is in charge of conducting the HAZOP

Analysis and organizing the HAZOP Analysis team. The Facilitator should be a
There can be only one Process Owner and one Facilitator per analysis. A single team
member, however, can be designated as both the Process Owner and Facilitator.
Assigning Roles to HAZOP Analysis

Team Members
The following instructions provide details on designating a team member as the Process
Owner or Facilitator. Assigning a team member a role serves as a reference for the team.
To assign a role to a HAZOP Analysis team member:
2. In the Team Members workspace, locate the row containing the team member that
you want to assign the role of Process Owner or Facilitator.
3. In either the Process Owner or Facilitator column, select the check box to
indicate that the team member is assigned to the corresponding role.
The team member is assigned the specified role, and the Analysis Owner field on the
Hazards Analysis datasheet is populated with that team member's name.
To assign a role to a different team member, select the Process Owner or Facilitator
check box in the row that represents that team member.
Viewing Human Resource Records for

HAZOP Analysis Team Members
To view the Human Resource record for a HAZOP Analysis team member:
2. In the Team Members workspace, locate the row containing the team member
whose Human Resource record you want to view.
3. In the User ID column, click the team member's hyperlinked User ID.
The Human Resource record for that team member appears in a new window. At this
point, you can modify the fields if desired.
4. Click OK.
Removing Team Members from the

HAZOP Analysis Team
When you remove a team member from a HAZOP Analysis team, you are deleting the
link between the Human Resource record and the Hazards Analysis record for that
HAZOP Analysis.
Additionally, if you remove from the HAZOP Analysis team a team member who is
assigned the role of Process Owner, the Owner field in the Hazards Analysis record will
be cleared.
To remove a team member from the HAZOP Analysis team:
2. In the Team Members workspace, select the rows containing the team members
that you want to remove from the HAZOP Analysis team.
3. At the bottom of the Team Members workspace, click the Remove Members
button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to remove the selected team
members.
The selected team members are removed from the HAZOP Analysis team.
About Defining Scenarios for HAZOP

Analyses
To define Scenarios for HAZOP Analyses, the HAZOP Analysis team will:
Review the hazardous processes that take place in a facility.

Identify the steps in those processes that cause abnormal or unsafe results.
Create records to represent the various Scenarios for each process.
As part of defining the Scenarios, the HAZOP Analysis team will:
Assess the risk associated with the Scenarios.
Determine actions that should be taken to mitigate the risk associated with the
Scenario and create records to represent those actions.
For example, assume the HAZOP Analysis team has discussed a process that is controlled
by System 1A. During the discussion, the team describes the following Scenario for
System 1A.
When the pressure monitor stops working, the pressure switch is not be triggered to open
or close appropriately, causing hazardous chemicals to leak out of the connector, which
may result in human injury. To prevent this condition, a toxicity detector is in place,
which sounds an alarm when the toxicity levels in the facility reach a high-risk level.
To define this Scenario within Hazards Analysis, the team would create one record in
each family described in the following table. The column In the example, this record
represents... contains an item from the previous example and serves as a reference for the
type of information that record represents in the HAZOP Analysis.
A record in this
family:
Hazards Analysis
System/Node
...Stores:
In the example, this record

represents:
Details on the group of equipment or

locations that is used to perform the System 1A
process.
Details about the condition that

deviates from the normal behavior of
HAZOP Deviation
Pressure increases.
that process and directly leads to a
risk.
Details on the event that results from
the deviation that is defined in the
HAZOP Deviation record, including
how frequently it may occur, and the
Hazards Analysis equipment or location that is
Chemicals leak.
associated with it.
Cause
Causes can include human error,
equipment failure, or other factors.
HAZOP Deviation deviates from the normal behavior of Pressure switch is not
triggered to open or close
risk. This condition is referred to as a appropriately.
deviation or guideword.
A deviation has a cause, which is
defined in a Hazards Analysis Cause
record.
Hazards Analysis
Consequence
Details on the negative outcome that

results from the event that is defined
Multiple fatalities
in the Hazards Analysis Cause
record.
Hazards Analysis
Safeguard
Details on the safety precautions that

are currently in place to prevent or
lessen the impact of the negative
Toxicity detector
outcome that is defined in the
Hazards Analysis Consequence
record.
1
Independent
Protection Layer
Additional details about a safeguard

defined in a Hazards Analysis
Safeguard record that is considered to
be an independent layer of protection. Toxicity detector
Not all safeguards are IPLs, so not all
Hazards Analyses will contain these
records.
1. If the safeguard is an instrumented function that exists within a safety system and is
represented by an Instrumented Function record in the Meridium APM database, you can
link that Instrumented Function record to the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record. For
more details on instrumented functions and safety systems, see the SIS Management
section of this Help system.
In addition to the records described in the table, the HAZOP Analysis team would create
two Risk Assessment records, where:
1. One is linked to the Hazards Analysis Consequence record to store the
unmitigated risk value associated with the Scenario without a safeguard in place.
In other words, the team will define the risk value that is associated with that
Scenario without the toxicity detector.
2. One is linked to the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record to store the mitigated risk
rank value of the Scenario with that safeguard in place. In other words, the team
will define the risk value associated with a Scenario when the toxicity detector is
in place.
After the team has defined the Scenario and assessed the risk associated with it, they
would create one Risk Assessment Recommendation record per action that the team
suggests for mitigating that risk. For example, the team may create a Risk Assessment
Recommendation record to add more safety equipment on the pressure switch to reduce
the risk of it failing and causing a chemical spill.
After the recommended action has been taken, the team would reassess the risk
associated with the Scenario after the additional safety precautions are in place. In other
words, they would determine the mitigated risk of the Scenario with the extra safety
equipment in place on the pressure switch.
When you create records as described here, the ID of that record will appear in a column
in the HAZOP Nodes grid on the HAZOP Nodes page.
Accessing the HAZOP Nodes Page

The HAZOP Nodes page lets you define the known hazardous conditions that exist in
your facility as a result of the process that is specified in the current Hazards Analysis
record.
To access the HAZOP Nodes page:
1. Open the Hazards Analysis record for the desired HAZOP Analysis.
2. On the Navigation menu, click the Systems/Nodes link.
If a Hazards Analysis System/Node record has not yet been linked to the Hazards
Analysis record for the current HAZOP Analysis, a new blank Hazards Analysis
System/Node record appears.
These instructions assume that you have not yet associated a Hazards Analysis
System/Node record with the HAZOP Analysis.
3. Complete the Hazards Analysis System/Node datasheet as desired, and click OK.
Note that the System/Node ID field is required.
The Hazards Analysis System/Node record is linked to the Hazards Analysis record, and
the HAZOP Nodes page appears, displaying the new Hazards Analysis System/Node
record.
Aspects of the HAZOP Nodes Page
The HAZOP Nodes page contains the HAZOP Nodes grid, which displays in hierarchical
format the hyperlinked Record IDs for the records that are used to define hazardous
Scenarios.
All Scenarios for a given HAZOP Analysis are represented on the same HAZOP Nodes
page.
Each separate row in the grid represents a separate record, with the exception of Risk
Assessment records, Risk Assessment Recommendation records, and Independent
Protection Layer records, which appear on the same row as the record to which they are
linked.
Each column in the grid corresponds to the name of the family to which the record
belongs. When you select a row in the grid, you are selecting the record that is
represented by the Record ID that appears in that row. The grid provides some standard
grid customization options that you can use to customize the layout of the query results.
The following columns appear in the grid:
System/Node ID: Contains the hyperlinked Record ID of the Hazards Analysis

System/Node records that belong to the HAZOP Analysis. The ID of each
Hazards Analysis System/Node record that you add to the HAZOP Analysis will
appear in a new row in this column.
Deviation ID: Contains the hyperlinked Record ID of the HAZOP Deviation
records that belong to the HAZOP Analysis. The ID of each HAZOP Deviation
record that you add to the HAZOP Analysis will appear in a new row in this
column directly below the row containing the Hazards Analysis System/Node
record to which it is linked.
Cause ID: Contains the hyperlinked Record ID of the Hazards Analysis Cause
records that belong to the HAZOP Analysis. The ID of each Hazards Analysis
Cause record that you add to the HAZOP Analysis will appear in a new row in
this column directly below the row containing the HAZOP Deviation record to
which it is linked.
Consequence ID: Contains the hyperlinked Record ID of the Hazards Analysis

Consequence records that belong to the HAZOP Analysis. The ID of each
Hazards Analysis Consequence record that you add to the HAZOP Analysis will
appear in a new row in this column below the Hazards Analysis Cause record to
which it is linked.
Unmitigated Risk: Displays the total unmitigated risk rank value as it appears in
the Risk Assessment record that is linked to the Hazards Analysis Consequence
record in that row. When you link a Risk Assessment record to a Hazards Analysis
Consequence record, the unmitigated risk rank value will appear in this column
on the same row as the Hazards Analysis Consequence record to which the Risk
Assessment record is linked.
Safeguard ID: Contains the hyperlinked Record ID of the Hazards Analysis

Safeguard records that belong to the HAZOP Analysis. Each Hazards Analysis
Safeguard record that you add to the HAZOP Analysis will appear in a new row in
this column below the Hazards Analysis Consequence record to which it is linked.
IPL: Indicates whether or not the safeguard shown in the Safeguard ID column is
an independent protection layer (IPL). This cell is populated automatically based
on the settings on the IPL checklist tab in the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record.
This column can contain the following values:
True: Indicates that the safeguard is an IPL and that an Independent

Protection Layer record is linked to the Hazards Analysis Safeguard
record. This value will appear only if all the logical fields on the IPL
Checklist tab are set to True.
False: Indicates that the safeguard is not an IPL.
IPL Type: If the safeguard shown in the Safeguard ID cell is an IPL, this cell
indicates the type of IPL. There are two types of IPLs:
o
Consequence Reducing IPLs: Reduce the severity of the failure (e.g.,

fatality to injury).
Frequency Reducing IPLs: Reduce how often the failures occur (e.g.,
every 100 years to every 1,000 years).
The IPL Type cell is populated automatically based on the value in the IPL column. If the
value in the IPL column is:
o
o
False: This column is blank.

True: This column displays the value from the IPL Type field in the
Independent Protection Layer record that is linked to the Hazards Analysis
Safeguard record.
IPL Credits: Displays the value stored in the IPL Credits field in the Independent
Protection Layer record that is linked to the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record.
Mitigated Risk: Displays the total mitigated risk rank value as it appears in the
Risk Assessment record that is linked to the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record in
that row. When you link a Risk Assessment record to a Hazards Analysis
Safeguard record, the mitigated risk rank value will appear in this column on the
same row as the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record to which the Risk Assessment
record is linked. If more than one Hazard Analysis Safeguard record is linked to
an Hazards Analysis Consequence record, the mitigated risk rank value for each
subsequent Hazards Analysis Safeguard record will further mitigate the mitigated
risk rank value of the previous Hazards Analysis Safeguard record, so that the
mitigated risk rank value associated with the last safeguard listed for a
consequence is the total mitigated risk rank value. If one of the Hazard Analysis
Safeguard records is deleted, the mitigated risk rank values will be recalculated
automatically.
Note: If you modify the value in the IPL Type field in a Hazard Analysis Safeguard
record after you have defined a mitigated risk value for that safeguard, the value in the
Mitigated Risk column will be cleared, and you will have to re-evaluate the mitigated
risk.
Recommendations: Contains the hyperlinked value <number> recommendations,

where <number> is a numeric value, indicating the number of Risk Assessment
Recommendation records that are linked to the Hazards Analysis Consequence
Consequence record, the <number> value in this column is increased by one and
appears in the same row as the Hazards Analysis Consequence record to which
the Risk Assessment Recommendation records are linked.
As you add records to the grid, a plus (+) or minus (-) sign appears to the left of the
predecessor record. You can expand a level of the hierarchy by clicking the plus sign, or
you can collapse a level of the hierarchy by clicking the minus sign. Note that when you
expand the root level of the hierarchy (i.e. the System/Node ID column), all levels of the
hierarchy will be expanded by default.
The HAZOP Nodes page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Actions
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Using the HAZOP Nodes page, you can:
Create new records that describe the Scenarios that you are assessing and link
them to the HAZOP Analysis.
Add existing records that describe the Scenarios that you are assessing and link
them to the HAZOP Analysis.
Assess the risk associated with the defined Scenarios.
The Hierarchy in the HAZOP Nodes

Grid
The HAZOP Nodes grid provides a hierarchical view of the records that are used to
describe a Scenario. In other words, the grid provides an alternate view of the record
hierarchy for the Hazards Analysis System/Node family. The following image shows an
example of how the HAZOP Nodes grid appears after you have defined a Scenario for an
HAZOP Analysis.
In this image, you can see the following relationships:
The Hazards Analysis System/Node record Node-06 is linked to the HAZOP

Deviation record Node-06 Deviation.
The HAZOP Deviation record Node-06 Deviation is linked to the Hazards
Analysis Cause record Node-06 Cause.
The Hazards Analysis Cause record Node-06 Cause is linked to the Hazards
Analysis Consequence record Node-06 Consequence.
The Hazards Analysis Consequence record Node-06 Consequence is linked to:
A Risk Assessment record with the unmitigated risk rank value of 280.
One Risk Assessment Recommendation record.
The Hazards Analysis Safeguard record Node-06 Safeguard, which is a

Consequence Reducing IPL.
The Hazards Analysis Safeguard record Node-06 Safeguard 2, which is a

Frequency Reducing IPL.
The Hazards Analysis Safeguard record Node-06 Safeguard is linked to:
A Risk Assessment record with the mitigated risk rank value of 43.
An Independent Protection Layer record that stores the values in the IPL
Type and IPL Credits column.
The Hazards Analysis Safeguard record Node-06 Safeguard 2 is linked to:
A Risk Assessment record with the mitigated risk rank value of 23.
If you were to view the record hierarchy for the Hazards Analysis System/Node record
Node-06 in the Record Manager, it would look something like this:
In this image, you can see the same relationships in a similar format to what you see in
the HAZOP Nodes grid. For example, Hazards Analysis Consequence record Node-06
Consequence is linked to:
The Hazards Analysis Safeguard records Node-06 Safeguard and Node-06

Safeguard 2.
Actions
The Actions menu on the HAZOP Nodes page contains the following links:
Add Node: Displays a new blank Hazards Analysis System/Node record in a new
window.
Add New: Displays a submenu of options that you can use to link a record to the
record that is currently selected in the grid. The submenu is dynamic, meaning
that the menu will contain only the options that are valid for the currently selected
record. This link is enabled only if a Hazards Analysis System/Node record
appears in the grid.
Apply Existing: Displays a submenu of options that you can use to search for an
existing record to link to the record that is currently selected in the grid. This
submenu is dynamic, meaning that the menu will contain only the options that are
valid for the currently selected record. This link is enabled only if a Hazards
Analysis System/Node record appears in the grid.
Delete: Displays a confirmation message, and then deletes the selected record and
all the records that are linked to that record as a successor. This link is enabled
only if a Hazards Analysis System/Node record appears in the grid.
Move Up: Moves the selected record up one row in the grid. This link is enabled
only when the selected record appears in a column that contains more than one
record.
Move Down: Moves the selected record down one row in the grid. This link is
enabled only when the selected record appears in a column that contains more
than one record.
Risk Matrix: Displays the Risk Assessment Interface, where you can assess the
risk associated with the item represented by the selected record. This link is
enabled only when a Hazards Analysis Consequence record or Hazards Analysis
Safeguard record is selected in the grid.
Recommendations: Displays the Recommendations dialog box, where you can

manage Risk Assessment Recommendation records for the selected record.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the HAZOP Nodes page contains the following links:
Find Analysis: Displays the Hazards Analysis Search page, where you can search
Create Analysis: Displays a new blank Hazards Analysis record on the Hazards
Page.
Reports: Displays a submenu that contains the caption of the Catalog item
Hazards Analysis Report as a link. When you click this link, it displays the
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the HAZOP Nodes page.
The Submenu on the Actions Menu

The Add New or Apply Existing links on the Actions menu let you link records to the
record that is currently selected in the grid. When you click the Add New or Apply
Existing link, a submenu appears. The links that appear on the submenu will vary
depending on the record that is currently selected in the HAZOP Nodes grid. The links
that appear are based on the relationship definitions that exist between the selected record
and the other records that can be displayed in the grid.
For example, the Hazards Analysis System/Node family participates as a predecessor in a
relationship with the HAZOP Deviation family, so when you select a Hazards Analysis
System/Node record in the grid and view the Add New or Apply Existing submenus, the
only available option is to link a HAZOP Deviation record to the selected Hazards
Analysis System/Node record.
The following table describes the options that appear on these submenus when a record is
selected in the grid. You can use this table and the options that you see on the submenus
to determine which records you can link to one another on the HAZOP Nodes page.
...The Add New submenu

contains these links:
...The Apply Existing

submenu contains these
links:
Deviation
Deviation
Deviation
Deviation
Cause
Cause
Cause
Cause
Consequence
Consequence
Consequence
Consequence
Safeguard
Safeguard
Hazards Analysis Safeguard Safeguard
Safeguard
When a record in this

family is selected:
Hazards Analysis
System/Node
HAZOP Deviation
Hazards Analysis Cause
Hazards Analysis
Consequence
About Adding Records to the HAZOP

Nodes Grid
When you add a record to the HAZOP Nodes grid, you are defining a part of a Scenario.
Each record that you add to the gird is linked automatically to another record that defines
another part of the Scenario, with the exception of the Hazards Analysis System/Node
record, which is linked automatically to the Hazards Analysis record for the current
HAZOP Analysis.
Before you can begin adding to the HAZOP Nodes grid records that represent parts of a
Scenario, you must first define a Hazards Analysis System/Node record that will appear
as the root record in the first column in the grid. At any given time, the records that you
are allowed to add is determined based upon the relationship definitions that exist
between the family of the new record and the record to which you are trying to link it.
You will know that you can add a record in a given family if that family name appears on
the Add New or Apply Existing submenus on the Actions menu.
After you have added to the HAZOP Nodes grid the desired records that describe the
hazardous Scenario you want to study, you can assess the risk values that are associated
with that Scenario.
Adding Hazards Analysis System/Node

Records to the HAZOP Nodes Grid
The following instructions provide details on adding a new Hazards Analysis
System/Node record to the HAZOP Nodes grid. These instructions assume that one
Hazards Analysis System/Node record already appears in the grid (i.e., the record was
defined when you accessed the HAZOP Nodes page for the first time).
To add a new Hazards Analysis System/Node record to the HAZOP Nodes grid:
1. Access the HAZOP Nodes page.
2. On the Actions menu, click the Add Node link.
A new blank Hazards Analysis System/Node record appears in a new window.
3. In the System/Node ID text box, type a name for the system/node. This field is
required.
4. Provide values in the remaining fields on the datasheet as desired, and then click
OK.
The new record is linked to the Hazards Analysis record for the current HAZOP Analysis
and appears in the System/Node ID column below the existing Hazards Analysis
System/Node record.
Creating Other Records and Adding

Them to the HAZOP Nodes Grid
The following instructions provide details on adding records in the following families to
the HAZOP Nodes grid. These instructions assume that you are familiar with the HAZOP
Analysis data model and the records that you need to create to define a Scenario.
HAZOP Deviation
Hazards Analysis Safeguard
To create a new record and add it to the HAZOP Nodes grid:

2. In the HAZOP Nodes grid, select the row containing the record to which you want
to link a new record.
3. On the Actions menu, click the Add New link.
A context-sensitive submenu appears that contains the family names for the records that
you can link to the currently selected record.
4. On the submenu, click the name of the family in which you want to create a new
record.
A new blank record in that family appears in a new window.
5. Provide a value in the required fields on the datasheet.
OK.
The record is linked to the currently selected record and appears in a new row in the grid
below the record to which it is linked and in the column that displays records in that
family. For example, if you create a new HAZOP Deviation record More Pressure and
link it to the Hazards Analysis System/Node record System/Node 1, the new HAZOP
Deviation record More Pressure will appear in the Deviation ID column in the row below
the Hazards Analysis System/Node record System/Node 1 as shown in the following
image.
You can continue to add records to the grid in this way until you have defined the
Scenario that you want to study. After you have defined the Scenario, you can assess the
risk associated with it.
Adding Existing Records to the HAZOP

Nodes Grid
The following instructions provide details on adding existing records in the following
families to the HAZOP Nodes grid. Adding an existing record means that you can search
for a record that already exists in the Meridium APM database and link that record to the
HAZOP Analysis.
These instructions assume that you are familiar with the HAZOP Analysis data model and
the records that you need to create to define a Scenario.
HAZOP Deviation
To add an existing record to the HAZOP Nodes grid:

2. In the HAZOP Nodes grid, select the row containing the record to which you want
to link an existing record.
3. On the Actions menu, click the Apply Existing link.
4. On the submenu, click the name of the family containing the existing record that
you want to add to the gird.
The Find Items window appears, and the name of the family that you selected on the
submenu appears in the Search In list by default.
5. If desired, specify the desired search criteria, and then click the Find Now button.
6. In the search results, locate the desired record, and then click the Open button.
family. For example, if you link the existing HAZOP Deviation record More Pressure to
the Hazards Analysis System/Node record System/Node 1, the HAZOP Deviation record
More Pressure will appear in the Deviation ID column in the row below the Hazards
Analysis System/Node record System/Node 1 as shown in the following image.
Modifying Records in the HAZOP

Nodes Grid
To modify a record in the HAZOP Nodes grid:
2. In the HAZOP Nodes grid, in the row containing the record that you want to
modify, click the hyperlinked ID for that record. For example, if you want to
modify a HAZOP Deviation record, in the Deviation ID cell, click the
hyperlinked value.
The record appears in a separate window.
3. Modify the values in the fields on the datasheet as desired, and then click OK.
Moving Records to Different Rows in

the HAZOP Nodes Grid
If desired, when a column contains more than one record, you can move the records up or
down to different rows. When you move a record in the grid, the records that are linked to
that record will also move, and the hierarchical format will be retained. You will know
that can move a record up or down a row in the grid when the Move Up or Move Down
links are enabled on the Actions menu.
For example, the following image shows a portion of the HAZOP Nodes grid, which
contains two HAZOP Deviation records: More Pressure and Contamination. The HAZOP
Deviation record Contamination is linked to the Hazards Analysis Cause record Node-02
Cause.
If you were to move the HAZOP Deviation record Contamination up one row, the
HAZOP Nodes grid would look similar to the following image, where the relationship
between the HAZOP Deviation record Contamination and the Hazards Analysis Cause
record Node-02 Cause is retained.
To move a record to a different row in the HAZOP Nodes grid:

2. In the grid, select the row containing the record that you want to move.
3. On the Actions menu, click one of the following links:
Move Up: Moves the selected record up a row in the grid.
Move Down: Moves the selected record down a row in the grid.
The selected record appears in the specified location.
Deleting Records from the HAZOP

Nodes Grid
When you delete a record from the HAZOP Nodes grid, you are deleting the selected
record and all the records that appear below that record in the same record hierarchy. For
example, if you delete a record in the HAZOP Deviation family, you are also deleting the
records in the following families, which appear in subsequent rows in the grid:

Risk Assessment (unmitigated risk)
Risk Assessment Recommendation
Risk Assessment (mitigated risk)
To delete a record from the HAZOP Nodes grid:

2. In the grid, select the row containing the record that you want to delete.
3. On the Actions menu, click the Delete link.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to delete the selected record
along with all the records that are linked to it.
The selected record and all the records that appear below that record in the grid are
deleted.
Accessing the HAZOP Analysis Assets

Page
To access the HAZOP Analysis Assets page:
On the Navigation menu, click the Manage Assets link.
The HAZOP Analysis Assets page appears, displaying a list of Equipment and Functional
Location records that are linked to the Hazards Analysis record for the current analysis.
Aspects of the HAZOP Analysis Assets

Page
The HAZOP Analysis Assets page displays a list of Equipment and Functional Location
records that are linked to the Hazards Analysis record associated with the current Hazards
Analysis.
The grid on the HAZOP Analysis Assets page contains the Record ID and the family of
each record that is linked to the Hazards Analysis record.
For Equipment records, the Record ID column is populated with the Record ID of
the linked Equipment record, and the Family column is populated with
Equipment.
For Functional Location records, the Record ID column is populated with the
Record ID of the linked Functional Location record, and the Family column is
populated with Functional Location. By default, linked records will be listed
alphabetically, first by the Family column, and then by the Record ID column.
The HAZOP Analysis Assets page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Actions
Common Tasks
Actions Menu
The Actions menu on the HAZOP Analysis Assets page contains the following links:
Link to Assets: Displays the Asset Finder window, where you can search for the
Equipment or Functional Location records that you want to link to the Hazards
Analysis record.
View Linked Assets: Displays the selected Equipment and Functional Location
records in the Record Manager. This link is enabled only if the current Hazards
Analysis record is already linked to an Equipment or Functional Location record.
Unlink Assets: Displays a confirmation message, asking if you really want to
unlink the selected Equipment or Functional Location records from the current
Hazards Analysis and then deletes the link between the Hazards Analysis record
and the Equipment or Functional Location records. This link is enabled only if the
current Hazards Analysis record is already linked to an Equipment or Functional
Location record.
Common Tasks Menu
The Common Tasks menu on the HAZOP Analysis Assets page contains the following
links:
Page.

item Hazards Analysis Report as a link. When you click this link, it displays the
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the HAZOP Analysis Assets
page.
Linking Assets to a HAZOP Analysis

The following instructions provide details on linking an Equipment or Functional
Location record to an existing Hazards Analysis record.
To link an Equipment record or Functional Location record to an existing Hazards
Analysis record:
1. Access the HAZOP Analysis Assets page.
2. On the Actions menu, click the Link To Assets link.
The Search Tool appears.
3. Perform a search to find the Equipment or Functional Location record you want to
link to the Hazards Analysis record.
4. In the search results list, select the Equipment or Functional Location record(s)
that you want to link to the Hazards Analysis record.
5. Click the Select button.
The Asset Finder window closes, and the selected Equipment or Functional Location
records appear on the HAZOP Analysis Assets page and are now linked to the Hazards
Analysis record.
Opening Assets Linked to a HAZOP

Analysis
To open the Equipment and Functional Location records that are currently linked to a
Hazards Analysis record:
2. In the grid, select one or more rows containing the Equipment and Functional
Location records that you want to open.
Hint: Alternatively, if you only want to open one Equipment or Functional Location
record, you can click the hyperlinked Record ID of the record you want to view.
3. On the Actions menu, click the View Linked Assets link.
The Record Manager appears, displaying the selected Equipment and Functional
Location records.
If you selected more than one record, multiple records will appear in Record Manager.
The first record that you selected in the grid on the HAZOP Analysis Assets page will be
expanded in the Record Explorer pane and displayed in the datasheet area. The rest of
the records appear collapsed in the Record Explorer pane.
Unlinking Assets from a Hazards

Analysis
To delete the link between an Equipment or Functional Location record and a Hazards
Analysis record:
2. Select the Equipment and Functional Location records you want to unlink from
the analysis by selecting one or more rows in the HAZOP Analysis Assets grid.
3. On the Actions menu, click the Unlink Assets link.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to delete the link.
4. Click OK.
The links between the selected Equipment and Functional Location records and the
Hazards Analysis record are deleted, and the Equipment and Functional Location records
no longer appear in the list on the HAZOP Analysis Assets page.
About the Hazards Analysis Report

The Hazards Analysis Report provides an overview of the HAZOP Analysis and contains
the following sections:
Cover: Displays the text HAZOP Final Report For: appended with the value that
exists in the Analysis Description field in the associated Hazards Analysis record.
Summary: Displays the value that exists in the Summary field in the associated
Purpose: Displays the value that exists in the Analysis Purpose field in the
associated Hazards Analysis record.
Objectives: Displays the value that exists in the Analysis Objective field in the
Process Description: The value that exists in the Process Description field in the
Scope of Study: Displays the value that exists in the Analysis Scope field in the
Methodology: Displays the text The Hazard and Operability (HazOp)

methodology was used to revalidate the PHA study using the Meridium Software
Program for documenting the PHA study results.
Hazards Analysis Team Members: Displays a table with a list of the members of
the HAZOP Analysis team. Each row in the table corresponds to one Human
Resource record. For each Human Resource record, the following information is
displayed:
Department: The value that exists in the Department field in the associated
Human Resource record.
Hazards Analysis Documentation: Displays a table with a list of the reference

documents that are associated with the analysis. Each row in the table corresponds
to one Reference Document record. For each record, the following information is
displayed:
Name: The first and last name of the team member as it appears in the
Last Name and First Name fields in the associated Human Resource
record.
Name: The value that exists in the ID field in the Reference Document
record.
Description: The value that exists in the Description field in the Reference
Document record.
Hazards Analysis Scope: Displays a table with a list of Equipment and Functional
Location records that are linked to the analysis. Each row in the table corresponds
to one Equipment or Functional Location record. For each record, the following
information is displayed:
Asset ID: The value that exists in the Equipment ID field of the
Equipment record or the Functional Location field of the Functional
Location record.
Asset Short Description: The value that exists in the Equipment Short
Description field of the Equipment record or the Functional Location
Description field of the Functional Location record.
Asset Long Description: The value that exists in the Equipment Long
Description field of the Equipment record or the Functional Location Long
Node List: Displays a table that contains a list of the records that describe the
hazardous Scenarios that are analyzed by the HAZOP Analysis. The table contains
records that appear in the grid on the HAZOP Nodes page.
Accessing the Hazards Analysis Report

for the HAZOP Analysis
You can access the Hazards Analysis Report via the Reports link on the Common Tasks
menu on any page where the link is enabled.
To access the Hazards Analysis Report for the HAZOP Analysis:
1. Open the desired Hazards Analysis record.
2. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Reports link.
A submenu appears.
3. On the submenu, click the Hazards Analysis Report link.
Note: The name of the link is the caption of the Catalog item Hazards Analysis Report.
By default, this value is Hazards Analysis Report.
The Hazards Analysis Report appears in the Report Viewer.
About the Hazards Analysis Mitigated

Risk Graph
The Hazards Analysis Mitigated Risk graph displays a graphical summary of the risk
rank values associated with the Hazards Analysis System/Node records and HAZOP
Deviation records that appear on the Hazards Analysis System/Nodes page.
For example, when the graph appears, the y-axis displays the unmitigated and mitigated
risk rank values and the x-axis displays ALL the Hazards Analysis system/Node records
that are associated with an analysis.
If you drill down in the graph (i.e., click a column), the graph will display the
unmitigated and mitigated risk rank values associated with the HAZOP Deviation record
that is linked to the Hazards Analysis System/Node record whose column you clicked in
the graph.
Accessing the Hazards Analysis

Mitigated Risk Graph
You can access the Hazards Analysis Mitigated Risk graph via the Graphs link on the
Common Tasks menu on any page where the link is enabled.
To access the Hazards Analysis Mitigated Risk graph for the HAZOP Analysis:
2. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Graphs link.
A submenu appears.
3. On the submenu, click the Hazards Analysis Mitigated Risk link.
Note: The name of the link is the caption of the Catalog item Hazards Mitigated Risk. By
default, this value is Hazards Mitigated Risk.
The Hazards Analysis Mitigated Risk graph appears in the Graph Viewer.
About Conducting a What If Analysis

A What If Analysis lets you document the potential hazardous Scenarios that may be
associated with a process, assess the likelihood of that Scenario occurring, and determine
the best way to mitigate the risk associated with that Scenario. A What If Analysis lets
your team analyze the possible Scenarios that may include a hazardous outcome. The
Scenarios that you define for a What If Analysis will describe events, deviations, and
risks that meet either of the following criteria:
They might but have not yet occurred on any of your existing equipment or
locations.
They may occur on equipment or locations that you implement in the future.
Conducting a What If Analysis includes completing the following steps:

1. Create one Hazards Analysis record, which stores the details of the What If
Analysis that you want to perform, including the start and end dates for the
analysis.
2. Define the What If Analysis team, who will conduct the analysis.
3. Link reference documents to the Hazards Analysis record, which contain

reference material relevant to the analysis.
4. Define Scenarios, which includes identifying the following characteristics of that
Scenario:
The system from which the hazardous Scenario could originate.
The condition under which the hazardous Scenario may appear.
What could cause the condition to occur.
The risks associated with that Scenario.
The safeguards that would mitigate the risk of the Scenario.
The risk associated with the Scenario with a safeguard in place.
Define recommendations for actions that should be take to mitigate the risk of that
Scenario occurring.
The Navigation Menu for a What If

Analysis
The Navigation menu appears on most pages in Hazards Analysis when you are working
with a What If Analysis and provides access to the Hazards Analysis features.
Note: The Navigation menu does not appear on the Hazards Analysis Administration
page or the What If Analysis Search page.
A green arrow to the left of an option indicates the feature that you are currently viewing.
The following image shows the Navigation menu as it appears on the What If Analysis
Definition page.
The Navigation menu in Hazards Analysis contains the following links:
Analysis Definition: Displays the What If Analysis Definition page, where you
can manage Hazards Analysis records.
Team Members: Displays the What If Analysis Team Members page, where you
can manage the What If Analysis team.
Reference Document records that are associated with the What If Analysis.
Systems/Nodes: Displays the What If Analysis Systems page, where you can
define the hazards that you want to analyze.
All Recommendations: Displays in Recommendation Management the list of all

Risk Assessment Recommendation records that are linked to the current Hazards
Analysis record.
Manage Assets: Displays the What If Analysis Assets page, which contains a list
of all the Equipment and Functional Location records that are linked to the current
manage the Hazards Analysis Revision records that exist for an analysis. This link
is enabled only if the state of the Hazards Analysis record with which you are
currently working has ever been set to Complete.
These links are enabled after you have created a new Hazards Analysis record or opened
an existing one (i.e., an Analysis ID appears in the title bar).
About Hazards Analysis Records and

the What If Analysis
Hazards Analysis records store information about a What If Analysis. Creating a Hazards
Analysis record is the first step in creating a What If Analysis. All other records that you
create for the What If Analysis will be linked directly or indirectly to the Hazards
Analysis record.
After you have defined the Hazards Analysis record on the What If Analysis Definition
page, you can use the links on the Navigation menu to:
Define the What If Analysis team.
Add reference documents to the analysis.
Define the possible Scenarios whose risks you want to assess.
Create Risk Assessment Recommendation records for actions that should be taken
to mitigate the risk of those Scenarios.
Accessing the What If Analysis Search

Page
The What If Analysis Search page lets you search for an existing Hazards Analysis record
for a What If Analysis.
To access the What If Analysis Search page:
1. Access the Hazards Analysis Start Page.
2. Click the What If Analysis link.
The What If Analysis Search page appears.
Aspects of the What If Analysis Search

Page
The What If Analysis Search page contains the results of the query that is specified in the
What If Analysis Search Query text box on the Hazards Analysis Administration page.
This documentation assumes that you are using the baseline WhatIf_Analysis_Search
query, which contains two prompts that appear as lists at the top of the What If Analysis
Search page:
State: Contains a list of record states that have been configured for the Hazards
All: Displays all the existing Hazards Analysis records that are in any
state.
Active: Displays the Hazards Analysis records that are in the Active state.
Complete: Displays the Hazards Analysis records that are in the Complete
state.
Pending Approval: Displays the Hazards Analysis records that are in the
Pending Approval state.
Planning: Displays the Hazards Analysis records that are in the Planning
state.
Review: Displays the Hazards Analysis records that are in the Review
state.
Hazards Analysis Owner: Contains the value All and a list of names of the What
If Analysis team members whose names appear in the Analysis Owner field in any
Hazards Analysis records.
The query is run automatically using the default prompt value All. If you select different
grid at the bottom of the page. The query results will include hyperlinked Analysis IDs,
which you can use to open the Hazards Analysis record on the What If Analysis
Definition page.
The What If Analysis Search page contains the following task menus:
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Common Tasks Menu
The Common Tasks menu on the What If Analysis Search page contains the following
links:
Find Analysis: This link is disabled on the What If Analysis Search page.
Create Analysis: Displays a new blank Hazards Analysis record on the What If
Copy Analysis: Displays on the What If Analysis Definition page a new Hazards
Analysis record, populated with values from the Hazards Analysis record that you
are currently viewing.
Open Analysis: Displays the currently selected record on the What If Analysis
Definition page.
Delete: Displays a confirmation message, and then deletes the selected Hazards
Analysis record.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the What If Analysis Search
page.
Searching for Hazards Analysis Records

on the What If Analysis Search Page
To search for Hazards Analysis records on the What If Analysis Search page:
1. Access the What If Analysis Search page.
2. If desired, in the What If Analysis Search workspace, in the State list, select the
record state by which you want to filter the query results.
3. If desired, in the Hazards Analysis Owner list, select the user ID of the desired
analysis owner.
The query results appear in the grid. At this point, you can open a Hazards Analysis
record, copy a Hazards Analysis record, or create a new one.
Accessing the What If Analysis

Definition Page
The What If Analysis Definition page lets you create and modify Hazards Analysis
records.
To access the What If Analysis Definition page:
-orIn the grid, in the Analysis ID cell in the row that contains the desired Hazards Analysis
record, click the hyperlinked Analysis ID.
The What If Analysis Definition page appears.
Aspects of the What If Analysis

Definition Page
The What If Analysis Definition page displays the datasheet for a Hazards Analysis
record, where you can manage the properties of the What If Analysis.
If you accessed the What If Analysis Definition page by clicking the Create
Analysis link, a blank datasheet for a new Hazards Analysis record appears.
If you accessed the What If Analysis Definition page by opening an existing

Hazards Analysis record, the datasheet for the selected record appears.
Saves the current Hazards Analysis record.

Displays the Reference Documents window, where you can manage the Reference
Document records that are linked to the current Hazards Analysis record.
Displays the Field Change History dialog box, where you can view the revision
history for all fields for which revision history exists.
Note: If the revision history feature has not been enabled in the Configuration Manager
for any fields, a message will appear, indicating that no revision history is available.
Users that are assigned to the states that are defined for the Hazards Analysis
o
o
State Indicator: Displays the current state of the Hazards Analysis record.
Operations Menu: Displays the operations that are available for selection.
You can use this option to change the state of the Hazards Analysis record.
This link is enabled only when you are viewing an existing Hazards
Analysis record.
The What If Analysis Definition page contains the following task menus:
Common Tasks
Navigation
Associated Pages
Using the HAZOP Analysis Definition page, you can:
Create new Hazards Analysis records.

Modify existing Hazards Analysis records.
Assign a Security User to a Hazards Analysis record state. Doing so will allow
this Security User to transition the Hazards Analysis record from the assigned
state to a successor state. A Security User must also be assigned to the successor
state before a Security User can transition to that state.
Transition the Hazards Analysis record state to a different state.
Common Tasks Menu
The Common Tasks menu on the What If Analysis Definition page contains the following
links:
Find Analysis: Displays the What If Analysis Search page, where you can search
Copy Analysis: Displays a new Hazards Analysis record that is populated with
values from the Hazards Analysis record that you are currently viewing.
Save: Saves the current record.
Delete: Displays a confirmation message and then deletes the current record.
Page.
Reports: Displays a submenu that contains the caption of the Catalog item What If
Analysis Report as a link. This link is enabled only when you are viewing an
existing Hazards Analysis record and displays the What If Analysis Report in the
Report Viewer.
Graphs: Displays a submenu that contains the caption of the Catalog item What If
Mitigated Risk as a link. This link is enabled only when you are viewing an
existing Hazards Analysis record and displays the What If Mitigated Risk graph in
the Graph Viewer.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the What If Analysis Definition
page.
Creating New Hazards Analysis Records

To create a new Hazards Analysis record for a What If Analysis:
1. Access the What If Analysis Search page or the What If Analysis Definition page.
A new blank Hazards Analysis record appears on the What If Analysis Definition page.
3. In the Analysis ID field, type a name for the What If Analysis. This field is
required.
Copying Hazards Analysis Records

When you copy an existing Hazards Analysis record, you are creating a new Hazards
Analysis record that will be populated with the values from the record that was copied.
The values in all the fields from the source record will be copied to the new record with
the exception of the following fields:
Analysis ID
Analysis Start Date
Analysis End Date field
Last Modified By
Last Modified Date
Revision Date field
Revision Number field
To copy a Hazards Analysis record to create a new one:

2. In the grid, select the row containing the record you want to copy.
A new record appears on the What If Analysis Definition page, which is populated
automatically with values from the selected record.
4. In the Analysis ID field, type a name for the What If Analysis. This field is
required.
5. In the Analysis Start Date field, select a start date for the analysis, if desired. This
field is populated automatically with the current date.
6. In the Analysis End Date field, select an end date for the analysis, if desired. This
field is cleared when you copy an analysis.
Opening Existing Hazards Analysis

Records
To open an existing Hazards Analysis record for a What If Analysis:
1. On the What If Analysis Search page, search for the Hazards Analysis record that
you want to open.
2. In the search results, in the Analysis ID cell, click the hyperlinked ID for the
record that you want to open.
The selected record appears on the What If Analysis Definition page.
Modifying Hazards Analysis Records

To modify a Hazards Analysis record for the What If Analysis:
1. Open the Hazards Analysis record that you want to modify.
Flagging Hazards Analysis Records as

Complete
If you are finished with a What If Analysis and no longer want to see its Hazards Analysis
record in the query results on the What If Analysis Search page, you can remove the
Hazards Analysis record from the query results via the Delete option on the Common
Tasks menu.
Using the Delete option does not delete the Hazards Analysis record from the database.
Instead, when you remove a Hazards Analysis record, the Is Deleted check box in the
record is selected, and that record will no longer appear in the query results.
You can remove a Hazards Analysis record from the query results on the What If
Analysis Search page regardless of the state of the record. After a Hazards Analysis
record has been removed from the query results, you can still access the record via a
search or a custom query.
To remove a Hazards Analysis record from the What If Analysis Search page:
1. On the What If Analysis Search page, select the row containing the Hazards
Analysis record that you want to remove.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to delete the Hazards Analysis
record and all the records linked to it.
The Hazards Analysis record is removed from the What If Analysis Search page.
About the What If Analysis Team

The What If Analysis team is a group of individuals who will complete the What If
Analysis. You can add Meridium APM users and non-Meridium APM users to the What
If Analysis team.
the Security user record was created.
or Human Resource record. To add a non-Meridium APM user to the HAZOP
You can do so via the What If Analysis Team Members page or by using the
Meridium APM Framework Tools.
Note: A Security User record is required for logging in to the Meridium APM Framework
application and using Hazards Analysis. What If Analysis team members who do not
have a Security User account may participate in and contribute to the analysis but will not
be able to use the application.
Any member of the What If Analysis team can be assigned a role within the What If
Analysis team, which provides a reference of the tasks for which the team member is
responsible.
Accessing the What If Analysis Team

Members Page
On the What If Analysis Team Members page, you can add team members to the What If
Analysis team and assign team members the role of Process Owner or Facilitator.
To access the What If Analysis Team Members page:
1. Open a Hazards Analysis record that is included in the What If Analysis whose
team you want to define.
The What If Analysis Team Members page appears.
Aspects of the What If Analysis Team

Members Page
The What If Analysis Team Members page displays the Team Members workspace, which
consists of a modifiable grid that displays information about the What If Analysis team
members. Each row in the grid represents one Human Resource record. For each Human
Resource record that appears in the grid, the following information is displayed by
default:
User ID: Contains a hyperlinked name of the team member as it appears in the
Human Resource record for that user. You can click any hyperlink to view the
datasheet for that Human Resource record.
Process Owner: Contains a check box that indicates whether or not the team
member has the role of Process Owner. You can select this check box in any row
to identify the team member that is the Process Owner. This check box can be
selected, however, for only ONE team member per What If Analysis team.
Facilitator: Contains a check box that indicates whether or not the team member
has the role of Facilitator. You can select this check box in any row to identify the
team member that is the Facilitator. This check box can be selected, however, for
only ONE team member per What If Analysis.
and link to the Hazards Analysis record.
for an existing Human Resource record and link it to the Hazards Analysis record.
The HAZOP Analysis Team Members page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Common Tasks Menu
The Common Tasks menu on the What If Analysis Team Members page contains the
following links:
Page.
Analysis Report as a link. When you click this link, it displays the What If
Analysis Report in the Report Viewer.
Mitigated Risk as a link. When you click this link, it displays the What If
Mitigated Risk graph in the Graph Viewer.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the What If Analysis Definition
page.

to the What If Analysis Team
When you create new users and add them to the What If Analysis team, you are creating
new Human Resource records in the Meridium APM database and linking them to the
Hazards Analysis record. This option should be used for team members who are not
Meridium APM system users. If you want to add a team member who is already a
Meridium APM system user, see the topic for adding new team members who already
have Human Resource records.
To create a new user and add that user to the What If Analysis team:
1. Access the What If Analysis Team Members page.
button.
field is required.
4. Click OK.
The Human Resource record is saved, and the new What If Analysis team member
appears in the Team Members workspace.
Adding New What If Analysis Team

Members Who Already Have Human
Resource Records
When you add a new What If Analysis Team Member who already has a Human
Resource record, you are linking an existing Human Resource record to the Hazards
Analysis record. This option should be used for team members who already have a
Human Resource record. If you want to add a new What If Analysis team member who
does not already have a Human Resource record, see the topic for creating a new user to
add to the What If Analysis team.
To add a new What If Analysis team member who already has a Human Resource record:
button.
3. If desired, type your search criteria in the Look For text box, and then click the
Find Now button.
4. Select the row containing the desired Human Resource record, and then click the
Open button.
The new What If Analysis team member appears in the Team Members workspace.
About What If Analysis Team Member

Roles
What If Analysis team member roles serve as a reference of which What If Analysis team
member is responsible for a given task related to the What If Analysis. The following
roles are available for a What If Analysis:
Process Owner: The team member who is responsible for managing the What If
Analysis and seeing it through to completion. After you assign a team member the
role of Process Owner, that team member's name will appear in the Analysis
Owner field in the Hazards Analysis record. The Process Owner should be a
Facilitator: The team member who is in charge of conducting the What If

Analysis and organizing the What If Analysis team. The Facilitator should be a
member of the MI HA Facilitator Security Group, which provides that user with
the ability to manage the Hazards Analysis record state.
There can be only one Process Owner and one Facilitator per analysis. A single team
Assigning Roles to What If Analysis

Team Members
Owner or Facilitator. Assigning a team member a role serves as a reference for the team.
To assign a role to a What If Analysis team member:
The team member is assigned the specified role, and the Analysis Owner field on the
Hazards Analysis datasheet is populated with that team member's name.

What If Analysis Team Members
To view the Human Resource record for a What If Analysis team member:
The Human Resource record for that team member appears in a new window. At this
point, you can modify the fields if desired.
4. Click OK.
Removing Team Members from the

What If Analysis Team
When you remove a team member from a What If Analysis team, you are deleting the
link between the Human Resource record and the Hazards Analysis record for that What
If Analysis.
Additionally, if you remove from the What If Analysis team a team member who is
assigned the role of Process Owner, the Owner field in the Hazards Analysis record will
be cleared.
To remove a team member from the What If Analysis team:
2. In the Team Members workspace, select the rows containing the team members
that you want to remove from the What If Analysis team.
button.
members.
The selected team members are removed from the What If Analysis team.
About Defining Scenarios for What If

Analyses
To define Scenarios for What If Analyses, the What If Analysis team will:
Hypothesize about the hazardous processes that take place in a facility.

Identify steps in those processes that have the potential to cause abnormal or
unsafe results.
Create records to represent the various Scenarios for each process.
As part of defining the Scenarios, the What If Analysis team will:
Assess the risk associated with the Scenarios.
Determine actions that should be taken to mitigate the risk associated with the
Scenario and create records to represent those actions.
For example, assume the What If Analysis team has discussed a process that is controlled
by System 1A. During the discussion, the team defines the following Scenario, which is a
Scenario that could occur.
When the pressure monitor stops working, the pressure switch is not be triggered to open
or close appropriately, causing hazardous chemicals to leak out of the connector, which
may result in environmental degradation. To prevent this condition, a toxicity detector is
in place, which sounds an alarm when the toxicity levels in the facility reach a high-risk
level.
To define this Scenario within Hazards Analysis, the team would create one record in
each family described in the following table. The column In the example, this record
represents... contains an item from the previous example and serves as a reference for the
type of information that record represents in the What If Analysis.
A record in this
family:
Hazards Analysis
System/Node
What If
Hazards Analysis
Cause
...Stores:
In the example, this record

represents:
Details on the group of equipment or

locations that is used to perform the System 1A
process.
deviates from the normal behavior of
Pressure increases.
risk.
Details on the event that results from
the deviation that is defined in the
HAZOP Deviation record, including
how frequently it may occur, and the
equipment or location that is
Chemicals leak.
associated with it.
Causes can include human error,
equipment failure, or other factors.
Hazards Analysis
Consequence
Details on the negative outcome that

results from the event that is defined
Multiple fatalities.
in the Hazards Analysis Cause
record.
Hazards Analysis
Details on the safety precautions that Toxicity detector
Safeguard
are currently in place to prevent or

lessen the impact of the negative
outcome that is defined in the
record.
1
Independent
Protection Layer
Additional details about a safeguard

defined in a Hazards Analysis
Safeguard record that is considered
an independent layer of protection. Toxicity detector
Not all safeguards are IPLs, so not all
Hazards Analyses will contain these
records.
1. If the safeguard is an instrumented function that exists within a safety system and is
represented by an Instrumented Function record in the Meridium APM database, you can
link that Instrumented Function record to the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record. For
more details on instrumented functions and safety systems, see the SIS Management
section of this Help system.
In addition to the records described in the table, the What If Analysis team would create
two Risk Assessment records, where:
1. One is linked to the Hazards Analysis Consequence record to store the
unmitigated risk value associated with the Scenario without a safeguard in place.
In other words, the team will define the risk value that is associated with that
Scenario without the toxicity detector.
2. One is linked to the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record to store the mitigated risk
rank value of the Scenario with that safeguard in place. In other words, the team
will define the risk value associated with a Scenario when the toxicity detector is
in place.
After the team has defined the Scenario and assessed the risk associated with it, they
would create one Risk Assessment Recommendation record per action that the team
suggests for mitigating that risk. For example, the team may create a Risk Assessment
Recommendation record to add more safety equipment on the pressure switch to reduce
the risk of it failing and causing a chemical spill.
After the recommended action has been taken, the team would reassess the risk
associated with the Scenario after the additional safety precautions are in place. In other
words, they would determine the mitigated risk of the Scenario with the extra safety
equipment in place on the pressure switch.
When you create records as described here, the ID of that record will appear in the What
If Analysis Systems grid on the What If Analysis Systems page.
Accessing the What If Analysis Systems

Page
The What If Analysis Systems page lets you define the possible hazardous conditions that
could occur in your facility as a result of the process that is specified in the current
To access the What If Analysis Systems page:
1. Open the Hazards Analysis record for the desired What If Analysis.
2. On the Navigation menu, click the Systems/Nodes link.
If a Hazards Analysis System/Node record has not yet been linked to the Hazards
Analysis record for the current What If Analysis, a new blank Hazards Analysis
System/Node record appears.
These instructions assume that you have not yet associated a Hazards Analysis
System/Node record to the What If Analysis.
3. Complete the Hazards Analysis System/Node datasheet as desired, and click OK.
Note that the System/Node ID field is required.
The Hazards Analysis System/Node record is linked to the Hazards Analysis record, and
the What If Analysis Systems page appears, displaying the new Hazards Analysis
System/Node record.
Aspects of the What If Analysis Systems

Page
The What If Analysis Systems page contains the What If Analysis Systems grid, which
displays in hierarchical format the hyperlinked Record IDs for the records that are used to
define Scenarios.
All Scenarios for a given What If Analysis are represented on the same What If Analysis
Systems page.
Each separate row in the grid represents a separate record, with the exception of Risk
Assessment records, Risk Assessment Recommendation records, and Independent
Protection Layer records, which appear on the same row as the record to which they are
linked.
Each column in the grid corresponds to the name of the family to which the record
belongs. When you select a row in the grid, you are selecting the record that is
represented by the Record ID that appears in that row. The grid provides some standard
grid customization options that you can use to customize the layout of the query results.
The following columns appear in the grid:
System/Node ID: Contains the hyperlinked Record ID of the Hazards Analysis

System/Node records that belong to the What If Analysis. The ID of each Hazards
Analysis System/Node record that you add to the What If Analysis will appear in
a new row in this column.
What If ID: Contains the hyperlinked Record ID of the What If records that
belong to the What If Analysis. The ID of each What If record that you add to the
What If Analysis will appear in a new row in this column directly below the row
containing the Hazards Analysis System/Node record to which it is linked.
Cause ID: Contains the hyperlinked Record ID of the Hazards Analysis Cause
records that belong to the What If Analysis. The ID of each Hazards Analysis
Cause record that you add to the What If Analysis will appear in a new row in this
column directly below the row containing the What If record to which it is linked.
Consequence ID: Contains the hyperlinked Record ID of the Hazards Analysis

Consequence records that belong to the What If Analysis. The ID of each Hazards
Analysis Consequence record that you add to the What If Analysis will appear in
a new row in this column below the Hazards Analysis Cause record to which it is
linked.
Unmitigated Risk: Displays the total unmitigated risk rank value as it appears in
the Risk Assessment record that is linked to the Hazards Analysis Consequence
Consequence record, the unmitigated risk rank value will appear in this column
on the same row as the Hazards Analysis Consequence record to which the Risk
Safeguard ID: Contains the hyperlinked Record ID of the Hazards Analysis

Safeguard records that belong to the What If Analysis. Each Hazards Analysis
Safeguard record that you add to the What If Analysis will appear in a new row in
this column below the Hazards Analysis Consequence record to which it is linked.
IPL: Indicates whether or not the safeguard shown in the Safeguard ID column is
an independent protection layer (IPL). This cell is populated automatically based
on the settings on the IPL checklist tab in the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record.
This column can contain the following values:
True: Indicates that the safeguard is an IPL and that an Independent

Protection Layer record is linked to the Hazards Analysis Safeguard
record. This value will appear only if all the logical fields on the IPL
Checklist tab are set to True.
False: Indicates that the safeguard is not an IPL.
IPL Type: If the safeguard shown in the Safeguard ID cell is an IPL, this cell
indicates the type of IPL. There are two types of IPLs:
o
Consequence Reducing IPLs: Reduce the severity of the failure (e.g.,

fatality to injury).
Frequency Reducing IPLs: Reduce how often the failures occur (e.g.,
every 100 years to every 1,000 years).
The IPL Type cell is populated automatically based on the value in the IPL column. If the
value in the IPL column is:
o
o
False: This column is blank.

True: This column displays the value from the IPL Type field in the
Safeguard record.
IPL Credits: Displays the value is stored in the IPL Credits field in the
Safeguard record.
record is linked. If more than one Hazard Analysis Safeguard record is linked to
an Hazards Analysis Consequence record, the mitigated risk rank value for each
subsequent Hazards Analysis Safeguard record will further mitigate the mitigated
risk rank value of the previous Hazards Analysis Safeguard record, so that the
mitigated risk rank value associated with the last safeguard listed for a
consequence is the total mitigated risk rank value. If one of the Hazard Analysis
Safeguard records is deleted, the mitigated risk rank values will be recalculated
automatically.
Note: If you modify the value in the IPL Type field in a Hazard Analysis Safeguard
record after you have defined a mitigated risk value for that safeguard, the value in the
Mitigated Risk column will be cleared, and you will have to re-evaluate the mitigated
risk.
record is linked.
Recommendations: Contains the hyperlinked value <number> recommendations,
where <number> is a numeric value, indicating the number of Risk Assessment
Recommendation records that are linked to the Hazards Analysis Consequence
Consequence record, the <number> value in this column is increased by one and
appears in the same row as the Hazards Analysis Consequence record to which
the Risk Assessment Recommendation records are linked.
As you add records to the grid, a plus (+) or minus (-) sign appears to the left of the
predecessor record. You can expand a level of the hierarchy by clicking the plus sign, or
you can collapse a level of the hierarchy by clicking the minus sign. Note that when you
expand the root level of the hierarchy (i.e. the System/Node ID column), all levels of the
hierarchy will be expanded by default.
The What If Analysis Systems page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Actions
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Using the What If Analysis Systems page, you can:
Create new records that describe the Scenarios that you are assessing and link
them to the What If Analysis.
Add existing records that describe the Scenarios that you are assessing and link
them to the What If Analysis.
Assess the risk associated with the defined Scenarios.
The Hierarchy in the What If Analysis

Systems Grid
The What If Analysis Systems grid provides a hierarchical view of the records that are
used to describe a Scenario. In other words, the grid provides an alternate view of the
record hierarchy for the Hazards Analysis System/Node family. The following image
shows an example of how the What If Analysis Systems grid appears after you have
defined a Scenario for a What If Analysis.
In this image, you can see the following relationships:
The Hazards Analysis System/Node record System Node1 is linked to the What If
record Question 1.
The What If record Question 1 is linked to the Hazards Analysis Cause record
Cause 1.
The Hazards Analysis Cause record Cause 1 is linked to the Hazards Analysis
Consequence record Consequence 1.
The Hazards Analysis Consequence record Consequence 1 is linked to:
The Hazards Analysis Safeguard record Safeguard 1, which is a

Consequence Reducing IPL.
The Hazards Analysis Safeguard record Safeguard 2, which is a Frequency

Reducing IPL.
The Hazards Analysis Safeguard record Safeguard 1 is linked to:
A Risk Assessment record with the mitigated risk rank value 10.
The Hazards Analysis Safeguard record Safeguard 2 is linked to:
A Risk Assessment record with the mitigated risk rank value 3.
If you were to view the record hierarchy for the Hazards Analysis System/Node record
System Node1 in the Record Manager, it would look something like this:
In this image, you can see the same relationships in a similar format to what you see them
in the What If Analysis Systems grid. For example, Hazards Analysis Consequence record
Consequence 1 is linked to:
The Hazards Analysis Safeguard records Safeguard 1 and Safeguard 2.

Actions
The Actions menu on the What If Analysis Systems page contains the following links:
Add Node: Displays a new blank Hazards Analysis System/Node record in a new
window.
Add New: Displays a submenu of options that you can use to link a record to the
record that is currently selected in the grid. The submenu is dynamic, meaning
that the menu will contain only the options that are valid for the currently selected
record. This link is enabled only if a Hazards Analysis System/Node record
appears in the grid.
Apply Existing: Displays a submenu of options that you can use to search for an
existing record to link to the record that is currently selected in the grid. This
submenu is dynamic, meaning that the menu will contain only the options that are
valid for the currently selected record. This link is enabled only if a Hazards
Analysis System/Node record appears in the grid.
Delete: Displays a confirmation message, and then deletes the selected record and
all the records that are linked to that record as a successor. This link is enabled
only if a Hazards Analysis System/Node record appears in the grid.
Move Up: Moves the selected record up one row in the grid. This link is enabled
only when the selected record appears in a column that contains more than one
record.
Move Down: Moves the selected record down one row in the grid. This link is
enabled only when the selected record appears in a column that contains more
than one record.
Risk Matrix: Displays the Risk Assessment Interface, where you can assess the
risk associated with the item represented by the selected record. This link is
enabled only when a Hazards Analysis Consequence record or Hazards Analysis
Safeguard record is selected in the grid.

manage Risk Assessment Recommendation records for the selected record.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the What If Analysis Systems page contains the following
links:
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the What If Analysis Systems
page.
The Submenu on the Actions Menu

The Add New or Apply Existing links on the Actions menu let you link records to the
record that is currently selected in the grid. When you click the Add New or Apply
Existing link, a submenu appears. The links that appear on the submenu will vary
depending on the record that is currently selected in the What If Analysis Systems grid.
The links that appear are based on the relationship definitions that exist between the
selected record and the other records that can be displayed in the grid.
For example, the Hazards Analysis System/Node family participates as a predecessor in a
relationship with the What If family, so when you select a Hazards Analysis System/Node
record in the grid and view the Add New or Apply Existing submenus, the only available
option is to link a What If record to the selected Hazards Analysis System/Node record.
The following table describes the options that appear on these submenus when a record is
selected in the grid. You can use this table and the options that you see on the submenus
to determine which records you can link to one another on the What If Analysis Systems
page.
...The Add New submenu

contains these links:
...The Apply Existing

submenu contains these
links:
What If
What If
What If
What If
Cause
Cause
Cause
Cause
Consequence
Consequence
Consequence
Consequence
Safeguard
Safeguard
Hazards Analysis Safeguard Safeguard
Safeguard
When a record in this

family is selected:
Hazards Analysis
System/Node
What If
Hazards Analysis
Consequence
About Adding Records to the What If

Analysis Systems Grid
When you add a record to the What If Analysis Systems grid, you are defining a part of a
Scenario. Each record that you add to the gird is linked automatically to another record
that defines another part of the Scenario with the exception of the Hazards Analysis
System/Node record, which is linked automatically to the Hazards Analysis record for the
current What If Analysis.
Before you can begin adding to the What If Analysis Systems grid records that represent
parts of a Scenario, you must first define a Hazards Analysis System/Node record that
will appear as the root record in the first column in the grid. At any given time, the
records that you are allowed to add is determined based upon the relationship definitions
that exist between the family of the new record and the record to which you are trying to
link it. You will know whether you can add a record in a given family to the grid if that
family name appears on the Add New or Apply Existing submenus on the Actions menu.
After you have added to the What If Analysis Systems grid the desired records that
describe the hazardous Scenario you want to study, you can assess the risk values that are
associated with that Scenario.
Adding Hazards Analysis System/Node

Records to the What If Analysis
Systems Grid
The following instructions provide details on adding a new Hazards Analysis
System/Node record to the What If Analysis Systems grid. These instructions assume that
one Hazards Analysis System/Node record already appears in the grid (i.e., the record
was defined when you accessed the What If Analysis Systems page for the first time).
To add a new Hazards Analysis System/Node record to the What If Analysis Systems
grid:
1. Access the What If Analysis Systems page.
2. On the Actions menu, click the Add Node link.

A new blank Hazards Analysis System/Node record appears in a new window.
3. In the System/Node ID text box, type a name for the system/node. This field is
required.
OK.
The new record is linked to the Hazards Analysis record for the current What If Analysis
and appears in the System/Node ID column below the existing Hazards Analysis
System/Node record.
Creating Other Records and Adding

Them to the What If Analysis Systems
Grid
The following instructions provide details on adding records in the following families to
the What If Analysis Systems grid. These instructions assume that you are familiar with
the What If Analysis data model and the records that you need to create to define a
Scenario.
What If
To create a new record and add it to the What If Analysis Systems grid:
2. In the What If Analysis Systems grid, select the row containing the record to which
you want to link a new record.
3. On the Actions menu, click the Add New link.
4. On the submenu, click the name of the family in which you want to create a new
record.
A new blank record in that family appears in a new window.
5. Provide a value in the required fields on the datasheet.
OK.
family. For example, if you create a new What If record and link it to the Hazards
Analysis System/Node record System/Node, the new What If record will appear in the
What If ID column in the row below the Hazards Analysis System/Node record
System/Node as shown in the following image.
Adding Existing Records to the What If

Systems Grid
The following instructions provide details on adding existing records in the following
families to the HAZOP Nodes grid. Adding an existing record means that you can search
for a record that already exists in the Meridium APM database and link that record to the
HAZOP Analysis.
These instructions assume that you are familiar with the What If Analysis data model and
the records that you need to create to define a Scenario.
What If
To add an existing record to the What If Analysis Systems grid:

2. In the What If Analysis Systems grid, select the row containing the record to which
you want to link an existing record.
3. On the Actions menu, click the Apply Existing link.
4. On the submenu, click the name of the family containing the existing record that
you want to add to the grid.
The Find Items window appears, and the name of the family that you selected on the
submenu appears in the Search In list by default.
5. If desired, specify the desired search criteria, and then click the Find Now button.
6. In the search results, locate the desired record, and then click the Open button.
family. For example, if you link the existing What If record to the Hazards Analysis
System/Node record System/Node, the What If record will appear in the What If ID
column in the row below the Hazards Analysis System/Node record System/Node as
shown in the following image.
Modifying Records in the What If

To modify a record in the What If Analysis Systems grid:
2. In the What If Analysis Systems grid, in the row containing the record that you
want to modify, click the hyperlinked ID for that record. For example, if you want
to modify a What If record, in the What If ID cell, click the hyperlinked value.
The record appears in a separate window.
3. Modify the values in the fields on the datasheet as desired, and then click OK.
Moving Records to Different Rows in

the What If Analysis Systems Grid
If desired, when a column contains more than one record, you can move the records up or
down to different rows. When you move a record in the grid, the records that are linked to
that record will also move, and the hierarchical format will be retained. You will know
that you can move a record up or down a row in the grid when the Move Up or Move
Down links are enabled on the Actions menu.
For example, the following image shows a portion of the What If Analysis Systems grid,
which contains two What If records: What if 1 and What if 2. The What If record What if
2 is linked to the Hazards Analysis Cause record Cause Node 1.
If you were to move the What If record What if 2 up one row, the What If Analysis
Systems grid would look similar to the following image, where the relationship between
the What If record What if 2 and the Hazards Analysis Cause record Cause Node 1 is
retained.
To move a record to a different row in the What If Analysis Systems grid:

2. In the grid, select the row containing the record that you want to move.
3. On the Actions menu, click one of the following links:
Move Up: Moves the selected record up a row in the grid.
Move Down: Moves the selected record down a row in the grid.
The selected record appears in the specified location.
Deleting Records from the What If

When you delete a record from the What If Analysis Systems grid, you are deleting the
selected record and all the records that appear below that record in the same record
hierarchy. For example, if you delete a record in the What If family, you are also deleting
the records in the following families, which appear in subsequent rows in the grid:

Risk Assessment (unmitigated risk)
Risk Assessment (mitigated risk)
To delete a record from the What If Analysis Systems grid:

2. In the grid, select the row containing the record that you want to delete.
3. On the Actions menu, click the Delete link.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to delete the selected record
along with all the records that are linked to it.
The selected record and all the records that appear below that record in the grid are
deleted.
Accessing the What If Analysis Assets

Page
To access the What If Analysis Assets page:
On the Navigation menu, click the Manage Assets link.
The What If Analysis Assets page appears, displaying a list of Equipment and Functional
Location records that are linked to the Hazards Analysis record for the current What If
analysis.
Aspects of the What If Analysis Assets

Page
The What If Analysis Assets page displays a list of Equipment and Functional Location
records that are linked to the Hazards Analysis record associated with the current What If
Analysis.
The grid on the What If Analysis Assets page contains the Record ID and the family of
each record that is linked to the Hazards Analysis record.
For Equipment records, the Record ID column is populated with the Record ID of
the linked Equipment record, and the Family column is populated with
Equipment.
For Functional Location records, the Record ID column is populated with the
Record ID of the linked Functional Location record, and the Family column is
populated with Functional Location. By default, linked records will be listed

alphabetically, first by the Family column, and then by the Record ID column.
The What If Analysis Assets page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Actions
Common Tasks
Actions Menu
The Actions menu on the What If Analysis Assets page contains the following links:
Link to Assets: Displays the Asset Finder window, where you can search for the
Equipment or Functional Location records that you want to link to the Hazards
Analysis record for the What If Analysis.
View Linked Assets: Displays the selected Equipment and Functional Location
records in the Record Manager. This link is enabled only if the current Hazards
Analysis record is already linked to an Equipment or Functional Location record.
Unlink Assets: Displays a confirmation message, asking if you really want to
unlink the selected Equipment or Functional Location records from the current
Hazards Analysis record and then deletes the link between the Hazards Analysis
record and the Equipment or Functional Location records. This link is enabled
only if the current Hazards Analysis record is already linked to an Equipment or
Functional Location record.
Common Tasks Menu
The Common Tasks menu on the What If Analysis Assets page contains the following
links:
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the What If Analysis Assets
page.
Linking Assets to a What If Analysis

The following instructions provide details on linking an Equipment or Functional
Location record to an existing Hazards Analysis record that is associated with a What If
Analysis.
To link an Equipment record or Functional Location record to an existing Hazards

Analysis record:
1. Access the What If Analysis Assets page.
2. On the Actions menu, click the Link To Assets link.
The Search Tool appears.
3. Perform a search to find the Equipment or Functional Location record you want to
link to the Hazards Analysis record.
4. In the search results list, select the Equipment or Functional Location record(s)
that you want to link to the Hazards Analysis record.
The Asset Finder window closes, and the selected Equipment or Functional Location
records appear on the What If Analysis Assets page and are now linked to the Hazards
Analysis record.
Opening Assets Linked to a What If

Analysis
To open the Equipment and Functional Location records that are currently linked to a
Hazards Analysis record:
2. In the grid, select one or more rows containing the Equipment and Functional
Location records that you want to open.
Hint: Alternatively, if you only want to open one Equipment or Functional Location
record, you can click the hyperlinked Record ID of the record you want to view.
3. On the Actions menu, click the View Linked Assets link.
The Record Manager appears, displaying the selected Equipment and Functional
Location records.
If you selected more than one record, multiple records will appear in Record Manager.
The first record that you selected in the grid on the What If Analysis Assets page will be
expanded in the Record Explorer pane and displayed in the datasheet area. The rest of the
records appear collapsed in the Record Explorer pane.
Unlinking Assets from a What If

Analysis
To delete the link between an Equipment or Functional Location record and a Hazards
Analysis record:
2. Select the Equipment and Functional Location records you want to unlink from
the analysis by selecting one or more rows in the What If Analysis Assets grid.
3. On the Actions menu, click the Unlink Assets link.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to delete the link.
4. Click OK.
The links between the selected Equipment and Functional Location records and the
Hazards Analysis record are deleted, and the Equipment and Functional Location records
no longer appear in the list on the What If Analysis Assets page.
About the What If Analysis Report
The What If Analysis report provides an overview of the What If Analysis and contains
the following sections:
Cover: Displays the text What If Final Report For: appended with the value that
exists in the Analysis Description field in the associated Hazards Analysis record.
Summary: Displays the value that exists in the Summary field in the associated
Purpose: Displays the value that exists in the Analysis Purpose field in the
Objectives: Displays the value that exists in the Analysis Objective field in the
Process Description: Displays the value that exists in the Process Description field
in the associated Hazards Analysis record.
Scope of Study: Displays the value that exists in the Analysis Scope field in the
Methodology: Displays the text The Hazard and Operability (HazOp)

methodology was used to revalidate the PHA study using the Meridium Software
Program for documenting the PHA study results.
What If Analysis Team Members: Displays a table with a list of members of the
What If Analysis team. Each row in the table corresponds to one Human Resource
record. For each Human Resource record, the following information is displayed:
Name: The first and last name of the team member as it appears in the
Last Name and First Name fields in the associated Human Resource
record.
Department: The value that exists in the Department field in the associated
Human Resource record.
What If Analysis Documentation: Displays a table with a list of reference

documents that are associated with the analysis. Each row in the table corresponds
to one Reference Document record. For each record, the following information is
displayed:
Name: The value that exists in the ID field in the Reference Document
record.
What If Analysis Scope: Displays a table with a list of Equipment and Functional
Location records that are linked to the analysis. Each row in the table corresponds
to one Equipment or Functional Location record. For each record, the following
Description: The value that exists in the Description field in the Reference
document record.
Asset ID: The value that exists in the Equipment ID field of the
Equipment record or the Functional Location field of the Functional
Location record.
Asset Short Description: The value that exists in the Equipment Short
Description field of the Equipment record or the Functional Location
Asset Long Description: The value that exists in the Equipment Long
Description field of the Equipment record or the Functional Location Long
Node List: Displays a table that contains a list of the records that describe the
hazardous conditions that are analyzed by the What If Analysis. The table
contains the records that appear in the grid on the What If Analysis Systems page.
Accessing the What If Analysis Report

You can access the What If Analysis Report via the Reports link on the Common
Tasks menu on any page where the link is enabled.
To access the What If Analysis Report for the What If Analysis:
A submenu appears.
3. On the submenu, click the What If Analysis Report link.
Note: The name of the link is the caption of the Catalog item What If Analysis Report. By
default, this value is What If Analysis Report.
The What If Analysis Report appears in the Report Viewer.
About the What If Mitigated Risk

Graph
The What If Mitigated Risk graph displays a graphical summary of the risk rank values
associated with the Hazards Analysis System/Node records and What If records that
appear on the What If Analysis Systems page.
For example, when the graph appears, the y-axis displays the unmitigated and mitigated
risk rank values and the x-axis displays ALL the Hazards Analysis system/Node records
that are associated with an analysis.
If you drill down in the graph (i.e., click a column), the graph will display the
unmitigated and mitigated risk rank values associated with the What If records that are
linked to the Hazards Analysis System/Node record whose column you clicked in the
graph.
Accessing the What If Mitigated Risk

Graph
You can access the What If Mitigated Risk graph via the Graphs link on the Common
Tasks menu on any page where the link is enabled.
To access the What If Mitigated Risk graph for the What If Analysis:
A submenu appears.
3. On the submenu, click the What If Mitigated Risk link.

Note: The name of the link is the caption of the Catalog item What If Mitigated Risk. By
default, this value is What If Mitigated Risk.
The What If Mitigated Risk graph appears in the Graph Viewer.
About Assessing Risk in Hazards

Analyses
When you conduct a HAZOP Analysis or What If Analysis, you will assess the risk
associated with a given hazardous Scenario to help you determine what actions should be
taken to prevent or lessen the consequences of that Scenario. Using the tools provided on
the HAZOP Nodes page or the What If Systems page, you will specify the following risk
rank values for each Scenario:
Unmitigated: The current risk level associated with that Scenario before any
actions have been put in place to lessen the risk associated with the hazardous
Scenario. Based on this risk level, the analysis team may decide that actions need
to be taken to mitigate that risk. For example, the team may create a Risk
Assessment Recommendation record to recommend that a safety system be put in
place.
The unmitigated risk rank is stored in a Risk Assessment record that is linked to the
Hazards Analysis Consequence record.
Mitigated: The risk level associated with that Scenario after actions have been put
in place that should lessen the risk of a hazardous Scenario or prevent the
Scenario from occurring. Based on this risk level, the analysis team may decide
that additional actions need to be taken to further mitigate the risk.
The mitigated risk rank is stored in a Risk Assessment record that is linked to the Hazards
Analysis Safeguard record.
To assess the risk associated with a Scenario, you will create TWO Risk Assessment
records:
1. One will store the unmitigated risk rank value and is linked to the Hazards
Analysis Consequence record. The unmitigated risk rank value indicates the
probability and consequence of the risk if it occurs.
2. One will store the mitigated risk rank value and is linked to a Hazards Analysis
Safeguard record. The mitigated risk rank value indicates the probability and
consequence of the risk occurring if:
The safeguard represented by the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record is in

place to mitigate the risk.
The safeguard is also an independent layer of protection (IPL). If the

safeguard is not an IPL, the Risk Assessment interface will be disabled,
and you will not be able to define a mitigated risk rank.
When you create the Risk Assessment records, if the Hazards Analysis record for the
current analysis is associated with a specific site, the Risk Assessment interface will
display the Risk Matrix that is associated with that site. If the analysis is not associated
with a specific site, the default Risk Matrix will be used.
About Independent Layers of Protection

(IPLs)
An independent layer of protection (IPL) is a system, action, or item that mitigates the
risk associated with a hazardous scenario. All IPLs are safeguards, but not all safeguards
are IPLs. In order to truly mitigate a risk, the safeguard must be an IPL.
The following criteria are required in order for a safeguard to be considered an IPL:
The safeguard must be independent of the risk so that a failure associated with the
risk will not also cause the safeguard to fail.
The safeguard must be auditable in that it must be tested and verified using an
industry standard (e.g., a risk based inspection).
The safeguard must be capable in that it is available at least 90 percent of the

time.
The safeguard must be specific in that it can detect a potential failure and is able
to take action to prevent the failure from occurring.
For example, in a hazardous scenario a high pressure separator releases liquid to

downstream equipment. If the liquid level in the high pressure separator decreases to a
certain level, pressure could be released to downstream equipment and cause it to rupture.
In this scenario, a controller monitors the liquid level. If the level gets too low, the
controller closes a valve so that the pressure is not released to downstream equipment.
An IPL for this scenario would be a second controller and valve. The safeguard is
independent because if the first controller fails, the second controller will still be able to
shut off its valve and prevent a failure. The safeguard is auditable because the second
controller and value can be routinely inspected. The safeguard is capable because it is
available at least 90 percent of the time. The safeguard is specific because the controller
detects potential failures by measuring the liquid level and will close the value when the
potential failure is detected. Since the safeguard meets each piece of criteria, it is
considered an IPL and can reduce the risk associated with the hazards scenario.
In Hazard Analyses and What If Analyses, Hazards Analysis Safeguard records that are
IPLs are linked to an Independent Protection Layer record, which stores additional
information about the IPL.
About Defining the Mitigated Risk Rank

When the Risk Assessment record that will store the mitigated risk rank is created, the
Meridium APM system will populate values in the Risk Assessment interface based on
criteria defined in other records.
The Meridium APM system uses the relationship between the Hazards Analysis
Consequence record and the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record to:
Automatically populate the Risk Matrix with the unmitigated risk rank value that
you specified in the Risk Assessment record that is linked to the Hazards Analysis
Consequence record.
Disable the cells in the Risk Matrix that represent a risk rank that is higher than
the unmitigated risk.
The Meridium APM system then uses values stored in the Hazards Analysis Safeguard
record to disable Risk Matrix cells depending on the type of IPL. If the safeguard:
Is not an IPL, all the cells are disabled.

Is an IPL and the IPL type is Frequency Reducing, only probability values in the
Risk Matrix lower than the unmitigated risk will be enabled.
Is an IPL and the IPL Type is Consequence Reducing, only consequence values in
the Risk Matrix lower than the unmitigated risk will be enabled.
For example, assume that you have:
One Risk Assessment record with the unmitigated risk rank value 830 that is
linked to the Hazards Analysis Consequence record Flame out which could lead to
explosion.
One Hazards Analysis Safeguard record High Gas Pressure Indicator and Alarm
that is a Consequence Reducing IPL, which is linked to the Hazards Analysis
Consequence record Flame out which could lead to explosion.
If you create a Risk Mitigation Assessment record to link to the Hazards Analysis
Safeguard record High Gas Pressure Indicator and Alarm, the unmitigated risk rank value
will be populated automatically in the risk matrix.
Note that the enabled cells correspond to the type of IPL (i.e., Consequence Modifier), so
that the only cells that are enabled are the cells that represent a lower consequence risk
than the unmitigated value. Before you select a mitigated risk value, the unmitigated and
mitigated risk values are the same, and the unmitigated risk icon and mitigated risk
icon appear in the same cell. When you select the mitigated risk value, the mitigated
risk icon appears in the selected cell, and the unmitigated risk icon remains in the
cell that represents the unmitigated risk rank.
Defining the Unmitigated Risk Rank

When you define the unmitigated risk rank for a risk, a Risk Assessment record is created
and linked to the Hazards Analysis Consequence record that identifies the risk.
To define the unmitigated risk rank for a risk:
1. Access the HAZOP Nodes page or the What If Analysis Systems page.
2. In the grid, select the row containing the Hazards Analysis Consequence record,
representing the risk whose unmitigated risk rank you want to define.
3. On the Actions menu, click the Risk Matrix link.
The Unmitigated Risk Assessment dialog box appears, displaying the Risk Assessment
interface.
4. Define the unmitigated risk across all categories as desired, and then click the
Save button. Note that when you select a cell in the risk matrix, the unmitigated
risk icon will appear in the selected cell.
The record is saved, and the total unmitigated risk rank value appears in the Unmitigated
Risk column in the same row as the Hazards Analysis Consequence record to which the
Risk Assessment record is linked.
Defining the Mitigated Risk Rank

You cannot define the mitigated risk rank until you define the unmitigated risk rank.
When you define the mitigated risk rank for a risk, a Risk Assessment record is created
and linked to the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record that identifies the safeguard that is
in place to mitigate the risk.
To define the mitigated risk rank for a risk:
2. In the grid, select the row containing the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record
representing the safeguard that corresponds to the risk whose mitigated risk rank
you want to define.
3. On the Actions menu, click the Risk Matrix link.
The Risk Mitigation Assessment dialog box appears, displaying the Risk Assessment
interface. The interface is populated automatically according to values stored in the
following records:
o
o
The Hazards Analysis Safeguard record you selected.

The Risk Assessment record that is linked to the Hazards Analysis
Consequence record to which the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record is
linked.
4. Define the mitigated risk across all categories as desired, and then click the Save
button. Note that when you select a cell in the risk matrix, the mitigated risk icon
will appear in the selected cell.
Note: If you do not mitigate the risk by the same number of steps across each category
(i.e., safety, environmental, operations), when you click the Save button, a message will
appear asking if you have intentionally mitigated the risk by different amounts. If you
have done this intentionally, click the Yes button. The IPL Credits column on HAZOP
Nodes page or What If Analysis Systems page the will indicate the greatest number of
steps reduced in a single category. Otherwise, click the No button to return to the risk
matrix.
The record is saved, and the total mitigated risk rank value appears in the Mitigated Risk
column in the same row as the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record to which the Risk
Modifying Risk Ranks

To modify a risk rank:
2. In the grid, locate the row containing the risk rank that you want to modify.
3. In the Unmitigated Risk or Mitigated Risk cell, click the hyperlinked risk rank
value that you want to modify.
The Risk Assessment interface appears, where you can change the current risk rank
value.
4. Modify the risk rank values as desired.
5. Click the Save button.
Note: If you modify the value in the Unmitigated Risk cell after you have defined a
mitigated risk value, the value in the Mitigated Risk cell will be cleared automatically,
and you will have to re-evaluate the mitigated risk.
About Risk Assessment

Recommendation Records
Risk Assessment Recommendation records store details about the analysis team's
suggestion for an action that should be taken to mitigate the risk associated with a
Scenario. Risk Assessment Recommendation records can be linked only to Hazards
Analysis Consequence records.
You can manage Risk Assessment Recommendation records for individual Hazards
Analysis Consequence records via the Recommendations dialog box. Additionally, via
Recommendation Management, you can manage the Risk Assessment Recommendation
records for:
One HAZOP Analysis or What If Analysis
All Hazards Analyses (i.e., HAZOP Analyses and What If Analyses)
The Risk Assessment Recommendation datasheet contains two tabs:
General Information: Contains fields that you can use to describe the
recommendation, assign the recommendation to a Security User, and specify due
dates for the recommendation. Additionally, you can use the Status list and the
various assignee fields in the Risk Assessment Recommendation record to track
the progress of the action suggested by the analysis team.
Alert: Contains fields that you can use to schedule alerts to be sent to specified
recipients when a recommendation or reevaluation is due.
After you link a Risk Assessment Recommendation record to a Hazards Analysis

Consequence record, the Risk Assessment record is part of the analysis with which you
are currently working.
Accessing the Recommendations Dialog

Box
The Recommendations dialog box lets you manage Risk Assessment Recommendation
records that are linked to Hazards Analysis Consequence records within a HAZOP
Analysis or What If Analysis. Using the Recommendations dialog box, you can:
View the Risk Assessment Recommendation records that are currently linked to
the Hazards Analysis Consequence record.
Create new Risk Assessment Recommendation records and link them to the
Link existing Risk Assessment Recommendation records to Hazards Analysis

Consequence record.
Remove the link between a Risk Assessment Recommendation record and the
The following instructions assume that you are viewing one of the following pages within
Hazards Analysis:
HAZOP Nodes
What If Analysis Systems
To access the Recommendations dialog box:

1. In the grid, select the row containing the Hazards Analysis Consequence record
whose recommendations you want to view.
2. On the Actions menu, click the Recommendations link.
The Recommendations dialog box appears.
Aspects of the Recommendations Dialog

Box
The Recommendations dialog box displays a list of Risk Assessment Recommendation
records that are linked to the Hazards Analysis Consequence record that is currently
selected. Each row in the list represents one Risk Assessment Recommendation record.
For each Risk Assessment Recommendation record that appears in the list, the following
Recommendation ID: The ID for the recommendation as it appears in the

Recommendation ID field in the Risk Assessment Recommendation record.
Recommendation Headline: The description of the recommendation as it appears

in the Recommendation Headline field in the Risk Assessment Recommendation
record.
Below the list, the following buttons appear:
Add new Recommendation: Displays a new blank Risk Assessment

Recommendation datasheet in a new window, where you can create a new Risk
Assessment Recommendation record. After you save the new record, it will
appear in the list on the Recommendations dialog box.
Add Existing Recommendations: Displays the Find Items window, where you can
search for an existing Risk Assessment Recommendation record to link to the
selected Hazards Analysis Consequence record.
Delete Recommendations: Displays a confirmation message, and then deletes the

link between the Risk Assessment Recommendation record and the selected
Hazards Analysis Consequence record and remove the Risk Assessment
Recommendation record from the list. This link is enabled only if at least one
Risk Assessment Recommendation record appears in the list.
Close: Closes the Recommendations dialog box, displaying the page from which
it was accessed.
Using the Status Field in

Recommendations
You can use the values in the Status list in a Risk Assessment Recommendation record to
facilitate a workflow to track the progress of the recommendation.
The Status list contains the following values:
Approved: You can use this status to indicate that the recommended action has
been approved and can be assigned to someone to implement in your facility.
Created: This status indicates that the Risk Assessment Recommendation record
and the associated recommendation are new. This is the default state.
Pending Review: You can use this status to indicate that the recommended action
is assigned to someone so that they can review it and obtain approval to
implement the suggested action.
Reviewed: You can use this status to indicate that the recommended action has
been reviewed and is waiting for approval.
Rejected: You can use this status to indicate that the recommended action has
been not been approved.
Cancelled: You can use this status to indicate that the previously approved or
reviewed action will no longer be implemented.
Superseded: You can use this status to indicate that the previously approved or
reviewed action will no longer be implemented because a different action
supersedes it.
Depending on the value that exists in the Status field, you will need to assign the Risk
Assessment Recommendation to an analysis team member or the individual within your
organization who is responsible for the current task associated with that recommendation.
Additionally, when the Status field contains a certain value, in order to change that value,
you must be logged in as the user to whom the record is assigned based on the current
value in the Status field. For example, only the person whose name appears in the
Reviewer Name field can change the value in the Status field to Reviewed.
The following diagram illustrates the workflow that you can use when working with the
Status field to track the progress of a given recommendation. The boxes represent a
Status value that appears in the Status field, and the arrows represent actions taken by the
current assignee.
Note: Risk Assessment Recommendation records that are set to the Approved state cannot
be deleted.
Creating New Risk Assessment

The following instructions provide details on creating a new Risk Assessment
Recommendation record via the Recommendations dialog box. These instructions assume
that you are familiar with the fields in the Risk Assessment Recommendation family.
To create a new Risk Assessment Recommendation record:
1. Access the Recommendations dialog box.
2. Below the grid, click the Add New Recommendation button.
A new Risk Assessment Recommendation record appears in a new window.
3. On the General Information tab, in the Target Completion Date box, type or select
the date on which the recommended action should be completed. This field is
required.
5. If desired, on the Alert tab, provide values in the fields to schedule an alert to be
sent to the assignee when the recommendation is due.
Note: On the Alert tab, you can also schedule an alert to be sent to a list of recipients
when the recommendation is due for reevaluation.
6. Click OK.
The selected record appears in the list on the Recommendations dialog box and is linked
to the Hazards Analysis Consequence record that is currently selected on the page from
which you accessed the Recommendations dialog box.
Adding Existing Risk Assessment

Recommendation Records to the
Analysis
The following instructions provide details on searching for an existing Risk Assessment
Recommendation record to link to a Hazards Analysis Consequence record. When you
link and existing Risk Assessment Recommendation record to a Hazards Analysis
Consequence record, you are adding that Risk Assessment Recommendation record to the
analysis with which you are currently working.
To add an existing Risk Assessment Recommendation record to the analysis:
2. Below the grid, click the Add Existing Recommendations button.
The Find Items window appears.
3. If desired, provide search criteria, and then click the Find Now button.
4. In the search results list, select the row containing the desired record.
5. Click the Open button.
to the record that is currently selected on the page from which you accessed the
Recommendations dialog box.
Opening Risk Assessment

Recommendation Records from the
Recommendations Dialog Box
To open a Risk Assessment Recommendation record from the Recommendations dialog
box:
2. In the grid, locate the row containing the Risk Assessment record that you want to
open.
3. In the Recommendation ID cell, click the hyperlinked Record ID for the desired
record.
The selected Risk Assessment Recommendation record appears in a new window. At this
point, you can modify the record as desired, and then click OK to save your changes.
Removing Risk Assessment

Recommendation Records from the
Analysis
When you remove a Risk Assessment Recommendation record from an analysis, you are
deleting the link between the Risk Assessment Recommendation record and the Hazards
Analysis Consequence record that is part of the HAZOP Analysis or What If Analysis.
To remove a Risk Assessment Recommendation record from the analysis:
2. In the grid, select the row containing the Risk Assessment record that you want to
remove from the analysis.
3. Click the Delete Recommendations button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to remove the link between
the Risk Assessment Recommendation record and the record to which it is linked.

The selected Risk Assessment Recommendation record is removed from the
Recommendations list and the analysis.
About Scheduling Risk Assessment

Recommendation Alerts
The Alerts tab on the Risk Assessment Recommendation datasheet contains fields that
you can use to schedule an email message to be sent to someone. You can schedule alerts
to be sent when:
The recommended action is due to be completed (via the Alert Assignee When
Due? check box and associated fields).
The recommended action is due for reevaluation (via the Reevaluate? check box
and associated fields).
For an email message to be sent to a recipient, the specified recipient must have a valid
email address specified in the Email Address field in a Human Resource record in the
Meridium APM database.
When you save a Risk Assessment Recommendation record whose Status field contains
the value Approved and whose alert schedule has been defined on the Alerts tab, the
following items are automatically created in the Meridium APM database:
One Alert record that is linked to the Risk Assessment Recommendation record.
One Scheduled Item in the Meridium APM Schedule Manager.
After these items exist, the email message will be sent to the specified recipient according
to the schedule that is defined in the Risk Assessment Recommendation record.
Scheduling Alerts to Notify Assignees

When a Recommended Action is Due
The following instructions provide details on using the fields on the Alert tab on the Risk
Assessment Recommendation datasheet to schedule an email message alert to be sent to
an email recipient when a recommended action is due. For details on scheduling email
messages to notify a recipient when a recommendation is due for reevaluation, see the
topic for scheduling alerts to notify assignees when a recommendation is due for
reevaluation.
These instructions assume that you have specified a user in the Assigned To Name field
on the General Information tab and that their Human Resource record contains a valid
email address.
To schedule an email message to notify an assignee when a recommended action is due:
1. Open the Risk Assessment Recommendation record for which you want to
configure email message alerts.
2. Click the Alert tab.
The Alert tab appears.
3. Select the Alert Assignee When Due? check box, and then click in a different
field.
The following fields are enabled and required:
Days Before Due Date to be Notified
Frequency of Alert After Due Date
4. In the Days Before Due Date to be Notified text box, type a numeric value that
represents the number of days prior to the due date that the assignee should be
notified of that due date.
5. In the Frequency of Alert After Due Date list, select the value that represents the
frequency by which an assignee should be notified after the due date has passed.
6. In the Implementation Alert Text text box, type the message that you want to
appear in the email message that is sent to the assignee.
7. At the bottom of the Risk Assessment Recommendation datasheet, click OK.
Scheduling Alerts to Notify Assignees

When a Recommended Action is Due
for Reevaluation
The following instructions provide details on using the fields on the Alert tab on the Risk
Assessment Recommendation datasheet to schedule an email message alert to be sent to
an email recipient when a recommendation is due for reevaluation. For details on
scheduling alerts to notify a recipient when a recommendation is due, see the topic for
scheduling alerts to notify assignees when a recommendation is due.
To schedule an email message to notify an assignee when a recommended action is due
for reevaluation:
configure email message alerts.
3. Select the Reevaluate? check box, and then click in a different field.
Reevaluation Date
Reevaluation Alert Body Text
4. In the Reevaluation Date box, type or select the date on which the reevaluation is
due.
5. In the Reevaluation Notification List, select the check box to the left of the
Meridium APM user who will receive the reevaluation email message if this user
is different from the user specified in the Assigned To Name field.
Note: For a user to receive a reevaluation alert, a valid email address must be stored in
the user's Human Resource record.
6. In the Reevaluation Alert Body Text text box, type the message that you want to
appear in the email message that is sent to the assignee.
7. At the bottom of the datasheet, click OK.
Viewing the List of Risk Assessment

Recommendation Records for the
Current Analysis
The following instructions provide details on viewing the list of Risk Assessment
Recommendation records that are associated with the current HAZOP Analysis or What
If Analysis. For details on viewing the list of Risk Assessment Recommendation records
for ALL HAZOP Analyses or What If Analyses, see the topic for viewing the list of Risk
Assessment Recommendation records for all analyses.
To view the list of Risk Assessment Recommendation records for the current analysis:
1. Open the Hazards Analysis record for the desired HAZOP Analysis or What If
Analysis.
2. On the Navigation menu, click the All Recommendations link.
The Recommendation Management page appears, displaying the results of the:
1.
-or-
HAZOP Analysis Recommendations query (for an HAZOP Analysis)
1.
What If Analysis Recommendations query (for a What If Analysis)

Recommendation Records for All
Hazards Analyses
Recommendation records that are associated with ALL HAZOP Analyses and What If
Analyses that exist in the Meridium APM database. For details on viewing a list of Risk
Assessment Recommendation records for a single analysis, see the instructions for
viewing the list of Risk Assessment Recommendation records for the current analysis.
To view the list of Risk Assessment Recommendation records for ALL analyses:
On the Hazards Analysis Start Page, click the Manage Recommendations link.
The Recommendation Management page appears, displaying the results of the All
HAZOP Analysis Recommendations query, which returns a list of ALL Risk Assessment
Recommendation records that are associated with any Hazards Analysis.
About Revision History in Hazards

Analysis
In addition to the Meridium APM Framework Tool that provides revision history for field
values , which you can use to manage revisions that are made on individual fields in a
family, Hazards Analysis provides a Revision History feature that you can use to manage
the revisions made for an entire analysis (i.e., HAZOP or What If). When you create an
analysis, you link records in multiple families to the Hazards Analysis record, which
represents the entire analysis. When you complete an analysis (i.e., it has been approved),
you will change the state of the Hazards Analysis record to Complete. When you do so, a
snapshot is taken of the Hazards Analysis record and each record to which it is linked,
either directly or indirectly.
When the Hazards Analysis record state is changed to Complete, one record in each of
the following families will be created:
Hazards Analysis Revision

Hazards Analysis System/Node Revision
HAZOP Deviation Revision (for HAZOP Analyses)
What If Revision (for What If Analyses)
Hazards Analysis Cause Revision
Hazards Analysis Consequence Revision
Hazards Analysis Safeguard Revision
Independent Protection Layer Revision
In other words, after the record state for the Hazards Analysis record is changed to
Complete, one Revision record is created for each record that is linked to the Hazards
Analysis record (with the exception of the Human Resource, Risk Assessment
Recommendation, and Risk Assessment families). Each Revision record stores a snapshot
of the source record as it appeared when the state of the Hazards Analysis record was
changed. For details on how these families are related to one another, see the illustration
of the Hazards Analysis revision data model.
If the analysis requires reassessment, after the reassessment takes place, the state of the
Hazards Analysis record will be changed again to the Complete state and a second set of
Revision records will be created, and so on.
You can access the Hazards Analysis Revision records via the Revision History link on
the Navigation menu.
Available Revision Families

The following families are not included in the Hazards Analysis data model image but are
also used by Hazards Analysis to support Revision History. The family captions for these
families match the source family name, appended with Revision to indicate that the
family is a Revision family:

Hazards Analysis System/Node Revision
HAZOP Deviation Revision (for a HAZOP Analysis)
-orWhat If Revision (for a What If Analysis)
Hazards Analysis Cause Revision

Hazards Analysis Consequence Revision
Hazards Analysis Safeguard Revision
Independent Protection Layer Revision
Accessing Hazards Analysis Revisions

The following instructions provide details on accessing the Analysis Revision History
page, where you can view the Revision records that exist for a given analysis.
To access the Analysis Revision History page:
2. On the Navigation menu, click the Revision History link.
The Analysis Revision History page appears.
Note: The Revision History link is enabled only if the Hazards Analysis record for the
current analysis has ever been set to the Complete state.
Aspects of the Analysis Revision History

Page
The Analysis Revision History page contains the following panes:
1. Revisions pane: Contains a list of all Hazards Analysis Revision records that have
been created for the HAZOP or What If Analysis from which you accessed the
Analysis Revision History page. Each row in the list represents one Hazards
Analysis Revision record, and each item in the list is labeled using the value that
exists in the Revision Date field in that Hazards Analysis Revision record. The
rows appear in the reverse order in which they were created and are numbered,
starting with 0, where 0 is the first revision. In other words, the most recent
revision will appear first in the list. When you select a row in the list:
o A hierarchical view of the HAZOP or What If Analysis that existed at the
time that revision was created will appear in the Selected Revision pane.
o
The corresponding Hazards Analysis Revision record will be displayed in

the datasheet area.
2. Selected Revision pane: Displays a hierarchical view of the records that belong to
the HAZOP or What If Analysis whose revision is selected in the Revisions pane.
At the bottom of this section, the Show Changes button appears, which you can click to
view the changes that were made to the selected record during this revision. This button
is enabled only if the selected record contains values that were changed since the
previous revision.
Note: If you are viewing the revision history for a What If Analysis, the root node
contains the text What If Analysis instead of Hazards Analysis.
3. Datasheet pane: Displays the Hazards Analysis Revision record that is currently
selected in the Revisions pane. Above the datasheet, the Print button appears,
which you can use to print the record that is displayed in the datasheet area.
The following image shows the Analysis Revision History page, where callouts have been
provided to identify the numbered panes described above.
The Analysis Revision History page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
The options that appear on these task menus is consistent with the options that appear on
that menu when you are viewing it on other pages in Hazards Analysis.
On the Analysis Revision History page, you can:
View the Revision record for the desired record.
View the specific changes that were made to a given Revision record.
Common Tasks Menu
The Common Tasks menu on the Analysis Revision History page contains the following
links:
Find Analysis: Displays the <Analysis Type> Analysis Search page, where
<Analysis Type> is either HAZOP or What If, depending on the type of analysis
you were working with when you accessed the Reference Documents page.
Create Analysis: Displays a new blank Hazards Analysis record on the <Analysis
Type> Analysis Definition page, where <Analysis Type> is either HAZOP or
What If, depending on the type of analysis you were working with when you
accessed the Reference Documents page.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the Analysis Revision History
page.
Viewing the Datasheet for a Revisions

Record
To view the datasheet for a Revision record:
1. Access the Analysis Revision History page.
2. In the Revisions pane, select the row that represents the revision of the Hazards
Analysis that you want to view.
The corresponding Hazards Analysis Revision record appears in the Datasheet pane, and
the corresponding revision appears in the Selected Revision pane.
3. In the Selected Revision pane, select the Revision record whose datasheet you
want to view.
The Revision record for the selected record appears in the Datasheet pane.
Viewing Changes That Were Made

Between Revisions
To view changes that were made between revisions:
2. In the Revisions pane, select the revision for which you want to see the modified
values.
3. In the Selected Revisions pane, select the record for which you want to see the
modified values.
4. At the bottom of the Selected Revisions pane, click the Show Changes button.
The Changes dialog box appears.
4. Review the changes and click OK when you are finished.

The Changes dialog box closes.
Accessing the Reference Documents

Page
On the Reference Documents page, you can manage the Reference Document records that
are linked to the Hazards Analysis record for the current analysis (i.e., HAZOP or What
If). The following instructions provide details on accessing the Reference Documents
page whether you are currently working with a HAZOP Analysis or a What If Analysis.
To access the Reference Documents page:
1. Open the Hazards Analysis record for the desired analysis: HAZOP or What If.
2. On the Navigation menu, click the Documents link.
The Reference Documents page appears.
Aspects of the Reference Documents

Page
The Reference Documents page contains the Reference Documents workspace, which
contains a grid that displays a list of Reference Document records that are linked to the
Hazards Analysis record for the current HAZOP Analysis or What If Analysis. Each row
in the grid represents one Reference Document record. For each Reference Document
record that appears in the grid, the following information is displayed:
ID: The value that exists in the ID field of the associated Reference Document
record.
Description: The value that exists in the Description field of the associated
Reference Document record.
Add New Document: Displays a new blank Reference Document record in the
<empty> (new Reference Document) dialog box.
Add Existing Documents: Displays the Find Items window, where you can search
for an existing Reference Document record to link to the Hazards Analysis record
for the current HAZOP Analysis or What If Analysis.
Remove Documents: Displays a confirmation message and then removes the

Reference Document record from the analysis. This button is enabled only when a
row in the grid is selected.
Open Document: Opens the file associated with the selected Reference Document
record. This button is enabled only when a row in the grid is selected.
The Reference Documents page contains the following task menus:
Navigation: Contains the options that are common to this menu whether you are
working with a HAZOP Analysis or What If Analysis.
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Reference Documents page contains the following links:
Find Analysis: Displays the <Analysis Type> Analysis Search page, where
<Analysis Type> is either HAZOP or What If, depending on the type of analysis
you were working with when you accessed the Reference Documents page.
Create Analysis: Displays a new blank Hazards Analysis record on the <Analysis
Type> Analysis Definition page, where <Analysis Type> is either HAZOP or
What If, depending on the type of analysis you were working with when you
accessed the Reference Documents page.
Page.
Reports: Displays a submenu that contains the caption of one of the following
Catalog items:
Hazards Analysis Report (for HAZOP Analyses)
What If Analysis Report (for What If Analyses)
The option that appears depends upon the type of analysis you were working with when
you accessed the Reference Documents page.
Graphs: Displays a submenu that contains the caption of one of the following
Catalog items:
Hazards Analysis Mitigated Risk (for HAZOP Analyses)
What If Mitigated Risk (for What If Analyses)
The option that appears depends upon the type of analysis you were working with when
you accessed the Reference Documents page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the Reference Documents page.
Creating New Reference Document

Records and Adding Them to the
Analysis
When you create a new Reference Document record and add it to a HAZOP Analysis or
What If Analysis, you are linking the new Reference Document record to the Hazards
Analysis record for that analysis.
To create a new Reference Document record and add it to the analysis:
1. Access the Reference Documents page.
2. Below the grid, click the Add New Documents button.
A new Reference Document record appears.
3. Follow the standard procedure for creating a Reference Document record.
The Reference Document record is saved and appears in a new row in the grid.
Adding Existing Reference Document

Records to the Analysis
When you add an existing Reference Document to a HAZOP Analysis or What If
Analysis, you are linking the Reference Document record to the Hazards Analysis record
for the analysis.
To add an existing Reference Document record to the analysis:
2. Below the grid, click the Add Existing Documents button.
The Find Items window appears, and the Reference Document family appears in the
3. Provide additional search criteria if desired, and then click the Find Now button.
4. In the search results grid, select the rows containing the Reference Document
records that you want to link to the Hazards Analysis record.
The selected records appear in new rows in the grid.
Viewing Reference Documents

When you view a reference document, you are opening the file specified in the Reference
Document record. To be able to view a reference document on your computer:
The file must be saved in a location that can be accessed from your computer.
The application required to open that document must be installed on your

computer.
To view a reference document:

2. In the grid, select the row containing the reference document that you want to
view.
3. Below the grid, click the Open Document button.
The reference document file appears in the application required to display it. For
example, if the reference document is a word document, it will appear in the Microsoft
Word application.
Modifying Reference Document Records

To modify a Reference Document record:
2. In the grid, locate the row containing the Reference Document record that you
want to modify.
3. In the ID column, click the hyperlinked Record ID of the record.
The Reference Document record appears in a new window.
5. Click OK.
Removing Reference Document Records

from the Analysis
When you remove a Reference Document record from a HAZOP or What If Analysis,
you are deleting the link between the Reference Document record and the Hazards
Analysis record for the analysis. You are not deleting the Reference Document record
from the database.
To remove a Reference Document record from the analysis:
2. In the grid, select the row containing the Reference Document record that you
want to remove from the analysis.
3. Below the grid, click the Remove Documents button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to remove the selected
records.
The selected records are removed from the analysis and are no longer displayed in the
grid.
Associated Pages - Hazards Analysis

The Associated Pages menu appears throughout Hazards Analysis and displays
Associated Pages that have been configured for the families that participate in the
Hazards Analysis data model. The baseline Meridium APM database does not contain
Associated Pages for Hazards Analysis families by default.
About the Hazards Analysis Catalog

Folder Structure
The Hazards Analysis Catalog folders contain queries, graphs, and reports that appear
throughout Hazards Analysis and display information contained in the records that make
up a HAZOP Analysis or a What If Analysis. The Catalog folder

\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Hazards Analysis contains the following subfolders:
HAZOP: Contains the following subfolders:
Graphs: Contains the Hazards Analysis Mitigated Risk graph and the
Subgraphs folder.
Queries: Contains various queries that are used to display information

related to a HAZOP Analysis.
Reports: Contains the Hazards Analysis Report report and the Subreports
folder.
Queries: Contains the queries that are used by Hazards Analysis to display search
results for Hazards Analysis records for either a HAZOP Analysis or a What If
Analysis.
What If: Contains the following subfolders:
Graphs: Contains the What If Mitigated Risk graph and the Subgraphs
folder.
Queries: Contains various queries that are used to display information

related to a What If Analysis.
Reports: Contains the What If Analysis Report report and the Subreports
folder.
The topics in this section of the Help system describe the content of each Catalog folder
in the previous list. You should not modify the names of these Catalog folders or the
names of the items that exist in these folders or move the items to another Catalog folder.
Graphs Folder
The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Hazards Analysis\HAZOP\Graphs
contains the following items:
Item Name
Behavior and Usage
Hazards Analysis
Mitigated Risk
A graph that displays a prompt for the Entity Key of a Hazards

Analysis record whose HAZOP Analysis data you want to view in
the Graph Viewer.
Subgraphs
A subfolder that contains the Hazards Analysis Deviation Mitigated

Risk graph, which supports the Hazards Analysis Mitigated Risk
graph.
Queries Folder
The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Hazards Analysis\HAZOP\Queries
contains the following queries:
Query Name
Behavior and Usage
All HAZOP Analysis

Recommendations
Displays a list of ALL the Risk Assessment

Recommendation records that are associated with
a Hazards Analysis (includes What If Analyses).
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key of the

desired Hazards Analysis System/Node record
and then displays the unmitigated and mitigated
risk rank values organized by the HAZOP
Hazards Analysis Deviation Mitigated
Deviation record with which they are associated.
Risk Query
This query supports the Hazards Analysis
Mitigated Risk graph that is stored in the
folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Hazards
Analysis\HAZOP\Graphs.
Hazards Analysis Mitigated Risk
Query

desired Hazards Analysis record and then displays
the unmitigated and mitigated risk rank values
organized by the Hazard Analysis System/Node
records with which they are associated. This
query supports the Hazards Analysis Mitigated
Risk graph that is stored in the folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Hazards
Analysis\HAZOP\Graphs.
Hazards Analysis Query

various information about the HAZOP Analysis,
including values that appear in the Hazards
Analysis record and Record IDs of the records
that are linked to the HAZOP Analysis. This
query supports the Hazards Analysis Report that
is stored in the Reports folder.
HAZOP Analysis Recommendations

a list of the Risk Assessment Recommendation
records that are associated with the HAZOP
Analysis that is represented by that Hazards
Analysis record.
HAZOP Locations and Equipment

and then displays the Entity Keys for the
Equipment and Functional Location records that
are associated with the specified record.
HAZOP Max Risk Rank for Node

and then displays the unmitigated risk rank value
for the Hazards Analysis Consequence record that
is linked to the specified record.

a list of Reference Document records and various
details from those records that are linked to the
Hazop_Reference_Documents_Query specified record. This query supports the
Hazop_Reference_Document_Report, which is
stored in the folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Hazards
Analysis\HAZOP\Reports\Subreports.
Hazop_Team_Member_Query

the list of Human Resource records that are linked
to the specified record. This query supports the
Hazop_Team_Member_Report, which is stored in

the folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Hazards
Analysis\HAZOP\Reports\Subreports.
Reports Folder
The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Hazards Analysis\HAZOP\Reports
Item Name Behavior and Usage
Hazards
Analysis
Report
Subreports
A report that displays a prompt for the Entity Key of the desired Hazards
Analysis record and then displays in the Report Viewer various information
about the HAZOP Analysis, including the field values from the Hazards
Analysis record and details on the records that make up that analysis.
A folder that contains the reports with the following names, which support
the Hazards Analysis Report:
Hazop_Reference_Document_Report
Hazop_Team_Member_Report
Queries Folder
The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Module\Hazards Analysis\Queries contains the
following queries, which are used to display search results for Hazards Analysis records
for HAZOP Analyses and What If Analyses:
Query Name
Behavior and Usage
A search that displays the following prompts and then

HAZOP_Analysis_Search displays all the Hazards Analysis records whose Analysis
Type field contains the value HAZOP and meets the specified
criteria:
State: The record states that have been configured in

the Configuration Manager for the Hazards Analysis
family. By default, this list contains the following
values:
All
Active
Complete
Pending Approval
Planning
Review
Hazards Analysis Owner: The names of the users

whose names appear in the Analysis Owner field in a
This query appears by default on the HAZOP Analysis Search

page.
A search that displays the following prompts and then
WhatIf_Analysis_Search displays all the Hazards Analysis records whose Analysis
Type field contains the value What If and meets the specified
criteria:
State: The record states that have been configured in

the Configuration Manager for the Hazards Analysis
family. By default, this list contains the following
values:
All
Active
Complete
Pending Approval
Planning
Review
Hazards Analysis Owner: The names of the users

whose names appear in the Analysis Owner field in a
This query appears by default on the What If Analysis Search

page.
Graphs Folder
The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modueles\Hazards Analysis\What If\Graphs
Item Name
Behavior and Usage
A graph that displays a prompt for the Entity Key of a Hazards Analysis
What If
record whose What If Analysis data you want to view in the Graph
Mitigated Risk
Viewer.
Subgraphs
A subfolder that contains the What If Deviation Mitigated Risk graph,

which supports the What If Mitigated Risk graph.
Queries Folder
The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Hazards Analysis\What If\Queries

contains the following queries:
Query Name
Behavior and Usage
What If Analysis
Query
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key of the desired Hazards

Analysis record and then displays various information about the
What If Analysis, including values that appear in the Hazards
Analysis record and Record IDs of the records that are linked to
the What If Analysis.
What If Analysis
Recommendations

Analysis record and then displays a list of the Risk Assessment
Recommendation records that are associated with the Analysis that
is represented by that Hazards Analysis record.

What If Locations and Analysis System/Node record and then displays the Entity Keys
Equipment
for the Equipment and Functional Location records that are
associated with the specified record.
What If Max Risk
Rank for System

Analysis System/Node record and then displays the unmitigated
risk rank value for the Hazards Analysis Consequence record that
is linked to the specified record.
What If Mitigated
Risk Query

Analysis record and then displays unmitigated and mitigated risk
rank values organized by the Hazard Analysis System/Node
records with which they are associated.
What If Risk Query

Analysis record and then displays the mitigated and unmitigated
risk rank values organized by the Hazards Analysis record with
which they are associated.
Reports Folder
The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modueles\Hazards Analysis\What If\Reports
Item Name
What If
Analysis
Report
Subreports
Behavior and Usage

A report that displays a prompt for the Entity Key of the desired Hazards
Analysis record and then displays in the Report Viewer various
information about the What If Analysis, including the field values from the
Hazards Analysis record and details on the records that make up that
analysis.
A folder that contains the reports with the following names, which support
the What If Analysis Report:
What If Reference Document Report
What If Team Member Report
Hazards Analysis
Hazards Analysis records store details about the Hazards Analysis that you are
conducting. The following table provides and alphabetical list and description of the
fields that exist for the Hazards Analysis family and appear on the Hazards Analysis
datasheet, unless otherwise specified. The information in the table reflects the baseline
state and behavior of these fields. This list is not comprehensive.
Field
Data
Type
Description Behavior and Usage
A brief
description On the datasheet, this field appears as a text box
Analysis
Character for the
labeled Analysis Description, in which you can enter
Description
Hazards
your own value.
Analysis.
On the datasheet, this field appears as a text box
Analysis End Date
The date on
button,
Date
which the labeled Analysis End Date and contains a
which you can click to access the Calendar feature.
Hazards
The date in this field must be later than the date in the
Analysis
Analysis Start Date field, or an error message will
will end.
appear.
When you copy a Hazards Analysis record, the value
in this field is not copied.

The ID for labeled Analysis ID. This field is required, and the
Analysis ID Character the Hazards value that you enter must be unique compared to the
Analysis. value in the Analysis ID field in other Hazards
Analysis records.
A
description
of the goals
labeled Analysis Objective and contains a
button,
for the
which you can click to access the Text Editor.
analysis.
Analysis
Objective
Text
Analysis
Owner
The
analysis
team
member
On the datasheet, this field is disabled and populated
Character whose name
automatically.
appears in
the Process
Owner
field.
Analysis
Purpose
Analysis
Scope
Analysis
Start Date
Text
Text
Date
A
On the datasheet, this field appears as text box labeled
description
of the
Analysis Purpose and contains a
button, which
purpose for
you can click to access the Text Editor.
the analysis.
A
description
of the
methods
and
labeled Analysis Scope and contains a
button,
resources
which you can click to access the Text Editor.
used to
conduct the
analysis.
The date on
button,
which the labeled Analysis Start Date and contains a
which you can click to access the Calendar feature.
Hazards
This date must be earlier than the date in the Analysis
Analysis
End Date field, or an error message will appear.

will begin.
When you copy a Hazards Analysis record, this field is

populated automatically with the current date in the
new record.
Analysis
Type
The type of
Hazards
Analysis
that you are
Character
conducting
(i.e.,
HAZOP or
What If).
Facilitator
The name
of analysis
team
member
This field does not appear on the Hazards Analysis
Character
who is
datasheet by default.
specified as
the
Facilitator.
Is Deleted
Logical
Indicates
whether the
Hazards
Analysis
record has
been
removed
from
searches
within the
Hazards
Analysis
module.

datasheet by default. This field is disabled and
populated automatically with the appropriate value
based on the page in the Hazards Analysis module
from which you create the Hazards Analysis record.

datasheet by default. This value is set automatically
when you flag a Hazards Analysis record as complete.
This value is used by the Meridium APM system, so
you should not modify it manually.
Last
Character The name On the datasheet, this field is disabled and populated
Modified By
of the user automatically. When you copy a Hazards Analysis
who was
record, the value in this field is not copied.
logged in
when the
Hazards
Analysis
record was
last
modified.
Last
Modified
Date
Date
Next
Reevaluation Date
Date
The date on
which the
Hazards
Analysis
automatically. When you copy a Hazards Analysis
record was record, the value in this field is not copied.
last
modified.
The date on This field is disabled and populated automatically with
which the the output of the following calculation:
Hazards
Analysis
Next Reevaluation Date = Revision Date +
should be Reevaluation Interval
reevaluated.
A longer
description On the datasheet, this field appears as a text box and
Process
of the
Text
button, which you can click to access
Description
process that contains a
the Text Editor.
you are
studying.
On the datasheet, this field appears as a list labeled
Process Life Cycle Phase and contains the description
The phase of all System Codes in the
MI_HAZARDS_ANALYSIS_LIFE_CYCLE_PHASE
that
corresponds System Code Table. You can choose from the
to the phase following baseline values:
Process Life
within the
Character
Design and Development
Cycle Phase
life cycle
Construction and Startup
for the
process that
you are
Operate and Maintain
analyzing.
Decommissioning
Process
Owner
Character The name

of the
analysis
team
member
who is
specified as
This field does not appear on the datasheet by default

and is automatically populated when you flag a team
member as the Process Owner via the HAZOP
Analysis Team Members or What If Analysis Team
Members page. This value is used to populate the
Analysis Owner field.
the Process
Owner.
A brief
description
of the
Process Type Character
labeled Process Type in which you can enter your own
process that
value.
you are
studying.
The number
of years
between
Reevaluation
Number evaluations You can populate this field manually on the datasheet.
Interval
of the
Hazards
Analysis.
The date
and time on On the datasheet, this field is disabled and populated
which the automatically with the date and time of the most recent
revision of revision. When you copy a Hazards Analysis record,
the Hazards this field is populated automatically with the current
Analysis
date and time in the new record.
was created.
Revision
Date
Date
Revision
Number
A number
that
represents
the number
of times the
Hazards
Analysis
Character record state
has been
changed to
Complete.
This field
contains the
value 0 by
default.

automatically. When you copy a Hazards Analysis
record, this field is populated automatically with 0 in
the new record.
A
description
of the site This field does not appear on the Hazards Analysis
Site
Character that is
datasheet by default. This value is set automatically
Description
specified in when you select a Site ID in the Site ID field.
the Site ID
field.
On the datasheet, this field appears as a list labeled
Site ID and contains the values stored in the Name
The ID of
field in existing Site Reference records. You can select
the site that
a value in the list.
is
Site ID
Character associated
The value that you select in the list is used to identify
with the
which risk matrix to display when you create Risk
Hazards
Assessment records in Hazards Analysis. If this field is
Analysis.
empty, the default risk matrix will be used.
Summary
Text
A summary
of the
analysis that
labeled Summary and contains a
button, which
was
you can click to access the Text Editor.
conducted.
A
description
of the unit
Unit
Character that is
Description
specified in
the Unit ID
field.
Unit ID
The ID for
the unit that
is
associated
with the
Character processes labeled Unit ID, in which you can enter your own
for which value.
you are
conducting
a Hazards
Analysis.

Hazards Analysis Cause records store details on the cause of a particular event or
condition within a process. The following table provides an alphabetical list and
description of the fields that exist for the Hazards Analysis Cause family and appear on
the Hazards Analysis Cause datasheet, unless otherwise specified. The information in this
table reflects the baseline state and behavior of these fields. This list is not
comprehensive.
Field
Cause
Comment
Data
Type
Text
Cause
Text
Description
Cause
Frequency
(per year)
Description
Comments about the

cause.
A detailed description
of the cause.
A numeric value that

represents the number
Number
of times per year the
cause may occur.
A brief description of
the cause.
Cause ID
Character
Cause
Number
Character A set of three numeric

values, separated by
decimal points, which
represents the location
Behavior and Usage

On the datasheet, this field appears as a
text box labeled Cause Comment and
contains a
button, which you can
click to access the Text Editor.
text box labeled Cause Description and
contains a
text box labeled Cause Frequency (per
year), in which you can enter your own
value.
text box labeled Cause ID. This value
will appear in the Cause ID cell in
either the HAZOP Nodes or What If
Analysis Systems grid, depending on
the type of analysis with which you are
currently working. This field is
required.
On the datasheet, this field is disabled
and populated automatically with a set
of three numbers, separated by decimal
points (e.g. 2.1.1). Specifically:
in which the Hazards

Analysis Cause record
appears in either the
HAZOP Nodes or What
If Analysis Systems
grid, depending on the
type of analysis with
which you are currently
working.
The first two numbers

correspond to the value that
exists in the What If Number
field in the What If record or
Deviation/Guideword Number
field in the HAZOP Deviation
record to which the Hazards
Analysis Cause record is linked.
The third number is the value

that exists in the Sequence
Number field in the Hazards
Analysis Cause record.
list labeled Cause Type and contains the
description of the System Codes that
exist in the
MI_HAZOP_CAUSE_TYPE System
Code Table. You can choose from the
following baseline values:
Equipment Failure
Human Error
Process Upset
Flooding
Lightning
Power Loss
Terrorism
Cause Type Character The type of cause.
The Record ID of the

Equipment record that
is linked to the Hazards
and contains a
button, which you
Equipment
can click to display the Find Items
Character
ID
through the Safety
window, where you can search for an
Analysis Has
existing Equipment record to link to the
Equipment Relationship
Hazards Analysis Cause record.
family.
Equipment Number The Entity Key for the This field is used by the Meridium
Entity Key
Equipment record
APM system and does not appear on the
whose Record ID
appears in the
Equipment ID field.
The Record ID for the
Functional Location
record that is linked to
Functional
the Hazards Analysis
Character
Location ID
Cause record through
the Has Functional
Location Relationship
family.
Hazards Analysis Cause datasheet by

default.
and contains a
button, which you
existing Functional Location record to
link to the Hazards Analysis Cause
record.
Functional
Location
Entity Key
The Entity Key for the

Functional Location
record whose Record
Number
ID appears in the
Functional Location ID
field.
Sequence
Number

represents the position
appears in the grid,
This field does not appear on the
Number relative to the other
records that are linked
to the same HAZOP
Deviation or What If
record.
This value is used by the Meridium

APM system, and the field does not
appear on the Hazards Analysis Cause

Hazards Analysis Consequence records store details on the specific risk that is associated
with a given Scenario. The following table provides an alphabetical list and description of
the fields that exist for the Hazards Analysis Consequence family and appear on the
Hazards Analysis Consequence datasheet by default, unless otherwise specified. The
information in the table reflects the baseline state and behavior of these fields. This list is
not comprehensive.
Field
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage

On the datasheet, this field appears as a text
box labeled Consequence Comment and
Consequence
Text
Comment
A comment about
the risk.
Consequence
Text
Description

A detailed
box labeled Consequence Description and
description of the
contains a
button, which you can click
risk.
to access the Text Editor.
contains a

box, labeled Consequence ID, in which you
can enter your own value. This value will
A brief
Consequence
appear in the Consequence ID cell in either
Character description of the
ID
the HAZOP Nodes or What If Analysis
risk.
Systems grid, depending on the type of
analysis with which you are currently
working. This field is required.
A set of four
numeric values, On the datasheet, this field is disabled and
populated automatically with numbers,
separated by a
separated by decimal points (e.g., 2.1.1.1).
decimal point,
which represents Specifically:
the location in
The first three numbers correspond to
which the Hazards
the value that exists in the Cause
Analysis
Number field in the Hazards Analysis
Consequence
Consequence
Cause record to which the Hazards
Character record appears in
Number
Analysis Consequence record is
either the HAZOP
linked.
Nodes or What If
Analysis Systems
grid, depending
The fourth number is the value that
on the type of
exists in the Sequence Number field
analysis with
in the Hazards Analysis Consequence
which you are
record.
currently
working.
On the datasheet, this field appears as a list
Consequence Character The type of risk. labeled Consequence Type and contains the
description of the System Codes that exist in

the MI_HAZOP_CONSEQUENCE_TYPE
System Code Table. You can choose from
the following baseline values:
Type
Sequence
Number
Fire
Explosion
Single Fatality
Multiple Fatality
Equipment Damage
Production Loss
A numeric value
that represents the
position in which
the Hazards
Analysis
Consequence
This field is used to populate the
record appears in
Consequence Number field and does not
Number the grid, relative
appear on the Hazards Analysis
to the other
Consequence datasheet by default.
Hazards Analysis
Consequence
records that are
linked to the same
Hazards Analysis
Cause record.
Hazards Analysis Safeguard Records

Hazards Analysis Safeguard records store details on safeguards that may be in place to
mitigate the risk associated with a Scenario. The following table provides an alphabetical
list and description of the fields that exist for the Hazards Analysis Safeguard family and
appear on the Hazards Analysis Safeguard datasheet, unless otherwise specified. The
information in this table reflects the baseline state and behavior of these fields. This list is
not comprehensive.
Field
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet
Tab
The Record ID
for the
Equipment
record that is On the datasheet, this field is disabled
linked to the
and contains a
button, which you
Hazards
Hazards
Equipment
Analysis
Character
Analysis
ID
Safeguard
Safeguard
record through existing Equipment record to link to
the Hazards Analysis Safeguard
the Safety
Analysis Has record.
Equipment
Relationship
family.
The Entity
Key of the
Equipment
Equipment
record whose This value is used internally by the
Number
Entity Key
Record ID
Meridium APM system.
appears in the
Equipment ID
field.
This field
does not
appear on
the
Hazards
Analysis
Safeguard
datasheet
by default.
The Record ID
for the
Functional
Location
record that is
linked to the
and contains a
button, which you
Hazards
Hazards
Functional
Character Analysis
Analysis
Location ID
Safeguard
Safeguard
existing Functional Location record
record through
to link to the Hazards Analysis
the Has
Safeguard record.
Functional
Location
Relationship
family.
Functional
Number The Entity
This value is used internally by the
This field
Location
Entity Key
Key for the

Functional
Location
record whose
Record ID
Meridium APM system.
appears in the
Functional
Location ID
field.
does not
appear on
the
Hazards
Analysis
Safeguard
datasheet
by default.
IF ID
The Record ID
of the
Instrumented
and contains a
button, which you
Function
Hazards
record that is can click to display the Find Items
Character
Analysis
linked to the window, where you can search for an
Safeguard
existing Instrumented Function
Hazards
record to link to the Hazards Analysis
Analysis
Safeguard record.
Safeguard
record.
IF Entity
Key
The Entity
Key for the
Instrumented
Function
This value is used internally by the
Number
record whose Meridium APM system.
Record ID
appears in the
IF ID field.
IPL
Reference
Key
IPL Type
The Entity
Key for the
Independent
Protection
Layer record This value is used internally by the
Number
that is linked Meridium APM system.
to the Hazards
Analysis
Safeguard
record.
On the datasheet, this field appears as
a list labeled IPL Type and contains
Character If the
safeguard is an the following options:
IPL, this value
This field
does not
appear on
the
Hazards
Analysis
Safeguard
datasheet
by default.
This field
does not
appear on
the
Hazards
Analysis
Safeguard
datasheet
by default.
IPL
Checklist
Consequence Reducing IPL

Frequency Reducing IPL
This field is disabled by default,

meaning that the safeguard is not an
IPL. If all of the following fields
contain the value True, the safeguard
is an IPL, and the IPL Type field is
enabled:
indicates the
type of risk the
IPL reduces.
Is the IPL auditable with

applicable industry standard?
Is the IPL capable with
respect to its availability
Is the IPL independent of the

initiating cause of the
hazardous secnario?
Is the IPL specific in that has

the ability to detect the
hazardous scenario?
When the IPL Type field is enabled, it

contains the value Consequence
Reducing IPL by default.
Alternatively, you can select
Frequency Reducing IPL from the
list.
Is the IPL
auditable
with
applicable
industry
standard?
Logical
Indicates if the
safeguard is
tested and
This value is False by default. This
verified using
field must be True in order for the
an industry
IPL Type field to be enabled.
standard (e.g.,
a risk based
inspection).
IPL
Checklist
Logical
Is the IPL
capable with
respect to its
availability?
Indicates if the This value is False by default. This

safeguard is field must be True in order for the
available at
least 90
percent of the
time and if the
IPL
Checklist
risk associated
with the
safeguard
reflects that
availability.
Is the IPL
independent
Logical
of the
initiating
cause of the
hazardous
scenario?
Indicates if the
safeguard is
independent of
the risk so that
a failure
associated
with the risk IPL Type field to be enabled.
will not also
cause the
safeguard to
fail.
IPL
Checklist
Is the IPL
specific in
Logical
that it has
the ability to
detect the
hazardous
scenario?
Indicates if the
safeguard can
detect a
potential
failure and is
able to take
action to
prevent the
failure from
occurring.
IPL
Checklist
Safeguard
Comment
Text
Safeguard
Text
Description
Safeguard
ID
A comment
about the
safeguard.

a text box labeled Safeguard
Hazards
Analysis
Comment and contains a
button,
Safeguard
which you can click to access the
Text Editor.
a text box labeled Safeguard
A detailed
Hazards
description of
Analysis
Description and contains a
the safeguard.
Safeguard
the Text Editor.
Character A brief
On the datasheet, this field appears as Hazards
description for a text box labeled Safeguard ID, in Analysis
which you can enter your own value.

This value will appear in the
Safeguard ID cell in either the
HAZOP Nodes or What If Analysis
the safeguard.
Safeguard
Systems grid, depending on the type
of analysis with which you are
required.
Safeguard
Number
Safeguard
Type
A set of five
numeric
values,
separated by a
decimal point,
which
represents the
location in
which the
Hazards
Analysis
Safeguard
Character record appears
in either the
HAZOP
Nodes or
What If
Analysis
Systems grid,
depending on
the type of
analysis with
which you are
currently
working
Character The type of
safeguard.

and populated automatically with a
set of five numbers (e.g., 1.1.1.1.1).
Specifically:
The first four numbers

correspond to the value that
exists in the Consequence
Hazards
Analysis
Analysis Consequence record
Safeguard
to which the Hazards Analysis
Safeguard record is linked.
The fifth number is the value

that exists in the Sequence
Analysis Safeguard record.

a list labeled Safeguard Type and
Hazards
contains the description of the System Analysis
Codes that exist in the
Safeguard
MI_HAZOP_SAFEGUARD_TYPE
System Code Table. You can choose
from the following baseline values:
Process Design
Process Control System
Sequence
Number
PSC
Operator
Deluge System
Fire Alarm
Process Alarm
A numeric that
represents the
position in
which the
Hazards
Analysis
Safeguard
record appears
in the grid,
relative to the This field is used to populate the
Number
other Hazards Safeguard Number field.
Analysis
Safeguard
records that
are linked to
the same
Hazards
Analysis
Consequence
record.
This field
does not
appear on
the
Hazards
Analysis
Safeguard
datasheet
by default.
Hazards Analysis System/Node

Hazards Analysis System/Node records store details on the group of equipment or
locations that perform the process that you are studying. The following table provides an
alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist for the Hazards Analysis
System/Node family and appear on the Hazards Analysis System/Node datasheet, unless
otherwise specified. The information in the table reflects the baseline state and behavior
of these fields.
Field
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
A numeric value
identifying the Hazards
Hazards
Analysis record to which
Number
Analysis Key
System/Node record is
linked.
The name of the user
who was logged in when This field does not appear on the
Modified By Character the Hazards Analysis
System/Node record was datasheet by default.
last modified.
The date on which the
Hazards Analysis
System/Node record was
last modified.
Modified
Date
Date
Reference
Drawing
On the datasheet, this field appears

A value identifying the as a list labeled Reference Drawing
reference document. This and contains the Record IDs of the
value exists in the Name Reference Document records that are
Character
field in the corresponding linked to the Hazards Analysis
Reference Document
record to which the Hazards
record.
Analysis System/Node record is
linked.
System/Node
Text
Comments
System/Node
Text
Description
Comments about the

system/node.

as a text box labeled System/Node
Comments and contains a
the Text Editor.
A detailed description of
the system/node.
the Text Editor.
System/Node Character The type of equipment
Equipment
Type
that corresponds to the

system that the Hazards
Analysis System/Node
record represents.
as a list labeled System/Node

Equipment Type and contains the
System Codes in the
MI_Equipment_Type System Code
Table.

ID, in which you can enter your own
value. This value will appear in the
System/Node
A brief description of the System Node ID cell in either the
Character
ID
system/node.
HAZOP Nodes or What If Analysis
Systems grid, depending on the type
of analysis with which you are
required.
On the datasheet, this field is
disabled and populated
A numeric value
representing the location automatically. When you move a
Analysis System/Node record in the grid, this value will
record appears in either change according to the record's
System/Node
current location in the grid.
Number the HAZOP Nodes or
Number
grid, depending on the
For example, the Hazards Analysis
type of analysis with
System/Node record that appears
which you are currently second in the grid will contain the
working.
value 2.
as a list labeled System/Node
Process Type and contains the
following hard-coded values:
System/Node
The type of process that
Character
Process Type
you are studying.
Gas/Oil Feed Steam Boiler

(Steam Generation)
Ethylene Oxide storage (EO
Storage)
FCCU (Fluid Catalytic
Cracking Unit)
HAZOP Deviation
HAZOP Deviation records store details on the condition within a process that deviates
from the normal behavior during that process, resulting in a risk. The following table
provides an alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist for the HAZOP
Deviation family and appear on the HAZOP Deviation datasheet, unless otherwise
specified. The information in this table reflects the baseline state and behavior of these
fields.
Field
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage

a list labeled Deviation/Guideword
and contains the description of the
System Codes that exist in the
MI_HAZOP_DEVIATIONS_TYPE
System Code Table. You can choose
from the following baseline values:
A brief
Deviation/Guideword Character description of
the deviation.
More Pressure
Less Pressure
More Temperature
Less Temperature
More Flow
Less Flow
No Flow
This value appears in the Deviation ID

cell in the HAZOP Nodes grid. This
field is required.
and populated automatically with a set
Deviation/Guideword Character A set of
Number
numeric values, of numeric values, separated by a
separated by a decimal point. Specifically:
decimal point,
which
The first number is the value
represents the
that exists in the System/Node
location in
which the
Analysis System/Node record
HAZOP
Deviation
record appears
in the HAZOP
Nodes grid.
to which the HAZOP

Deviation record is linked.
The second number is the
value that exists in the
Sequence Number field in the
HAZOP Deviation record.
For example, 1.2.
Sequence Number
A numeric
value that
represents the
sequence in
which the
HAZOP
Deviation
record appears
in the grid,
Number
relative to the
other HAZOP
Deviation
records that are
linked to the
same Hazards
Analysis
System/Node
record.

datasheet by default. This value in this
field is used to populate the
Deviation/Guideword Number field.
Independent Protection Layer

Independent Protection Layer records store additional information about safeguards that
are considered to be independent layers of protection. The following table provides an
alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist for the Independent Protection
Layer family. The information in the table reflects the baseline state and behavior of these
fields. This list is not comprehensive.
Field
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet
The ID of the Equipment

Equipment
Character Safeguard record to
ID
which the Independent
Protection Layer record
is linked.
This field is populated

automatically with the
value stored in the
Equipment ID field in the
Hazards Analysis
None
Safeguard record to
which the Independent
Protection Layer record
is linked.

The ID for the Functional automatically with the
Location record that is
value stored in the
linked to the Hazards
Functional Location field
Functional
Character Analysis Safeguard
in Hazards Analysis
None
Location ID
record to which the
Safeguard record to
Independent Protection which the Independent
Layer record is linked. Protection Layer record
is linked.
On the datasheet, this
IPL Credits Number The number of steps in field is disabled and
Independent
the risk matrix that a risk populated automatically Protection
with the number of steps Layer
is reduced by the IPL.
between the unmitigated
and mitigated risk rank
values in the Risk Matrix.
If the risk is not reduced
by the same number of
steps across each risk
category (e.g., Safety),
the value in the IPL
Credits field will be the
greatest number of steps
reduced in a single
category.
For example, if each risk
category is reduced by
one step, the value in the
IPL Credits field would
be 1. If two categories
are reduced by one step
and one category is
reduced by two steps, the
value in the IPL Credits
field would be 2. If the

safeguard is not an IPL,
the value in the IPL
Credits field would be 0.
This value appears in the
IPL Credits column on
the Hazop Nodes and
grids.
IPL ID
IPL Type

value is disabled and
populated automatically
with <Safeguard ID> The ID of the
IPL, where <Safeguard Independent
Character independent protection ID> is the value stored in Protection
layer.
the Safeguard ID field in Layer
Safeguard record that is
linked to the Independent
Protection Layer record.
field is populated
value stored in the IPL
Type field in the Hazards
The type of risk the IPL Analysis Safeguard
record to which the
reduces. Consequence
Reducing IPLs reduce the Independent Protection
Layer record is linked.
severity of the failure
(e.g., fatality to
Independent
Character injury. Frequency
This value appears in the Protection
Reducing IPLs reduce
IPL Type column on the Layer
how often the failures
Hazop Nodes and What
occur (e.g., every 100
If Analysis Systems grids
years to every 1,000
and determines which
years).
cells in the Risk Matrix
will be enabled when you
define the mitigated risk
rank for a hazardous
Scenario.
What If
What If records store details about the hypothetical condition that may occur during
process and lead to a risk. The following table provides an alphabetical list and
description of the fields that exist for the What If family and appear on the What If
datasheet, unless otherwise specified. The information in this table reflects the baseline
state and behavior of these fields.
Field
Data
Type
Sequence
Number

represents the position in
which the What If record This field does not appear on the
appears in the grid, relative datasheet by default. This field is
Number
to the other What If records used to populate the What If
that are linked to the same Number field.
Hazards Analysis
System/Node record.
What If
Text
Description
Description
A detailed description of
the specific event or
condition within a Scenario
that deviates from the
normal behavior of that
process and directly leads
to a risk.
Behavior and Usage

as a text box labeled What If
button, which you can click to
access the Text Editor.

A brief description of the as a text box labeled What If ID, in
event or condition within which you can enter your own value.
What If ID Character the Scenario that deviates This value appears will appear in the
from the normal behavior What If ID cell in the What If
of the process.
Analysis Systems grid. This field is
required.
What If
Character A set of numeric values,
automatically with a set of numeric
Number
separated by a decimal
point, which represents the values. Specifically:
location in which the What
If record appears in the
The first number is the value
that exists in the
System/Node Number field

in the Hazards Analysis
System/Node record to
which the What If record is
linked.
grid.
The second number is the

Sequence Number field in
the What If record.
System Code Tables Used by Hazards

Analysis
The following System Code Tables are used by Hazards Analysis.
Table ID
Table
Function
Description
MI_HAZARDS_ANALYSIS_LIFE_CYCLE_PHASE Hazards
Analysis
Life Cycle
Process
Phase
Used to populate the

Process Life Cycle
Phase field in
Hazards Analysis
records.
MI_HAZOP_CAUSE_TYPE

HAZOP
Cause Type field in
Cause Type Hazards Analysis
Cause records.
MI_HAZOP_CONSEQUENCE_TYPE

Consequence Type
HAZOP
field in Hazards
Consequence
Analysis
Type
Consequence
records.
MI_HAZOP_DEVIATIONS
HAZOP
Deviations
Deviation/Guideword
field in HAZOP
Deviation records.
IPL Types

IPL Type field in
Hazards Analysis
Safeguard records.
HAZOP
Safeguard
Type

Safeguard Type field
in Hazards Analysis
Safeguard records.
MI_HAZOP_IPL_TYPE
MI_HAZOP_SAFEGUARD_TYPE
Parameters for the Hazards Analysis

Base URL
There is one root URL associated with Hazards Analysis: meridium://HAZOP. A link
constructed from the path alone will open the Hazards Analysis Start Page. In addition,
you can use any of the parameters described in the following table. Click here for
examples of using these parameters to customize the Hazards Analysis URL.
Parameter
Name
Page
Description
Accepted
Value(s)
Search
Notes
The Page parameter is required.
Specifies the
page in Hazards Definition
Use the following links to view notes
Analysis that you
about each value that is accepted by the
want to view.
Revisionhistory Page parameter.
Team
Search
Documents
Definition
Nodes
Revisionhistory
ManageAssets Team
Documents
Nodes
ManageAsssets
The EntyKey parameter is required for
the following Page parameter values:
EntyKey
Specifies the
Entity Key of the
record that you Numeric Entity
want to manage Key
on the specified
page.
Specifies the
AnalysisType desired analysis
type.
WhatIf
Revisionhistory
Team
Documents
Nodes
This parameter is required only if you

want to manage a Hazards Analysis
record in the context of a What If
Analysis. If you exclude this parameter,
features specific to HAZOP Analyses
will appear by default.
Examples of Hazards Analysis URLs
Meridium://HAZOP
Displays the Hazards Analysis Start Page.
Meridium://HAZOP?Page=Search
Displays the HAZOP Analysis Search page.
Meridium://HAZOP?Page=Search&AnalysisType=WhatIf
Displays the What If Analysis Search page.
Meridium://HAZOP?Page=Definition
Displays a new Hazards Analysis record on the HAZOP Analysis Definition page.
Meridium://HAZOP?Page=Definition&AnalysisType=WhatIf
Displays a new Hazards Analysis record on the What If Analysis Definition page.
Meridium://HAZOP?Page=Definition&EntyKey=64251874508
Displays on the HAZOP Analysis Definition page the Hazards Analysis record with the
Entity Key 64251874508.
Meridium://HAZOP?
Page=Definition&AnalysisType=WhatIf&EntyKey=64251876497
Displays on the What If Analysis Definition page the Hazards Analysis record with the
Entity Key 64251876497.
Meridium://HAZOP?Page=RevisionHistory&EntyKey=64251874508
Displays within the context of a HAZOP Analysis the Analysis Revision History page for
the Hazards Analysis record with the Entity Key 64251874508.
Meridium://HAZOP?
Page=RevisionHistory&AnalysisType=WhatIf&EntyKey=64251876497
Displays within the context of a What If Analysis the Analysis Revision History page for
the Hazards Analysis record with the Entity Key 64251876497.
Meridium://HAZOP?Page=Team&EntyKey=64251874508
Displays the HAZOP Analysis Team Members page that is associated with the Hazards
Analysis record with the Entity Key 64251874508.
Meridium://HAZOP?
Page=Team&AnalysisType=WhatIf&EntyKey=64251876497
Displays the What If Analysis Team Members page that is associated with the Hazards
Analysis record with the Entity Key 64251876497.
Meridium://HAZOP?Page=Documents&EntyKey=64251874508
Displays within the context of a HAZOP Analysis the Reference Documents page for the
Hazards Analysis record with the Entity Key 64251874508.
Meridium://HAZOP?
Page=Documents&AnalysisType=WhatIf&EntyKey=64251876497
Displays within the context of a What If Analysis the Reference Documents page for the
Hazards Analysis record with the Entity Key 64251876497.
Meridium://HAZOP?Page=Nodes&EntyKey=64251874508
Displays the HAZOP Nodes page for the Hazards Analysis record with the Entity Key
64251874508.
Meridium://HAZOP?
Page=Nodes&AnalysisType=WhatIf&EntyKey=64251876497
Displays the What If Analysis Systems page for the Hazards Analysis record with the
Entity Key 64251876497.
Meridium://HAZOP?Page=ManageAssets&EntyKey=64251874508
Displays the HAZOP Analysis Assets page for the Hazards Analysis record with the
Entity Key 64251874508.
Meridium://HAZOP?
Page=ManageAssets&AnalysisType=WhatIf&EntyKey=64251874508
Displays the What If Analysis Assets page for the Hazards Analysis record with the
Entity Key 64251874508.
Cause
An event that results from a deviation and leads to a negative safety or environmental
outcome.
Consequence
A negative safety or environmental outcome that results from a cause.
Deviation
A condition that deviates from the normal behavior of the process and directly leads to a
risk.
Hazards and Operability (HAZOP)

Analysis
An analysis that allows you to document the known hazardous Scenarios associated with
a process, assess the likelihood of the risks in those Scenarios occurring, and determine
the best way to mitigate the risk in those Scenarios.
Independent Layer of Protection

A system, action, or item that mitigates the risk associated with a hazardous scenario.
IPLs must be independent, auditable, capable, and specific.
Process
A series of actions that are performed by multiple pieces of equipment or locations in a

single system.
Safeguard
A safety instrumented system or other safety device that prevents a risk from occurring or
lowers the probability or severity identified by a risk assessment.
Scenario
For a given process, the combination of a risk and its risk assessment, where a risk is any
event that can occur that threatens safety, either human or the environment, and the
negative outcome associated with that event (e.g., human injury). You can define multiple
Scenarios for a single process.
What If Analysis
An analysis that allows you to hypothesize about the possible hazardous Scenarios,
determine the risk associated with those Scenarios, and determine the best way to
mitigate those risks.
Overview of Safety Instrumented

System (SIS) Management
The Safety Instrumented System (SIS) Management module lets you manage the safety
instrumented systems that are in place in a facility to monitor and maintain controlled
processes and ensure efficiency and safety during those processes.
For example, heating the temperature of a room is a process that has a specific, desired
outcome to reach and maintain the desired temperature (e.g., 20 degrees Celsius). If the
temperature increases too rapidly, the temperature change could lead to a chain of events
that may result in equipment failure or a catastrophic event. To prevent a rapid
temperature increase during the heating process, a sensor within the thermometer
continually measures the temperature and relays that information to a computer. The
computer decides whether the temperature is increasing at intervals that are in line with
the specified safe limits for this process. If the data transmitted to the computer indicates
that the temperature is increasing too rapidly, it will send a command to the heating
element to decrease the temperature.
Together, the sensor within the thermometer, the computer, and the heating element act as
a safety instrumented system that monitors the process of heating a room to ensure that it
is performed safely and efficiently.
Using SIS Management, you can conduct a Safety Integrity Level (SIL) Analysis, which
you can use to assess the integrity of the safety instrumented systems that are already in
place in your facility and to uncover areas that may require further safeguarding. An SIL
Analysis (pronounced S-I-L) lets you assign a numeric rating to the safety instrumented
systems that you are analyzing. This numeric rating represents the level of protection that
those systems currently provide, called a safety integrity level (SIL).
For instance, consider the previous example. If the heating element safely and
successfully reduces the speed at which the temperature is increasing, this safety
instrumented system would be considered to have a higher integrity level than one in
which the temperature in the room continues to increase despite the efforts of the system.
To conduct an SIL Analysis in SIS Management, a team of individuals will:
Define the function of the safety instrumented systems that will be assessed.
Identify the undesirable consequences that the safety instrumented systems are
designed to prevent.
Test the components of the safety instrumented systems to determine if its

performance is meeting the specified requirements and identify failures that may
be occurring within those systems.
Based on the test results, determine where further improvements are needed
within the safety instrumented systems.
In addition, the SIS Management module provides the tools necessary for compliance
with the standard IEC 61511. D
The Meridium APM SIS Management module and supporting documentation
are dedicated in memory of Steve Soos IV, Product Manager, whose knowledge,
dedication, and vision are realized therein.
What is a Safety Instrumented System?

A safety instrumented system (SIS) is a system comprised of instruments that are designed
specifically to:
Monitor the conditions of a process. Processes can be executed by an equipment

and locations.
Recognize conditions that are indicative of failure. Identifying the initiating
events that could lead to a safety instrumented system failure can provide the
system with enough time to prevent the failure. The consequences of a safety
system failure can lead to a chain of event that causes further equipment failure
and even a catastrophic event.
Prevent consequences by reacting to conditions that are indicative of a failure.
Safety instrumented systems make adjustments to the process to bring the
conditions to a mitigated state or even shut down that process to prevent failures.
A safety instrumented system consists of the following items:
One or more protective instrument loops (PIL), which is a series of interconnected

instruments. Each protective instrument loop (PIL) is designed to maintain a
defined condition within the process, meaning that it serves a specific purpose or
instrumented function (IF). In other words, for every instrumented function that
exists for a safety instrumented system, there is one protective instrument loop in
place to fulfill that function.
One logic solver, which is a computer that interprets readings from the
components of the protective instrument loop (PIL) and measures that information
against predefined criteria to determine whether that system needs to make
adjustments to mitigate the risk associated with the instrumented functions of

each protective instrument loop.
For example, assume that Unit A provides steam to Unit B, and SIS-A is in place on Unit
A and Unit B to maintain the pressure levels during that process to prevent loss of
pressure or excess pressure beyond the defined safe and productive levels. Maintaining
safe and productive pressure levels are the instrumented functions of the protective
instrument loops within SIS-A. The logic solver within SIS-A receives data from the
components of the protective instrument loops and decides whether the pressure levels
are normal, exceed, or are lower than the safe and productive pressure levels. If the
current pressure levels indicate the possibility of a process failure, which includes
scenarios like loss of productivity or explosion, the logic solver tells the components of
the SIS to do something to mitigate the current condition. For example, if the current
condition of the process indicates that the pressure is too low, the logic solver will tell an
element of the protective instrument loop to increase the pressure so the levels are within
the safe and productive levels defined for that process.
The following image illustrates a safety instrumented system and the relationships
described above.
In summary:
A given process can have more than one safety instrumented system in place to
monitor and safeguard its conditions.
Each safety instrumented system contains one protective instrument loop per
instrumented function to fulfill that function within the safety instrumented
system.
Each safety instrumented system contains one logic solver to interpret the
readings from the components of the protective instrument loop and instruct those
elements to take action if necessary.
The components of a protective instrument loop provide data in the form of

readings to the logic solver.
SIS Management System Requirements
The SIS Management license is required to take advantage of SIS Management

functionality. In addition, your system must contain the basic Meridium APM system
architecture.
In order to use the integration between SIS Management and Hazards Analysis, the
Hazards Analysis license is also required.
Hint: Details on the system requirements for the basic Meridium APM system
architecture and activating licenses can be found in the Installation, Upgrade, and System
Administration section of the Meridium APM Help system.
perform some configuration tasks specifically for the SIS Management feature.
Overview of the SIS Management Data

Model
The SIS Management data model uses families to represent the various components of an
SIL Analysis. Meridium APM leverages its fundamental entity and relationship family
infrastructure to store data related to an SIL Analysis. When attempting to understand and
make use of the Meridium APM SIS Management functionality, it is helpful to visualize
the SIS Management data model.
Because you should already be familiar with the concept of records and viewing records
in the Meridium APM Record Manager, as you attempt to get your bearings in SIS
Management, it may be useful to remember that SIS Management is simply a customized
view of individual records that work together to make up an SIL Analysis.
Note: While SIS Management provides a customized view of individual records that
exist in the Meridium APM database, you should not use the Record Manager to manage
records for use with SIS Management. You should use the features provided in the
Meridium APM SIS Management module only.
All SIL Analyses begin with an SIL Analysis record. Each SIL Analysis record will be
linked to:

One or more Human Resource records.
One or more Reference Document records.
One or more Instrumented Function records.
One or more Safety Instrumented System records.
Each Safety Instrumented System record will be linked to:
One or more Instrumented Function records.

One or more SIS Proof Test records.
One or more SIS Proof Test Template records.
Each Instrumented Function records will be linked to:

One or more Protective Instrument Loop records.
One or more Inspection Tasks records.
One Risk Assessment records.
One or more LOPA records.
One or more SIS Proof Test records.
One or more SIS Proof Test Template records.
Illustration of the SIS Management

Data Model
The SIS Management data model uses families to represent various components of an
SIL Analysis. Meridium APM leverages its fundamental entity and relationship family
infrastructure to store data related to an SIL Analysis.
The following diagram illustrates the families that participate in the SIL Analysis. The
shaded boxes represent entity families, and the arrows represent relationship families.
arrow head: the box to the left of each arrow head is the predecessor in that relationship
definition, and the box to the right of each arrow head is the successor in that relationship
definition.
The SIS Management data model is best understood if you view it in portions, and to
simplify this image, some relationship and entity families are not included. To view a
specific portion of the data model, click the hyperlinked name of the desired family.
This section of the documentation includes images of the portions of the SIS
Management data model that are not illustrated in the preceding image. Each image
illustrates the portion of the SIS Management data model where the following families
participate as the predecessor family in the relationships illustrated in the image:
Safety Instrumented System

Instrumented Function
Protective Instrument Loop
The Reference Document family is a shared family. Meaning that the Reference
Document family is used by multiple families within the SIS Management data model. To
simplify all the data model images, the Reference Document family is included only in
the preceding image, where the SIL Analysis family is the predecessor. In addition to this
relationship, the Reference Document family participates as the successor in the Has
Reference Documents relationship definition with the following families:
SIL Analysis
SIS Proof Test
SIS Proof Test Template
To simplify the data model images, the following families are not included:
Risk Assessment Recommendation. Within the SIS Management data model, the
Risk Assessment Recommendation family participates as the successor in the Has
Recommendations relationship definition with the following families:
SIS Proof Test
IPL Type. This family is not related to any family in the baseline Meridium APM
database. The IPL Type family is a subfamily of the Meridium Reference Tables
family. IPL Type records store details about independent layer of protection types
and are used to populate Independent Layer of Protection records.
Hazards Analysis. The Hazards Analysis family participates as the successor in

the Has HAZOP Reference relationship definition with the SIL Analysis and
Instrumented Function families.
Safety Instrumented System Family Is

the Predecessor Family
The following image shows the relationships where the Safety Instrumented System
family participates as the predecessor.
To view a specific portion of the data model, click the hyperlinked name of the desired
family.
Note: To simplify this image, the relationships between the Instrumented Function family
and the SIS Proof Test and SIS Proof Test Template families is not included. This
relationship is illustrated in the image that illustrates the relationships in which the
Instrumented Function family participates as the predecessor.
The Safety Instrumented System family contains records that store information about the
safety instrumented system that you are analyzing. Safety Instrumented System records
are linked to Instrumented Function records, which store information about the specific
functions associated with the safety instrumented system. Safety Instrumented System
records are also linked to records in the following families:
SIS Proof Test: Store details about a proof test that is performed on a safety
instrumented system and serves as a record of the proof test event. SIS Proof Test
record can be linked to Functional Test Detail records, which store the detailed
steps that need to be performed during the proof test.
SIS Proof Test Template: Store details about the steps that should be taken when
testing a safety instrumented system. When you create SIS Proof Test record, you
can select an SIS Proof Test Template record, and the details from the SIS Proof
Test Template record will be populated automatically in the SIS Proof Test record.
SIS Proof Test Template records can be linked to SIS Proof Test Template Detail
records, which store details on the steps that need to be performed during the
proof test.
The SIS Proof Test, SIS Proof Test Template, and Reference Document families
participate as the successor in other relationships within the SIS Management data model.
This means that these families appears in another portion of the data model.
Instrumented Function Family Is the

Predecessor Family
The following image shows the relationships in which the Instrumented Function family
participates as the predecessor.
To view a specific portion of the data model image, click the hyperlinked name of the
desired family.
Instrumented Function records store details about a specific function of an SIS.
Instrumented Function records are linked directly to records in the following families:
Inspection Task: Stores details on when a task should be performed on the item
represented by the record to which the Inspection Task record is linked, including
the due date for the task.
SIS Proof Test: Stores details about a test that is taken on a safety instrumented
system and serves as a record of the event.
SIS Proof Test Template: Stores details about the steps that should be taken when
testing a safety instrumented system. When you create an SIS Proof Test record,
you can select an SIS Proof Test Template record, and the details from the SIS
Proof Test Template record will be populated automatically in the SIS Proof Test
record.
Risk Assessment: Stores the unmitigated risk associated with the item represented
by the record to which the Risk Assessment record is linked.
Protective Instrument Loop: Stores the details of the protective instrument loop
and its components, including the calculated results of the proof test associated
with the Safety Instrumented System record to which the Protective Instrument
Loop record is linked.
LOPA: Stores the details of the Layer of Protection Analysis that you want to
conduct, including a description of the initiating event that is indicative of a
process failure. LOPA records store details of the risk assessment that is
determined after conducting the Layer of Protection Analysis.
SIF Common Cause Failure: Stores the details of a failure that affects the
operation of multiple instrumented functions.
Instrumented Function: Indicates that if both the instrumented functions

represented by the two records are in their safe state at the same time, a
hazardous event may occur.
Note: The SIS Proof Test and SIS Proof Test Template families also appear in other
portions of the data model.
Protective Instrument Loop Family Is

the Predecessor
The following image shows the relationships in which the Protective Instrument Loop
family participates as the predecessor.
Protective Instrument Loop records store summary information about all the records that
are linked to that record. The Protective Instrument Loop record combined with all the
records that are linked to that record make up the protective instrument loop.
Components of an SIL Analysis

A Safety Integrity Level (SIL) Analysis lets you assess the safety instrumented systems in
your facility to ensure that they are adequately safeguarding your equipment, locations,
and processes. An SIL Analysis consists of an SIL Analysis record and ALL the records
that are linked to that record both directly and indirectly. SIL Analysis records store
overview information about the analysis that you are conducting, including the start and
end dates for the analysis. The following image illustrates the records that are linked
directly to an SIL Analysis record.
You can see that records in the following families are linked directly to an SIL Analysis
record:
Human Resource: Stores information about the people who will participate in the
analysis as SIL Analysis team members.
Reference Document: Stores the URL path to a document that is external to
Meridium APM and contains reference information related to the SIL Analysis.
Instrumented Function: Stores information about the instrumented functions of

the safety instrumented system that you are analyzing.
Safety Instrumented System: Stores information about the safety instrumented

systems that you are analyzing.
Additionally, Safety Instrumented System records and Instrumented Function records are
linked to one another through the Has IF relationship. In addition to the relationships
described above, an SIL Analysis includes records in the families that are linked to Safety
Instrumented System records and Instrumented Function records. For more information
on these records, see the data model image.
When you conduct an SIL Analysis, you will:
Assess the level of safety integrity per instrumented function, using the Meridium
APM Risk Matrix interface or via a Layer of Protection Analysis (LOPA). The
overall safety integrity level (SIL) for a safety instrumented system will be
calculated automatically by the Meridium APM system based upon the defined
risks.
Validate the safety integrity level (SIL) of a safety instrumented system using the
SIL Validation tool, which lets you create a diagram of the protective instrument
loops (PIL) that make up the safety instrumented system and calculate the ability
of a protective instrument loop to meet the required safety integrity level (SIL) for
that process. The Meridium APM system uses equations defined by IEC 61508 to
calculate the probability of failure on Demand average (PFD Avg) or probability
of failure per hour (PFH).
Determine whether further safeguarding is necessary, based upon the safety
integrity level maintained by those safety instrumented systems.
The SIS Management Workflow

The first step in creating an SIL Analysis is to create an SIL Analysis record. After you
have created the SIL Analysis record on the SIL Analysis Definition page, you can
complete the SIL Analysis by:
Defining the SIL Analysis team.

Managing Reference Document records.
Defining the Safety Instrumented System records.
Defining Instrumented Function records.
Assess risk, which includes:
Using a Risk Matrix.
Conducting a Layer of Protection Analysis (LOPA)
Manage Risk Assessment Recommendation records.
Validate the safety integrity level (SIL) of the safety instrumented systems by
managing protective instrument loops (PILs).
Manage SIS Trip Report records.
Manage Inspection Task records.
Manage Validation Failure Rate Reference data.
SIL Analysis State Configuration

This topic describes attributes of the State Configuration that is defined for the SIL
Analysis family in the baseline Meridium APM database.
States and Operations

The following State Configuration is defined for the SIL Analysis family. In this image, a
box represents a state, and an arrow represents an operation. The state to which an arrow
points represents a successor state.
Initial State
The Planning state is the initial state of all new SIL Analysis records.
By default, states and operations will appear on the datasheet when you are viewing an
SIL Analysis record in SIS Management, the Record Manager, or the Bulk Data Form.

Configuration.
States
State
Is Reserved?
Planning
Yes
Active
Yes
Review
Yes
Pending Approval
Yes
Complete
Yes
Operations
Operation
Is Reserved?
Begin
Yes
Propose
Yes
Submit
Yes
Accept
Yes
Reject
Yes
Modify/Reassess
Yes
By default, the MI SIS Administrator and MI SIS Engineer State Configuration Roles are
assigned to all states in the SIL Analysis State Configuration. You can assign State
Configuration Roles to any state. In addition, for each state, the Require a specific user
to be assigned to a state check box is selected.
Protective Instrument Loop State

Configuration
This topic describes attributes of the State Configuration that is defined for the Protective
Instrument Loop family in the baseline Meridium APM database.

The following State Configuration is defined for the Protective Instrument Loop family.
In this image, a box represents a state, and an arrow represents an operation. The state to
which an arrow points represents a successor state.
Initial State
The Design state is the initial state of all new Protective Instrument Loop records.
By default, states and operations will appear on the datasheet when you are viewing a
Protective Instrument Loop record in SIS Management, the Record Manager, or the Bulk
Data Form.

Configuration.
States
State
Is Reserved?
Design
Yes
Pending Approval
Yes
Approval
Yes
In Service
Yes
Out of Service
Yes
Operations
Operation
Is Reserved?
Submit
Yes
Accepted
Yes
Rejected
Yes
Commissioned
Yes
Modify
Yes
Resinstate
Yes

State
Design
Pending Approval
Approval
In Service
Out of Service
Security Groups
MI SIS Administrator
MI SIS Engineer
MI SIS Engineer
MI SIS Engineer
MI SIS Engineer
MI SIS Engineer
In addition, for each state, the Require a specific user to be assigned to a state check
box is selected.
SIS Trip Report State Configuration

This topic describes attributes of the State Configuration that is defined for the SIS Trip
Report family in the baseline Meridium APM database.

The following State Configuration is defined for the SI Trip Report family. In this image,
a box represents a state, and an arrow represents an operation. The state to which an
arrow points represents a successor state.
Initial State
The Active state is the initial state of all new SIS Trip Report records.
By default, states and operations will appear on the datasheet when you are viewing an
SIS Trip Report record in SIS Management, the Record Manager, or the Bulk Data Form.

Configuration.
States
State
Is Reserved?
Active
No
Review
No
Pending Approval
No
Complete
No
Operations
Operation
Is Reserved?
Propose
No
Submit
No
Accept
No
Reject
No
Modify/Reassess
No

State
Active
Review
Pending Approval
Secur0ity Groups
MI SIS Engineer
MI SIS Engineer
MI SIS Engineer
Complete
MI SIS Engineer
In addition, for each state, the Require a specific user to be assigned to a state check
box is selected.
Integration with Hazards Analysis

In the Hazards Analysis module, you can conduct a Hazards Analysis to identify hazards
associated with a process, and then assess the risks associated with those hazards. In the
SIS Management module, you can use a SIL Analysis to assess the risks associated with
the instrumented functions in a safety instrumented system to determine whether it
requires additional safeguarding.
After you assess risk in the Hazards Analysis module, you can apply that risk assessment
to an Instrumented Function record in an SIL Analysis in the SIS Management module.
You can use the Risk Assessment record that you created in a Hazards Analysis to
calculate the safety integrity level (SIL) for your Instrumented Function record without
having to recreate the assessment in the SIS Management module.
To take advantage of this functionality:
The Hazards Analysis license must be active.

You must assign at least view permissions to the Hazards Analysis family to any
SIS Management Security Groups that should have access to integration with
Hazards Analysis.
You must have full permissions to the Has HAZOP Reference relationship family.
Note: All SIS Management and Hazards Analysis Security Groups have full permissions
to the Has HAZOP Reference family by default, with the exception of the MI HA
Member Security Group.
Accessing the SIS Management Start

Page
To access the SIS Management Start Page:
and then click SIS Management.
The SIS Management Start Page appears.
Aspects of the SIS Management Start

Page
The SIS Management Start Page serves as a starting point for tasks that you can perform
using the SIS Management module.
The SIS Management Start Page contains the following links:
SIL Analysis: Displays the SIL Analysis Search page, where you can create and
manage SIL Analysis records.
SIL Validation: Displays the Protective Loop Search page, where you can search
for and open existing Protective Instrument Loop records.
SIL Validation Template: Displays the Protective Loop Template Search page,
where you can create and manage Protective Instrument Loop Template records.
SIS Trip Report: Displays the SIS Trip Report Search page, where you can create
and manage SIS Trip Report records.
Manage Tasks: Displays the Task List page, where you can view and manage the
Task records that are associated with all SIL Analyses.

where you can view and manage a list of Risk Assessment Recommendation
records that are associated with all SIL Analyses.
Manage Validation Failure Rate Reference Data: Displays the Sensor Reference
Data Search page, where you can create and manage records in the Protective
Instrument Loop Element families.
Perform Administrative Tasks: Displays the SIS Management Administration

page, where you can perform administrative tasks for the SIS Management
module. This link appears only if you are logged in as a Super User or a member
of the MI SIS Administrator Security Group.

Deploying and configuring SIS Management for the first time includes completing
multiple steps, which are outlined in the table in this topic. The steps in this section of the
documentation provide all the information that you need to deploy and configure the SIS
Management module on top of the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
are marked as Required if you must perform the steps to take advantage of SIS
Management functionality.
Step Task
1
Review the SIS Management data

model to determine which
relationship definitions you will
need to modify to include your
Optional
custom equipment or location
definitions as needed via

if you store equipment or
location information in
families other than the
baseline Equipment and
Functional Location
families.
Assign the desired Security Users

to one or more SIS Management
Security Groups in Configuration
Manager.
Manage the queries whose results

will appear throughout the SIS
Management module.
Required
Users will not be able to

access SIS Management
unless they have
permissions to the SIS
Management families.
None
Required
Specify the whether Equipment or

Functional Location records will be
used when integrating with the
Required
Asset Strategy Management (ASM)
module.
None
Import data from an Exida project

file.
Optional

want to create SIL Analyses
using an Exida project file.
Export data from an Exida project

Optional
file.
None
Manage the types of independent

layers of protection that will be
Required
used to populate Independent Layer
of Protection records.
None
Activate the Hazards Analysis

license in Configuration Manager.

want to take advantage of
the integration between the
Hazards Analysis module
and SIS Management.
Optional
Assign at least view permissions to

the Hazards Analysis family to SIS
Management Security Groups in
Optional
This is necessary only for

Security Groups that will be
used in the integration
between the Hazards
Analysis module and SIS
Management.
Upgrade Workflow
are upgrading:
V3.5.1
V3.5.0 SP1 LP
V3.5.0
V3.4.5
Upgrading SIS Management from

V3.5.1 to V3.6.0.0.0
The following table lists the steps that are required to upgrade and configure SIS
Management for V3.6.0.0.0. These steps assume that you have completed the steps for
Step Task

license via Configuration
Optional
Manager.

integration between the Hazards
Management.
Assign at least view

Analysis family to SIS
Optional
Management Security Groups

used in the integration between
the Hazards Analysis module
and SIS Management.

V3.5.0 SP1 LP to V3.6.0.0.0
Step Task

Optional
Manager.

Management.

Optional

and SIS Management.

V3.5.0 to V3.6.0.0.0
Step Task

Optional
Manager.

Management.

Optional

and SIS Management.

V3.4.5 to V3.6.0.0.0
Step Task

Optional
Manager.

Management.

Optional

and SIS Management.
SIS Management Security Groups

The following Security Groups are provided for use with SIS Management:
MI SIS Engineer
MI SIS User
These groups are intended to support the three main types of users who will use Hazards
Analysis. Each of these groups has privileges assigned to it by default. The baseline
family-level privileges are summarized in the following table.
MI SIS
Administrator
MI SIS Engineer MI SIS User
Asset Criticality Analysis
View
None
None
Asset Criticality Analysis

System
View
None
None
Family
Entity Families
Consequence
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
Consequence Modifier
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Equipment
View
View
View
Functional Location
View
View
View
Functional Systems
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Functional Test Detail
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Human Resource
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Independent Layer of
Protection
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
IPL Type
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
LOPA
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Notification
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
None
Probability
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
Protection Level
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Insert
View

Element
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Proven In Use Justification
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
RBI Components
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
None
Reference Document
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Risk
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Risk Assessment
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Risk Assessment
Recommendation
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Risk Category
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Risk Matrix
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
Risk Threshold
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Safety Integrity Level
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
SIF Common Cause Failure
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
SIL Analysis
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
SIL Threshold
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
SIS Proof Test
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
SIS Proof Test Template Detail View, Update,

Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
SIS Trip Report
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
SIS Trip Report Detail
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Site Reference
View
View
View
Task
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Time Based Inspection Interval View
View
View
Time Based Inspection Setting View
View
View
Analysis Has Human Resource View, Update,

Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Asset Criticality Analysis Has

View
System
None
None
Equipment Has Equipment
View
View
View
Functional Location Has

Equipment
View
View
View

Functional Location
View
View
View
Has Consequence Modifier
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Equipment
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Relationship Families
Has Functional Location
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Functional Test
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Functional Test Detail
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Hazard Event
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has HAZOP Reference
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has IF
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Independent Protection

Layer
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Instrumented Function

Revision
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Instrument Loop
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Instrument Loop Revision View, Update,

Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
Has LOPA
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has LOPA Revision
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has PIL Device
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has PIL Device Revision
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
View
Has PIL Group
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has PIL Group Revision
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has PIL Subsystem
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has PIL Subsystem Revision
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has PIL System
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has PIL System Revision
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Proven In Use

Justification
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has RBI Components
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
None
Has Recommendations
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Reference Documents
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Insert
Has Reference Values
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
Has Risk
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Risk Category
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Risk Matrix
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has SIF Common Cause

Failures
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
View
View
Has SIS Analysis Revision
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has SIS Revision
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has SIS Trip Report Detail
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
Has Site Reference
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Task History
View, Insert
View, Insert
View, Insert
Has Tasks
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
Has Task Revision
View
View
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Has Template Detail
View
Has Templates
Has Time Based Inspection
Interval
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
View
View
View
Mitigates Risk
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Was Promoted to ASM

Element
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Accessing the SIS Management

Administration Page
Accessing the SIS Management Administration page:
On the SIS Management Start Page, click the Perform Administrative Tasks link.
The SIS Management Administration page appears.
Aspects of the SIS Management

Administration Page
The SIS Management Administration page contains the following sections:
Manage Queries: Contains the following options:
SIL Analysis Search Query: Specifies the query whose results will appear
on the SIL Analysis Search page. The query
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS
Management\Queries\SIL_Analysis_Search is specified for this setting by
default.
Protective Loop Search Query: Specifies the query whose results will
appear on the Protective Loop Search page. The query
Management\Queries\Safety_Loop_Search is specified for this setting by
default.
Protective Loop Template Search Query: Specifies the query whose results
will appear on the Protective Loop Template Search page. The query
Management\Queries\Safety_Loop_Template_Search is specified for this
setting by default.
Sensor Reference Data Query: Specifies the query whose results will
appear on the Sensor Reference Data Search page. The query
Management\Queries\Sensor_Reference_Data_Search is specified for this
setting by default.
Logic Solver Reference Data Query: Specifies the query whose results
will appear on the Logic Solver Reference Data Search page. The
query \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS
Management\Queries\Logic_Solver_Reference_Data_Search is specified
for this setting by default.
o
Final Element Reference Data Query: Specifies the query whose results
will appear on the Final Element Reference Data Search page. The
query \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS
Management\Queries\Final_Element_Reference_Data_Search is specified
for this setting by default.
IF Protective Loop Search Query: Specifies the query whose results will
appear on the Protective Loop Search page when you search for protective
instrument loops associated with an instrumented function. The query
Management\Queries\IF_Safety_Loop_Search is specified for this setting
by default.
SIS Trip Report Search Query: Specifies the query whose results will
appear on the SIS Trip Report Search page. The query
Management\Queries\SIS_Trip_Report_Search is specified for this setting
by default.
For the preceding options, you can specify a different query by clicking the
button
that appears to the right of each option. This button displays the Select Query dialog box,
where you can navigate to the desired query.
Import/Export Exida Projects: Displays the text Import from Exida Project and
Export to Exida Project with corresponding buttons, which appear to the right of
these labels:
Import: Displays the Import Builder, which takes you step-by-step through
importing data from an Exida project file stored on your computer. When
you import data from an Exida project file, that data is transferred into
Meridium APM records and creates an SIL Analysis or updates an existing
SIL Analysis.
Export: Displays the Export Builder, takes you step-by-step through
exporting SIL Analysis data from the Meridium APM database to an Exida
project file stored on your computer.
ASM Integration: Using SIS Management, you can promote to ASM Instrumented
Function records, which contain an Equipment ID and Functional Location ID
field. The ASM Integration section contains the text Asset Source Field and the
following options that you can use to specify which field in the Instrumented
Function record that the Meridium APM system will use to promote to ASM the
corresponding record that represents the equipment or location:
Equipment: Specifies that the Meridium APM system will promote to

ASM the Equipment record that is specified in the Equipment ID field in
the Instrumented Function record. This is the default option.
Functional Location: Specifies that the Meridium APM system will
promote to ASM the Functional Location record that is specified in the
Functional Location ID field in the Instrumented Function record.
At the bottom of the SIS Management Administration page, the following options appear:
Save: Saves the current administrative settings.

Exit: Displays the SIS Management Start Page. If you have unsaved changes on
the page, a dialog box appears first, asking if you want to save your changes.
The SIS Management Administration page contains one task menu Common Tasks.
Common Tasks Menu
The Common Tasks menu on the SIS Management Administration page contains the
following options:

Open Analysis: This link is disabled.
Delete: This link is disabled.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the SIS Management
Administration page.
Specifying a Different Query on SIS

Management Administration Page
In the Manage Queries section on the SIS Management Administration page, you can
specify the Catalog path to a query other than the one that is currently displayed.
To specify a different query on the SIS Management Administration Page:
1. Access the SIS Management Administration page.
2. To the right of the text box that corresponds to the query that you want to change,
click the
button.
The Select Query dialog box appears.

3. Navigate to the desired query.
The Select Query dialog box closes, and the name of the query that you selected appears
in the corresponding text box.
Specifying the Asset Source for ASM

Integration
When you specify the Asset Source for ASM integration, you are specifying which
relationship family you are using to relate Instrumented Function records representing the
desired equipment or location. You will need to specify whether this relationship is Safety
Analysis Has Equipment or Has Functional Location. If you are using both relationships,
you will need to specify which one you want to use to promote an asset to ASM when the
Instrumented Function to which it is linked is promoted.
To specify the asset source for ASM integration:
1. Access the SIS Management Administration page.
2. In the ASM Integration section, to the right of the Asset Source field label, select
the option that corresponds to the relationship family that you are using.
About Importing Data from an Exida

Project File
exida is a software solution, where you can store information about the systems in a
facility. When you import data from an exida project file on your computer, you are
importing information to automatically create Instrumented Function records in the
Meridium APM database. Those records are also automatically linked to the SIL Analysis
to which they belong. The information in this section of the documentation provides
details on using the Import Builder on the SIS Management Administration page to
import data from a file on your computer into the Meridium APM database.
When you use the Import Builder to import data from an exida file, you will have two
options that you can use to do so:
Create a new SIL Analysis for the data.

Append the data to an existing SIL Analysis.
Depending on the method that you select, the screens that you see in the builder will
change. This section of the documentation provides instructions for using the Import
Builder to:
Accessing the Options screen, where you can select the import method that you
want to use.
Creating a new SIL Analysis for the imported data.
Appending the imported data to an existing SIL Analysis.
Accessing the Options Screen

To import data from an exida project file:
1. On the SIS Management Administration page, in the Import/Export Exida
Projects section, click the Import button.
The Import Builder appears, displaying the Welcome screen.
2. Click the Next button.
The Specify exSILentia file screen appears.
3. In the Path text box, type the path to the file that you want to import.
-orClick the
button to search for the file on your computer. These instructions assume
that you want to search for the file.
The Import dialog box appears.
4. Navigate to the desired exSILentia file, and click the Open button.
The path to the selected file appears in the Path text box.
The Select Instrumented Functions screen appears, displaying a list of Instrumented
Function records that exist in the specified file.
6. Select the rows containing the Instrumented Function records that you want to
import.
The Options screen appears, displaying the options that you can use to import the
Instrumented Functions.
At this point, you can follow the procedure for importing data via the desired method:
8.
Creating a new analysis for the imported data.
Appending the imported data to an existing analysis.
Creating a New Analysis for the

Imported Data
The following instructions provide details on using the Options screen and successive
screens in the Import Builder to import data from an exida project file and create a new
analysis for the data. For details on importing data from an exida project file and
appending it to an existing analysis, see the instructions for appending imported data to
an existing SIL Analysis.
To create a new analysis for the imported data:
1. Access the Options screen in the Import Builder.

2. Select the Create a New Analysis option.
The Next button is disabled.
3. Click the Finish button.
A new blank SIL Analysis record appears in a new window.
4. Provide values in the fields as desired. Note that the Analysis ID field is required.
5. Click OK.
The SIL Analysis record closes, and the Progress dialog box appears, displaying the
progress of the import process.
When the import is finished, the Confirmation dialog box appears, indicating that the
selected Instrumented Function records were imported successfully.
Note: If the import process is unsuccessful, a message will appear, indicating that the
process was not successful. If you see this message, you will need to correct any issues,
and then try again.
6. On the Confirmation dialog box, click OK.
The Import Builder closes, revealing the SIS Management Administration page. At this
point, you can view the new SIL Analysis.
Hint: On the Confirmation dialog box, you can click the Detail>> button to view a list of
IDs for the Instrumented Function records that were imported.
Appending the Imported Data to an

Existing Analysis
The following instructions provide details on using the Options screen and successive
screens in the Import Builder to import data from an exida project file and append that
data to an existing SIL Analysis. For details on importing data from an exida project
file and creating a new analysis for that data, see the instructions for creating a new SIL
Analysis for imported data.
To append the imported data to an existing analysis:
1. Access the Options screen in the Import Builder.
2. Select the Append to Existing Analysis option.
The Finish button is disabled.
The Select an Analysis screen appears and displays a query prompt for the record state
and SIL Analysis Owner of the desired SIL Analysis record.
4. Select the desired search criteria, and then click OK.

-orAccept the default All options, and click OK.
The Select an Analysis screen is revealed, and the query results are displayed in the grid.
5. In the grid, select the row containing the SIL Analysis record to which you want
to link the Instrumented Function records.
The Progress dialog box appears, displaying the progress of the import process.
and then try again.
About Exporting Data to an Exida

Project File
When you export data from the Meridium APM database to a file on your computer, you
are exporting information from Instrumented Function records an exida project file.
The information in this section of the documentation provides details on using the Export
Builder on the SIS Management Administration page to export data from the Meridium
APM database to an exida project file on your computer.
Exporting Data to an Exida Project File

The following instructions provide details on using the Export Builder to export
Instrumented Function records and Protective Instrument Loop records to an exida
project file on your computer.
To export data to an exida project file:
1. On the SIS Management Administration page, in the Import/Export Exida
Projects section, click the Export button.
The Export Builder appears, displaying the Welcome screen.
The Select SIL Analysis screen appears and displays a query prompt for the record state of
the SIL Analysis whose Instrumented Function records you want to export.
3. In the State list, select the state that corresponds to the record state of the SIL
Analysis whose Instrumented Function records you want to export.
-orAccept the default option, All.
4. Click OK.
The Select SIL Analysis screen appears, and the query results are displayed in the grid.
5. In the grid, select the row that contains the SIL Analysis record whose
Instrumented Function records you want to export.
The Select Instrumented Function screen appears, displaying a list of Instrumented
Function records that are linked to the SIL Analysis record that you selected on the Select
SIL Analysis screen.
7. In the grid, select the rows that contains the Instrumented Function records that
you want to export.
The Select Protective Instrument Loop screen appears, displaying the list of Protective
Instrument Loop records that are linked to the Instrumented Function records that you
selected on the Select Instrumented Function screen.
9. In the list, select the rows containing the Protective Instrument Loop records that
you want to export.
The Specify Output File screen appears.
11. In the Path text box, type the file path to the desired location.
-orClick the
button to search for the desired file. These instructions assume that you
want to search for the file.
The Export dialog box appears, where you can navigate to the desired exSILential file.
12. Navigate to the desired file on your computer, and then click the Save button.
The specified file path appears in the Path text box.
The Progress dialog box appears, displaying the progress of the export process.
When the export is finished, the Confirmation dialog box appears, indicating that the
selected records were exported successfully.
Note: If the export process is unsuccessful, a message will appear, indicating that the
and then try again.
The Progress dialog box appears, displaying the progress of the import process.
and then try again.
Export Builder closes, revealing the SIS Management Administration page.
IDs for the Instrumented Function records that were exported.
About Managing the Types of

Independent Layers of Protection
To manage the types of independent layers of protection that will be used to populate
Independent Layer of Protection records, you will need to:
1. Modify the values in the Default Value fields in the baseline IPL Type records.
2. Define additional IPL types.
About Independent Layer of Protection

Types
An independent layer of protection is a system, action, or item that mitigates the risk
associated with an instrumented function. In SIS Management, details on independent
layers of protection are stored in Independent Layer of Protection records. When you
conduct a Layer of Protection Analysis (LOPA) to assess risk for a given instrumented
function, you will create one Independent Layer of Protection record per independent
layer of protection. When you do so, you will need to select in the Type list the type of
independent layer of protection that the record represents. Throughout the documentation,
we refer to the values in the Type list as IPL types.
The IPL type that you select in the Independent Layer of Protection record is used to
determine the probability of failure data (PFD) value that is associated with that type of
independent layer of protection. The PFD value is stored in the PFD field in the
Independent Layer of Protection record and used to calculate the overall risk associated
with a given instrumented function. On the Independent Layer of Protection datasheet,
the Type list contains the IPL types that are defined in the Meridium APM database in the
form of records belonging to the IPL Type family.
The IPL Type family is a subfamily of the Meridium Reference Tables family and is not
related to any families in the SIS Management data model. You can think of IPL Type
records as templates that you can use to define Independent Layer of Protection records.
The following list contains the Record IDs for the baseline IPL Type records that are
provided in the Meridium APM database:
Control loop
Human performance (trained, no stress)
Human performance (under stress)
Operator response to alarms
Vessel pressure rating above max challenge
The baseline IPL Type records contain a value in the Default Value field. As part of the
administrative steps for the SIS Management module, you will need to review and
modify these default values. The value in the Default Value field is used to populate the
PFD field in the Independent Layer of Protection record.
For each baseline IPL Type record, a corresponding System Code is provided in the
LOPA IPL TYPE (MI_IPL_TYPE) System Code Table. You can use these System Codes
to translate the baseline IPL types, if desired.
In the Type list, the following information is displayed for each IPL type:
<IPL Type ID> (<Default Value or Lower Boundary> - <Upper Boundary>)
...where:
<IPL Type ID> is the value stored in the IPL Type ID field in the corresponding
IPL Type record.
<Default Value> is a numeric value that is stored in the Default Value field in the
corresponding IPL Type record.
<Lower Boundary> is a numeric value that is stored in the Lower Boundary field
in the corresponding IPL Type record.
<Upper Boundary> is a numeric value that is stored in the Upper Boundary field
in the corresponding IPL Type record.
Together, the values stored in the Lower Boundary and Upper Boundary fields define a
PFD range for that IPL type.
For example, the baseline IPL type Control Loop is displayed in the Type list as Control
Loop (.01), where .01 is the value stored in the Default Value field in the corresponding
IPL Type record. Likewise, the baseline IPL type Human performance (trained, no stress)
is displayed in the Type list as Human performance (trained, no stress) (0.0001 - 0.01),
where 0.0001 - 0.01 is the PFD range defined for that IPL type. Specifically:
0.0001 is the value stored in the Lower Boundary field in the corresponding IPL
Type record.
-and
0.01 is the value stored in the Upper Boundary field in the corresponding IPL
Type record.
In addition to the baseline IPL types, you can define additional IPL types that will appear
in the Type list on the Independent Layer of Protection datasheet.
Modifying the Default Values in the

Baseline IPL Type Records
The following instructions provide details on modifying the baseline IPL Type records to
change the values stored in the Default Value fields in these records.
To modify the value in the Default Value field in a baseline IPL Type record:
1. Open the baseline IPL Type record whose default value you want to modify.
2. In the Default Value field, modify the value as desired.
3. On the datasheet toolbar, click the Save button.
Defining Additional IPL Types

If desired, you can define additional IPL types that will appear in the Type list on the
Independent Layer of Protection datasheet. To define additional IPL types, you will need
to create a new record in the IPL Type family, using the Record Manager. To do so, you
must be logged in as a member of the MI SIS Administrator or MI SIS Engineer Security
Group. After you save the record, the IPL type will be available in the Type list on the
Independent Layer of Protection datasheet.
Remember that the values you enter in the IPL Type record define a type of independent
layer of protection and will be used to determine the PFD value in Independent Layer of
Protection records. The following table provides a description of the fields that appear on
the IPL Type datasheet and how they effect Independent Layer of Protection records
when you select an IPL Type record in the Type list. You should use this table to
determine how to define additional IPL types, based upon how the values will be used by
Independent Layer of Protection records.
IPL Type
Field
Default
IPL Type Field Description
Effect on Independent Layer of Protection

Records
A numeric value
representing the PFD value The PFD field will be populated automatically
that is associated with the

IPL type.
Value
with this value.

This field is required.
Description
A description of the IPL

type.
The Description field is populated

automatically with this value.
This value will be displayed in the Type list,
along with the:
Value in the Default Value field.

-or-
IPL Type
ID
Is Fixed
Value
An ID for the IPL type. This

value is used to identify the
IPL Type record.
A check box that indicates

whether the IPL type is
associated with a fixed PFD
value or a PFD range.
The value that is displayed here depends upon

whether the Is Fixed Value check box is
selected in the IPL Type record.
If the Is Fixed Value check box is selected in
the IPL Type record:
If the Is Fixed Value

check box is selected,
the Lower Boundary
and Upper Boundary
cells are disabled,
and the Default Value
cell is required.
If the Is Fixed Value
check box is cleare,
the Default Value cell
is disabled, and the
Lower Boundary and
Upper Boundary
cells are required.
Range defined by the values in the

Lower Boundary and Upper Boundary
fields.
The PFD field will be required, and the

value that you enter in the PFD cell
must fall within the PFD range defined
in the IPL Type record.
If the value that you enter in the PFD
cell does not fall within the PFD range,
a message will appear, indicating that
you must enter a value that falls within
the specified range.
In the Type list, the IPL Type ID will

be appended with the values stored in
the Lower Boundary and Upper
Boundary fields in the IPL Type
record, which define the PFD range.
If the Is Fixed Value check box is cleared in

the IPL Type record:
The PFD field will be populated

automatically with the value stored in
the Default Value field in the IPL Type

record.
In the Type list, the IPL Type ID will
be appended with the value stored in
the Default Value field in the IPL Type
record.
the IPL Type record, this value will be
A numeric value
displayed in the Type list, along with the
representing the lowest value
following values stored in the IPL Type
in the PFD range associated
record:
with an IPL type.
IPL Type ID
Together, this value and the
Upper Boundary
value in the Upper Boundary
Lower
Boundary field define the PFD range
In addition, when you enter a value in the
for the IPL type.
PFD cell, the Meridium APM system will use
this value to determine if the PFD value falls
If the Is Fixed Value check
within the defined PFD range. If the value
box is selected, this field is
does not fall within the PFD range, a message
disabled.
will appear, indicating that you must enter a
value that falls within the specified range.
the IPL Type record, this value will be
displayed in the Type list, along with the
A numeric value
following values stored in the IPL Type
representing the highest
record:
value in the PFD range
associated with an IPL type.
IPL Type ID
Together, this value and the
Lower Boundary
value in the Lower Boundary
Upper
Boundary field define the PFD range In addition, when you enter a value in the
for the IPL type.
PFD cell, the Meridium APM system will use
this value to determine if the PFD value falls
If the Is Fixed Value check within the defined PFD range. If the value
box is selected, this field is does not fall within the specified range, a
disabled.
message will appear, indicating that you must
enter a value that falls within the specified
range.
An Example: Defining Additional IPL

Types
Assume that you want the IPL type Vessel pressure rating below minimum challenge to
be available for selection in an Independent Layer of Protection record. In addition,
assume that a fixed PFD value of .2 is associated with this IPL type. To define this
additional IPL type, you would create the following IPL Type record.
If you create a new Independent Layer of Protection record and select the Vessel pressure
rating below minimum challenge IPL type in the Type list, that record would look similar
to the following image.
Alternatively, if you assume that the Vessel pressure rating below minimum challenge IPL
type is associated with a PFD range of 0.00001 -0.000001, you would create the
following IPL Type record.
If you create a new Independent Layer of Protection record and select the Vessel pressure
rating below minimum challenge IPL type in the Type list, that record would look similar
to the following image.
At this point, you could modify the PFD value that is populated automatically with the
value in the Default Value field in the specified IPL Type record. The PFD value that you
type must fall within the PFD range (shown in parenthesis in the Type list).
About Navigating SIS Management
SIS Management is context-driven. This means that each page that you view within the
module will contain data related only to the SIL Analysis with which you are currently
working. After you have opened an SIL Analysis record on the SIL Analysis Definition
page, the ID of the SIL Analysis will appear on the site map and the title bar on each page
within the module, indicating that SIL Analysis with which you are currently working.
The Navigation menu appears on almost every page in SIS Management and provides
access to the pages that contain the features that allow you to create and perform SIL
Analyses. After you open an SIL Analysis record on the SIL Analysis Definition page, you
can use the links on the Navigation menu to facilitate a workflow for creating the
remaining records that make up the SIL Analysis.
For example, assume that the SIL Analysis record B0007-009 Steam Boiler SIS appears
on the SIL Analysis Definition page. The site map and the title bar will contain the text
B0007-009 Steam Boiler SIS as shown in the following image.
To define the SIL Analysis team for the SIL Analysis B0007-009 Steam Boiler SIS, you
could click the Team Members link on the Navigation menu and see that the site map and
title bar on the SIL Analysis Team Members page still contain the Analysis ID B0007-009
Steam Boiler SIS.
The Navigation Menu in SIS

Management
The Navigation menu appears on most pages in SIS Management and provides access to
the SIS Management features. A green arrow to the left of an option indicates the feature
that you are currently viewing. The Navigation menu contains the following links:
Analysis Definition: Displays the SIL Analysis Definition page, where you can
modify an SIL Analysis record or create a new one.
Team Members: Displays the SIL Analysis Team Members page.
Reference Document records for the current SIL Analysis.
Systems: Displays the Safety Instrumented Systems page, where you can mange
the Safety Instrumented System records for the current SIL Analysis.
Functions: Displays the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page, where you can
manage the Instrumented Function records for the current SIL Analysis.
All Recommendations: Displays the Recommendation Management page, where

you can manage the list of Risk Assessment Recommendation records for the
current SIL Analysis.
manage the SIL Analysis Revision records that exist for the analysis. This link is
enabled only if the state of the SIL Analysis record with which you are currently
working has ever been set to Complete.
About SIL Analysis Records
SIL Analysis records store information about an SIL Analysis. Creating an SIL Analysis
record is the first step in creating an SIL Analysis. All other records that you create for
the SIL Analysis will be linked directly or indirectly to the SIL Analysis record.
SIL Analysis records are defined via a custom form datasheet that contains the following
tabs:
SIL Analysis
Safety Requirement Specifications
General SIS Requirements
General SIF Requirements
After you have created the SIL Analysis record, it will appear on the SIL Analysis
Definition page, from which you can use the links on the Navigation menu to:
Define the SIL Analysis team.

Define Reference Document records.
Define the safety instrumented systems that you are analyzing.
Define the instrumented functions that make up the safety instrumented system.
Manage Risk Assessment Recommendation records that are linked to the SIL
Analysis record.
Accessing the SIL Analysis Search Page

The SIL Analysis Search page lets you search for existing SIL Analysis records or create
new ones. To access this page, you must be a Super User or a member of the MI SIS
Administrator, MI SIS Engineer, or MI SIS User Security Group.
To access the SIL Analysis Search page:
On the SIS Management Start Page, click the SIL Analysis link.
The SIL Analysis Search page appears.
Aspects of the SIL Analysis Search Page

The SIL Analysis Search page contains the SIL Analysis Search workspace, which
displays the results of the query specified in the SIL Analysis Search Query text box on
the SIS Management Administration page. This documentation assumes that you are
using the baseline SIL_Analysis_Search query, which contains two prompts that appear
as lists at the top of the SIL Analysis Search Workspace:
State: Contains a list of record states that have been configured for the SIL
Active: Displays the list of existing SIL Analysis records whose State field
contains the value Active.
Complete: Displays the list of existing SIL Analysis records whose State
field contains the value Complete.
Pending Approval: Displays the list of existing SIL Analysis records

whose State field contains the value Pending Approval.
Planning: Displays the list of existing SIL Analysis records whose State
field contains the value Planning.
Review: Displays the list of existing SIL Analysis records whose State
field contains the value Review.
Selecting the All option will cause the query to return all SIL Analysis records in any
state.
SIL Analysis Owner: Contains a list of User IDs of the users whose name is stored
in the Owner field in any SIL Analysis record.
After you select different criteria, you can click the Run Query button to run the
SIL_Analysis_Search query and displays the results in the grid at the bottom of the page.
The query results will include hyperlinked Analysis IDs, which you can use to open the
SIL Analysis record on the SIL Analysis Definition - <Analysis ID> page, where
<Analysis ID> is the ID of the SIL Analysis with which you are currently working.
Below the query results, options appear that you can use to navigate the results.
The SIL Analysis Search page contains the following task menus:
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Common Tasks Menu
The Common Tasks menu on the SIL Analysis Search page contains the following
options:
Find Analysis: Displays the SIL Analysis Search page. This link appears on other
pages in SIS Management and is disabled on the SIL Analysis Search page.
Create Analysis: Displays a new SIL Analysis record on the SIL Analysis
Definition page.
Copy Analysis: Displays on the SIL Analysis Definition page a new SIL Analysis
record, which is populated with information from the SIL Analysis record that is
currently selected.
Open Analysis: Displays the selected SIL Analysis record on the SIL Analysis
Definition page.
Delete: Displays a confirmation message, asking if you want to delete the selected
record, and then deletes the selected SIL Analysis record.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the SIL Analysis Search page.
Searching for SIL Analysis Records

To search for an SIL Analysis record:
1. Access the SIL Analysis Search page.
2. In the SIL Analysis Search workspace, in the State list, select the record state by
which you want to filter the results.
3. In the SIL Analysis Owner list, select the User ID for the name of the analysis
owner by which you want to filter the results.
The records that meet your search criteria appear in the query results section.
Accessing the SIL Analysis Definition

Page
The SIL Analysis Definition page displays:
A new blank SIL Analysis datasheet, which you can use to create a new SIL
Analysis record.
The datasheet for the selected SIL Analysis record, which you can use to modify
the SIL Analysis record.
-or-
To access the SIL Analysis Definition page:

-orClick the hyperlinked Analysis ID of an existing SIL Analysis record.

The SIL Analysis Definition page appears.
Aspects of the SIL Analysis Definition

Page
The SIL Analysis Definition page contains the following items:
SIL Analysis Definition workspace: Contains the SIL Analysis record with which
you are currently working. Via the SIL Analysis Definition workspace, you can
create a new SIL Analysis record or modify an existing SIL Analysis record.
Task Menus: The SIL Analysis Definition page contains the following task menus:
Common Tasks
Navigation
Associated Pages
Common Tasks Menu

The Common Tasks menu on the SIL Analysis Definition page contains the following
options:
Find Analysis: Displays the SIL Analysis Search page.

Create Analysis: Displays a new SIL Analysis record on the SIL Analysis
Definition page.
Copy Analysis: Displays on the SIL Analysis Definition page a new SIL Analysis
record, which is populated with information from the SIL Analysis record that is
currently selected.
Save: Saves the current SIL Analysis record.
Open Analysis: This link is disabled in the SIL Analysis Definition page.
Delete: Displays a confirmation message, and then deletes the current record.
Page.
Reports: Displays a submenu with the captions of the reports that are stored in the
Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS Management\SIL\Reports.
Graphs: Displays a submenu with captions of the graphs that are stored in the
Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS Management\SIL\Graphs.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the SIL Analysis Definition
page.
About Defining SIL Analysis Records

You can define SIL Analysis records via the SIL Analysis datasheet on the Analysis
Definition page. The SIL Analysis datasheet is a custom form that contains the following
tabs that displays fields that are configured for the SIL Analysis family:
SIL Analysis
Safety Requirement Specifications
General SIS Requirements
General SIF Requirements
Creating SIL Analysis Records

To create an SIL Analysis record:
The SIL Analysis Definition page appears, displaying a new SIL Analysis record.
3. On the SIL Analysis tab, in the Analysis ID field, type a unique name for the SIL
Analysis.
5. Click the Safety Requirement Specifications tab, and enter values as desired.
6. Click the General SIS Requirements tab, and enter values as desired.
7. Click the General SIF Requirements tab, and enter values as desired.
8. At the top of the datasheet, click the Save button.
The SIL Analysis record is saved.
Copying SIL Analysis Records

When you copy an existing SIL Analysis record, you are creating a new SIL Analysis
record that will be populated with the values from the record that was copied. The values
in all the fields from a source record will be copied to the new record with the exception
of the following fields:
Analysis ID
Analysis End Date
Analysis Start Date
Equipment ID
Hazards Analysis Date
Hazards Analysis Reference
Hazards Analysis Reference Key
Last Modified By
Last Modified Date
To copy an SIL Analysis record:

1. Access the SIL Analysis Definition page for the SIL Analysis record that you
want to copy.
A new SIL Analysis record appears and is populated automatically with values from the
currently selected record.
3. In the Analysis ID text box, type a unique name for the SIL Analysis. This field is
required.
4. If needed, modify the values in the remaining fields.
The new SIL Analysis record is saved.
Modifying SIL Analysis Records
To modify an SIL Analysis record:

1. Open the desired SIL Analysis record on the SIL Analysis Definition page.
2. On the SIL Analysis datasheet, modify the fields as desired.
3. At the top of the datasheet, click the Save icon.
Opening Existing SIL Analysis Records

To open an existing SIL Analysis record:
1. On the SIL Analysis Search page, search for the desired record.
2. In the results, locate the row that contains the desired SIL Analysis record.
3. In the Analysis ID column, click the hyperlinked Analysis ID.
The record appears on the SIL Analysis Definition page, where you can modify the record
and continue working with the SIL Analysis.
Removing SIL Analysis Records from

the SIL Analysis Search Page
If you are finished with an SIL Analysis record and no longer want to see that record in
the query results on the SIL Analysis Search page, you can remove the SIL Analysis
record from the query results via the Delete option on the Common Tasks menu.
Using the Delete option does not delete the SIL Analysis record from the database.
Instead, when you remove an SIL Analysis record:
The Is Deleted check box in the record is selected, and that record will no longer
appear in the query results.
The links between that record and other records associated with the SIL Analysis
are deleted.
You can remove an SIL Analysis record from the query results on the SIL Analysis
Search page regardless of the state of that record. After an SIL Analysis record has been
removed from the query results, you can still access the record via a search.
To remove an SIL Analysis record from the SIL Analysis Search page:
1. On the SIL Analysis Search page, select the row containing the SIL Analysis
record that you want to delete.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to delete the SIL Analysis
record and all the records linked to that record.
The SIL Analysis record is removed from the SIL Analysis Search page, and the links to
all the records that are linked to that record are deleted.
About Associating SIL Analyses with a

Specific Site
Some companies that use the Meridium APM software have facilities at multiple sites, or
locations, around the world. Each site contains unique equipment and locations.
If desired, you can define these sites and associate equipment and locations with the site
to which they belong. You can also associate risk matrices with specific sites. If a risk
matrix is associated with a site, you can specify which site you want to associate with an
SIL Analysis. You can associate a site with an SIL Analysis by selecting the ID of the
desired Site Reference record in the Site ID field in the SIL Analysis record for that SIL
Analysis.
After an SIL Analysis is associated with a site, when you create a Risk Assessment record
for an Instrumented Function record associated with an SIL Analysis, rather than seeing
the default risk matrix, you will see the risk matrix that is associated with the specified
site.
About the SIL Analysis Team

The SIL Analysis team is a group of individuals who will complete the SIL Analysis. You
can add Meridium APM users and non-Meridium APM users to the SIL Analysis team.
the Security User record was created.
or a Human Resource record. To add a non-Meridium APM user to the SIL
You can do so via the SIL Analysis Team Members page or using Meridium APM
Framework Tools.
Note: A Meridium APM Security User record is required for logging in to the Meridium
APM Framework application and using SIS Management. SIL Analysis team members
who do not have a Security User account may participate in and contribute to the analysis
but will not be able to use the application.
Any member of the SIL Analysis team can be assigned a role within the SIL Analysis
team, which provides a reference of the tasks for which that team members is responsible.
Accessing the SIL Analysis Team

Members Page
On the SIL Analysis Team Members page, you can add team members to the SIL Analysis
and assign team members the role of Process Owner or Facilitator.
To access the SIL Analysis Team Members page:
1. Open the SIL Analysis record for the desired SIL Analysis.
The SIL Analysis Team Members page appears.
Aspects of the SIL Analysis Team

Members Page
The SIL Analysis Team Members page displays the Team Members workspace, which
consists of a grid that displays the names of the SIL Analysis team members. Each row in
the grid represents one Human Resource record. For each Human Resource record that
appears in the grid, the following information is displayed:
User ID: The name of the team member as it appears in the First Name and Last
Name fields in the Human Resource record for that user.
Process Owner: Indicates whether or not the team member has the role of Process
Owner. This check box can be selected for only one team member per SIL
Analysis team.
Facilitator: Indicates whether or not the team member has the role of Facilitator.
This check box can be selected for only one team member per SIL Analysis.
and link to the SIL Analysis record.
for an existing Human Resource record and link it to the SIL Analysis record.
The SIL Analysis Team Members page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the SIL Analysis Team Members page contains the following
links:
Find Analysis: Displays the SIL Analysis Search page, where you can search for
an existing SIL Analysis record.
Create Analysis: Displays a new blank SIL Analysis record on the SIL Analysis
Definition page.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the SIL Analysis Team
Members page.

to the SIL Analysis Team
When you create new users and add them to the SIL Analysis team, you are creating new
Human Resource records in the Meridium APM database and linking them to the SIL
Analysis record. This option should be used for team members who do not have a Human
Resource record. If you want to add a team member who is already has a Human
Resource record, see the topic for adding new team members who already have a Human
Resource record.
To create a new user and add that user to the SIL Analysis team:
1. Access the SIL Analysis Team Members page.
button.
field is required.
4. Click OK.
The Human Resource record is saved, and the new SIL Analysis team member appears in
the Team Members workspace.
Adding New Team Members Who

Already Have A Human Resource
Record
When you add a new SIL Analysis Team Member who already has a Human Resource
record, you are linking an existing Human Resource record to the SIL Analysis record.
This option should be used for team members who already have a Human Resource
record. If you want to add a new SIL Analysis team member who does not already have a
Human Resource record, see the topic for creating a new user to add to the SIL Analysis
team.
To add a new team member who already has a Human Resource record:
button.
3. If desired, type your search criteria in the Look For text box., and then click the
Find Now button.

4. Locate the desired Human Resource record, and click the Open button.
The new SIL Analysis team member appears in the Team Members workspace.
About SIL Analysis Team Member Roles

SIL Analysis team member roles serve as a reference of which SIL Analysis team
member is responsible for a given task related to the SIL Analysis. The following roles
are available for an SIL Analysis:
Process Owner: The team member who is responsible for the SIL Analysis. After
you assign a team member the role of Process Owner, that team member's name
will appear in the Owner field in the SIL Analysis record.
Facilitator: The team member who is in charge of conducting the SIL Analysis
and organizing the SIL Analysis team.
There can be only one Process Owner and one Facilitator per SIL Analysis. A single team
Assigning Roles to SIL Analysis Team

Members
Owner or Facilitator. Assigning a team member to a role serves as a reference for the
team.
To assign a role to an SIL Analysis team member:
The team member is assigned the specified role, and the Owner field on the SIL Analysis
datasheet is populated with that team member's name.

Existing Team Members
To view the Human Resource record for an existing SIL Analysis team member:
The Human Resource record for that team member appears. At this point you can modify
the fields if desired.
4. Click OK.
Removing Team Members from the SIL

Analysis Team
When you remove a team member from an SIL Analysis team, you are deleting the link
between the Human Resource record and the SIL Analysis record.
Additionally, if you remove from the SIL Analysis team a team member who is assigned
the role of Process Owner, the Owner field in the SIL Analysis record will be cleared.
To remove team members from the SIL Analysis team:
2. In the Team Members workspace, select the rows containing the team member
that you want to remove from the SIL Analysis team.
button.
members.
The selected team members are removed from the SIL Analysis team.
Accessing the Reference Documents

Page
The Reference Documents page lets you create and manage Reference Document records
that are linked to the SIL Analysis record for the current SIL Analysis.
To access the Reference Documents page:
2. On the Navigation menu, click the Documents link.
The Reference Documents page appears.
Aspects of the Reference Documents

Page
The Reference Documents page contains the Reference Documents workspace, which
consists of a grid that displays a list of Reference Document records that are linked to the
current SIL Analysis. Each row in the grid represents one Reference Document record.
For each Reference Document record that appears in the grid, the following information
is displayed:
ID: The value that exists in the ID field of the associated Reference Document
record.
Description: The value that exists in the Description field of the associated
Reference Document record.
Add New Document: Displays a new blank Reference Document record in the
<empty> (new Reference Document) dialog box.
Add Existing Documents: Displays the Find Items window, where you can search
for an existing Reference document record to link to the SIL Analysis.
Remove Documents: Displays a confirmation message and then removes the

Reference Document record from the SIL Analysis. This button is enabled only
when a row in the grid is selected.
Open Document: Opens the file associated with the selected Reference Document
record. This button is enabled only when a row in the grid is selected.
The Reference Documents page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Reference Documents page contains the following links:
Create Analysis: Displays a new, blank SIL Analysis record on the SIL Analysis
Definition page.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the SIL Analysis Team
Members page.
Creating New Reference Document

Records and Adding Them to the SIL
Analysis
When you create a new Reference Document record and add it to the SIL Analysis, you
are linking the new Reference Document record to the SIL Analysis record.
To create a new Reference Document record and add it to the SIL Analysis:
2. Below the grid, click the Add New Document button.
A new Reference Document record appears.
3. Follow the standard procedure for creating a Reference Document record.
The new Reference Document record is saved and linked to the SIL Analysis record, and
the record appears in the Reference Documents workspace.
Adding Existing Reference Document

Records to the SIL Analysis
When you add an existing Reference Document record to the SIL Analysis, you are
linking the Reference Document to the SIL Analysis record.
To add existing Reference Document records to the SIL Analysis:
2. Below the grid, click the Add Existing Documents button.
The Find Items window appears, and the Reference Document family appears in the
3. Provide additional search criteria if desired, and then click the Find Now button.
4. In the search results grid, select the row containing the Reference Document
record that you want to link to the SIL Analysis record.
The selected record appears in the Reference Documents workspace.
Viewing Reference Documents

When you view a reference document, you are opening the file specified in the Reference
Document record. To be able to view a reference document on your computer:
The file must be saved to a location that can be accessed from your computer.
The application required to open that document must be installed on your

computer.
To view a reference document:

2. In the Reference Documents workspace, select the row containing the reference
document that you want to view.
3. At the bottom of the Reference Documents workspace, click the Open Document
button.
The reference document file appears in the application required to display it. For
example, if the reference document is a word document, it will appear in the Microsoft
Word application.
Opening Reference Document Records

To open a Reference Document record:
2. In the Reference Documents workspace, locate the row containing the Reference
Document record that you want to open.
3. In the ID column, click the hyperlinked Record ID of the record.
The Reference Document record appears in a new window. At this point, you can modify
the records as desired.
To close the Reference Document record and return to the Reference Documents page,
click OK (to save your changes) or Cancel.
Removing Reference Documents from

the SIL Analysis
When you remove a reference document from the SIL Analysis, you are deleting the link
between the Reference Document record and the SIL Analysis record. You are not
deleting the Reference Document record from the database.
To remove reference documents from the SIL Analysis:
2. In the Reference Documents workspace, select the row containing the reference
document that you want to remove from the SIL Analysis.
3. Click the Remove Documents button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to remove the selected record.
The selected record is removed from the SIL Analysis and is no longer displayed in the
grid.
About Safety Instrumented System

Records
Safety Instrumented System records store details about safety instrumented systems (SIS)
for which you are conducting an SIL Analysis. A safety instrumented system is a system
that is equipped with one or more protective instrument loops (PIL), which consist of a
series of interconnected instruments that are designed specifically to monitor the process
defined by that protective instrument loop's instrumented function and prevent

consequences within that process. You should add to the SIL Analysis one Safety
Instrumented System record per safety instrumented system that you want to asses via the
analysis.
When you add a Safety Instrumented System record to an SIL Analysis, you are linking
the Safety Instrumented System record directly to the SIL Analysis record. Additionally,
Safety Instrumented System records can be linked to records in the following families:
Instrumented Function: Store details on the specific function of a given

protective instrument loop within the safety instrumented system.
SIS Proof Test: Store details on the steps that need to be performed to test each
safety instrumented system and the results of that test.
SIS Proof Test Template: Store details on the steps that need to be performed to
test an instrumented function. You can use an SIS Proof Test Template record to
populate an SIS Proof Test record with data that is common to more than one
proof test.
You can add Safety Instrumented System records to the SIL Analysis using the following
methods:
Create a new one.

Add an existing one.
Copy an existing one and automatically create a new one.
After you have added to the SIL Analysis the desired Safety Instrumented System
records, you can define the specific Instrumented Functions (IFs) of those Safety
Instrumented Systems.
Accessing the Safety Instrumented

Systems Page
On the Safety Instrumented Systems page, you can create new Safety Instrumented
System records and modify existing ones.
To access the Safety Instrumented Systems page:
2. On the Navigation menu, click the Systems link.
The Safety Instrumented Systems page appears.
Aspects of the Safety Instrumented

Systems Page
The Safety Instrumented Systems page contains the Safety Instrumented Systems
workspace, which consists of a grid that displays a list of Safety Instrumented System
records that are linked to the current SIL Analysis. Each row in the grid represents one
Safety Instrumented System record. For each Safety Instrumented System record that
appears in the grid, the following information is displayed:
System ID: The value that exists in the SIS ID field in the Safety Instrumented
System record.
Description: The value that exists in the SIS Description field in the Safety
Instrumented System record.
Logic Solver Type: The value that exists in the Logic Solver Type field in the
Safety Instrumented System record.
Is Default: Specifies whether or not the Safety Instrumented System record is the
default. If you have more than one safety instrumented systems defined for an SIL
Analysis, you will need to specify one as the default.
Create New System: Displays a new blank Safety Instrumented System record in
a new window.
Add Existing System: Displays the Find Items window, where you can search for
an existing Safety Instrumented System record to link to the SIL Analysis record.
Copy System: Displays a new Safety Instrumented System record and populates it
automatically with values from the currently selected record. This button is
enabled only when a record appears in the grid.
Remove System: After displaying a confirmation message, deletes the link

between the selected Safety Instrumented System record and the SIL Analysis
record. This button is enabled only when a record appears in the grid.
The Safety Instrumented Systems page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Assessment Tasks
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Assessment Tasks
The Assessment Tasks menu on the Safety Instrumented Systems page contains the
following links:
Test Templates: Displays a submenu with the following options:
Create: Displays the Proof Test Template Definition page, where you can
create a new Proof Test Template record and link it to the selected Safety
View: Displays the Proof Test Templates page, where you can view a list
of Proof Test Template records that are linked to the selected Safety
Proof Tests: Displays a submenu with the following options:
Create: Displays the Proof Test Definition page, where you can create a
new Proof Test record to link to the selected Safety Instrumented System
record.
View: Displays the Proof Tests page, where you can view a list of Proof
Test records that are linked to the selected Safety Instrumented System
record.
Tasks: Displays a submenu with the following options:
Create: Displays a new Inspection Task record that you can link to the
selected Safety Instrumented System record.
View: Displays the Task List page, where you can view a list of Inspection
Tasks records that are linked to the selected Safety Instrumented System
record.
The Assessment Tasks menu appears on multiple pages throughout SIS Management. The
links that are available to you will vary depending on where you are accessing the menu.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Safety Instrumented Systems page contains the
following links:
Definition page.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the Safety Instrumented
Systems page.
Creating New Safety Instrumented

System Records
When you create a new Safety Instrumented System record, it will be linked
automatically to the SIL Analysis record for the current SIL Analysis.
To create a new Safety Instrumented System record:
1. Access the Safety Instrumented Systems page.
2. At the bottom of the Safety Instrumented Systems workspace, click the Create
New System button.
A new blank Safety Instrumented System record appears in a new window.
3. In the SIS ID text box, type a unique name for the safety instrumented sysetm.
4. Provide values for the remaining fields as desired.
5. Click OK.
The record window closes, and the record is created and linked to the SIL Analysis record
for the current analysis and appears in the Safety Instrumented Systems grid.
Adding Existing Safety Instrumented

System Records to the SIL Analysis
When you add an existing Safety Instrumented System record to an SIL Analysis, you are
linking that record to the SIL Analysis record for the current SIL Analysis.
To add an existing Safety Instrumented System record to the SIL Analysis:
2. At the bottom of the Safety Instrumented Systems workspace, click the Add
Existing Systems button.
The Find Items window appears, where you can search for an existing Safety
3. If desired, in the Look For text box, type the desired search criteria, and click the
Find Now button.
The search results appear and contain only the Safety Instrumented System records that
are not currently linked to an SIL Analysis.
4. In the search results, select the row containing the record that you want to add to
the analysis.
The Find Items window closes, and the selected record is linked to the SIL Analysis
record for the current SIL Analysis and appears in the Safety Instrumented Systems grid.
Copying Existing Safety Instrumented

System Records
When you copy an existing Safety Instrumented System record, you are creating a new
Safety Instrumented System record that will be populated with the values from the record
that was copied. The new record will be linked automatically to the SIL Analysis record
for the current SIL Analysis. That values in all the fields from a source record will be
copied to the new record with the exception of the SIS ID field. Each Safety Instrumented
System record should have a unique ID.
To copy a Safety Instrumented System record:
2. In the Safety Instrumented Systems grid, select the row containing the Safety
Instrumented System record that you want to copy.
3. At the bottom of the Safety Instrumented Systems workspace, click the Copy
System button.
A new Safety Instrumented System record appears in a new window and is populated
automatically with values from the currently selected record with the exception of the SIS
ID field.
4. In the SIS ID field, type a unique name for the safety instrumented system.
5. Modify the values in the remaining fields as desired, and then click OK.
The record window closes, and the new record is linked to the SIL Analysis record for the
current SIL Analysis and appears in the Safety Instrumented Systems grid.
Modifying Safety Instrumented System

Records
To modify a Safety Instrumented System record:
2. In the Safety Instrumented Systems grid, locate the Safety Instrumented System
record that you want to modify.
3. In the System ID cell, click the hyperlinked Record ID of that record.

The selected record appears in a new window.
4. Modify the values in the fields as desired, and then click OK.
Removing Safety Instrumented System

Records from the SIL Analysis
When you remove a Safety Instrumented System record from the SIL Analysis, you are
deleting the link between the Safety Instrumented System record and the SIL Analysis
record for the current SIL Analysis.
To remove a Safety Instrumented System record from the SIL Analysis:
2. In the Safety Instrumented Systems grid, select the row containing the Safety
Instrumented System record that you want to remove from the analysis.
3. At the bottom of the Safety Instrumented Systems grid, click the Remove System
button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to remove the Safety
Instrumented System record form the analysis.
4. Click OK.
The link between the selected record and the SIL Analysis record for the current analysis
is deleted, and the record is removed from the Safety Instrumented Systems grid.
About Instrumented Function Records
Instrumented Function records store details about the specific functions that exist within
a safety instrumented system. An instrumented function is a specific need required of a
safety instrumented system to monitor the conditions of a process. For each instrumented
function defined for a safety instrumented system, one protective instrument loop (PIL)
will exist to satisfy that need. A protective instrument loop consists of interconnected
safety instruments that monitor aspects of a process and take readings on its condition.
You should create one Instrumented Function record per instrumented function on an SIS.
An instrumented function may be associated with a particular equipment or location
within the process that the SIS exists to safeguard.
When you create an Instrumented Function record, it will be linked automatically to the
SIL Analysis record for the current analysis. When you define the Instrumented Function
record, in addition to details about the instrumented function, you can specify the:
Safety Instrumented System record to which the Instrumented Function record is

linked.
Equipment and Functional Location record to which the Instrumented Function
record is linked.
SIF Common Cause Failure records that are linked to the Instrumented Function
record.
Hazardous events that may occur if the safe state associated with the current
instrumented function occurs at the same time as the safe state associated with a
different instrumented function.
You can add Instrumented Function records to the SIL Analysis using the following
methods:
Create a new one.

Add an existing one.
Copy an existing one and automatically create a new one.
After you have defined the desired Instrumented Function records, you can assess the risk
associated with an instrumented function and define the protective instrument loop that
exists for an instrumented function.
Accessing the Instrumented Functions

(IFs) Page
The Instrumented Functions (IFs) page lets you mange the Instrumented Function
records that are linked to the SIL Analysis record for the current SIL Analysis.
To access the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page:
2. On the Navigation menu, click the Functions link.
The Instrumented Functions (IFs) page appears.
Aspects of the Instrumented Functions

(IFs) Page
The Instrumented Functions (IFs) page contains the following sections:
Instrumented Functions: Consists of a grid that contains a list of Instrumented

Function records that are linked to the SIL Analysis record for the current SIL
Analysis and options that you can use to manage those records. Each row in the
grid corresponds to one Instrumented Function record. For each Instrumented
Function record in the grid, the following information appears:
Function ID: The value that exists in the IF ID field in the Instrumented
Function record. This value appears as a hyperlink, which you can click to
view the contents of the Instrumented Function record.
Description: The value that exists in the IF Description field in the

Instrumented Function record.
SIL Method: The value that exists in the SIL Assessment Method field in
the Instrumented Function record.
SIL Mode: The value that appears in the SIL Mode field in the
Selected SIL Level: The value that exists in the Selected SIL Level field in
the Instrumented Function record. If the Selected SIL Level field is empty
(i.e., an SIL Level has not been assessed), the Selected SIL Level cell will
contain the value 0.
Protective Loop ID: The ID of the Protective Instrument Loop record that
is linked to the Instrumented Function record. If more than one Protective
Instrument Loop record is linked to the Instrumented Function, this field
contains the ID of the Protective Instrument Loop record that is in the
Approved state. If a Protective Instrument Loop record that is linked to the
Instrumented Function record is not in an Approved state, this field
contains the ID of the first Protective Instrument Loop record that is linked
to the Instrumented Function record.
Create New Function: Displays a new blank Instrumented Function record

in a new window.
Add Existing Functions: Displays the Find Items window, where you can
search for an existing Instrumented Function record to add to the SIL
Analysis.
Copy Function: Displays a new Instrumented Function record that is

populated automatically with values from the source record. This button is
enabled only when a record appears in the grid.
Remove Function: Displays a confirmation message, and then removes the

selected Instrumented Function record from the SIL Analysis. This button
is enabled only when a record appears in the grid.
Associated Risk Assessments: Consists of a grid that contains a list of LOPA

records that are linked to the Instrumented Function record that is currently
selected in the Instrumented Functions grid. Each row in the grid represents one
LOPA record. For each LOPA record in the grid, the following information
appears:
LOPA ID: The value that exists in the LOPA ID field in the LOPA record.
Description: The value that exists in the Description field in the LOPA
record.
Calculated SIL Level: The value in the Calculated SIL field in the LOPA
record.
RRF: The value that exists in the Required PIF Risk Reduction Factor
field in the LOPA record.
Create New LOPA: Displays the LOPA Definition page, where you can
create a LOPA record and conduct a Layer of Protection Analysis.
Add Existing LOPA: Displays the Find Items window, where you can
search for an existing LOPA record to link to the SIL Analysis.
Copy LOPA: Displays on the LOPA Definition page a new LOPA record
that is automatically populated with values from the currently selected
LOPA record.
Remove LOPA: Displays a confirmation message, and then removes the

LOPA record from the SIL Analysis.
You can collapse and expand the Instrumented Functions and Associated Risk
Assessments sections using the following buttons, which appear in the top right corner of
the sections in turn:
: Indicates that the section is expanded. You can click this button to collapse the
section.
: Indicates that the section is collapsed. You can click this button to expand the
section.
The Instrumented Functions (IFs) page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Assessment Tasks
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Assessment Tasks
The Assessment Tasks menu on the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page contains the
following links:
Risk Matrix: Displays the Risk Assessment interface from which you can define
the unmitigated risk for the selected Instrumented Function record.
Protective Loops: Displays the Protective Instrument Loop Diagram View page,
where you can mange Protective Instrument Loop records.

manage Risk Assessment Recommendations records for the selected Instrumented
Function record.
Asset Health Manager: Displays the SIS - Asset Health Manager for
<Instrumented Function Record ID> (Instrumented Function) page, where you
can manage the Health Indicator records for the selected Instrumented Function
record.
Note: The integration between SIS Management and Asset Health Manager (AHM) is not
documented.
Test Templates: Displays a submenu with the following options:
Create: Displays the Proof Test Template Definition page, where you can
create a new Proof Test Template record and link it to the selected
View: Displays the Proof Test Templates page, where you can view a list
of Proof Test Template records that are linked to the selected Instrumented
Function record.
Proof Tests: Displays a submenu with the following options:
Create: Displays the Proof Test Definition page, where you can create a
new Proof Test record to link to the selected Instrumented Function
record.
View: Displays the Proof Tests page, where you can view a list of Proof
Test records that are linked to the selected Instrumented Function record.
Tasks: Displays a submenu with the following options:
Create: Displays a new Inspection Task record that you can link to the
selected Instrumented Function record.
View: Displays the Task List page, where you can view a list of Inspection
Tasks records that are linked to the selected Instrumented Function record.
ASM: Displays a submenu with the following options:
Promote: Promotes the Equipment or Functional Location record that is

linked to the selected Instrumented Function record to an ASM and
displays on the ASM - Asset Strategy Overview page the Asset Strategy
for that record.
View: Displays the Asset Strategy for the Equipment or Functional
Location record that is linked to the selected Instrumented Function
record. This link is enabled only if that Equipment or Functional Location
record has been promoted to ASM and has an existing Asset Strategy.
The ASM link is enabled only if the selected Instrumented Function record is linked to an
Equipment or Functional Location record and a Risk Assessment record.
The Assessment Tasks menu appears on multiple pages throughout SIS Management. The
links that are available to you will vary depending on where you are accessing the menu.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page contains the
following links:
Definition page.
Page.
Reports: Displays a submenu that contains the captions of the following Catalog
items as links:
IF Report: Displays in the Report Viewer the IF Report for the selected
IF Risk Matrix Result Report: Displays in the Report Viewer the IF Risk
Matrix Result Report for the selected Instrumented Function record.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the Instrumented Functions
(IFs) page.
About Defining Instrumented Function

Records
Instrumented Function records are defined via the <Record ID> (Instrumented Function)
window, where <Record ID> is the value stored in the IF ID field in that record. The
<Record ID> (Instrumented Function) window contains the following tabs:
Instrumented Function: Displays the Instrumented Function datasheet, which is a

custom form and contains fields that store information about the instrumented
function that record represents.
Safety Requirement Specification: Displays the Safety Requirement Specification
datasheet, which is a custom form and contains fields that are used by the Safety
Requirement Specifications report.
Common Cause Failures: Contains options you can use to manage the SIF
Common Cause Failure records that are linked to Instrumented Function records.
Concurrent Safe States: Contains options you can use to manage the other
Instrumented Function records that are linked to the current Instrumented
Function record and specify the hazardous event that can occur when the
instrumented functions represented by those records are in safe states at the same
time.
The following image shows what an Instrumented Function record looks like in the
<Record ID> (Instrumented Function) window, where the Instrumented Function tab is
selected by default.
Creating New Instrumented Function

Records
When you create a new Instrumented Function record, it will be linked automatically to
the SIL Analysis record for the current SIL Analysis.
To create a new Instrumented Function record:
1. Access the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page.

2. In the Instrumented Functions section, below the grid, click the Create New
Function button.
A new blank Instrumented Function record appears in the <Record ID> (Instrumented
Function) window, and the Instrumented Function tab is selected by default.
3. In the IF ID text box, type a unique name for the instrumented function. This field
is required.
5. Click the Safety Requirement Specification tab, and then provide values in the
fields as desired.
6. Click the Common Cause Failures tab, and define the common cause failures
associated with the instrumented function.
7. Click the Concurrent Safe States tab, and define the concurrent safe state hazards
associated with the instrumented function.
8. Click OK.
The window closes, and the record is linked to the SIL Analysis record for the current
analysis and appears in the Instrumented Functions grid.
About the Instrumented Function Tab

The Instrumented Function tab on the <Record ID> (Instrumented Function) window
displays the Instrumented Function datasheet, which is the default datasheet for the
Instrumented Function family. This datasheet is a custom form and contains fields that
are used to define the instrumented function that the record represents.
The following image shows what the Instrumented Function tab looks like in the
<Record ID> (Instrumented Function) window.
About The Safety Requirement

Specification Tab
The Safety Requirement Specification tab on the <Record ID> (Instrumented Function)
window displays the Safety Requirement Specification datasheet, which is a custom form
that contains fields that store information that is used by the Safety Requirement
Specification report.
The following image shows what the Safety Requirement Specification tab looks like on
the <Record ID> (Instrumented Function) window.
About SIF Common Cause Failure

Records
SIF Common Cause Failure records store details about a failure or a condition within a
plant that can affect the operation of multiple instrumented functions. Throughout this
documentation, we refer to these items as common cause failures. SIF Common Cause
Failure records must be linked to at least two Instrumented Function records. In other
words, for every SIF Common Cause Failure record, there will be at least two
Instrumented Function records that represent the instrumented functions that are affected
by the common cause failure defined in the SIF Common Cause Failure record.
For example, incorrect maintenance of sensors can affect multiple instrumented
functions. In this case, you would first create an SIF Common Cause Failure record to
document incorrect maintenance of sensors as a common cause failure and then link that
SIF Common Cause Failure record to the Instrumented Function records representing the
instrumented functions that would be affected by the incorrect sensor maintenance.
You can manage SIF Common Cause Failure records via the Common Cause Failures tab
on the <Record ID> (Instrumented Function) window for an Instrumented Function
record. Using the Common Cause Failures tab, you can specify the common cause
failures that exist for the current instrumented function and other instrumented functions
that are defined in the Meridium APM database. More specifically, to define a common
cause failure, you will need to:
Link SIF Common Cause Failure records to the current Instrumented Function
record.
Link additional Instrumented Function records to those SIF Common Cause

Failure records.
The following illustration shows the records that will exist for a given common cause
failure scenario.
When you are working with records in the SIF Common Cause Failure and Instrumented
Function families, it is helpful to refer to the SIS Management data model in which the
Instrumented Function family is the predecessor family.
The following image shows what the Common Cause Failures tab looks like on the
<Record ID> (Instrument Function) window.
Aspects of the Common Cause Failures

Tab
The Common Cause Failures tab on the <Record ID> (Instrumented Function) window
contains the following sections:
Common Cause Failures: Contains a grid that displays the SIF Common Cause
Failure records that are linked to the current Instrumented Function record and the
additional Instrumented Function records that appear in the Related Instrumented
Function grid. Each row in the Common Cause Failures grid represents one SIF
Common Cause Failure record. For each SIF Common Cause Failure record, the
following values that are stored in the corresponding SIF Common Cause Failure
record are displayed:
CCF ID: An ID for the common cause failure. This value appears as a
hyperlink, which you can click to view the contents of the corresponding
SIF Common Cause Failure record in a new window.
CCF Description: A description of the common cause failure.
CCF Mitigation: A description of the way(s) in which you can mitigate the
occurrence of the effect of the common cause failure.
Create New: Displays a new SIF Common Cause Failure record in a new
window, where you can define a common cause failure and automatically
link the SIF Common Cause Failure record to the current Instrumented
Function record. After you create an SIF Common Cause Failure record, a
new row will appear in the Related Instrumented Functions grid to
represent the current Instrumented Function, and a message will appear in
that section, indicating that you must link at least one more Instrumented
Function record to the SIF Common Cause Failure record.
Add Existing: Displays the Find Items window, where you can search for
an existing SIF Common Cause Failure record and link it to the current
Instrumented Function record. After you link an existing SIF Common
Cause Failure record to the Instrumented Function record, a new row will
appear in the Related Instrumented Functions grid to represent the current
Instrumented Function record, and a message will appear in that section,
indicating that you must link at least one more Instrumented Function
record to the SIF Common Cause Failure record.
Remove: After displaying a confirmation message, deletes the link

between the SIF Common Cause Failure record and the current
Instrumented Function record. If the SIF Common Cause Failure record is
linked to an Instrumented Function record other than the current one, that
link will not be removed. This button is disabled until at least one SIF
Common Cause Failure record appears in the grid.
Related Instrumented Functions: Contains a grid that displays Instrumented

Function records, if at least one SIF Common Cause Failure record appears in the
Common Cause Failures grid. Specifically, the rows in the Related Instrumented
Functions grid contain the:
Current Instrumented Function record. This record always appears in the

first row.
Additional Instrumented Function records that are linked to the SIF

Common Cause Failure record that is selected in the Common Cause
Failures grid.
Below the grid, the Add Existing button appears, which displays the Find Items window,
where you can search for an existing Instrumented Function record that you want to link
to the selected SIF Common Cause Failure record.
The following image shows what the Common Cause Failures tab looks like when ONE
SIF Common Cause Failure record is linked to the current Instrumented Function record
and two additional Instrumented Function records.
Creating New Common Cause Failure

Records
When you create a new SIF Common Cause Failure record, it will be linked
automatically to the Instrumented Function record with which you are currently working.
To create a new SIF Common Cause Failure record:
1. Open the Instrumented Function record to which you want to link a new SIF
Common Cause Failure record.
2. Click the Common Cause Failures tab.
The Common Cause Failures tab appears.
3. In the Common Cause Failures section, click the Create New button.
A new SIF Common Cause Failures record appears in a new window.
4. Provide values in the fields as desired. All the fields are required.
5. Click OK.
The SIF Common Cause Failures record closes, and the following rows are added to the
Common Cause Failures tab:
One row in the Common Cause Failures section that represents the SIF
One row in the Related Instrumented Functions section that represents the
current Instrumented Function record.
In addition, a message appears, indicating that you must link at least one more
Instrumented Function record to the SIF Common Cause Failure record. The following
image shows an example of how the Common Cause Failures tab appears after you create
a new SIF Common Cause Failure record.
6. Link the additional Instrumented Function record(s) to the SIF Common Cause
Failure record.
7. Click OK.
The Instrumented Function record closes, and your changes are saved.
Linking Existing SIF Common Cause

Failure Records to Instrumented
Function Records
To link an existing SIF Common Cause Failure record to an Instrumented Function
record:
1. Open the Instrumented Function record to which you want to link an existing SIF
2. Click the Common Cause Failures tab.
The Common Cause Failures tab appears.
3. In the Common Cause Failures section, click the Add Existing button.
4. Perform a search for the desired SIF Common Cause Failure record.
5. In the search results, select the row containing the SIF Common Cause Failure
record that you want to link to the current Instrumented Function record, and then
click the Open button.
The Find Items window closes, and the following rows are added to the Common Cause
Failures tab:
One row in the Common Cause Failures section that represents the SIF
Common Cause Failure record that you selected.
One row in the Related Instrumented Functions section that represents the
current Instrumented Function record.
In addition, a message appears, indicating that you must link at least one more
Instrumented Function record to the SIF Common Cause Failure record. The following
image shows an example of how the Common Cause Failures tab appears after you link
an existing SIF Common Cause Failure record to an Instrumented Function record.
6. Link the additional Instrumented Function record(s) to the SIF Common Cause
Failure record.
7. Click OK.
The Instrumented Function record closes, and your changes are saved.
Linking Additional Instrumented

Function Records to an SIF Common
Cause Failure Record
The following instructions assume that you are viewing the Common Cause Failures tab
in an Instrumented Function record that is linked to at least one SIF Common Cause
Failure record.
To link an additional Instrumented Function record to an SIF Common Cause Failure
record:
1. In the Common Cause Failures section, select the row containing the SIF
Common Cause Failure record that you want to link to an additional Instrumented
Function record.
2. In the Related Instrumented Functions section, click the Add Existing button.
3. Perform a search for the desired Instrumented Function record.
4. In the search results, select the row containing the Instrumented Function record
that you want to link to the SIF Common Cause Failure record, and then click the
Open button.
The Find Items window closes, and the Instrumented Function record appears in a new
row in the Related Instrumented Functions grid.
5. Click OK.
The Instrumented Function record closes, and your changes are saved. Note that if you
view the Common Cause Failures tab in the Instrumented Function record that you just
added, the SIF Common Cause Failure record will be displayed in the Common Cause
Failures grid.
Removing SIF Common Cause Failure

Records from an Instrumented
Function Record
The following instructions provide details on removing an SIF Common Cause Failure
record from an Instrumented Function record. When you do so, you are deleting the link
between the SIF Common Cause Failure record and the Instrumented Function record.
These instructions assume that you are viewing the Common Cause Failures tab on the
<Record ID> (Instrumented Function) window for an Instrumented Function record that
is linked to at least one SIF Common Cause Failure record.
To remove an SIF Common Cause Failure record from an Instrumented Function record:
1. In the Common Cause Failures section, select the row containing the SIF
Common Cause Failure record that you want to remove.
2. Click the Remove button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to remove the SIF Common
Cause Failure record from the Instrumented Function record.
The link between the SIF Common Cause Failure record and the Instrumented Function
record is deleted, and the rows in the sections are updated in the following ways:
The SIF Common Cause Failure record is removed from the Common
Cause Failures grid.
The Instrumented Function record(s) that appeared in the Related
Instrumented Functions section are removed from the grid.
4. Click OK.
Your changes are saved, and the Instrumented Function record closes.
About Concurrent Safe State Hazards

and Instrumented Function Records
When you define an Instrumented Function record, you will define the safe state to the
instrumented function is responsible for taking the process in the event that the process is
in an unsafe state. In other words, if a given process is approaching an unsafe condition,
the instrumented function that monitors that process will take the process to a condition
that is specified as the safe for that process. For example, if the temperature reaches an
unsafe level, the cooling system will be triggered to bring down the temperature to a safe
state.
In some cases, if a given process is in its associated safe state at the same time as a
different process, while the individual processes are in a safe state, the combination of
these conditions could trigger a hazardous event. For example, assume that to reach a safe
state in a Flare system, the steam valve needs to vent. Now assume that two steam valves
need to vent at the same time. In this case, the Flare system can become overloaded due
to both processes reaching their safe states concurrently.
In Meridium APM, the combinations of safe states that can lead to hazardous events are
referred to as concurrent safe state hazards. You can document the concurrent safe state
hazards that exist for instrumented functions via the Instrumented Function record
representing that instrumented function. In other words, for each instrumented function
that participates in a potentially hazardous relationship, you will need to define the
concurrent safe state hazard(s) for that instrumented function.
The Concurrent Safe States tab in the <Record ID> (Instrumented Function) window
allows you manage all the concurrent safe state hazards that exist for an instrumented
function. To define concurrent safe state hazards for an instrumented function, you will
need to:
Link the Instrumented Function record to the other Instrumented Function record
representing the instrumented function whose concurrent safe state can cause a
hazard. Instrumented Function records can be linked to one or more other
Instrumented Function records through the Has Hazardous Event relationship.
Describe the hazardous event that can occur when the safe state conditions occur
concurrently. Because some instrumented functions can participate in multiple
concurrent safe state scenarios, in each Instrumented Function record, you will
need to describe the hazardous events that are associated with that instrumented
function. In other words, describing the hazardous event in one Instrumented
Function record will not automatically populate the linked Instrumented Function
record with the same description. You will need to open the linked Instrumented
Function record and enter the description of the concurrent safe state hazard.
The following image illustrates the records that participate in a concurrent safe state
scenario in which the combination of three concurrent safe states can lead to a hazardous
event.
Notice that the Instrumented Function record to which you link other Instrumented
Function records is the predecessor in the relationship. When you are working with
Instrumented Function records, it is helpful to refer to the SIS Management data model
image in which the Instrumented Function family is the predecessor family.
The following image shows what the Concurrent Safe States tab looks like in the
<Record ID> (Instrumented Function) window.
Aspects of the Concurrent Safe States

Tab in Instrumented Function Records
The Concurrent Safe States tab in the <Record ID> (Instrumented Function) window
contains the Hazard for Concurrent Safe States? check box, which indicates whether the
instrumented function represented by the current Instrumented Function record is
associated with any hazards that result from safe states that occur simultaneously. When
the Hazard for Concurrent Safe States? check box is:
Selected, the remaining options on the Concurrent Safe States tab are enabled,
and a message appears indicating that you must link at least one Instrumented
Function record to the current Instrumented Function record. The additional
Instrumented Function record represents the instrumented function whose safe
state can lead to a hazardous event if it occurs simultaneously with the safe state
for the current instrumented function. After you link at least one Instrumented
Function record to the current Instrumented Function record, the message is
hidden.
Cleared, the remaining options on the Concurrent Safe States tab are disabled.
This indicates that the instrumented function represented by the current
Instrumented Function record is not associated with any concurrent safe state
hazards.
After at least one Instrumented Function record is linked to the current Instrumented
Function record, the Hazard for Concurrent Safe States? check box is disabled.
In addition, you can clear this check box only if the Individual Safe State Detail grid is
empty (i.e., there are no concurrent safe state hazards associated with the instrumented
function).
Below the Hazard for Concurrent Safe States? check box, the following sections appear:
Individual Safe State Detail: Contains a grid that displays the list of Instrumented
Function records that are linked to the current Instrumented Function record. Each
row in the grid represents one instrumented function whose safe state can lead to a
hazardous event if it occurs simultaneously with the safe state of the current
instrumented function. The following information is displayed for each
Instrumented Function record that appears in the grid:
Function ID: The ID for the instrumented function that is stored in the IF
ID field in the corresponding Instrumented Function record. This value
appears as a hyperlink, which you can click to view the contents of the
corresponding Instrumented Function record.
Description: The description of the instrumented function that is

stored in the IF Description field in the corresponding Instrumented
Function record.
Safe States: The description of the safe state that is associated with the
instrumented function, which is stored in the Safe State Description field
in the corresponding Instrumented Function record.
Add Existing: Displays the Find Items window, which you can use to
search for an existing Instrumented Function record and link it to the
current Instrumented Function record. After you link an Instrumented
Function record to the current Instrumented Function record, a new row
will appear in the Individual Safe State Detail grid to represent that
instrumented function.
between the selected Instrumented Function record and the current
Instrumented Function record and removes the instrumented function from
the grid. This button is disabled until at least one Instrumented Function
record appears in the Individual Safe State Detail grid.
Potential Concurrent Safe State Hazard: Contains a field, which stores the
description for the concurrent safe state hazards that are associated with the
current instrumented function. This field is required. If the current instrumented
function is associated with multiple concurrent safe state hazards, you should
provide a description in this field for each of these hazards.
Defining Concurrent Safe State Hazards

for Instrumented Functions
To define a concurrent safe state hazard for instrumented functions, you will need to:
Link to one another the Instrumented Function records whose associated safe
states can cause a hazardous event when they occurs simultaneously.
Describe in each of the Instrumented Function records the hazardous event that
can occur if the safe states associated with the instrumented functions occur
simultaneously.
To define a concurrent safe state hazard for an instrumented function:

1. Open the Instrumented Function record for which you want to define a concurrent
safe state.
2. Click the Concurrent Safe States tab.
The Concurrent Safe States tab appears.
3. Select the Hazard for Concurrent Safe States? check box.

The remaining options are enabled, and a message appears, indicating that you must link
at least one Instrumented Function record to the current Instrumented Function record.
4. In the Individual Safe State Detail section, click the Add Existing button.
The Find Items window appears, and the Search In text box contains Instrumented
Function by default.
5. Perform a search for the desired Instrumented Function record.
6. In the search results, select the rows containing the Instrumented Function records
that you want to link to the current Instrumented Function record, and then click
the Open button. Keep in mind the records you select should represent the
instrumented functions whose safe states can lead to a hazardous event if they
occur concurrently with the safe state of the current instrumented function.
The Find Items window closes, and the Instrumented Function records that you selected
appears in the Individual Safe State Detail grid.
7. In the Potential Concurrent Safe State Hazard section, enter a description of the
hazardous event that can occur if the safe states for the instrumented functions in
the Individual Safe State Detail section occur simultaneously with the safe state
for the current instrumented function.
8. In the Individual Output States section, in the first row in the grid, click the
hyperlinked ID in the Function ID cell.
The corresponding Instrumented Function record appears in a new window.
The Concurrent Safe States tab appears. You can see that the Hazard for Concurrent Safe
States? check box is selected automatically and the Individual Safe State Detail grid
contains the Instrumented Function record to which the current record is linked (i.e., the
record from which you accessed the current record).
10. In the Concurrent Hazardous Event section, enter a description for the hazardous
event that can occur if the safe states associated with the instrumented occur
simultaneously. This should be the same description that you entered in step 7.
11. Click OK.
Your changes are saved, and the Instrumented Function record closes, revealing the
previous Instrumented Function record.
12. Repeat steps 8 through 11 for each Instrumented Function record that appears in
the Individual Safe State Detail grid.
13. Click OK.
Removing Instrumented Functions

From the Concurrent Safe States Tab
When you remove an Instrumented Function from the Concurrent Safe States tab, you are
deleting the link between the Instrumented Function records.
To remove an instrumented function from the Concurrent Safe States tab:
1. Open the Instrumented Function record from which you want to remove a linked
The Concurrent Safe States tab appears.
3. In the Individual Safe State Detail section, select the row containing the
instrumented function that you want to remove.
Hint: You may want to update the text stored in the Concurrent Hazardous Event section
in the corresponding Instrumented Function record before you remove it from the current
record. To do so, click the hyperlinked value in the Function ID cell in that row.
The link between the selected Instrumented Function record and the current Instrumented
Function record is deleted, and the instrumented function is removed from the Individual
Safe State Detail grid.
Hint: You may want to update the text stored in the Concurrent Hazardous Event section
in the current record.
6. Click OK.
Adding Existing Instrumented Function

Records to the SIL Analysis
When you add an existing Instrumented Function record to an SIL Analysis, you are
automatically linking that record to the SIL Analysis record for the current SIL Analysis.
To add an existing Instrumented Function record to the SIL Analysis:
2. In the Instrumented Functions section, below the grid, click the Add Existing
Functions button.
The Find Items window appears, where you can search for an existing Instrumented
Function record.
3. If desired, in the Look For text box, type the desired search criteria, and click the
Find Now button.
The search results appear and contain only the Instrumented Function records that are not
currently linked to an SIL Analysis.
4. In the search results, select the row containing the record that you want to add to
the analysis.
The Find Items window closes, and the selected record is linked to the SIL Analysis
record for the current SIL Analysis and appears in the Instrumented Functions grid.
Copying Existing Instrumented

Function Records
When you copy an existing Instrumented Function record, you are creating a new
Instrumented Function record that is populated with the values from the record that was
copied and automatically linking it to the SIL Analysis record for the current SIL
Analysis. The values in all the fields from a selected record will be copied to the new
records with the exception of the following fields:
IF ID
Hazards Analysis Date
Hazards Analysis Reference
Hazards Analysis Reference Key
To copy an Instrumented Function record:

1. Access the Instrumented Functions page.
2. In the Instrumented Functions section, select the row containing the Instrumented
Function record that you want to copy.
3. Below the Instrumented Functions grid, click the Copy Function button.
A new Instrumented Function record appears that is populated with information from the
source record.
4. In the IF ID field, type the ID for the instrumented function.
5. Modify the values in the remaining fields as desired.
6. Click OK.
The record is saved and appears in the Instrumented Functions section.
Modifying Existing Instrumented

Function Records
To modify an existing Instrumented Function record:

2. In the Instrumented Functions grid, locate the row containing the Instrumented
Function record whose contents you want to modify.
The Instrumented Function record appears in a new window.
3. Modify the record as desired.

4. Click OK.
The record closes, and your changes are saved.
About Assessing the SIL Level for

Instrumented Functions
Before the SIL Analysis team can make recommendations for actions that should be taken
to mitigate risk for a given safety instrumented system, the team must first assign a
numeric rating to each instrumented function within that safety instrumented system. The
safety integrity level (SIL) is a numeric value that represents an overall rating for the
instrumented function. This rating tells you to what degree the instrumented function is
meeting its requirements to mitigate risk. After you have assigned an SIL value to each
instrumented function within a safety instrumented system, the combination of these
values indicates overall safety integrity of the safety instrumented system to which the
instrumented functions belong.
You can use the following methods to assess the SIL value for an instrumented system:
Risk Matrix: Lets you use the standard Meridium APM Risk Assessment
interface to select the risk rank values for specific categories of risk. The
highest risk rank value that you select in the Risk Matrix is used to determine
the SIL value for that instrumented function. You can use the baseline Risk
Matrix or a custom Risk Matrix.
Layer of Protection Analysis (LOPA): Lets you evaluate on a granular level the
risk value associated with a given risk for the instrumented function to determine
the SIL value that is associated with each risk. The highest SIL value that is
assigned to a given risk is used to determine the SIL value of the instrumented
function with which those risks are associated.
Hazards Analysis Risk Assessment: Lets you select an existing Risk Assessment
record that is associated with a Hazards Analysis record to which the
Instrumented Function record is linked. The existing risk rank values will be used
to determine the SIL value for that instrumented function automatically.
You can use more than one risk assessment method to determine the SIL value for a given
instrumented function and then compare the results of the different methods. If you use
more than one risk assessment method, however, only one of the resulting SIL values can
exist in the Selected SIL Level field in the Instrumented Function record. To indicate
whether the SIL value will be determined by the Risk Matrix, LOPA, or Hazards Analysis
Risk Assessment method, you can select the corresponding value in the SIL Assessment
Method field in the Instrumented Function record. For example, if you select the value
Risk Matrix - Internal in the SIL Assessment Method field, the SIL value determined by
the Risk Matrix assessment method will appear in the Selected SIL Level field.
In addition to the Select SIL Level field, SIL values are also displayed in the Selected SIL
Level column in the Instrumented Functions section on the Instrumented Functions
(IFs) page. After an SIL value exists for an instrumented function, the SIL Analysis team
can make recommendations for actions that should be taken to mitigate the risk
associated with that instrumented function, if necessary. They can do so using Risk
Assessment Recommendation records.
For example, assume you have conducted a LOPA for the Instrumented Function record
IF - 1001, and the SIL value is 4. In this case, your SIL Analysis team might want to
create a Risk Assessment Recommendation record that contains a recommendation for
adding an additional layer of protection to that instrumented function.
SIL Level and Required Probability of

Failure
The required probability of failure is a number representing the probability that an
instrumented function will fail in a dangerous scenario. This value is represented as a
probability value (e.g., .001) and is an indicator of whether the instrumented function is
meeting its requirements to mitigate risk.
The required probability of failure is defined in the Required Probability of Failure field
in the Instrumented Function record. The required probability of failure value is based
upon the following values stored in the Instrumented Function record:
The SIL value, which is stored in the Selected SIL Level field. The higher the SIL
value for an instrumented function, the lower the probability that the instrumented
function will fail.
The method used to determine the SIL value, which is stored in the SIL
Assessment Method field (e.g., Risk Matrix).
The demand rate, which is stored in the SIL Mode field and represents how
frequently the instrumented function will be needed to protect the safety
instrumented system as a result of a failure (i.e., Low Demand, High Demand, or
Continuous).
Depending upon these values in other fields, this field is either disabled and populated
automatically or enabled so that you can type a value manually. The following sections
define how the required probability of failure is calculated for each demand rate.
High Demand and Continuous

In an Instrumented Function record, when the value in the SIL Mode field is High
Demand or Continuous demand, the Meridium APM system assumes that the demand
rate of the instrumented function more frequent than once per year. In these cases, the
failure rate is measured by the average probability of dangerous failures per hour (PFH).
The required probability of failure is defined by an industry standard that is associated
with the SIL. The following table contains the standard PFH values for each SIL.
Safety Integrity Level (SIL)
4
3
2
1
Required Probability of Failure (PFH)

10-9 to
10-8
10-8 to
10-7
10-7 to
10-6
10-6 to
10-5
If you use an internal Risk Matrix to determine the SIL value, the value in the Required
Probability of Failure field on the Instrumented Function datasheet will be populated
automatically with the lowest (i.e., the most conservative) value as the targeted
probability and disabled. For example, if the SIL is 2, the Required Probability of Failure
field will be populated automatically with 1E-07 (i.e., 10-7).
If you use an internal Layer of Protection Analysis to determine the SIL value, the value
in the Required Probability of Failure field is disabled and populated automatically with
the difference between the values in the Mitigated Consequence Frequency field and the
Required Mitigated Consequence Frequency field in the LOPA record.
If you use an SIS Assessment Method other than an internal Layer of Protection Analysis
or Risk Matrix (e.g., LOPA - External), the Required Probability of Failure field will be
enabled, and you can type the probability value manually. In this case:
If you modify the value in the Selected SIL Level field, the value in the Required
Probability of Failure field will be updated automatically to fall within the correct
range of values for that level.
If you type a value that does not fall within the range defined in the table, an error
message will appear.
If you type a value in the Required Probability of Failure field without first typing
a value in the Selected SIL Level field, an error message will appear.
Low Demand
In an Instrumented Function record, when the value in the SIL Mode field is Low
Demand, the Meridium APM system assumes that the demand rate of the instrumented
function is less frequent than once per year. In this case, the failure rate is measured by
the average probability of failure on demand (PFD Avg).
In these cases, a risk reduction factor can also be used to indicate the probability of
failure for an instrumented function. The risk reduction factor is the inverse of the
required probability of failure, which is represented in years in cases of low demand. For
example, a required probability of failure value of .001 would equal a risk reduction
factor of 1,000, meaning that the instrumented function would fail during a dangerous
scenario about every 1,000 years.
The required probability of failure is defined by the industry standard that is associated
with each SIL. The following table contains the standard PFD Avg values for each SIL.
Safety Integrity Level Required Probability of Failure (PFD
(SIL)
Avg)
4
10-5 to
10-4
Target Risk Reduction

Factor
10,000 to
100,000
3
2
1
10-4 to
10-3
1,000 to
10-3 to
10-2
100 to
10-2 to
10-1
10 to
10,000
1,000
10
If you use an internal Risk Matrix to determine the SIL value, the Required Probability of
Failure field on the Instrumented Function datasheet will be disabled and populated
automatically with the lowest (i.e., the most conservative) value as the targeted
probability. For example, if the SIL is 3, the Required Probability of Failure field will be
populated automatically with 0.001 (i.e., 10-3). The value in the Risk Reduction Factor
field is the inverse of value in the Required Probability of Failure field, so for an SIL of
3, the Risk Reduction field on the Instrumented Function datasheet will be disabled and
populated automatically with 1,000 (i.e., the inverse of 0.001). In other words, for an SIL
value of 3, the instrumented function should not fail more than once every 1,000 years.
If you use an internal Layer of Protection Analysis to determine the SIL value, the
Required Probability of Failure field is populated automatically in the same way as when
the demand rate is High Demand or Continuous. The value in the Risk Reduction Factor
field, however, is now populated automatically with the inverse of value in the Required
Probability of Failure field.
For an SIL Assessment Method other than an internal Risk Matrix or Layer of Protection
Analysis (e.g., LOPA - External), the Required Probability of Failure field and the Risk
Reduction field will be enabled, and you can type a value into those fields manually. The
same restrictions apply in this case as when the demand rate is High Demand or
Continuous but with the following additional logic:
If you modify the value in the Required Probability of Failure field, the value in
the Risk Reduction Factor field will be populated automatically with the inverse
of the value in the Required Probability of Failure field.
If you modify the value in the Risk Reduction field, the value in the Required
Probability of Failure field will be populated automatically with the inverse of the
value in the Risk Reduction field.
About Assessing SIL Values Via the Risk

Matrix
When you assess a SIL value for an instrumented function via the Risk Matrix, you will
use the Risk Assessment interface to create a Risk Assessment record and link it to the
Instrumented Function record representing that instrumented function.
Specifically, you will use the Risk Matrix on the Risk Assessment interface to select a
risk rank value for each risk category that is defined in that Risk Matrix. After you select
risk rank values in the Risk Matrix, the sum of the unmitigated risk rank values that you
selected (i.e., the overall unmitigated risk rank) is used to determine the SIL value for that
instrumented function. This value is stored in the Unmitigated Risk Rank text box
above Risk Matrix on the Risk Assessment Interface.
SIL values are stored in the SIL Level field in SIL Threshold records. SIL Threshold
records also store numeric ranges, which correspond to risk rank values that appear in the
Risk Matrix. The Meridium APM baseline database contains SIL Threshold records that
you can use for this purpose. The overall unmitigated risk rank value will be compared to
the ranges that are defined in the SIL Threshold records. The SIL value that corresponds
to the range in which the overall unmitigated risk rank value falls is assigned to the
For example, assume that the following SIL Threshold record exists, where the numeric
range is 100 - 1000 with a corresponding SIL value of 2.
In this case, if the overall unmitigated risk rank value is 500, a SIL value of 2 would
appear in the Selected SIL Level field in the Instrumented Function record.
Accessing the Risk Assessment Interface

The following instructions provide details on accessing the Risk Assessment interface to
select risk rank values. When you select risk rank values via the Risk Assessment
interface, you are creating a Risk Assessment record and linking it to the selected
To access the Risk Assessment interface:
2. In the Instrumented Functions section, select the row containing the instrumented
function whose risk rank values you want to assess.
3. On the Assessment Tasks menu, click the Risk Matrix link.
The Risk Analysis dialog box appears, displaying the Risk Assessment interface.
At this point, you can follow the standard procedure for assessing risk via the Risk
Matrix, and then click the Save button.
The Risk Assessment record will be linked to the selected Instrumented Function record,
and the SIL Level value will be calculated automatically and displayed in the Selected
SIL Level cell in the currently selected row.
About Assessing SIL Values via a

Hazards Analysis Risk Assessment
If you have already performed risk assessments for a Hazards Analysis via the Hazards
Analysis module, you can use one of those risk assessments to assess the SIL value for an
instrumented function. Before you can use a risk assessment from a Hazards Analysis,
you must:
1. Link the Instrumented Function record to the Hazards Analysis record that is
associated with the risk assessment that you want to use.
2. In the SIL Assessment Method field in the Instrumented Function record, select
PHA-Internal.
After you have completed these steps, on the Assessment Tasks menu, you can click the
Risk Matrix link to select which Risk Assessment record you want to use and then view
its details on the PHA Risk Assessment window.
About Mapping Values from a Hazards

Analysis
When you assess the SIL value for an instrumented function using a Hazards Analysis
Risk Assessment, you will select a Risk Assessment record that has been previously
defined for a Hazards Analysis and use it to assess risk for that instrumented function.
The risk rank values and Risk Matrix that have been defined for that risk assessment are
mapped to corresponding fields on the PHA Risk Assessment window. The risk rank
values on the PHA Risk Assessment window are used to determine the SIL value in the
same way risk rank values from the standard Risk Assessment interface are used to
determine the SIL value, with the following exceptions:
The risk rank values on the PHA Risk Assessment window are already defined and
cannot be modified.
The overall unmitigated risk rank value is not always used to determine the SIL
value. The Meridium APM system determines which risk rank values to use based
upon the following criteria:
If the risk from the Hazards Analysis has not been mitigated, the sum of
the unmitigated risk rank values is used to calculate the SIL value in the
same way as the values are calculated using the standard Risk Assessment
interface.
If the risk from the Hazards Analysis has been mitigated, then the sum of
the mitigated risk rank values from the risk assessment (i.e., the overall
mitigated risk rank) is compared to values in SIL Threshold records to
determine the SIL value. The overall mitigated risk rank value is displayed
in the Mitigated Risk Rank text box above the Risk Matrix on the PHA
Risk Assessment window.
In addition, after you select a Risk Assessment record from a Hazards Analysis, certain
values that are stored in fields in Hazards Analysis Cause and Hazards Analysis
Consequence records from that Hazard Analysis are copied to corresponding fields in the
Instrumented Function record. The following table lists the families and fields in the
Hazards Analysis module that store these values and the field in the Instrumented
Function record to which they are mapped.
Hazard Analysis Family
Hazard Analysis Field
Instrumented Function Field
Hazard Analysis Cause
Cause Type
Initiating Event
Cause Description
Initiating Event Description
Cause Frequency (per

year)
Frequency of Initiating Event (per

yr)
Hazard Analysis
Consequence
Consequence Type
Hazardous Event
Hazard Analysis
Consequence
Consequence Description Consequence Description
Selecting a Risk Assessment Record

from a Hazards Analysis
To use risk ranks that were defined in a Risk Assessment record in a Hazards Analysis,
you must access the PHA Risk Assessment window instead of the standard Risk
Assessment interface. The following instructions assume that the Instrumented Function
record for which you are assessing risk is linked to a Hazards Analysis record and
contains the value PHA - Internal in its SIL Assessment Method field.
To select an existing Risk Assessment record from a Hazards Analysis:
1. On the Instrumented Functions page, select the Instrumented Function record for
which you want to define risk ranks using an existing Risk Assessment record
from a Hazards Analysis.
2. On the Assessment Tasks menu, click the Risk Matrix link.
The Search Tool appears. The Search In list is populated automatically with the Risk
Assessment family, the Linked To list is populated automatically with the Hazards
Analysis Consequence family, and the Through list is disabled and populated
automatically with the Has Risk family.
3. Click the Find Now button.

The search results display all the Risk Assessment records that are linked to a Hazards
Analysis Consequence record though the Has Risk relationship family.
Note: Only Risk Assessment records that are associated with the Hazards Analysis record
to which the selected Instrumented Function record is linked will appear in the search
results.
4. Select the row containing the Risk Assessment record whose risk rank values you
want to use, and then click the Open button.
The PHA Risk Assessment window appears, displaying the read-only risk assessment
from the Hazards Analysis. In the Instrumented Function record, the values in the
following fields are calculated and populated automatically according to the risk rank
values stored in the Risk Assessment record:
o
o
Selected SIL Level

Required Probability of Failure
Risk Reduction Factor (RRF)
5. Click the
button to close the PHA Risk Assessment window.
Aspects of the PHA Risk Assessment

Window
The PHA Risk Assessment window functions the same as the standard Risk Assessment
interface, with some exceptions:
The Risk Matrix and risk rank values are populated automatically with the
corresponding values from the Risk Assessment record that is associated with the
Hazards Analysis.
The Risk Matrix is disabled, and you cannot make changes to the risk rank values.
If you want to make changes to the risk rank values, you will need to do so from
the source Hazards Analysis, and then select the Risk Assessment record again via
the SIS Management module.
If the Risk Assessment record is linked to a Hazards Analysis Safeguard record

that is also an Independent Protection Layer (IPL), the PHA Risk Assessment
window will contain the IPL Information section. Otherwise, this section is
hidden.
The following values are populated automatically from a Risk Assessment record
from a Hazards Analysis:
Unmitigated Risk Rank
Mitigated Risk Rank
Risk Matrix
If you select a Risk Assessment record from a Hazards Analysis that includes
safeguards that are independent protection layers (IPLs), the PHA Risk
Assessment window contains an additional sections: IPL Information.
The following items appear on the PHA Risk Assessment window:
Unmitigated Risk Rank text box: Displays the unmitigated risk rank value stored
in the Risk Assessment record that is linked to the Hazards Analysis record. This
text box is disabled.
Mitigated Risk Rank text box: Displays the mitigated risk rank value stored in the
Risk Assessment record that is linked to the Hazards Analysis record. This text
box is disabled.
Risk Matrix: Displays the Risk Matrix from the Risk Assessment record for the
Hazards Analysis as read-only.
PIF Information section: Displays values from the Instrumented Function record
for which you are assessing risk. All the fields in this section are disabled and
populated automatically with existing values from the corresponding fields in the
Instrumented Function record with the following exceptions:
o
The value in the SIL Level text box is calculated automatically based on
the unmitigated and mitigated risk rank values when you open the PHA
Risk Assessment window for the first time and then gets copied to the
Selected SIL Level field in the Instrumented Function record. After the
value is calculated initially, it will be stored in the Instrumented Function
record.
The Initiating Event text box, Hazardous Description text box, and
Consequence Description text box are populated automatically with values
that are stored in fields in Hazards Analysis Cause and Hazards Analysis
Consequence records from the Hazard Analysis.
IPL Information section: Displays values that are stored in the Independent
Protection Layer records and Hazards Analysis Safeguard records that are used to
determine the mitigated risk rank in the Hazards Analysis. This section appears on
the PHA Risk Assessment window only if the source Hazards Analysis includes
Hazards Analysis Safeguard records that are IPLs. Otherwise, this section is
hidden. The IPL Information section contains the following items:
IPL List: Displays the list of Hazards Analysis Safeguard records that are
classified as IPLs and linked to the Hazards Analysis Consequence record.
You can select one of these records in the list to view its mitigated risk
details in the Risk grid.
Safeguard ID: This cell is disabled and populated automatically with the
value that is stored in the Safeguard ID field in the Hazards Analysis
Safeguard record.
Equipment ID: This cell is disabled and populated automatically with the
value that is stored in the Equipment ID field in the Equipment record to
which the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record is linked.
IF ID: This cell is disabled and populated automatically with the value
that is stored in the IF ID field in the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record.
Safeguard Type: This cell is disabled and populated automatically with the
value that is stored in the Safeguard Type field in the Hazards Analysis
Safeguard record.
Safeguard Description: This cell is disabled and populated automatically

with the value that is stored in the Safeguard Description field in the
Hazards Analysis Safeguard record.
Risk grid: Displays in grid format the mitigated and unmitigated risk ranks
for each Risk Matrix category (e.g., environment) and the overall
unmitigated and mitigated risk ranks associated with the IPL that is
selected in the IPL List.
IPL Credits: This value is disabled and populated automatically with the
value that is stored in the IPL Credits field in the Independent Protection
Layer record that is linked to the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record that
is selected in the IPL List. This number represents the amount by which
the risk is reduced because of that IPL.
o
IPL Type: This value is disabled and populated automatically with the
value that is stored in the IPL Type field in the Independent Protection
Layer record that is linked to the Hazards Analysis Safeguard record that
is selected in the IPL List. This cell can contain one of the following
values:
o
Consequence Reducing IPLs: Reduce the severity of the failure

(e.g., fatality to injury).
Frequency Reducing IPLs: Reduce how often the failures occur

(e.g., every 100 years to every 1,000 years).
What is a Layer of Protection Analysis

(LOPA)?
A Layer of Protection Analysis (LOPA) is type of risk assessment, which lets you
determine the SIL value that is associated with the protective instruments that exist to
mitigate the same risks for which the instrumented function exists. When you use an
LOPA to assess the SIL value for an instrumented function, you examine the granular
portions of the a scenario and assess the risk associated with each portion, and then those
individual risk values are used to calculate the SIL value for the instrumented function.
You can conduct one LOPA per risk that is associated with an instrumented function.
After you have conducted a LOPA for all the desired risks, the highest SIL value will be
used to calculate the SIL for that instrumented function.
A LOPA consists of one LOPA record and all the records that are linked to that record.
For more details on how the LOPA family participates in the SIS Management data
model, see the illustration of the data model where the Instrumented Function family is
the predecessor.
When you conduct an LOPA, you will complete the following steps:
1. Create one LOPA record to define the risk that you are assessing.
2. Create one Independent Layer of Protection record per independent layer of
protection that exists to mitigate the risk defined in the LOPA record.
3. Create one Consequence Modifier record per consequence modifier that is

associated with the risk defined in the LOPA record.
After you complete these steps, the SIL value will be calculated automatically based on
the probability values defined in the Independent Layer of Protection records and
Consequence Modifier records.
Navigation Menu
The Navigation menu appears on the following pages when you are working with a
LOPA:
LOPA Definition
Consequence Modifiers
In addition to these pages, the Navigation menu provides to the Instrumented Functions
(IFs) page. A green arrow to the left of an option indicates the page that you are currently
viewing. The Navigation menu contains the following links:
LOPA Definition: Displays the LOPA Definition page, where you can manage
LOPA records and Independent Layers of Protection records.
Modifiers: Displays the Consequence Modifiers page, where you can manage
Consequence Modifier records.
Return to Functions: Displays the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page, where you
can manage Instrumented Function records.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu appears on the following pages when you are working with a
LOPA:
LOPA Definition
Consequence Modifiers
The Common Tasks menu contains the following links:
Page.
Reports: Displays a submenu that contains the caption of the Catalog item LOPA
Report as a link. This link is enabled only if you are viewing an existing LOPA
record on the LOPA Definition page. This link does not appear on the
Consequence Modifiers page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the current page.
About LOPA Records

LOPA records store details about the LOPA that you are conducting to determine the SIL
value for a risk that is associated with an instrumented function. When you create a
LOPA record, it will be linked to the Instrumented Function record that is currently
selected on the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page.
LOPA records can be linked to records in the following families:
Consequence Modifier: Stores details about the consequences of the risk

described in the LOPA record.
Independent Layer of Protection: Stores details about the independent layers of

protection that exist to mitigate the risk associated with the consequences
described in the Consequence Modifier records. Independent Layer of Protection
records can be linked to Equipment and Functional Location records, which store
details about the equipment or location with which the independent layers of
protection are associated.
These families also store numeric values that present probability and failure rates. These
values are used to calculate the SIL value of the Instrumented Function whose risks you
are assessing through the LOPA. The calculated SIL value is stored in the Calculated SIL
field in the LOPA record.
When you create a LOPA record, you will define the following items in the record:
The risk for which you are conducting the Layer of Protection Analysis (LOPA).
The consequences that may occur if that risk is not prevented from proceeding
into an undesirable scenario.
The events or conditions that can initiate the undesirable event.
How often the event may occur.
How often it is acceptable for the event to occur.
Accessing the LOPA Definition Page

On the LOPA Definition page, you can create the following items:
One LOPA record.

One or more Independent Layer of Protection records.
Additionally, via the LOPA Definition page, you can access the Consequence Modifiers
page, where you can create one or more Consequence Modifier records.
The following instruction provide details on accessing the LOPA Definition page for a
new LOPA record. You can also access the LOPA Definition page by opening an existing
LOPA record.
To access the LOPA Definition page:

Function record for which you want to conduct the LOPA.
3. In the Associated Risk Assessments section, click the Create New LOPA button.
Aspects of the LOPA Definition Page

The LOPA Definition page contains the following items:
Datasheet area: Contains the LOPA datasheet for the current LOPA record.
Independent Protective Layers section: Contains a grid that displays a list of
Independent Layer of Protection records that are linked to the LOPA record whose
datasheet is displayed in the datasheet area. Each row in the grid represents one
Layer of Protection record. For each record that appears in the grid, the following
Sequence Number: The value that exists in the Sequence Number field in
the Independent Layer of Protection record.
IPL ID: The value that exists in the IPL ID field in the Independent Layer
of Protection record.
Description: The value that exists in the Description field in the

Independent Layer of Protection record.
Type: The value that exists in the Type field in the Independent Layer of
Protection record.
PFD: The value that exists in the PFD field in the Independent Layer of
Protection record.
Add New IPL: Displays a new blank Independent Layer of Protection

record in a new window.
Delete IPL: Displays a confirmation message, and then deletes the

selected Independent Layer of Protection record.
You can collapse and expand the Independent Protective Layers section using the
following buttons, which appear on the top right corner of the section in turn:
: Indicates that the section is expanded. You can click this button to collapse the
section.
: Indicates that the section is collapsed. You can click this button to expand the
section.
The LOPA Definition page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Creating LOPA Records

To create a LOPA record:
1. Access the LOPA Definition page.
2. In the datasheet area, on the Definition tab, provide values for the fields as
desired. Note that the LOPA ID field is required.
3. Click the Details tab.
The Details tab appears.
4. Provide values for the fields as desired. Note that the following fields are
required:
Frequency of Initiating Event
Required Mitigated Consequence Frequency
5. Above the datasheet, click the Save button.
Opening Existing LOPA Records

To open an existing LOPA record:
Function record to which the desired LOPA record is linked.
3. In the Associated Risk Assessments section, locate the LOPA record that you want
to open.
4. In the LOPA ID cell, click the hyperlinked Record ID for the desired record.
The selected LOPA record appears on the LOPA Definition page. At this point, you can
modify the LOPA record, create Independent Layer of Protection records, and access the
Adding Existing LOPA Records to the

Associated Risk Assessments Grid
The following instructions provide details on searching for an existing LOPA record to
link to an Instrumented Function record. When you search for LOPA records, the search
results will contain only LOPA records that are not already linked to an Instrumented
Function record.
To add an existing LOPA record to the Associated Risk Assessments grid:
Function record to which you want to link the LOPA record.
3. Below the Associated Risk Assessments section, click the Add Existing LOPA
button.
4. Provide the desired search criteria, and then click the Find Now button.
5. In the search results, select the row containing the LOPA record that you want to
link to the selected Instrumented Function record, and then click the Open button.
The LOPA record is linked to the Instrumented Functions record and appears in the
Associated Risk Assessments section.
Copying LOPA Records to Create New

Ones
When you copy a LOPA record to create a new one, you are creating a new LOPA record
that is populated with information from the source record. If the source LOPA record is
linked to Independent Layer of Protection records or Consequence Modifier records,
those records will not be linked to the new LOPA record.
To copy a LOPA record and create a new one:
3. In the Associated Risk Assessments section, select the row containing the LOPA
record that you want to copy.
4. Click the Copy LOPA button.
A new LOPA record appears on the LOPA Definition page and is populated automatically
with information from the source record.
5. In the datasheet area, in the LOPA ID field on the Definition tab, type an ID for
the LOPA. This field is required.
The record is saved. At this point you can, link the LOPA record to Independent Layer of
Protection records and Consequence Modifier records.
Removing LOPA Records from the

Associated Risk Assessments Grid
When you remove a LOPA record from the Associated Risk Assessments grid on the
Instrumented Functions (IFs) page, you are deleting the link between the Instrumented
Function record and the LOPA record, and the LOPA record will no longer be associated
with the current SIL Analysis.
To remove a LOPA record from the Associated Risk Assessments grid:

3. In the Associated Risk Assessments section, select the row containing the LOPA
record that you want to remove.
4. Click the Remove LOPA button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to remove the LOPA record
from the SIL Analysis.
The LOPA record is removed from the Associated Risk Assessments grid.
About Independent Layer of Protection

Records
An independent layer of protection is a device, system, or action that exists to prevent a
risk and is independent of the event that initiates the scenario. An independent layer of
protection is external to any other layer of protection or safety instrumented system. The
effectiveness of an independent layer of protection is quantified in terms of its probability
of failure data (PFD), which is a numeric value that represents the probability that the
independent layer of protection will fail to perform its specified function on demand.
Independent Layer of Protection records store details on probability and failure rate data
for an independent layer of protection. When you create an Independent Layer of
Protection record, you are defining the item that helps mitigate a risk, which is also
mitigated by the instrumented function. By defining these items, you can more accurately
assess the SIL value that is associated with a given instrumented function because you are
taking into account all the mitigating factors that exist for that risk.
You can use the values in the Type list to populate an Independent Layer of Protection
record automatically with values from an IPL Type record. IPL Type records are provided
in the baseline database and can defined by an SIS Administrator or SIS Engineer.
You should create one Independent Layer of Protection record per layer of protection that
exists. Via the Independent Layer of Protection datasheet, you can link the Independent
Layer of Protection record to the Equipment or Functional Location record that represents
the equipment or location for which the layer of protection exists.
You can manage Independent Layer of Protection records via the Independent Protective
Layers section on the LOPA Definition page.
Creating Independent Layer of

Protection Records
When you create an Independent Layer of Protection record, you are automatically
linking that record to the LOPA record with which you are currently working. The
following instructions provide details on creating a new Independent Layer of Protection
record. These instructions assume that you are familiar with the fields in Independent
Layer of Protection records and that you want to use a value in the Type list to populate
the record automatically.
To create an Independent Layer of Protection record:
1. Open the LOPA record to which you want to link the Independent Layer of
Protection record.
2. At the bottom of the Independent Protective Layers section, click the Add New
IPL button.
A new blank Independent Layer of Protection record appears in a new window.
3. In the IPL ID field, type an ID for the record.

4. In the Type list, select the desired IPL type.
The Description field is populated automatically with the value stored in the Description
field in the corresponding IPL Type record, and if the IPL type is associated with a:
3.
Fixed PFD value, the PFD field is disabled and populated automatically
with the value stored in the Default Value field in the corresponding IPL
Type record.
PFD range, the PFD field is required.
5. If the PFD field is required, enter a value in the PFD cell.

If the value does not fall within the specified PFD range, a message will appear,
indicating that the value you entered is not valid, and you will need to specify a value that
is within the specified range.
6. In either the Functional Location or Equipment ID field, click the
button.
The Find Items window appears, and the Search In text box is populated automatically
with either Functional Location or Equipment, depending upon the field from which you
accessed the Find Items window.
7. Perform a search for the desired Equipment or Functional Location record.
8. Select the desired record, and then click the Open button.
The Record ID for the selected record appears in the Functional Location or Equipment
ID field, depending upon the family to which the record belongs.
9. Click OK.
The record is saved and appears in the Independent Protective Layers grid.
Deleting Independent Layer of

Protection Records
When you delete an Independent Layer of Protection record, you are deleting the link
between the Independent Layer of Protection record and the LOPA record to which it is
linked and deleting the Independent Layer of Protection record from the Meridium APM
database.
To delete an Independent Layer of Protection record:

1. Open the LOPA record that is linked to the Independent Layer of Protection
record that you want to delete.
2. In the Independent Protective Layers grid, select the row containing the
Independent Layer of Protection record that you want to delete.
3. At the bottom of the Independent Protective Layers section, click the Delete IPL
button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to delete the Independent
Layer of Protection record.
The selected record is deleted and removed from the Independent Protective Layers grid.
About Consequence Modifier Records

A consequence modifier is an action or event, which can increase the probability that a
risk may occur if the action is not mitigated and proceeds into an undesirable event.
Details about a consequence modifier are stored in Consequence Modifier records, which
are linked to LOPA records. When you define a Consequence Modifier record, you are
defining the event or action that exists within a risk scenario and increases the probability
or severity of the undesirable outcome that may occur as a result of that scenario.
For example, assume that the SIL Analysis team is conducting an LOPA to investigate the
risk scenario, illustrated in the following diagram, where each box represents a portion of
the scenario, and each label indicates the family that stores that information:
When Valve A-1001 fails, flammable gas is released into an explosive atmosphere, and if
the flame ignites, causing a vapor cloud explosion in the vicinity of the operator, it could
cause a fatal injury.
In this risk scenario, the fatal injury is consequence of the valve failure, and the following
events or actions are the consequence modifiers:
The flame igniting

The vapor cloud exploding
The operator being in the vicinity of the explosion
Because these actions and events appear within the risk scenario, the probability
associated with the consequence occurring is increased exponentially. In other words, if
the operator was not in the vicinity of the blast, the probability of fatal injury would be
less. By examining the granular events that are associated with a risk, the SIL Analysis
team can more accurately assess the SIL value for the instrumented function.
Accessing the Consequence Modifiers

Page
The Consequence Modifiers page lets you manage the Consequence Modifier records that
are linked to a given LOPA record.
To access the Consequence Modifiers page:
1. Open the desired LOPA record on the LOPA Definition page.
2. On the Navigation menu, click the Modifiers link.
The Consequence Modifiers page appears.
Aspects of the Consequence Modifiers

Page
The Consequence Modifiers page displays a grid, which contains a list of Consequence
Modifier records that are linked to the LOPA record with which you are currently
working. Each row in the grid represents one Consequence Modifier record. For each
Consequence Modifier record in the grid, the following information is displayed:
Consequence Modifier ID: The value that exists in the Consequence Modifier ID
field in the Consequence Modifier record. This value appears as a hyperlink,
which you can use to open the Consequence Modifier record.
Description: The value that exists in the Description field in the Consequence
Modifier record.
Probability: The value that exists in the Probability field in the Consequence
Modifier record.
Type: The value that exists in the Type field in the Consequence Modifier record.
Add New Modifier: Displays a new blank Consequence Modifier record in a new
window.
Remove Modifier: Displays a confirmation message, and then removes the
Consequence Modifier record from the grid.
The Consequence Modifier page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Creating New Consequence Modifier

Records
When you create a Consequence Modifier record, you are linking that record to the
LOPA record with which you are currently working.
To create a new Consequence Modifier record:
1. Access the Consequence Modifier page.
2. Below the grid, click the Add New Modifier button.
A new blank Consequence Modifier record appears.
3. Provide values in the fields as desired. Note that the following fields are required:
Consequence Modifier ID
Probability
4. Click OK.
The record is saved and appears in the grid.
Removing Consequence Modifier

Records from the Consequence
Modifiers Grid
When you remove a Consequence Modifier record from the Consequence Modifiers grid,
you are deleting the Consequence Modifier record from the Meridium APM database and
the link between the Consequence Modifier record and the LOPA record to which it is
linked.
To remove a Consequence Modifier record from the Consequence Modifiers grid:
1. Access the Consequence Modifiers page.
2. In the grid, select the row containing the Consequence Modifier record that you
want to remove.
3. Below the grid, click the Remove Modifier button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to remove the record from the
current LOPA.
The record is deleted and removed from the grid.
About Promoting Instrumented

Functions to ASM
When you promote an Instrumented Function record to ASM, the Meridium APM system
will automatically create in ASM one:
Asset Strategy for the Equipment or Functional Location record that is linked to
the Instrumented Function record and link that Asset Strategy to the Instrumented
Function record through the Was Promoted to ASM Element relationship.
Before you promote an Instrumented Function record to ASM, you should specify on the
SIS Management Administration page whether you want the Meridium APM system to
promote the Equipment record that is specified in the Equipment ID field or the
Functional Location record that is specified in the Functional Location ID field.
Note: If an Asset Strategy already exists for the record that is linked to the Instrumented
Function record, the existing Asset Strategy will be used.
Action record for each Inspection Task record that is linked to the Instrumented
Function record and links those Action records to the Instrumented Function
record through the Was Promoted to ASM Element relationship. The Action
records that are created are are read-only, meaning that you cannot modify the
records.
Failure Risk record for each risk category that exists in the Risk Assessment
record that is linked to the Instrumented Function record and links the Failure
Risk records to the Instrumented Function records through the Was Promoted to
ASM Element relationship. The Failure Risk records that are created will be readonly, meaning that you cannot modify the records.
Additionally, if you update in SIS Management the Instrumented Function record or and
records that are linked to that record, if you promote that Instrumented Function record
again, the updates that you made in SIS Management will also saved in ASM. For
example, if you link an additional Inspection Task record to the Instrumented Function
record that was already promoted to ASM, when you promote that Instrumented Function
record again, one additional Action record will be created for the new Inspection Task
record and linked to the Asset Strategy that exists for the Instrumented Function record.
Before you can promote an Instrumented Function record to ASM, the Instrumented
Function record must be linked to:

On Risk Assessment record.
Note: You cannot promote to ASM an Instrumented Function record whose risk
assessment method is a LOPA.
The ASM link on the Assessment Tasks menu will be disabled until the preceding criteria
are met for an Instrumented Function record that is selected in the Instrumented
Functions pane on the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page. When you click the ASM link,
a submenu appears with the following options:
-or-
Promote: If the record has not yet been promoted to ASM, the Instrumented
Function record will be promoted to ASM, and the Asset Strategy Overview
page will appear, displaying the Asset Strategy overview for the
If the record has already been promoted to ASM, the Asset Strategy will be updated with
any changes that were made since it was first created, and the Asset Strategy Overview
page will appear, displaying the Asset Strategy overview for the Instrumented Function
record.
View: If the record has not yet been promoted to ASM, this link is disabled.
-orIf the record has already been promoted to ASM, the Asset Strategy Overview page will
appear, displaying the existing Asset Strategy.
Promoting Instrumented Functions to

ASM
To promote an Instrumented Function record to ASM:
2. In the Instrumented Functions pane, select the row containing the Instrumented
Function record that you want to promote to ASM.
3. On the Assessment Tasks menu, click the ASM link.
A submenu appears.
4. On the submenu, click the Promote link.
The Asset Strategy Overview page appears, displaying the Asset Strategy overview for
Viewing Asset Strategies Created from

To view an Asset Strategy that was created from an Instrumented Function record:
2. In the Instrumented Functions pane, select the row containing the Instrumented
Function record whose Asset Straegy you want to view.
3. On the Assessment Tasks menu, click the ASM link.
A submenu appears.
4. On the submenu, click the View link.
The Asset Strategy Overview page appears, displaying the Asset Strategy overview for
About Proof Testing

Safety instrumented systems and each instrumented function within that system needs to
be tested to ensure that the system is functioning to the standards for which it is designed.
A proof test consists of a set of steps that you need to perform to test safety instrumented
systems and instrumented functions. The conditions under which the test is conducted
should represent the normal conditions under which the system is intended to operate.
Depending on the group of equipment or devices that make up a safety instrumented
system, you will want to define a set of test steps that apply to a given group equipment
or devices. In other words, you will need to define one set of test steps that you can reuse
when you test similar systems.
For each proof test that you want to conduct, you should create at least one record in each
of the following families:
SIS Proof Test Template: Stores details about a given proof test, including the
steps that need to be performed. For each unique set of test steps that exists, you
will need to create one SIS Proof Test Template record to store those details.
SIS Proof Test Template Detail: Stores the details on each specific step that needs
to be performed for the test. SIS Proof Test Template Detail records are linked to
SIS Proof Test Template records through the Has Template Detail relationship.
You should create one SIS Proof Test Template Detail record for each step that is
required for that test.
SIS Proof Test: Stores details about a proof test that you perform, including the
test results. When you create an SIS Proof Test record, you will need to specify
the SIS Proof Test Template record that contains the details about the proof test
you want to perform. When you select the SIS Proof Test Template record, one
Functional Test Detail record will be created for each SIS Proof Test Template
Detail record that is linked to the SIS Proof Test Template record. For each proof
test that you want to perform, you will need to create one SIS Proof Test record.
You can, however, reuse SIS Proof Test Template records.
You can think of the SIS Proof Test Template record and SIS Proof Test Template Detail
records as the specification for how the test should be performed, and the SIS Proof Test
record and Functional Test Details records as a record of the test occurring.
To conduct a proof test, you will nee to complete the following steps:
1. Define the proof test steps that need to be performed for a given safety
instrumented system by creating one Proof Test Template record for each type of
test that will need to be performed. Creating an SIS Proof Test Template record
includes linking SIS Proof Test Template Detail records to the SIS Proof Test
Template record.
2. Create on SIS Proof Test record, which serves as a record of the test event and
stores the results of that test.
After you have completed a proof test, you can create Risk Assessment Recommendation
records to record recommendations for how a particular proof test can be improved. For
example, you may want to suggest adding or removing a particular step from the proof
test requirements.
This section of the documentation provides details on managing SIS Proof Test Template
and SIS Proof Test records. For details on how these families participate in the SIS
Management data model, see the SIS Management data model image.
Common Tasks Menu
When you are working with SIS Proof Test Template records in SIS Management, the
Common Tasks menu will appear and contains the following links:
View Templates: Displays the Proof Test Templates page, where you can view a
list of existing SIS Proof Test Template records that are linked to the Safety
Instrumented System record or Instrumented Function record with which you are
currently working. This link is disabled on the Proof Test Templates page.
Create Templates: Displays a new blank SIS Proof Test Template record on the
Proof Test Template Definition page.
Copy Template: Displays a new SIS Proof Test Template record on the Proof Test
Template Definition page that is populated with information from the source SIS
Proof Test Template record. This link is enabled only when you are viewing an
existing SIS Proof Test Template record.

manage Risk Assessment Recommendation records that are linked to an SIS Proof
Test Template record. This link is enabled only when you are viewing existing SIS
Proof Test Template records.
Page.
Reports: Displays a submenu that displays the caption of the Catalog item Proof
Test Template Report as a link. The Reports link appears only on the Proof Test
Template Definition page and is enabled only when you are viewing an existing
SIS Proof Test Template record.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the page that you are currently
viewing.
Accessing the Proof Test Template

Definition Page
Accessing the Proof Test Template Definition page:
1. Access the Safety Instrumented Systems page (if you want to link the SIS Proof
Test Template record to a Safety Instrumented System record).
-orAccess the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page (if you want to link the SIS Proof Test
Template record to an Instrumented Function record).
2. In the grid, select the record to which you want to link the SIS Proof Test
Template record.
3. On the Assessment Tasks menu, click the Test Templates link, and then click
Create.
The Proof Test Template Definition page appears.
Aspects of the Proof Test Template

Definition Page
The Proof Test Template Definition page contains the SIS Proof Test Template datasheet,
which is a master/detail datasheet that contains two sections:
Master record: Contains fields that you can use to describe the proof test.
Proof Test Template Details: Contains a grid that displays a list of SIS Proof Test
Template Detail records, which store details on the individual steps that need to be
performed during the proof test. Each row in the grid represents one SIS Proof
Test Template Detail record. For each record that appears in the grid, the
following information is displayed:
Step Sequence Number
Template Detail ID
Step Type
Test Criteria
Result Criteria
Location ID
Equipment ID
Add New Details: Displays a new blank SIS Proof Test Template Detail
record.
Add Existing Details: Displays the Find Items window, where you can
search for an existing SIS Proof Test Template Detail record to link to the
SIS Proof Test Template record.
Delete Details: Displays a confirmation message, and then deletes the

selected SIS Proof Test Template Detail record.
The Proof Test Template Definition page contains the following task menus:
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Creating SIS Proof Test Template

Records
When you create an SIS Proof Test Template record, you are defining the proof test and
related steps that need to be performed when you test a given safety instrumented system
or instrumented function within that system. You can create SIS Proof Test Template
records and link them to records in the following families:
The following instructions provide details on creating an SIS Proof Test Template record
that will be linked automatically to a record in the preceding families. The SIS Proof Test
Template datasheet is a master/detail datasheet. This means that when you create the SIS
Proof Test Template record, you will also need to create SIS Proof Test Template Detail
records that will be linked automatically to the SIS Proof Test Template record.
To create an SIS Proof Test Template record:
1. Access the Proof Test Template Definition page.
2. In the master record, provide values in the fields as desired.
3. In the Proof Test Template Details section, click the Add New Details button.
A new blank SIS Proof Test Template Detail record appears in a new window.
Note: You can link existing SIS Proof Test Template Detail records to the SIS Proof Test
Template record via the Add Existing Details button. These instructions assume that you
want to create a new SIS Proof Test Template Detail record. For details on adding
existing SIS Proof Test Template Detail record to SIS Proof Test Template records, see
the topic for adding existing SIS Proof Test Template Detail Records to the SIS Proof
Test Template Detail record.
4. Provide values in the fields as desired, and then click OK.
The SIS Proof Test Template Detail record is linked to the SIS Proof Test Template record
and appears in the Proof Test Template Details section.
5. Continue linking SIS Proof Test Template Detail records as desired.
The SIS Proof Test Template record is saved.
Accessing a List of Existing SIS Proof

Test Template Records
The following instructions provide details on accessing the Proof Test Templates page,
where you can view a list of SIS Proof Test Template records that are linked to the
currently selected Safety Instrumented System record or instrumented function record.
You can use this page to view the list of proof tests that have been defined or define a
new proof test that is based on an existing proof test.
To access the list of existing SIS Proof Test Template records:
1. Access the Safety Instrumented Systems page (if you want to view the SIS Proof
Test Template records that are linked to a Safety Instrumented System record).
-orAccess the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page (if you want to view the SIS Proof Test
Template records that are linked to an Instrumented Function record).
2. In the grid, select the record whose SIS Proof Test Template records you want to
view.
3. On the Assessment Tasks menu, click the Test Templates link.
A submenu appears.
The Proof Test Templates page appears.
Aspects of the Proof Test Templates

Page
The Proof Test Templates page contains the Proof Test Templates grid, which displays the
list of SIS Proof Test Template records that are linked to the Safety Instrumented System
record or Instrumented Function record with which you are currently working. Each row
in the grid represents one SIS Proof Test Template record. For each record in the grid, the
following information appears:
Template ID: The value that exists in the Template ID field in the SIS Proof Test
Template record.
Description: The value that exists in the Template Description field in the SIS
Proof Test Template record.
Author: The value that exists in the Author field in the SIS Proof Test Template
record.
Created On: The value that exists in the Created On field in the SIS Proof Test
Template record.
Modified Date: The value that exists in the Modified Date field in the SIS Proof
Test Template record.
Create Template: Displays a new blank SIS Proof Test Template record on the
Proof Test Template Definition page.
Add Existing Template: Displays the Find Items window, where you can search
for an existing SIS Proof Test Template record to link to the Safety Instrumented
System record or Instrumented Function record with which you are currently
working.
Remove Template: Displays a confirmation message, and then removes the
selected SIS Proof Test Template record from the Proof Test Templates grid.
The Proof Test Templates page contains the following task menus:
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Viewing an Existing SIS Proof Test

Template Record
When you are viewing the list of proof tests, you can view the details of that proof test.
When you do so, you are opening the SIS Proof Test Template record on the Proof Test
Template Definition page. When you are viewing the details of the record, you can also
modify the information that is stored in the record.
To view the details of an existing SIS Proof Test Template record:
1. Access the Proof Test Templates page.
2. In the Proof Test Templates grid, locate the row containing the SIS Proof Test
Template record whose details you want to view.
3. In the Template ID cell in that row, click the hyperlinked Template ID for the
desired record.
The selected record appears on the Proof Test Template Definition page. At this point, you
can modify the record.
Adding Existing SIS Proof Test

Template Detail Records to the SIS
Proof Test Template Record
When you define a proof test in an SIS Proof Test Template record, you will define the
individual steps that should be performed for that test. If desired, you can reuse a step that
is associated with a different proof test. To do so, you will need to search for an existing
SIS Proof Test Template Detail record to link to the SIS Proof Test Template record.
The following instructions provide details on linking an existing SIS Proof Test Template
Detail record to an SIS Proof Test Template record. For details on creating a new SIS
Proof Test Template Detail record to link to the SIS Proof Test Template record, see the
instructions for creating SIS Proof Test Template records.
To add an existing SIS Proof Test Template Detail record to the SIS Proof Test Template
record:
1. Access the SIS Proof Test Template record to which you want to add an SIS Proof
Test Template Detail record.
2. In the Proof Test Template Details section, click the Add Existing Details button.
3. Specify the desired search criteria, and then click the Find Now button.
4. In the search results, select the SIS Proof Test Template Detail records that you
want to link to the SIS Proof Test Template record.
The selected records are linked to the SIS Proof Test Template record and appears in the
Proof Test Template Details section.
6. At the top of the datasheet, click the Save button.
Viewing Existing SIS Proof Test

Template Detail Records
The following instructions provide details on viewing the contents of an SIS Proof Test
Template Detail record that is linked to an SIS Proof Test Template record.
To view an existing SIS Proof Test Template Detail record:
1. Access the SIS Proof Test Template record whose Detail records you want to
view.
2. In the Proof Test Template Details section, locate the row containing the SIS
Proof Test Template Detail record you want to view.
3. In the Template Detail ID cell, click the hyperlinked Template Detail ID.
The selected record appears in a new window.
4. If desired, you can modify the record, and then click OK.
Removing SIS Proof Test Template

Detail Records from the SIS Proof Test
Template Record
If desired, you can remove a step that you previously included in the test steps for a proof
test. To do so, you will need to remove the SIS Proof Test Template Detail record from
the SIS Proof Test Template record. When you remove an SIS Proof Test Template Detail
record from an SIS Proof Test Template record, you are deleting the link between the SIS
Proof Test Template record and the SIS Proof Test Template Detail record, and the SIS
Proof Test Template record will no longer appear in the Proof Test Template Detail
section on the SIS Proof Test Template datasheet.
To remove an SIS Proof Test Template Detail record from the SIS Proof Test Template
record:
1. Access the SIS Proof Test Template record, which is linked to the SIS Proof Test
Template Detail record that you want to remove.
2. In the Proof Test Template Details grid, select the row containing the SIS Proof
Test Template Detail record you want to remove.
3. Below the grid, click the Delete Details button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to remove the SIS Proof Test
Template Detail record from the SIS Proof Test Template record.
The selected SIS Proof Test Template Detail record is removed from the Proof Test
Template Details grid.
Copying SIS Proof Test Template

Records to Create New Ones
You can use an existing proof test definition to define another similar proof test. To do so,
you can copy an existing SIS Proof Test Template record, which will create a new SIS
Proof Test Template record that is automatically populated with information from the
source record. When you create a new SIS Proof Test Template record in this way, the
SIS Proof Test Template Detail records that are linked to the source record are also linked
the new record. These records will not, however, appear in the Proof Test Template
Details section in the new record until after you save the new record.
To copy an SIS Proof Test Template record to create a new one:
1. Access the desired SIS Proof Test Template record.
2. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Copy Template link.
A new SIS Proof Test Template record appears on the Proof Test Template Definition
page and is populated automatically with information from the source record.
3. Modify the values in the master record as desired
The Proof Test Template Details section is populated automatically with the SIS Proof
Test Template Detail records that are linked to the source record.
5. Modify the values in the detail records as desired, including creating new SIS
Proof Test Template Detail records.
6. When you are finished, click the Save button.
Removing SIS Proof Test Template

Records
If an existing proof test is no longer valid, you can remove that proof test from the SIL
Analysis. When you do so, you are deleting the link between the SIS Proof Test Template
record and the Safety Instrumented System record or Instrumented Function record to
which it is linked.
To remove an SIS Proof Test Template record:
1. Access the Proof Test Templates page.
2. In the Proof Test Templates grid, select the row containing the SIS Proof Test
Template record that you want to remove.
3. Below the grid, click the Remove Template button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to remove the proof test from
the SIL Analysis.
The selected record is removed from the Proof Test Templates grid.
About SIS Proof Test Records
SIS Proof Test records store details about a proof test that is executed, including the
results of the proof test. Each SIS Proof Test record will be linked to one or more
Functional Test Detail records, which store details on the steps that you need to perform
during the proof test and the results of each test step.
When you create an SIS Proof Test record, you will need to specify an SIS Proof Test
Template record whose details you will use to perform the proof test. When you do so,
one Functional Test Detail record will be created for each SIS Proof Test Template Detail
record that is linked to the SIS Proof Test Template record that you specified in the SIS
Proof Test record. The Functional Test Detail records will be populated automatically
with information from the source SIS Proof Test Template Detail records.
Common Tasks Menu
When you are working with SIS Proof Test records in SIS Management, the Common
Tasks menu will appear and contains the following links:
View Tests: Displays the Proof Tests page, where you can view a list of existing
SIS Proof Test records that are linked to the Safety Instrumented System record or
Instrumented Function record with which you are currently working. This link is
disabled on the Proof Tests page.
Create Test: Displays a new blank SIS Proof Test record on the Proof Test
Definition page.
manage Risk Assessment Recommendation records that are linked to an SIS Proof
Test record. This link is enabled only when you are viewing existing SIS Proof
Test records.
Page.
Reports: Displays a submenu that displays the caption of the Catalog item Proof
Test Report as a link. The Reports link appears only on the Proof Test Definition
page and is enabled only when you are viewing an existing SIS Proof Test record.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the page that you are currently
viewing.
Accessing the Proof Test Definition Page

Accessing the Proof Test Definition page:
1. Access the Safety Instrumented Systems page (if you want to link the SIS Proof
Test record to a Safety Instrumented System record).
-orAccess the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page (if you want to link the SIS Proof Test
record to an Instrumented Function record).
2. In the grid, select the record to which you want to link the SIS Proof Test record.
3. On the Assessment Tasks menu, click the Proof Tests link.
A submenu appears.
4. On the submenu, click the Create link.
The Proof Test Definition page appears.
Aspects of the Proof Test Definition Page

The Proof Test Definition page contains the SIS Proof Test datasheet, which is a
master/detail datasheet that contains two sections:
Master record: Contains fields that you can use to record the status of the proof
test and specify the SIS Proof Test Template record whose details you will use to
perform the proof test.
Proof Test Details: Contains a grid that displays the list of Functional Test Detail
records that are linked to the SIS Proof Test record. Each row in the grid
represents one Functional Test Detail record. For each record that appears in the
grid, the following information is displayed:
Step Sequence Number
Template Detail ID
Step Type
Test Criteria
Result Criteria
Location ID
Equipment ID
If the Proof Test Status field in the SIS Proof Test record contains the value Closed or
Complete, the SIS Proof Test and Functional Test Detail records are disabled on the
Proof Test Definition page, and you can only the view the values stored in these records.
The Proof Test Definition page contains the following task menus:
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Creating New SIS Proof Test Records
When you create an SIS Proof Test record, you are creating a record of the proof test that
takes place in your facility. You can create SIS Proof Test records and link them to
records in the following families:

The following instructions provide details on creating an SIS Proof Test record that will
be linked automatically to a record in the preceding families. The SIS Proof Test
datasheet is a master/detail datasheet. When you create the SIS Proof Test record and
specify an SIS Proof Test Template record, Functional Test Detail records will be linked
automatically to the SIS Proof Test record that are created based on the SIS Proof Test
Template Detail records that are linked to the SIS Proof Test Template record. For details
on the relationships that exist between these families, see the data model image.
To create an SIS Proof Test record:
1. Access the Proof Test Definition page.
2. In the master record, in the Functional Test Template list, select the Template ID
for the SIS Proof Test Template record that contains the test information that you
want to use for the proof test. This field is required.
3. Provide values in the remaining fields in the master record as desired.
The record is saved, and the Proof Test Details section is populated automatically with
Functional Test Detail records. At this point, you can perform the proof test and record
the results in the SIS Proof Test record.
Accessing the List of Existing SIS Proof

Test Records
The following instructions provide details on accessing a list of SIS Proof Test records
that are currently linked to a given Safety Instrumented System record or Instrumented
Function record.
To access the list of existing SIS Proof Test records:
1. Access the Safety Instrumented Systems page (if you want to view the SIS Proof
Test records for a Safety Instrumented System record).
-orAccess the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page (if you want to view the SIS Proof Test
records for an Instrumented Function record).
2. In the grid, select the desired record.
3. On the Assessment Tasks menu, click the Proof Tests link.
A submenu appears.
The Proof Tests page appears.
Aspects of the Proof Tests Page

The Proof Tests page contains the Proof Test Tests grid, which displays the list of SIS
Proof Test records that are linked to the Safety Instrumented System record or
Instrumented Function record with which you are currently working. Each row in the grid
represents one SIS Proof Test record. For each record in the grid, the following
information appears:
Test ID: The value that exists in the Test ID field in the SIS Proof Test record.
Test Description: The value that exists in the Test Description field in the SIS
Proof Test record.
Template ID: The value that exists in the Functional Test Template field in the SIS
Proof Test record.
Create Test: Displays a new blank SIS Proof Test record on the Proof Test
Definition page.
Delete Test: Displays a confirmation message, and then deletes the selected SIS
Proof Test record.
The Proof Test Templates page contains the following task menus:
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Opening SIS Proof Test Records

The following instructions provide details on opening an existing SIS Proof Test record to
view its contents.
To open an SIS Proof Test record:
1. Access the Proof Tests page.
2. In the Proof Tests grid, locate the row containing the SIS Proof Test record whose
contents you want to view.
3. In the Test ID cell, click the hyperlinked ID for the record.
The selected record appears on the Proof Test Definition page.
4. If desired, you can modify the values in the fields, and then click the Save button.
Recording Proof Test Results in SIS

Proof Test Records
When you perform a proof test, you can record the results of each step that is required for
that test via the SIS Proof Test record for that proof test.
To record proof test results in an SIS Proof Test record:
1. Access the SIS Proof Test record for the current proof test.
2. In the Proof Test Details section, locate the row containing the Functional Test
Detail record, which stores the details of the step for which you want to record the
results.
3. In the Template Detail ID cell, click the hyperlinked Template Detail ID.
The selected Functional Test Detail record appears in a new window.
4. Provide values in the fields as desired to indicate the results of the test step.
5. Click OK.
The record closes, revealing the Proof Test Definition page. You can continue recording
test step results in this way.
6. When you are finished, click the Save button.
About Protective Instrument Loops

A protective instrument loop consists of interconnected instruments that work together to
serve a function that is defined for the safety instrumented system in which they exist.
When you create a protective instrument loop in SIS Management, you are creating a
Protective Instrument Loop record, and when you define the components of the
protective instrument loop (i.e., the interconnected instruments), you are creating records
in the Protective Instrument Loop Element family and its subfamilies and linked them to
the Protective Instrument Loop record. Throughout this documentation, when we refer to
the protective instrument loop, we are referring to the Protective Instrument Loop record
and all the records that are linked to it, and when we refer to Protective Instrument Loop
Element records, we are referring to the records that are linked to the Protective
Instrument Loop.
When you are working with protective instrument loops in SIS Management, it is helpful
to visualize the components of that protective instrument loop as a diagram. For example,
the following image shows the baseline protective instrument loop diagram as it appears
on the Protective Instrument Loop Diagram View page. When you first access the SIL
Validation feature for an SIL Analysis, this diagram will appear by default, and you can
use it as a starting point for defining your protective instrument loop.
For more details on the components of a protective instrument loop, see the data model
image, where the Protective Instrument Loop family is the predecessor.
Additionally, you can create protective instrument loop templates, which are protective
instrument loops that are specified as a template via the Protective Instrument Loop
record for that protective instrument loop. When you are working with protective
instrument loop templates in SIS Management, you will use the same features (e.g., the
diagram view shown in the preceding image). Within these features, however, the context
of the pages will specify that you are working with a template. For more details on the
SIL Validation feature, see the topic about the SIL Validation feature.
About the SIL Validation Feature

The SIL Validation feature lets you define the various components of protective
instrument loops or protective instrument loop templates so that you can see how the
components will work together to achieve the safety integrity level that was determined
based on the risks associated with these components.
Using the SIL Validation feature, you will complete the following steps:
1. Define the components of a protective instrument loop or template.
2. Calculate results.
3. View a summary of these results in graphical format.
The SIL Validation feature includes the following pages, which you can use to complete
the preceding steps:
Protective Instrument Loop Summary: Lets you view the Protective Instrument
Loop record and graphs, which provide a summary of the calculated data that is
stored in Protective Instrument Loop Element records.
Protective Instrument Loop Grid View: Lets you view hierarchically how the
Protective Instrument Loop Element records relate to one another in the Meridium
APM database.
Protective Instrument Loop Diagram View: Lets you represent visually the
physical components of the protective instrument loop or template and how they
work together. This is the page that appears by default when you access the SIL
Validation feature.
Each page presents a different view of the components of the protective instrument loop
and contains the following task menus:
Navigation
SIL Validation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
When you attempt to get your bearings in the SIL Validation feature, keep in mind that
each page in the feature displays a custom view of the records that exist in the Meridium
APM database.
To begin using the SIL Validation feature, you can:
Open an existing protective instrument loop.

Create a new protective instrument loop from scratch.
Create a new protective instrument loop based on a template.
Create a new protective instrument loop template from scratch.
Create a new protective instrument loop template based on a protective instrument

loop.
Copy an existing protective instrument loop template to create a new one.
Throughout this documentation, when we refer to protective instrument loops, we are

referring to the non-template protective instrument loop. When we discuss templates for
protective instrument loops, we refer to them as protective instrument loop templates.
The SIL Validation Workflow

When you use the SIL Validation feature, you will complete the following steps:
1. Define the components of the protective instrument loop, using the diagram view.
2. Define the properties of the components, using the grid view.
3. Calculate the values that are defined in the records for the components.
4. View a summary of the data, using the summary view.
5. Define recommendations for the protective instrument loop.
The Navigation Menu

The Navigation menu appears on all the pages where you are working with protective
instrument loops, but it does not appear when you are working with a protective
instrument loop template. This menu contains the following links:
Analysis Definition: Displays the SIL Analysis Definition page, where you can
modify an SIL Analysis record or create a new one.
Systems: Displays the Safety Instrumented Systems page, where you can manage
the Safety Instrumented System records for the current SIL Analysis.
Functions: Displays the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page, where you can
manage the Instrumented Function records for the current SIL Analysis.
Asset Health Manager: Displays the SIS - Asset Health Manager for <Protective
Instrument Loop Record ID> (Protective Instrument Loop) page, where you can
manage Health Indicator records for the current protective instrument loop.
Note: The integration between SIS Management and Asset Health Manager (AHM) is not
documented.
All Recommendations: Displays the Recommendation Management page, where

you can manage the list of Risk Assessment Recommendation records for the
current SIL Analysis.
manage the SIL Analysis Revision records that exist for the analysis. This link is
enabled only if the state of the SIL Analysis record with which you are currently
working has ever been set to Complete.
The SIL Validation Menu
The SIL Validation menu appears on all the pages within the SIL Validation feature. A
green arrow to the left of an option indicates the feature that you are currently viewing.
The SIL Validation menu contains the following links:
Summary: Displays the Protective Instrument Loop Summary page, where you
can view a summary of the protective instrument loop.
Grid: Displays the Protective Instrument Loop Grid View page, where you can
view the records that make up the protective instrument loop.
Diagram: Displays the Protective Instrument Loop Diagram View page, where
you can illustrate the protective instrument loop in diagram form.
Calculate: Calculates the values that are stored in the records that make up the
protective instrument loop.

manage Risk Assessment Recommendation records for the protective instrument
loop. This link does not appear when you are working with protective instrument
loop templates.
The Common Tasks Menu
The Common Tasks menu appears on all the pages within the SIL Validation features and
contains the following links:
Save Loop: Saves the records with which you are currently working.
Delete Loop: Displays a confirmation message and then deletes the Protective
Instrument Loop record with which you are currently working.
Save As Template: Displays on the Protective Instrument Loop Template page a

copy of the selected Protective Instrument Loop record, where the new record is
specified as a template.
Apply Template: Displays the Protective Instrument Loop dialog box, where you
can select the Protective Instrument Loop record whose values you want to use to
populate the current Protective Instrument Loop record.
Reference Documents: Displays the Reference Documents dialog box, where you
can manage Reference Document records that are linked to the Protective
Instrument Loop record.
Reports: Displays a submenu that displays the caption of the Catalog item
Protective Instrument Loop Report as a link, which you can click to view the
Protective Instrument Loop Report.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the current page.
About Creating Protective Instrument

Loops
When you create a protective instrument loop, you will need to complete the following
steps:
1. Create the Protective Instrument Loop record and the Protective Instrument Loop
Element records that are linked to that record. The Meridium APM system will
create the Protective Instrument Loop record and the default Protective Instrument
Loop Element records automatically when you select to create a new protective
instrument loop for an Instrumented Function.
2. Add components to the protective instrument loop in addition to the default
components. When you add an element to the protective instrument loop, you are
creating a record and linking it to the Protective Instrument Loop record for that
To add components to a protective instrument loop, you can use either of the following
views:
1.
o
The diagram view
The grid view
Note: This documentation assumes that you want to use the diagram view to add
components to the protective instrument loop.
3. Define the properties of each element that is included in the protective instrument
loop diagram by providing values in the Protective Instrument Loop Element
records and the Protective Instrument Loop record. To define the properties of a
protective instrument loop, you can use either of the following views:
o The diagram view
o
The grid view
Note: This documentation assumes that you want to use the diagram view to define the
properties of the protective instrument loop.
For details on the components of a protective instrument loop, see the data model
diagram, where the Protective Instrument Loop family is the predecessor.
Creating New Protective Instrument

Loops Manually
The following instructions provide details on creating a new protective instrument loop
diagram by adding elements to the default diagram. When you create a protective
instrument loop diagram, you are creating a Protective Instrument Loop record. As you
add components to the diagram, you are creating a record in the family that represents
that element.
To create a new protective instrument loop manually:
2. In the Instrumented Functions grid, select the row containing the Instrumented
Function record for which you want to create a protective instrument loop
diagram.
3. On the Assessment Tasks menu, click the Protective Loops link.
The Protective Instrument Loop Diagram View page appears, displaying the default
protective instrument loop diagram, which you can use as a starting point for creating
your protective instrument loop.
Note: If a Protective Instrument Loop record is already linked to the selected
Instrumented Function record, a submenu appears, displaying options that you can use to
create a new Protective Instrument Loop record or view the existing one. These
instructions assume that you want to create a new Protective Instrument Loop. In this
case, if the submenu appears, click the Create link, and the Protective Instrument Loop
Diagram View page will appear.
4. Add the desired components to the grid.
5. Define the properties of the components as desired.
6. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Save Loop link.
The protective instrument loop is saved.

Loops Based on a Template
The following instructions provide details on creating a new protective instrument loop
based on a template. When you create a protective instrument loop based on a template,
the Meridium APM system will automatically:
Populate the Protective Instrument Loop record with the information from the
Protective Instrument Loop record for the template.
Create and populate the Protective Instrument Loop Element records that are
linked to the Protective Instrument Loop record, using the values in the template.
Create the diagram.
After you create a protective instrument loop based on a template, you can modify it as
desired.
To create a new protective instrument loop based on a template:
2. In the Instrumented Functions grid, select the row containing the Instrumented
Function record for which you want to create a protective instrument loop.
The Protective Instrument Loop Diagram View page appears, displaying the default
protective instrument loop diagram.
Note: If a Protective Instrument Loop record is already linked to the selected

Instrumented Function record, a submenu appears, displaying options that you can use to
create a new protective instrument loop or view the existing one. These instructions
assume that you want to create a new protective instrument loop. In this case, if the
submenu appears, click the Create link, and the Protective Instrument Loop Diagram
View page will appear.
4. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Apply Template link.
The Protective Instrument Loop dialog box appears, displaying a list of Protective
Instrument Loop records that are specified as templates.
5. In the grid, select the row containing the template that you want to use.
6. Click OK.
The Protective Instrument Loop dialog box closes, and the Protective Instrument Loop
Diagram View page refreshes and displays the protective instrument loop that is
populated automatically with data from the template.
7. Modify the elements of the protective instrument loop as desired.
The protective instrument loop is saved.
About Opening Existing Protective

Instrument Loops
When you open an existing protective instrument loop, you are accessing the Protective
Instrument Loop record and the associated records that make up that protective
instrument loop.
You can open an existing protective instrument loop from:
Search results that return all existing Protective Instrument Loop records.
The associated Instrumented Function record in an SIL Analysis.
Accessing a List of Existing Protective

Instrument Loops
When you access a list of existing protective instrument loops, you are accessing a list of
Protective Instrument Loop records, which represent the protective instrument loop.
To access a list of existing protective instrument loops:
On the SIS Management Start Page, click the SIL Validation link.
The Protective Loop Search page appears, displaying the list of existing Protective
Instrument Loop records.
Aspects of the Protective Loop Search

Page
The Protective Loop Search page contains the Protective Loop Search workspace, which
displays the results of the query specified in the Protective Loop Search Query text box
on the SIS Management Administration page. This documentation assumes that you are
using the baseline Safety_Loop_Search query, which contains a State prompt that appears
a list at the top of the Protective Loop Analysis Search workspace. The State list contains
a list of record states that have been configured for the Protective Instrument Loop
family. You can choose from the following baseline states:
Approval: Displays the list of existing Protective Instrument Loop records whose
State field contains the value Approval.
Design: Displays the list of existing Protective Instrument Loop records whose
State field contains the value Design.
In Service: Displays the list of existing Protective Instrument Loop records whose
State field contains the value In Service.
Out of Service: Displays the list of existing Protective Instrument Loop records
whose State field contains the value Out of Service.
Pending Approval: Displays the list of existing Protective Instrument Loop

records whose State field contains the value Pending Approval.
Selecting the All option displays the list of ALL Protective Instrument Loop records that
exist in the Meridium APM database. This is the default option.
After you select the desired state, you can click the Run Query button to run the
Safety_Loop_Search query and display the results in the grid at the bottom of the page.
The query results will include hyperlinked Record IDs, which you can click to open the
protective instrument loop on the Protective Instrument Loop Diagram View - <Analysis
ID> page, where <Analysis ID> is the value in the Analysis ID field in the SIL Analysis
record with which you are currently working.
The SIL Analysis Search page contains the following task menus:
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Using the Protective Loop Search page, you can:

Delete a protective instrument loop.
Calculate the SIL Validation results for one or multiple protective instrument
loops.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Protective Loop Search page contains the following
links:
Find Loop: This link is always disabled.

Delete Loop: Displays a confirmation message, and then deletes the selected
record.
selected protective instrument loop(s).
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the Protective Loop Search
page.
Opening an Existing Protective

Instrument Loop
To open an existing protective instrument loop:
1. Access the Protective Loop Search page.
2. In the State list, select the desired record state, and then click the Run Query
button.
The results appear in the grid.
3. In the results grid, select the row containing the Protective Instrument Loop
record that represents the protective instrument loop that you want to open.
4. In the ID cell, click the hyperlinked Record ID.
The protective instrument loop represented by the selected Protective Instrument Loop
record appears on the Protective Instrument Loop Diagram View - <SIL Analysis> page,
where <SIL Analysis> is the value in the Analysis ID field in the SIL Analysis record
with which the Protective Instrument Loop records is associated.
Opening Protective Instrument Loops

Associated with an Instrumented
Function in an SIL Analysis
To open a protective instrument loop associated with an instrumented function in an SIL
Analysis:
1. Access the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page for the desired SIL Analysis.
Function record that is linked to the Protective Instrument Loop record that you
want to open.
A submenu appears with options that let you create a new protective instrument loop or
view the existing protective instrument loop that is associated with the selected
Instrumented Function record. These instructions assume that you want to view the
existing protective instrument loop.
The protective instrument loop appears on the Protective Instrument Loop Diagram View
page.
Note: If the selected Instrumented Function record is associated with more than one
protective instrument loop, the Protective Instrument Loop Search page appears, where
you can search for the desired Protective Instrument Loop record.
Aspects of the Protective Instrument

Loop Diagram View Page
When you select to create a new protective instrument loop or open an existing one, the
Protective Instrument Loop Diagram View page will appear by default. The Protective
Instrument Loop Diagram View page contains the Protective Instrument Loop workspace,
which contains the following sections:
Explorer pane: Contains a hierarchical view of the relationships that exist between
the records that represent the components of the protective instrument loop. For
each level in the hierarchy, an associated element appears in the Diagram grid.
When you select a level in the hierarchy, the associated element will be
highlighted in green in the Diagram Canvas. You can hide and display the
Explorer pane, using the icon.
Diagram Canvas: Serves as an interactive drawing interface where you can build a
diagram of the protective instrument loop. Each element represents a record, and
each line between the elements represents the relationship that exists between
those records. When you first access the Design Canvas, baseline elements appear
and serve as a starting point for defining the protective instrument loop. You can
double click an element to display the datasheet for the record that is represented
by that element. Additionally, you can double click a blank space on the Diagram
Canvas to view the Protective Instrument Loop record for that protective
instrument loop.
Palette pane: Contains elements that represent components of a protective
instrument loop. Each element corresponds to a family whose records can be
linked to the Protective Instrument Loop record. You can drag an element to the
Diagram Canvas to add that element to the protective instrument loop. The
Palette pane contains the following elements:
Sensor
Sensor Group
Final Element Group
Final Element
The icon for each element in the Palette pane includes a connection point to the left,
right, or on both sides of the icon, which indicates where that element can be added to the
Diagram Canvas. For example, an element with only a connection point to the right can
be added to the Diagram Canvas only as the first element. An element with connection
points on both sides, however, can be added anywhere in the diagram. You can hide and
display the Palette pane using the icon.
Above the Protective Instrument Loop workspace, the
button appears, which
displays the State Assignments dialog box, where you can manage the Security Users that
are assigned to the states that are defined for the Protective Instrument Loop family. To
the right of the icon, the following options appear:
State indicator: Displays the current state of the Protective Instrument Loop
record.
Operations link: Displays a submenu that lists the available operations for the
current record. You can use this option to change the state of the Protective
Using the Protective Instrument Loop Diagram View page, you can:
Add elements to the protective instrument loop diagram.

Define the properties of each element.
Delete elements from the protective instrument loop diagram.
Link Risk Assessment Recommendation records to the Protective Instrument

Loop record that represents the protective instrument loop.
Adding Elements to the Protective

Instrument Loop Diagram
When you add an element to the protective instrument loop, you are creating a record and
linking it to the Protective Instrument Loop record that represents the protective
instrument loop. Note that adding an element to the protective instrument loop diagram
does not assign properties to that element. After you add an element to the diagram, you
will still need to define its properties by entering values in the fields in the record that it
represents.
To add an element to the protective instrument loop diagram:

1. Open the desired Protective Instrument Loop record on the Protective Instrument
Loop Diagram View page.
2. In the Palette pane, select the element that you want to add to the protective
instrument loop diagram.
3. Drag the element and drop it in the desired location on the Design Canvas.
The element is added to the diagram. At this point you can define the properties of that
element or link an existing Element record to the element.
Defining Element Properties in the

Diagram View
When you define properties for an element via the diagram view, you are entering values
into fields in the record represented by that element. The following instructions provide
details on defining a new Element record from scratch. Alternatively, you can link an
existing Element record to an element.
To define element properties in the diagram view:
1. Open the desired protective instrument loop.
page.
2. In the Diagram Canvas, double-click the element whose properties you want to
define.
The record that is represented by that element appears in a new window. For example, the
following image shows a Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record.
3. Provide values in the fields on the datasheet as desired.
4. Click OK.
Removing Elements from the Protective

Instrument Loop Diagram
When you remove an element from the protective instrument loop diagram, you are
deleting:
The link between the Protective Instrument Loop record and the record that is
represented by that element.
The record that is represented by that element.
The records that are linked to the selected record as successors.
Note: You cannot remove an element that appears in the diagram by default.
To remove elements from the protective instrument loop diagram:
1. Access the desired protective instrument loop on the Protective Instrument Loop
Diagram View page.
2. On the Diagram Canvas, right-click the element that you want to remove from the
diagram.
A shortcut menu appears.
Note: The shortcut menu does not appear if you right-click a element that appears in the
diagram by default.
3. Click the Delete link.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to delete the selected element.
The selected element is removed from the protective instrument loop diagram.
Linking Existing Records to Elements in

the Protective Instrument Loop
Rather than creating an Element record from scratch and linking it to the element in the
protective instrument loop, you can link an existing Element record to an element in the
protective instrument loop. Additionally, if an element is already linked to an Element
record, you can replace the existing Element record with an existing Element record.
When you do so:
If the current Element record is not linked to any other protective instrument
loops, that Element record will be deleted.
If the current Element record is linked to one or more other protective instrument
loops, that Element record will be unlinked from the current protective instrument
loop, and will not be deleted.
The following instructions provide details on linking an existing Element record to an

element in a protective instrument loop.
To link an existing record to an element in a protective instrument loop:
1. Open the desired protective instrument loop.
page.
2. In the diagram canvas, double-click the element to which you want to link an
existing record.
The record that is represented by that element appears in a new window. For example, the
following image shows a Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record.
3. Click the Link button.

The Protective Instrument Loop dialog box appears, displaying a list of existing Element
records in the same family. The header on this dialog box indicates the name of the
family (e.g., Sensor). For example, the following image shows how the Protective
Instrument Loop dialog box appears when you access it from a Protective Instrument
Loop Sensor record.
4. Select the row containing the Element record that you want to link to the element,
and then click OK.
The Protective Instrument Loop dialog box closed, and if the element to which you are
linking an existing Element record is already linked to an Element record that is:
Not linked to any other Protective Instrument Loop records, a message

appears, indicating that the Element record you selected will replace the
current Element record, and then the current Element record will be
deleted. Clicking OK on this message will delete the current Element
record and replace it with the selected Element record.
Linked to one or more other Protective Instrument Loop records, a
message will appear, indicating that the record cannot be deleted until it is
unlinked from the current protective instrument loop. Clicking OK on this
message will unlink the current Element record and link the selected
Element record.
5. If the datasheet window is still open, on the datasheet window, click OK.
The datasheet window closes.
Unlinking Elements from a Protective

Instrument Loop
The following instructions provide details on removing the link between a record
representing an element and the Protective Instrument Loop record representing the
Protective Instrument Loop. Keep in mind that every Protective Instrument Loop must
consist of at least one of ALL the following elements by default:
Logic Solver
Sensor System
Sensor Group
Sensor
Final Element System
Final Element Group
Final Element
If you remove the link between a Protective Instrument Loop record and the only record
for a required element type (listed above), the Meridium APM system will automatically
create a new, default record of that element type and link it to the Protective Instrument
Loop record.
You can remove any element from a Protective Instrument Loop only if the record
representing that element is linked to more than one Protective Instrument Loop. In this
case, the Unlink button on the datasheet for that record will be enabled. If, however, a
record representing an element is linked to only one Protective Instrument Loop, the
Unlink button will be disabled. These instructions assume that the Unlink button is
enabled.
To unlink an element from a Protective Instrument Loop:
1. Open the Protective Instrument Loop containing the element that you want to
remove.
The Protective Instrument Loop appears on the Protective Instrument Loop Diagram
View page.
2. Open the record representing the element that you want to remove from the
Protective Instrument Loop.
The record appears. The following image shows an example of a Protective Instrument
Loop System record that is linked to more than one Protective Instrument Loop record.
3. Click the Unlink button.

The record closes, and the link between the record representing that element and the
current Protective Instrument Loop record is removed.
Accessing the Protective Instrument

Loop Grid View Page
The Protective Instrument Loop Grid View page lets you view the elements of the
protective instrument loop by viewing the records that are represented by those elements.
Unlike the diagram view, where you can add an element to the diagram and then define
the field values in the record that is represented by that element, in the grid view, you can
add element records to the protective instrument loop using Link and Apply buttons,
which appear on the datasheet of some element records.
To access the Protective Instrument Loop Grid View page:
Diagram View page.
2. On the SIL Validation menu, click the Grid link.
The Protective Instrument Loop Grid View page appears.

Loop Grid View Page
The Protective Instrument Loop Grid View page contains the following sections:
Datasheet area: Contains the datasheet for the record that is currently selected in
the Tree pane. At the top of the datasheet area, the following option appears:
Users that are assigned to the states that are defined for the Protective Instrument
Loop family.
State indicator: Displays the current state of the Protective Instrument Loop
record.
Operations link: Displays a submenu that lists the available operations for the
current record.
Tree pane: Contains a hierarchical view of the records that make up the protective
instrument loop. When you select a level in the hierarchy, the corresponding
record will appear in the datasheet area.
When you are viewing some datasheets for Protective Instrument Loop Element families,
the following buttons may appear:
Link: Displays the Protective Instrument Loop dialog box, which contains a list of
records that you can link to the currently selected record. To link one of these
records to the currently selected record, you can select the row containing the
record that you want to link to the currently selected record and then click OK.
Apply: Displays the Protective Instrument Loop dialog box, which contains a list
of records whose contents that you can use to create a new record that is
populated automatically with information from the source record and then link
that record automatically to the currently selected record. The new record will be
linked automatically to the currently selected record. To use an existing record to
create a new record and link it automatically to the currently selected record, you
can select the row containing the desired record and then click OK.
Select: Displays the Protective Instrument Loop dialog box, which contains a list
of Logic Solver records from which you can select the desired element to link to
the protective instrument loop.
Accessing the Protective Instrument

Loop Summary Page
The Protective Instrument Loop Summary page lets you manage the summarized data that
is stored in the records that make up the protective instrument loop that is illustrated in
the diagram on the Protective Instrument Loop Diagram View page.
To access the Protective Instrument Loop Summary page:
Diagram View page.
2. On the SIL Validation menu, click the Summary link.
The Protective Instrument Loop Summary page appears.

Loop Summary Page
The Protective Instrument Loop Summary page displays the datasheet for the
Protective Instrument Loop record for the protective instrument loop with which you are
currently working. Below the datasheet, two graphs appear, which display the following
calculated values per element in the protective instrument loop:
PFD Contribution
MTTFS Contribution
Deleting Protective Instrument Loops
When you delete a protective instrument loop (or protective instrument loop template),
you are deleting the Protective Instrument Loop record and all the Protective Instrument
Loop Element records that are linked to that record. If you try to delete a protective
instrument loop that contains an element that is also linked to a different Protective
Instrument Loop record, you will need to remove the link between that Protective
Instrument Loop Element record and the Protective Instrument Loop record before you
can delete the protective instrument loop.
You can delete one or multiple protective instrument loops at one time. These instructions
provide details on deleting only ONE protective instrument loop at a time.
To delete a protective instrument loop:
1. Access the Protective Loop Search page (for non-template protective instrument
loops)
-orAccess the Protective Instrument Loop Template Search page (for protective instrument
loop templates).
2. In the search results, select the row containing the protective instrument loop you
want to delete.
3. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Delete Loop link.
A message appears, asking if you want to delete the selected protective instrument loop.
The protective instrument loop is deleted.
Note: If the Protective Instrument Loop record is linked to any Element records that are
linked to additional Protective Instrument Loop records, a message will appear, indicating
that you must remove the link between these Element records and the Protective
Instrument Loop record before you can delete the protective instrument loop.
About Protective Instrument Loop

Templates
If you create a protective instrument loop that you want to use as a template for creating
additional protective instrument loops in the future, you can use that protective
instrument loop to create a template, or you can create a protective instrument loop
template manually.
A protective instrument loop template is the same as a protective instrument loop,
meaning that it consists of a Protective Instrument Loop record and all the records that
are linked to that record as elements of the protective instrument loop. Each record that is
associated with the protective instrument loop for a template, however, is specified as a
template via the Is Template field in the record. Note that the Is Template field value is
set by the Meridium APM system automatically when you create a protective instrument
loop template. The field does not appear on any datasheet by default and is not meant to
be modified manually.
When you save a protective instrument loop as a template, the Meridium APM system
will automatically:
Create a copy of the Protective Instrument Loop record.

Create a copy of each record that is linked to the Protective Instrument Loop
record as an element of the protective instrument loop and link those records to
the Protective Instrument Loop record for the template with one exception. When
the Meridium APM system copies a Protective Instrument Loop Final Element
record, the values stored on the Dangerous Combination of Outputs tab are not
copied to the template record.
Select the Is Template check box in each of the copied records (i.e., setting this
value to true.), which identifies the protective instrument loop as a template.
After a protective instrument loop template exists:
As with a non-template protective instrument loop, you can view the records that
make up the protective instrument loop in the grid view, diagram view, and
summary view.
As with a non-template protective instrument loop, you can calculate the SIL
Validation results.
It will not appear in the query results on the Protective Loop Search page.
You can search for it on the Protective Instrument Loop Template Search page.
As with non-template protective instrument loops, when you are working with a
protective instrument loop template, you will use the following pages to complete the
tasks associated with a protective instrument loop:
Protective Instrument Loop Diagram View: Lets you view the components of the
protective instrument loop template as a diagram. This is the default view.
Protective Instrument Loop Grid View: Lets you view the components of the
protective instrument loop in record form and in a hierarchy, which is similar to
the Record Explorer pane in the Record Manager.
Protective Instrument Loop Summary View: Lets you view the Protective
Instrument Loop record for the template and graphs, which provide a summary of
the calculated data that is stored in each Protective Instrument Loop Element
record for the template.
Note: Unlike working with these pages for a non-template protective instrument loop,
instead of displaying the text Protective Instrument Loop in the workspace, the text
Protective Instrument Loop Template will appear, indicating that you are working with a
template.
Each page presents a different view of the components of the protective instrument loop
template and contains the following task menus:
SIL Validation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
When you attempt to get your bearings with templates in the SIL Validation feature, keep
in mind that each page in the feature displays a custom view of the records that exist in
the Meridium APM database.
To begin working with protective instrument loop templates, you can:
Create a protective instrument loop template from scratch.

Create a protective instrument loop template as a copy of an existing protective
instrument loop template.
Save an existing protective instrument loop as a template.
About Creating Protective Instrument

Loop Templates
As with non-template protective instrument loops, when you are working with a
protective instrument loop template, you will complete the following steps:
1. Create the Protective Instrument Loop record for the template and the Protective
Instrument Loop Element records that are linked to that record. The Meridium
APM system will automatically create these records when you select to create a
template:
o Based on an existing protective instrument loop.
o
From scratch.
Based on an existing template.
2. Add elements to the protective instrument loop template in addition to the default
elements (for a new template) or existing elements (for a template that is created
based on an existing template or non-template protective instrument loop). When
you add an element to a protective instrument loop template, you are creating a
record in a family and linking that record to the Protective Instrument Loop
record for that protective instrument loop template.
To add elements to the protective instrument loop template, you can use either of the
following views:
The diagram view

The grid view
Note: You can use the same instructions for adding components to a template as adding
components to a non-template protective instrument loop.
3. Define the properties of each node that is included in the protective instrument
loop template diagram, meaning that you will provide values in the Protective
Instrument Loop Element records and the Protective Instrument Loop record for
the template.
To define the properties of the protective instrument loop template, you can se the
following view:
The diagram view

The grid view
Note: You can use the same instructions for defining the properties of nodes for a
template as defining the properties of nodes for a non-template protective instrument
loop.
For details on the components of a protective instrument loop, see the data model
diagram, where the Protective Instrument Loop family is the predecessor.
Creating Protective Instrument Loop

Templates from Scratch
To create a protective instrument loop template from scratch:
1. Access the Protective Loop Template Search page.
2. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Create Template link.
A new protective instrument loop template appears on the Protective Instrument Loop
Diagram View page.

5. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Save Template link.
The protective instrument loop template is saved.

Templates Based on Existing Protective
Instrument Loops
If you create a protective instrument loop that you want to use as a template to create
additional protective instrument loops in the future, you can save that protective
instrument loop as a template.
When you save a protective instrument loop as a template, you are automatically:
Creating a copy of the source Protective Instrument Loop record and the
Protective Instrument Loop Element records that are linked to that record.
Selecting the Is Template check box in the copied records.
In other words, you are creating a protective instrument loop template that is based on a
non-template protective instrument loop.
To create a protective instrument loop template based on existing protective instrument
loop:
1. Open the protective instrument loop that you want to use as a template.
2. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Save As Template link.
The page refreshes and displays the protective instrument loop template, which is
populated automatically with the information from the source protective instrument loop.
5. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Save Template link.
The protective instrument loop template is saved.
Copying Protective Instrument Loop

Templates to Create New Ones
When you copy a protective instrument loop template to create a new one, the Meridium
APM system will automatically:
Create a copy of the Protective Instrument Loop record for the template.
Create a copy of each Protective Instrument Loop Element record that is linked to
the Protective Instrument Loop record for the template.
Append the name of the protective instrument loop with copy. For example, if you
copy a protective instrument loop template named Template Loop -02, the new
protective instrument loop template will be named Template Loop -02 copy.
To copy a protective instrument loop template to create a new one:

2. In the search results, select the row containing the protective instrument loop
template that you want to copy.
3. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Copy Template link.
The Protective Instrument Loop Template Search page refreshes, and a new protective
instrument loop template appears in a new row in the search results.
Accessing the Protective Loop Template

Search Page
On the Protective Loop Template Search page, you can search for and manage existing
protective instrument loop templates.
To access the Protective Loop Template Search page:
1. Access the SIS Management Start Page.
2. Click the SIL Validation Template link.
The Protective Loop Template Search page appears.
Aspects of the Protective Loop Template

Search Page
The Protective Loop Template Search page contains the Protective Loop Template Search
workspace, which displays the results of the query specified in the Protective Loop
Template Search Query text box on the SIS Management Administration page. This
documentation assumes that you are using the baseline Safety_Loop_Template_Search

query, which contains the State prompt that appears as a list at the top of the Protective
Loop Template Search workspace. The State list contains a list of record states that have
been configured for the Protective Instrument Loop family. You can choose from the
following baseline states:
Approval: Displays the list of existing Protective Instrument Loop records whose
State field contains the value Approval.
Design: Displays the list of existing Protective Instrument Loop records whose
State field contains the value Design.
In Service: Displays the list of existing Protective Instrument Loop records whose
State field contains the value In Service.
Out of Service: Displays the list of existing Protective Instrument Loop records
whose State field contains the value Out of Service.
Pending Approval: Displays the list of existing Protective Instrument Loop

records whose State field contains the value Pending Approval.
Selecting the All option will cause the query to return all Protective Instrument Loop
records in any state.
After you select different criteria, you can click the Run Query button to run the
Safety_Loop_Template_Search query and displays the results in the grid at the bottom of
the page. The query results will include hyperlinked Template IDs, which you can use to
open the protective instrument loop on the Protective Instrument Loop Diagram View
page.
The Protective Loop Template Search page contains the following task menus:
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Using the Protective Loop Template Search page, you can:
Open an existing protective instrument loop template.

Create a new protective instrument loop template from scratch.
Create a new protective instrument loop template by copying an existing

protective instrument loop template.
Delete a protective instrument loop template.
Calculate the SIL Validation results for multiple protective instrument loop
templates.
The Common Tasks Menu

The Common Tasks menu on the Protective Loop Template Search page contains the
following links:
Find Template: This link is disabled.

Create Template: Displays on the Protective Instrument Loop Diagram View page
the Protective Instrument Loop Template screen with a new protective instrument
loop template.
Copy Template: Displays in a new row in the grid on the Protective Loop
Template Search page a new protective instrument loop template with the same
name as the source template, appended with copy.
Delete Template: Displays a confirmation message, and then deletes the current
selected protective instrument loop template(s).
Page.
Help: Displays the context sensitive help topic for the Protective Loop Template
Search page.
Opening Existing Protective Instrument

Loop Templates
The following instructions provide details on searching for an existing protective
instrument loop templates and opening a protective instrument loop.
To open an existing protective instrument loop template:
2. In the State list, select the state that corresponds to the value in the State field in
the Protective Instrument Loop record for the protective instrument loop template
that you want to open.
4. In the search results, locate the row containing the protective instrument loop
template that you want to open, and in the ID cell, click the hyperlinked Template
ID for the desired record.
The selected protective instrument loop template appears on the Protective Instrument
Loop Diagram View page.
About Calculating SIL Validation

Results
Note: The details in this section of the documentation can also be used when working
with protective instrument loop templates.
The values that are used to calculate SIL Validation results come from the Protective
Instrument Loop Element records that are linked to the Protective Instrument Loop
record. SIL Validation results for a protective instrument loop can be calculated manually
or by the Meridium APM system.
You can specify how you want to calculate the SIL Validation results via the SIL
Validation Method field in the Protective Instrument Loop record. On the datasheet, this
field appears as a list that contains the following values:
Internal Calculation: Indicates that the results will be calculated by the Meridium
APM system. When the SIL Validation Method field contains the value Internal
Calculation, the Calculated Results section on the Protective Instrument Loop
datasheet is disabled and populated automatically with the calculation results.
External Calculation: Indicates that the results will be calculated manually. When
the SIL Validation Method field contains the value External Calculation, the
Calculated Results section on the Protective Instrument Loop datasheet is
enabled. You can use the fields in the Calculated Results section to manually
calculate SIL Validation results.
The Meridium APM system will calculate SIL Validation results when you click the
Calculate link, which is available in the following locations:
SIL Validation task menu in the SIL Validation feature. This option lets you
calculate the results for an individual protective instrument loop.
Common Tasks menu on the Protective Loop Search. This option lets you
calculate the results for multiple protective instrument loops at one time.
-or-
Note: You can calculate the results for multiple protective instrument loop templates
using this option on the Protective Loop Template Search page.
Calculating SIL Validation Results for a

The following instructions provide details on calculating the SIL Validation results for a
single Protective Instrument Loop (or protective instrument loop template). The results of
the calculation are stored in the Protective Instrument Loop record and can be viewed via
the Protective Instrument Loop Summary page.
To calculate SIL Validation results for a Protective Instrument Loop:
On any page within the SIL Validation feature, on the SIL Validation menu, click
the Calculate link.
If the results were calculated successfully, a message appears, indicating

that the results were calculated successfully.
If the results were not calculated successfully, a message appears,

indicating that the calculation was unsuccessful and that the results have
not been updated.
If the calculation cannot be performed because values required for the

calculation have not been provided, the Missing Required Values dialog
box appears, displaying the list of fields that require a value, sorted by the
record in which the field exists. You will need to provide the required
values and then calculate the results again.
Calculating SIL Validation Results for

Multiple Protective Instrument Loops
The following instructions provide details on calculating the SIL Validation results for
more than one protective instrument loop at one time. These results are stored in the
Protective Instrument Loop record and can be viewed via the Protective Instrument Loop
Summary page.
These instructions can also be used to calculate the results for more than one protective
instrument loop template.
To calculate SIL Validation results for multiple Protective Instrument Loops:
1. Access the Protective Loop Search page (for non-template protective instrument
loops).
-orAccess the Protective Instrument Loop Template Search page (for protective instrument
loop templates).
2. In the search results, select the rows containing the protective instrument loops
whose SIL Validation results you want to calculate.
3. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Calculate link.
The Calculation dialog box appears and displays the progress of the calculations. After
the results have been calculated, the Calculation dialog box displays a message,
indicating that the calculation operation is finished, as shown in the following image.
Hint: To view the list of protective instrument loops that were calculated and whether the
calculation finished successfully or failed, click the Detail>> button.
4. Click OK.
The Calculation dialog box closes.
About Calculation Details

After you calculate multiple protective instrument loops, on the Calculation dialog box,
you can click the Details>> button to view the list of protective instrument loops that
you selected to calculate and the status of that calculation.
The details of the calculation can contain the following status messages:
External Calculation: This indicates that the value in the SIL Validation Method
field in the Protective Instrument Loop record is External.
Failed: This indicates that the calculation failed to return results.
Succeeded: This indicates that the calculated results were returned successfully.
Unable to calculate: This indicates that there are some required values missing
from the protective instrument loop.
About the Missing Required Values

Dialog Box
The Missing Required Values dialog box will appear if you try to calculate the SIL
validation results or save the Protective Instrument Loop record and the values required
for the SIL validation calculations have not been provided.
Note: You can save a Protective Instrument Loop record without providing the required
values. You cannot, however, successfully calculate SIL Validation results without
providing these values.
The Missing Required Values dialog box displays a grid that contains a list of fields that
are required for the calculation and for which a value has not been provided. These fields
are grouped by the Record ID of the record in which they exist. Each row in the grid
represents one field. For each field, the following columns are displayed:
Caption: Displays the datasheet caption for that record family.

Value: Displays a text box, where you can provide a value for that field.
In the Value cell in the grid, you can type a value for only some of the required fields. In
some cases, you will need to navigate to the datasheet itself to provide a value. You will
know that you can type the value directly in the Value cell on the Missing Required
Values dialog box if a cursor appears in the Values cell when you click the cell. If a cursor
does not appear, you will need to navigate to the datasheet. For example, because the
Actuator field on a Final Element datasheet contains a list, in order to provide a value in
this field, you will need to do so via the datasheet for that family.
Below the grid, the following options appear:
OK: Closes the Missing Required Values dialog box.

Check: Refreshes the grid, removing fields for which you have provided a valid
value.
About Protective Instrument Loop Final

Element Records
Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records can be defined via the <Record ID>
(Protective Instrument Loop Final Element) window, which contains the following tabs:
Final Element: Displays the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element datasheet,
which is a custom form datasheet that contains fields that you can use to define
the final element.
Dangerous Combination of Outputs: Allows you to define hazards associated
with combined output states for final elements.
About Defining Hazards Associated

With Combined Output States
When you define a Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record, you will need to
define the potential hazards that can occur if the output state associated with the final
element is combined with the output state associated with a different final element. While
the output state associated with individual final elements is safe, in some cases, when
output states associated with multiple final elements are combined, a hazardous event can
occur. For example, if the output state associated with Final Element A has the potential
to fill a tank half full, and the output state associated with Final Element B has the
potential to fill the same tank half full, these combined output states have the potential to
overflow the tank. In this way, Final Element A and Final Element B have a combined
output state hazard.
You can document combined output state hazards that exist for final elements via the
Dangerous Combination of Outputs tab on the <Record ID> (Protective Instrument Loop
Final Element) window. In other words, for each final element that participates in a
potentially hazardous relationship, you will need to define the combined output state
hazard(s) for that final element.
The Dangerous Combination of Outputs tab allows you to manage all the combined
output state hazards that exist for a final element. To define combined output state
hazards for a final element, you will need to:
Link the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record to the other Protective
Instrument Loop Final Element record representing the final element whose
output state can cause a hazard when combined with the output state of the current
final element. Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records can be linked to
one or more other Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records through the
Has Hazardous Event relationship.
Describe the hazardous event that can occur when the output states are combined.
Because some final elements can participate in multiple combined output state
hazard scenarios, in each Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record, you
will need to describe the hazardous events that are associated with that final
element. In other words, describing the hazardous event in one Protective
Instrument Loop Final Element record will not automatically populate the linked
Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record with the same description.
The following image illustrates the records that participate in a combined output state
hazard scenario in which the combination of two output states can lead to a hazardous
event.
Notice that the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record to which you link other
Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records is the predecessor in the relationship.
When you are working with Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records, it is
helpful to refer to the SIS Management data model image where the Protective
Instrument Loop family is the predecessor family.
The following image shows the Dangerous Combination of Outputs tab on the <Record
ID> (Protective Instrument Loop Final Element) window for the final element with the
Record ID Final Element template 1 2.
Aspects of the Dangerous Combination

of Output States Tab in Protective
Instrument Loop Final Element
Records
The Dangerous Combination of Outputs tab on the <Record ID> (Protective Instrument
Loop Final Element) window contains the Dangerous Combination of Outputs? check
box, which lets you indicate whether the final element represented by the current record
is associated with any hazards that result from a combination of output states. When the
Dangerous Combination of Outputs? check box is:
Selected, the remaining options on the Dangerous Combination of Outputs tab are
enabled, and a message appears, indicating that you must link at least one
Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record to the current Protective
Instrument Loop Final Element record. The additional Protective Instrument Loop
Final Element record represents the final element whose output state combined
with the output state of the current final element can lead to a hazardous event.
After you link at least one Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record to the
current record, the message is hidden.
Cleared, the remaining options on the Dangerous Combination of Outputs tab are
disabled. This indicates that the final element represented by the current
Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record is not associated with any
combined output state hazards. You will need to open the linked Protective
Instrument Loop Final Element record and enter the description of the combined
output state hazard.
After at least one Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record is linked to the
current Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record, the Dangerous Combination of
Outputs? check box is disabled. In addition, you can clear this check box only if the
Individual Output States grid is empty (i.e., there are no combined output state hazards
associated with the final element).
Below the Dangerous Combination of Outputs? check box, the following sections
appear:
Individual Output States: Contains a grid that displays the list of Protective
Instrument Loop Final Element records that are linked to the current Protective
Instrument Loop Final Element record. Each row in the grid represents one final
element whose output state can lead to a hazardous event if it is combined with
the output state associated with the output state of the current final element. The
following information is displayed for each Protective Instrument Loop Final
Element record that appears in the grid:
Final Element ID: An ID for the final element that is stored in the Final
Element ID field in the corresponding Protective Instrument Loop Final
Element record.
Final Element Description: A description for the final element that is

stored in the Description field in the corresponding Protective Instrument
Loop Final Element record.
Function ID: The value stored the IF ID field in the Instrumented Function
record to which the corresponding Protective Instrument Loop Final
Element record is linked.
Function Description: The value stored in the IF Description field in the

Instrumented Function record to which the corresponding Instrument Loop
Final Element record is linked.
Add Existing: Displays the Find Items window, which you can use to
search for an existing Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record
and link it to the current Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record.
After you link a Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record to the
current Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record, a new row will
appear in the Individual Output States grid to represent that final element.
between the selection Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record
and the current Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record and
removes the final element from the grid. This button is disabled until at
least one Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record appears in the
Individual Output States grid.
Potential Combination of Outputs Description: Contains a field, which stores the

description of the combined output state hazards that are associated with the
current final element. This field is required. If the current final element is
associated with multiple combined output state hazards, you should provide a
description in this field for each of these hazards.
Defining Combined Output State

Hazards for Final Elements
To define a combined output state hazard for final elements, you will need to:
Link to one another the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records whose
associated output states can cause a hazard if they occur simultaneously.
Describe in each of the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records the
hazardous event that can occur if the output states associated with the final
elements occur simultaneously.
To define a combined output state hazard for final elements:

1. Open the Protective Instrument Loop record that contains the final element for
which you want to define a combined output state hazard.
2. In the Diagram Canvas, double-click the Final Element node representing the
final element for which you want to define a combined output state hazard.
The Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record appears in the <Record>
(Protective Instrument Loop Final Element) window.
3. Click the Dangerous Combination of Outputs tab.

The Dangerous Combination of Outputs tab appears.
4. Select the Dangerous Combination of Outputs? check box.
The remaining options are enabled, and a message appears, indicating that you must link
at least one Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record to the current Protective
Instrument Loop Final Element record.
5. In the Individual Output States section, click the Add Existing button.
The Search Related Final Element dialog box appears, displaying the list of existing
Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records.
6. In the grid, select the rows containing the Protective Instrument Loop Final
Element records that you want to link to the current Protective Instrument Loop
Final Element record, and then click OK. Keep in mind the records you select
should represent the final elements whose output states can lead to a hazardous
event if they occur simultaneously with the output state of the current final
element.
The Search Related Final Element dialog box closes, and the record(s) you selected
appear in the Individual Output States grid. For example, in the following image, you can
see that two Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records are linked to the
Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record XL0615-009 A.
7. In the Combination Hazardous Event section, enter a description for the

elements occur simultaneously.
8. In the Individual Output States section, in the first row in the grid, click the
hyperlinked ID in the Final Element ID cell.
The corresponding Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record appears in a new
<Record ID> (Protective Instrument Loop Final Element) window.

The Dangerous Combination of Outputs tab appears. In addition, you can see that the
Dangerous Combination of Outputs? check box is selected automatically and the
Individual Output States grid contains the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element
record to which the current record is linked (i.e., the record from which you accessed the
current record).
10. In the Combination Hazardous Event section, enter a description for the
elements occur simultaneously. This should be the same description that you
entered in step 7.
11. Click OK.
Your changes are saved, and the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record closes,
revealing the previous Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record.
12. Repeat steps 8 through 11 for each Protective Instrument Loop Final Element
record that appears in the Individual Output States grid.
13. Click OK.
Your changes are saved, and the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record closes.
Removing Final Elements From the

Dangerous Combination of Outputs
Tab
When you remove a final element from the Dangerous Combination of Outputs tab, you
are deleting the link between the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records.
To remove a final element from the Dangerous Combination of Outputs tab:
1. Open the Protective Instrument Loop that contains the final element whose
corresponding record you want to modify.
2. In the Diagram Canvas, double-click the Final Element node representing the
final element from which you want to remove a different final element.
The Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record appears in a new window.

The Dangerous Combination of Outputs tab appears.
4. In the Individual Output States grid, select the row containing the final element
that you want to remove.
Hint: You may want to update the text stored in the Combination Hazardous Event
section in the corresponding Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record before you
remove it from the current record. To do so, click the hyperlinked value in the Final
Element ID cell in that row.
Hint: You may want to update the text stored in the Combination Hazardous Event
section in the current record.
Your changes are saved, and the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record closes.
About the Protective Instrument Loop

Report
The Protective Instrument Loop report provides an overview of the protective instrument
loop and displays the following information:
Loop ID: Displays the value that exists in the Loop ID field in the associated
Protective Instrument Loop record.
Description: Displays the value that exists in the Description field in the
associated Protective Instrument Loop record.
Long Description: Displays the value that exists in the Long Description field in
the associated Protective Instrument Loop record.
Loop Class: Displays the value that exists in the Loop Class field in the associated
Loop Type: Displays the value that exists in the Loop Type field in the associated
SIL Demand Mode: Displays the value that exists in the Demand Mode field in
Systematic Capability Validation: Displays the value that exists in the Systematic
Capability Validation field in the associated Protective Instrument Loop record.
Mission Time: Displays the value that exists in the Mission Time field in the
Startup Time: Displays the value that exists in the Startup Time field in the
Required SIL: Displays the value that exists in the Required SIL field in the
Meets SIL Requirements: Displays the value that exists in the Meets SIL
Requirement? field in the associated Protective Instrument Loop record.
Achieved SIL: Displays the value that exists in the Achieved SIL field in the
Evaluated Architectural Constraints: Displays the value that exists in the Meets
Architectural Constraints field in the associated Protective Instrument Loop
record.
Risk Reduction Factor: Displays the value that exists in the Risk Reduction Factor
field in the associated Protective Instrument Loop record.
MTTS (years): Displays the value that exists in the MTTFS Years field in the
Status: Displays the value that exists in the Status field in the associated
Status Changed Date: Displays the date on which the value in the Status field was
updated last.
Status Changed By: Displays the value that exists in the Last Modified By field in
Last Modified By: Displays the value that exists in the Last Modified By field in
Last Modified Date: Displays the value that exists in the Last Modified Date field
in the associated Protective Instrument Loop record.
In addition to the preceding information, the Protective Instrument Loop Report contains
a table, which contains various information that is stored in the Protective Instrument
Loop Element records that are linked to the Protective Instrument Loop record.
Viewing the Protective Instrument Loop

Report
To view the Protective Instrument Loop report:
1. Open the protective instrument loop or protective instrument loop template for
which you want to view the Protective Instrument Loop report.
A submenu appears.
3. On the submenu, click the Protective Instrument Loop Report link.
Note: The name of the link is the caption of the Catalog item Protective Instrument Loop
Report. This link is called the Protective Instrument Loop Report by default.
The Protective Instrument Loop report appears in the Report Viewer.
Viewing SIL Analysis Graphs

The following instructions provide details on viewing the graphs that appear on the
Graphs submenu on the Common Tasks menu when you are viewing and SIL Analysis
record. This submenu displays all the reports that exist in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS Management\SIL\Graphs.
To view an SIL Analysis graph:
1. Access the SIL Analysis record whose report you want to view.
A submenu appears.
3. On the submenu, click the link that corresponds to the caption of the graph that
you want to view. For example, click the SIL Assignment Summary Graph link.
The selected report appears in the Graph Viewer. The following image shows an example
of the baseline SIL Assignment Summary Graph.
Viewing SIL Analysis Reports

The following instructions provide details on viewing the reports that appear on the
Reports submenu on the Common Tasks menu when you are viewing and SIL Analysis
record. This submenu displays the reports that exist in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS Management\SIL\Reports. By default, this folder
contains the SIL Analysis Report.
To view an SIL Analysis report:
1. Access the SIL Analysis record whose report you want to view.
A submenu appears.
3. On the submenu, click the link that corresponds to the caption of the report that
you want to view. For example, click the SIL Analysis Report link.
The selected report appears in the Report Viewer.
About the Safety Requirement

Specifications Report
The Safety Requirement Specifications report contains all the details from an SIL
Analysis that are required to meet compliance for IEC standard 61511. You can use this
report to:
Provide proof of compliance with IEC 61511.

Identify gaps in compliance with IEC 61511.
The Safety Requirement Specifications report displays values that are stored in the
records that make up an SIL Analysis.
It is stored in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS
Management\SIL\Reports and titled SRS Report. You can access the report using the
Reports link on the Common Tasks menu on the SIL Analysis Definition page. When you
access the Safety Requirement Specifications report in this way, the Meridium APM
system will automatically pass in the Entity Key for the SIL Analysis record to which all
other records that make up and SIL Analysis are linked.
While you can run the Safety Requirement Specifications report directly from the Catalog
folder and pass in an Entity Key manually, we recommend that you run the report via the
SIL Analysis within the SIS Management module. In addition, you should not modify the
report or any of its supporting queries or subreports.
Accessing the Safety Requirement

Specifications Report
The following instructions provide details on accessing the Safety Requirement

Specifications report for an SIL Analysis. When you run the Safety Requirement
Specifications report, the Meridium APM system will automatically pass in the Entity
Key of the SIL Analysis record to which all other records that make up the SIL Analysis
are linked.
To access the Safety Requirement Specification report:
1. Open the SIL Analysis for which you want to view the Safety Requirement
Specifications report.
A submenu appears, displaying the captions of the following Catalog items as links:
SIL Analysis Report
SRS Report
3. Click the SRS Report link.

The Safety Requirement Specifications report appears in the Report Viewer.
About Managing Validation Failure

Rate Reference Data
Failure rate reference data refers to data that exists to record trends in failure rates for
elements that exist in a protective instrument loop. Before you add an element to a
protective instrument loop, you can consider the failure rate reference data that is
associated with that element and make a decision on whether or not to use that particular
element.
SIS Management provides tools that you can use to view Protective Instrument Loop
Element records for sensors, logic solvers, and final elements, where the Is Reference
Data field in that record is set to True. The Is Reference Data check box is not included
on the datasheet by default. This field is used by the Meridium APM system and is not
meant to be modified manually.
When you create a Protective Instrument Loop Element record via the Validation Failure
Rate Reference Data feature, the Meridium APM system will automatically select the Is
Reference Data check box in that record.
You can use the Validation Failure Rate Reference Data feature to determine which
elements are approved for use with a protective instrument loop. After you have
determined that a given element is approved, you can select Approve button below the
datasheet. When you do so, the Meridium APM system will automatically select the
Approved Custom Device check box in that record, and it will be available for selection in
the SIL Validation feature. To approve a Protective Instrument Loop Element record, you
must be a member of the SIS Administrator or SIS Engineer Security Group.
Navigation
The Navigation menu in the Validation Failure Rate Reference Data feature contains the
following links:
Sensors: Displays the Sensor Reference Data Search page, where you can search
for Sensor records.
Logic Solvers: Displays the Logic Solver Reference Data Search page, where you
can search for Logic Solver records.
Final Elements: Displays the Final Element Reference Data Search page, where
you can search for Final Element records.
A green arrow to the left of an option indicates the Protective Instrument Loop Element
family with which you are currently working.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu in the Validation Failure Rate Reference Data Feature contains
the following links, which are context-sensitive, meaning that the family with which you
are currently working will determine the specific context of the link:
Create: Displays a new blank record in the family with which you are currently
working.
Copy: Displays a new record in the family with which you are currently working
that is populated automatically with information from the source record.
Delete: Displays a confirmation message and then deletes the selected record.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the current page.
Accessing the Sensor Reference Data

Search Page
The Sensor Reference Data Search page appears by default when you access the
Validation Failure Rate Reference Data feature.
To access the Sensor Reference Data Search page:

2. Click the Manage Validation Failure Rate Reference Data link.
The Sensor Reference Data Search page appears.
Aspects of the Sensor Reference Data

Search Page
The Sensor Reference Data Search page contains the results of the
Sensor_Reference_Data_Search query. This documentation assumes that you are using
the baseline query, which contains an Approved to Use prompt that appears as a list at the
top of the Sensor Reference Data Search page. The Approved to Use list contains a list of
values that correspond to the state of the Approved Custom Device field in the Protective
Instrument Loop Sensor records. You can choose from the following baseline values:
Yes: Displays all the existing Protective Instrument Loop Sensor records whose Is
Reference Data field is set to True and whose Approved Custom Device check
box is selected.
No: Displays all the existing Protective Instrument Loop Sensor records whose Is
Reference Data field is set to True and whose Approved Custom Device check
box is cleared.
Any (%): Displays all the existing Protective Instrument Loop Sensor records
whose Is Reference Data field is set to True.
This query is run automatically using the default prompt value Any (%). If you select
different criteria, you can click the Run Query button to run the query and display the
results in the grid at the bottom of the page. The query results will include hyperlinked
Record IDs, which you can use to open the Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record on
the Sensor Reference Data page.
The Sensor Reference Data Search page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages

Loop Sensor Records
To open an existing Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record:
1. Access the Sensor Reference Data Search page.
2. Provide the desired search criteria, and then click the Run Query button.
3. In the grid, locate the row containing the Protective Instrument Loop Sensor
record whose contents you want to view.
4. In the Sensor ID cell, click the hyperlinked Record ID for the desired record.
The selected record appears on the Sensor Reference Data page.
Aspects of the Sensor Reference Data

Page
Note: You can access the Sensor Reference Data page by opening an existing Protective
Instrument Loop Sensor record or creating a new one.
The Sensor Reference Data page displays the datasheet for a Protective Instrument Loop
Sensor record. The Protective Instrument Loop Sensor datasheet is a master/detail
datasheet, meaning that below the master record, a Devices pane appears, which contains
a list of Protective Instrument Device records that are linked to the Protective Instrument
Loop Sensor record. The Protective Instrument Device records that appear in this pane
will depend on the values that exist in the Sensor field in the master record. You can
collapse and expand the Devices pane using the and buttons that appears in the top
right corner of the pane.
Below the datasheet, the following buttons appear:
Save: Saves the Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record.

Approve: Selects the Approve Custom Device check box on the Protective
Instrument Loop Sensor datasheet. After you click this button, the label changes
to Revoke Approval.
Revoke Approval: Clears the Approve Custom Device check box on the Protective
Instrument Loop Sensor datasheet. After you click this button, the label changes
to Approve.
The Sensor Reference Data page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Using the Sensor Reference Data page, you can:
Create new Protective Instrument Loop Sensor records from scratch.

Create new Protective Instrument Loop Sensor records as copies of existing
Protective Instrument Loop Sensor records.
Approve Protective Instrument Loop Sensor records.
Revoke approval for Protective Instrument Loop Sensor records.

Loop Sensor Records from Scratch
The following instructions provide details on creating a Protective Instrument Loop

Sensor record for the Validation Failure Rate Reference Data feature. You can also create
Protective Instrument Loop Sensor records using the SIL Validation feature.
To create a new Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record:
1. Access the Sensor Reference Data Search page.
2. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Create link.
The Sensor Reference Data page appears, displaying a new blank Protective Instrument
Loop Sensor record.
3. Provide values in the fields as desired. Note that when you select a value in the
Sensor list, Protective Instrument Device records will appear in the Devices pane.
4. Below the datasheet, click the Save button.

Sensor Records as Copies of an Existing
One
The following instructions provide details on creating a new Protective Instrument Loop
Sensor record as a copy of an existing Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record. These
instructions assume that you are using the Validation Failure Rate Reference Data feature.
You can also create Protective Instrument Loop Sensor records using the SIL Validation
feature.
When you create a new Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record as a copy of an
existing one, the new Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record will contain the same
information as the source record, with the following exceptions:
The Approved Custom Device check box will be clear by default. This setting is
clear by default in all new Protective Instrument Loop Sensor records.
The value in the Sensor ID field will be appended with the number 1 (one). For
each subsequent Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record that you create as a
copy of the same existing Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record, an additional
1 (one) will be appended to the Sensor ID. For example, if you create three new
Protective Instrument Loop Sensor records using the Protective Instrument Loop
Sensor record with the Sensor ID Fire Gas Sensor A, the Sensor ID values for the
new records will be:
Fire Gas Sensor A 1
Fire Gas Sensor A 1 1
Fire Gas Sensor A 1 1 1
You can modify the Sensor ID value, if desired.

If the Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record is linked to Protective Instrument Device
records, those record will also be copied and linked to the new record. When a Protective
Instrument Device record is copied, the value in the ID field will be appended with the
number 1 (one). For each subsequent Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record that you
create as a copy of the same source record (i.e., that is linked to the same Protective
Instrument Device record), an additional number 1 (one) will be appended to the ID in
the new Protective Instrument Device record. You can modify the ID value, if desired.
To create a new Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record as a copy of an existing
Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record:
1. Open the Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record that you want to copy to
create a new Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record.
The Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record appears on the Sensor Reference Data
page.
2. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Copy link.

The new Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record appears on the Sensor Reference
Data page.
3. If desired, you can modify the record. When you are finished, click the Save
button.
Approving and Revoking Approval for

Protective Instrument Loop Sensor
Records
After you have determined that a sensor is approved for use in a protective instrument
loop, you can specify that in the Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record. Additionally,
if you later determine that a sensor is no longer approved for use in a protective
instrument loop, you can revoke that approval in the Protective Instrument Loop Sensor
record.
To approve a Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record:
1. Open the Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record that represents the sensor that
you want to approve.
2. Below the datasheet, click the Approve button.
The Approved Custom Device check box in the Protective Instrument Loop Sensor
record is automatically selected, and the label on the Approve button changes to Revoke
Approval.
To revoke approval for a Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record:
1. Open the Protective Instrument Loop Sensor record that represents the sensor
whose approval status you want to revoke.
2. Below the datasheet, click the Revoke Approval button.
The Approved Custom Device check box in the Protective Instrument Loop Sensor
record is automatically cleared, and the label on the Revoke Approval button changes to
Approve.
Accessing the Logic Solver Reference

Data Search Page
The Logic Solver Reference Data Search page lets you search for existing Protective
Instrument Loop Logic Solver records that are specified as reference data via the Is
Reference Data check box in that family.
To access the Logic Solver Reference Data Search page:
3. On the Navigation menu, click the Logic Solvers link.
The Logic Solver Reference Data Search page appears.
Aspects of the Logic Solver Reference

Data Search Page
The Logic Solver Reference Data Search page contains the results of the
Logic_Solver_Reference_Data_Search query. This documentation assumes that you are
using the baseline query, which contains an Approved to Use prompt that appears as a list
at the top of the Logic Solver Reference Data Search page. The Approved to Use list
contains a list of values that correspond to the state of the Approved Custom Device field
in the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver records. You can choose from the
Yes: Displays all the existing Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver records
whose Is Reference Data field is set to True and whose Approved Custom Device
check box is selected.
No: Displays all the existing Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver records
check box is cleared.
Any (%): Displays all the existing Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver
records whose Is Reference Data field is set to True.
Record IDs, which you can use to open the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver
record on the Sensor Reference Data page.
The Logic Solver Reference Data Search page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages

Loop Logic Solver Records
To open an existing Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record:
1. Access the Logic Solver Reference Data Search page.
3. In the grid, locate the row containing the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver
record whose contents you want to view.
4. In the ID cell, click the hyperlinked Record ID for the desired record.
The selected record appears on the Logic Solver Reference Data page.
Aspects of the Logic Solver Reference

Data Page
Note: You can access the Logic Solver Reference Data page by opening an existing
Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record or creating a new one.
The Logic Solver Reference Data page displays the datasheet for a Protective Instrument
Loop Logic Solver record. The Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver datasheet is a
master/detail datasheet, meaning that below the master record, a Channels/Modules pane
appears, which contains a list of Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver Channel
records that are linked to the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record. You can
link Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver Channel records to the master record or
delete the link between these records using the Add and Remove options that appears in
this pane. You can collapse and expand the Channels/Modules pane using the and
buttons that appears in the top right corner of the pane.
Save: Saves the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record.

Instrument Loop Logic Solver datasheet. After you click this button, the label
changes to Revoke Approval.
Instrument Loop Logic Solver datasheet. After you click this button, the label
changes to Approve.
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Using the Logic Solver Reference Data page, you can:
Create Protective Instrument loop Logic Solver records from scratch.

Create Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver records that are based upon an
existing Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record.
Create Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver records as copies of an existing

Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record.
Link Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver Channel records to a Protective

Instrument Loop Logic Solver record.
Remove the links between a Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record and
Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver Channel records.
Approve a Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record.
Revoke approval for a Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record.

Logic Solver Records from Scratch
Logic Solver record from scratch using the Validation Failure Rate Reference Data
feature. You can also create Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver records using the
SIL Validation feature.
To create a new Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record from scratch:
The Logic Solver Reference Data page appears, displaying a new blank Protective
3. Provide values in the fields as desired.

The record is saved. At this point, you can link the desired Protective Instrument Loop
Logic Solver Channel records to the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record.

Logic Solver Records Based on Existing
Ones
Logic Solver record based on an existing one, using the Validation Failure Rate
Reference Data feature. You can also create Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver
records using the SIL Validation feature.
To create a new Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record based on an existing
one:
The Logic Solver Reference Data page appears, displaying a new blank Protective
3. In the MTTR text box, type the desired numeric value. This field is require before
you can apply an existing record.
4. In the Proof Test Interval text box, type the desired numeric value. This field is
require before you can apply an existing record.
5. In the Proof Test Coverage text box, type the desired numeric value. This field is
require before you can apply an existing record.
The Protective Instrument Loop dialog box appears, displaying the list of existing
Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver records.
7. In the list, select the row containing the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver
record whose contents you want to apply to the new Protective Instrument Loop
Logic Solver record.
8. Click OK.
The new Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record is populated automatically with
information from the selected record, including the Channels/Modules pane.
The record is saved. At this point, you can link Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver
Channel records to the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record.

Logic Solver Records as Copies of an
Existing One
Logic Solver record as a copy of an existing Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver
record. These instructions assume that you are using the Validation Failure Rate
Reference Data feature. You can also create Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver
When you create a new Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record as a copy of an
existing one, the new Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record will contain the
same information as the source record, with the following exceptions:
clear by default in all new Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver records.
The value in the Logic Solver ID field will be appended with a number that is
relative to subsequent copies of the same source record, beginning with 1 (one).
For each subsequent Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record that you
create as a copy of the same existing Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver
record, the number that is appended to the Logic Solve ID will increase by one.
For example, if you create three new Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver
records using the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record with the Logic
Solver ID Logic Solver A, the Logic Solver ID values for the new records will be:
Logic Solver A 1
Logic Solver A 2
Logic Solver A 3
You can modify the Logic Solver ID value, if desired.

If the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record is linked to Protective Instrument
Loop Logic Solver Channel records, these records will also be copied and linked to the
new Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record. When a Protective Instrument
Logic Solver Channel record is copied, the value in the ID field will be appended with a
number that is relative to the subsequent copies of the same source Protective Instrument
Logic Solver record, beginning with 1 (one). For each subsequent Protective Instrument
Loop Logic Solver record that you create as a copy of the same source record, the value
that is appended to the ID in the new Protective Instrument Logic Solver Channel records
will increase by one (as explained above).
To create a new Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record as a copy of an existing
Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record:
1. Open the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record that you want to copy
to create a new Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record.
The Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record appears on the Logic Solver
Reference Data page.

The new Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record appears on the Logic Solver
3. If desired, you can modify the record. When you are finished, click the Save
button.
Linking Protective Instrument Loop

Logic Solver Channel Records to
Protective Instrument Loop Logic
Solver Records
The following instructions provide details on linking Protective Instrument Loop Logic
Solver Channel records to existing Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver records
using the Validation Failure Rate Reference Data feature. You can also link these records
using the SIL Validation feature. For details on using the SIL Validation feature, see the
SIL Validation section of this Help system.
IMPORTANT: Before you can link a Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver Channel
record to a Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record, you must select the Manual
Entry check box in the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record.
To link a Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver Channel record to a Protective
Instrument Loop Logic Solver record:
1. On the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver datasheet for the record to which
you want to link a Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver Channel record, in
the Channels/Modules pane, click the Add button.
A new Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver Channel record appears in a new
window.
2. Provide values in the fields on the datasheet as desired, and then click OK.
The record is linked to the master record and appears in the grid in the Channels/Modules
pane.
3. You can continue adding records in this way. When you are finished, below the
datasheet, click the Save button.
Removing Protective Instrument Loop

Logic Solver Channel Records from
Solver Records
When you remove a Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver Channel record from a
Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record, you are deleting the link between the
two records and removing the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver Channel record
from the grid in the Channels/Modules pane on the Protective Instrument Loop Logic
Solver datasheet.
To remove a Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver Channel record from a Protective
Instrument Loop Logic Solver record:
1. Open the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record that is linked to the
Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver Channel record that you want to
remove.
2. In the Channels/Modules pane, select the row containing the Protective
Instrument Loop Logic Solver Channel record that you want to remove.
3. Below the grid, click the Remove button.
A message appears, asking if you are sure you want to remove the selected record.
The record is removed from the grid.

Solver Records
After you have determined that a logic solver is approved for use in a protective
instrument loop, you can specify that in the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver
record. Additionally, if you later determine that a logic solver is no longer approved for
use in a protective instrument loop, you can revoke that approval in the Protective
To approve a Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record:
1. Open the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record that represents the logic
solver that you want to approve.
The Approved Custom Device check box in the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver
record is automatically selected, and the label on the Approve button changes to Revoke
Approval.
To revoke approval for a Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record:
1. Open the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record that represents the logic
solver whose approval status you want to revoke.
The Approved Custom Device check box in the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver
record is automatically cleared, and the label on the Revoke Approval button changes to
Approve.
Accessing the Final Element Reference

Data Search Page
The Final Element Reference Data Search page lets you search for existing Protective
Instrument Loop Final Element records that are specified as reference data via the Is
Reference Data check box in that family.
To access the Final Element Reference Data Search page:
3. On the Navigation menu, click the Final Elements link.
The Final Element Reference Data Search page appears.
Aspects of the Final Element Reference

Data Search Page
The Final Element Reference Data Search page contains the results of the
Final_Element_Reference_Data_Search query. This documentation assumes that you are
using the baseline query, which contains an Approved to Use prompt that appears as a list
at the top of the Final Element Reference Data Search page. The Approved to Use list
contains a list of values that correspond to the state of the Approved Custom Device field
in the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records. You can choose from the
Yes: Displays all the existing Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records
No: Displays all the existing Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records
check box is cleared.
Any (%): Displays all the existing Protective Instrument Loop Final Element
records whose Is Reference Data field is set to True.
Record IDs, which you can use to open the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element
record on the Sensor Reference Data page.
The Final Element Reference Data Search page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages

Loop Final Element Records
To open an existing Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record:
1. Access the Final Element Reference Data Search page.
3. In the grid, locate the row containing the Protective Instrument Loop Final
Element record whose contents you want to view.
4. In the Final Element ID cell, click the hyperlinked Record ID for the desired
record.
The selected record appears on the Final Element Reference Data page.
Aspects of the Final Element Reference

Data Page
Note: You can access the Final Element Reference Data page by opening an existing
Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record or creating a new one.
The Final Element Reference Data page displays the datasheet for a Protective
Instrument Loop Final Element record. The Protective Instrument Loop Final Element
datasheet is a master/detail datasheet, meaning that below the master record, a Devices
pane appears, which contains a list of Protective Instrument Device records that are
linked to the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record. The Protective Instrument
Device records that appear in this pane will depend on the values that exist in the Final
Element field in the master record. You can collapse and expand the Devices pane using
the and buttons that appears in the top right corner of the pane.
Save: Saves the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record.

Instrument Loop Final Element datasheet. After you click this button, the label
changes to Revoke Approval.
Instrument Loop Final Element datasheet. After you click this button, the label
changes to Approve.
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Using the Final Element Reference Data page, you can:
Create new Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records from scratch.
Create new Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records as copies of an
existing Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record.
Approve a Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record.
Revoke approval for a Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record.

Loop Final Element Records from
Scratch
The following instructions provide details on creating a Protective Instrument Loop Final
Element record for the Validation Failure Rate Reference Data feature. You can also
create Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records using the SIL Validation feature.
To create a new Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record:
1. Access the Final Element Reference Data Search page.
The Final Element Reference Data page appears, displaying a new blank Protective
3. Provide values in the fields as desired. Note that when you select a value in the
Final Element list, Protective Instrument Device records will appear in the
Devices pane.

Final Element Records as Copies of an
Existing One
Final Element record as a copy of an existing Protective Instrument Loop Final Element
record. These instructions assume that you are using the Validation Failure Rate
Reference Data feature. You can also create Protective Instrument Loop Final Element
When you create a new Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record as a copy of an
existing one, the new Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record will contain the
same information as the source record, with the following exceptions:
clear by default in all new Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records.
The value in the Final Element ID field will be appended with the number 1 (one).
For each subsequent Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record that you
create as a copy of the same existing Protective Instrument Loop Final Element
record, an additional 1 (one) will be appended to the Final Element ID. For
example, if you create three new Protective Instrument Loop Final Element
records using the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record with the Final
Element ID Final Element A, the Final Element ID values for the new records will
be:
Final Element A 1
Final Element A 1 1
Final Element A 1 1 1
You can modify the Final Element ID value, if desired.

If the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record is linked to Protective Instrument
Device records, those record will also be copied and linked to the new record. When a
Protective Instrument Device record is copied, the value in the ID field will be appended
with the number 1 (one). For each subsequent Protective Instrument Loop Final Element
record that you create as a copy of the same source record (i.e., that is linked to the same
Protective Instrument Device record), an additional number 1 (one) will be appended to
the ID in the new Protective Instrument Device record. You can modify the ID value, if
desired.
To create a new Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record as a copy of an existing
Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record:
1. Open the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record that you want to copy
to create a new Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record.
The Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record appears on the Final Element

The new Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver record appears on the Logic Solver

Protective Instrument Loop Final
Element Records
After you have determined that a final element is approved for use in a protective
instrument loop, you can specify that in the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element
record. Additionally, if you later determine that a final element is no longer approved for
use in a protective instrument loop, you can revoke that approval in the Protective
To approve a Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record:
1. Open the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record that represents the
final element that you want to approve.
The Approved Custom Device check box in the Protective Instrument Loop Final
Element record is automatically selected, and the label on the Approve button changes to
Revoke Approval.

To revoke approval for a Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record:
1. Open the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element record that represents the
final element whose approval status you want to revoke.
The Approved Custom Device check box in the Protective Instrument Loop Final
Element record is automatically cleared, and the label on the Revoke Approval button
changes to Approve.
About SIS Trip Reports

SIS Trip Reports are records that store details on events, which occurred on a safety
instrumented system such as a trip alarm. For example, if during a process, the gas
pressure level increased to an unmanageable level and the safety instrumented system
turned off the gas feed, you would create one SIS Trip Report record to record the details
of that trip alarm event.
Using SIS Management, you can manage the SIS Trip Report records that exist for all
your safety instrumented systems.
When you create an SIS Trip Report record, you will link the record to a Safety
Instrumented System record. When you link the SIS Trip Report record to a Safety
Instrumented System record, the list of Instrumented Function records that are linked to
the Safety Instrumented System record will automatically appear in the SIS Trip Report
record. You can select the Instrumented Function records that you want to associate with
the SIS Trip Report record. When you select Instrumented Function records on the SIS
Trip Report datasheet, the Meridium APM system will automatically create one SIS Trip
Report Detail record for each Instrumented Function record that you select and
automatically link the SIS Trip Report Detail record to the SIS Trip Report record.
SIS Trip Report Detail records store details on the Instrumented Function with which it is
associated. They also contain the decision that is made around the particular trip event,
which is stored in the Action text box. For example, you can specify a trip event as
Dangerous or Safe.
Accessing the SIS Trip Report Search

Page
The SIS Trip Report Search page lets you search for and open an existing SIS Trip Report
record. Using this page, you can also access features that you can use to create new SIS
Trip Report records.
To access the SIS Trip Report Search page:
2. Click the SIS Trip Report link.
The SIS Trip Report Search page appears.
Aspects of the SIS Trip Report Search

Page
The SIS Trip Report Search page contains the results of the SIS_Trip_Report_Search
query. This documentation assumes that you are using the baseline query, which contains
a State prompt that appears as a list at the top of the SIS Trip Report Search page. The
State list contains a list of record states that have been configured for the SIS Trip Report
family. You can choose from the following baseline states:
All: Displays all the existing SIS Trip Report records that are in any state.
Active: Displays the SIS Trip Report records that are in the Active state.
Complete: Displays the SIS Trip Report records that are in the Complete state.
Pending Approval: Displays the SIS Trip Report records that are in the Pending
Approval state.
Review: Displays the SIS Trip Report records that are in the Review state.
This query is run automatically using the default prompt value All. If you select different
grid at the bottom of the page. The query results will include hyperlinked Record IDs,
which you can use to open the SIS Trip Report record on the SIS Trip Report page.
The SIS Trip Report Search page contains the following task menus:
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Opening Existing SIS Trip Report

Records
To open an existing SIS Trip Report record:
1. Access the SIS Trip Report Search page.
2. In the State list, select the record state for the desired SIS Trip Report record, and
then click the Run Query button.
The search results appear in the grid.
3. In the grid, locate the row containing the SIS Trip Report record that you want to
view.
4. In the Report ID cell in that row, click the hyperlinked Record ID.
The selected SIS Trip Report record appears on the SIS Trip Report page.
Navigation
The Navigation menu on the SIS Trip Report pages contains the following links:
SIS Trip Report Definition: Displays the SIS Trip Report page.
SIS Trip Report Details: Displays the SIS Trip Report Details page. This link is
enabled only when you are viewing an existing SIS Trip Report record.
Documents: Displays the Reference Documents page. This link is enabled only
when you are viewing an existing SIS Trip Report record.
All Recommendations: Displays a list of Risk Assessment Recommendation

records on the Recommendation Management page. This link is enabled only
when you are viewing an existing SIS Trip Report record.
A green arrow to the left of a link indicates the feature that you are currently viewing.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the SIS Trip Report pages contains the following links:
Find SIS Trip Report: Displays the SIS Trip Report Search page, where you can
search for an existing SIS Trip Report record. This link is disabled on the SIS Trip
Report Search page.
Create SIS Trip Report: Displays a new blank SIS Trip Report record on the SIS
Trip Report page.
Delete: Displays a confirmation message and then deletes the selected SIS Trip
Report record, and the SIS Trip Report Search page appears. This link does not
appear on the SIS Trip Report Details page or the SIS Trip Report Search page.

manage Risk Assessment Recommendation records that are linked to the SIS Trip
Report record. This link is enabled only when you are viewing an existing SIS
Trip Report record. This link does not appear on the SIS Trip Report Details page
or the SIS Trip Report Search page.
Page.
Reports: Displays a submenu that displays the caption of the Catalog item SIS
Trip Report as a link. This link is enabled only when you are viewing an existing
SIS Trip Report record. This link does not appear on the SIS Trip Report Details
page or the SIS Trip Report Search page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the current page.
Aspects of the SIS Trip Report Page

The SIS Trip Report page contains the SIS Trip Report datasheet. You can access the SIS
Trip Report page by opening an existing SIS Trip Report record or creating a new one.
When you access the SIS Trip Report page by creating a new SIS Trip Report record, the
Record ID of the SIS Trip Report record will not appear in the page title until after you
save the new record.
Saves the current SIS Trip Report record.
Users that are assigned to the states that are defined for the SIS Trip Report
State Indicator: Displays the current state of the SIS Trip Report record.
Operations menu: Displays the operations that are available for selection.
You can use this option to change the state of the SIS Trip Report record.
This link is enabled only when you are viewing an existing SIS Trip
Report record.
The SIS Trip Report page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Creating New SIS Trip Report Records

To create a new SIS Trip Report record:
1. Access the SIS Trip Report Search page.
2. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Create SIS Trip Report link.
The SIS Trip Report page appears, displaying a new blank SIS Trip Report record.
3. In the Trip Report ID text box, type a name for the SIS Trip Report record. This
field is required.
4. In the Trip Type list, select the type of trip event that the SIS Trip Report record
represents. This field is required.
5. Provide values in the remaining fields on the SIS Trip Report tab as desired.
6. Click the Associated Instrumented Functions tab,
The Associated Instrumented Functions tab appears.

7. In the SIS ID text box, click the
button. This field is required.
The Find Items window appears, and the Search In list contains the Safety Instrumented
System family by default.
8. Specify the desired search criteria, and then click the Find Now button.
9. In the search results, select the desired Safety Instrumented System record, and
then click the Open button.
The Instrumented Functions dialog box appears, displaying a list of Instrumented
Function records that are linked to the selected Safety Instrumented System record. The
Instrumented Function records that appear in this list automatically appear in the
Associated Instrumented Functions list on the Associated Instrumented Functions tab.
10. In the list, select the Instrumented Function records that you want to associated
with the SIS Trip Report record, and then click OK.
The Instrumented Functions dialog box closes, revealing the SIS Trip Report datasheet,
where the Record ID of the Safety Instrumented System record appears in the SIS ID text
box and the Instrumented Function records that you selected on the Instrumented
Functions dialog box are selected in the Associated Instrumented Functions list.
Note: In the Associated Instrumented list, if you want to associate additional
Instrumented Function records with the SIS Trip Report record, you can select the check
box to the left of the desired record.
The record is saved, and the following links are enabled on the Navigation menu:
SIS Trip Report Details
Documents
All Recommendations
Accessing the SIS Trip Report Details

Page
The SIS Trip Report Details page lets you manage the SIS Trip Report Detail records that
were created automatically based on the Instrumented Function records that are specified
in the SIS Trip Report record to which the SIS Trip Report Detail records are linked.
To access the SIS Trip Report Details page:
1. Open on the SIS Trip Report page the SIS Trip Report whose details you want to
view.
2. On the Navigation menu, click the SIS Trip Report Details link.
The SIS Trip Report Details page appears, displaying a list of SIS Trip Report Detail
records that are linked to the SIS Trip Report record from which you accessed the SIS
Trip Report Details page.
Aspects of the SIS Trip Report Details

Page
The SIS Trip Report Details page contains the SIS Trip Report Details workspace, which
displays a grid with a list of SIS Trip Report Detail records that are linked to the SIS Trip
Report from which you accessed the SIS Trip Report Details page. Each row in the grid
represents one SIS Trip Report Detail record. By default, the grid contains the following
columns:
Trip Report Detail ID: Displays the value that exists in the Trip Report Detail ID
field in the SIS Trip Report Detail record. This value appears as a hyperlink,
which you can click to open the SIS Trip Report Detail record.
Instrumented Function ID: Displays the value that exists in the Instrumented
Function ID field in the SIS Trip Report Detail record. This value appears as a
hyperlink, which you can use to open the Instrumented Function record.
Action: Displays the value that exists in the Action field in the SIS Trip Report
Detail record.
Add Trip Detail: Displays the Add Trip Details dialog box, where you can select
the Instrumented Function record that you want to use for the SIS Trip Report
Detail record.
Remove Trip Detail: Displays a confirmation message, and then deletes the
selected SIS Trip Report Detail record.
The SIS Trip Report Details page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Using the SIS Trip Report Details page, you can:
View an existing SIS Trip Report Details record.

Create a new SIS Trip Report Details record.
Delete an SIS Trip Report Details record.
Creating New SIS Trip Report Details

Records
To create a new SIS Trip Report Details record:
1. Access the SIS Trip Report Details page.
2. In the SIS Trip Report Details workspace, below the grid, click the Add Trip
Detail button.
The Add Trip Details dialog box appears, displaying the list of Instrumented Function
records that are linked to the Safety Instrumented System record that is linked to the SIS
Trip Report record to which the SIS Trip Report Details record is linked.
3. In the list, select the Instrumented Function record that you want to use to create
the SIS Trip Report Details record, and then click OK.
The Add Trip Details dialog box closes, the new SIS Trip Report Detail record is created,
saved, and appears at the bottom of the list. At this point, you can open the SIS Trip
Report Detail record and modify its contents.
Viewing SIS Trip Report Detail Records
To view an SIS Trip Report Detail record:

1. Access the SIS Trip Report Details page.
2. In the SIS Trip Report Details workspace, locate the row containing the SIS Trip
Report Detail record whose contents you want to view.
3. In the Trip Report Detail ID cell, click the hyperlinked Record ID for the desired
record.
The SIS Trip Report Detail record appears in a new window.
4. Modify the values in the fields as desired, and then click OK.
Deleting SIS Trip Report Detail Records

When you delete an SIS Trip Report Detail record, the record and all relationships in
which it participates will be deleted from the Meridium APM database.
To delete an SIS Trip Report Detail record:
1. Access the SIS Trip Report Detail page.

2. In the SIS Trip Report Details workspace, select the row containing the SIS Trip
Report Detail record that you want to delete.
3. Below the grid, click the Remove Trip Detail button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to delete the selected record.
The selected record is deleted from the Meridium APM database and no longer appears in
the grid.
About Revision History in SIS

Management
In addition to the Meridium APM Framework Tool that provides revision history for field
values, which you can use to manage revisions that are made on individual fields in a
family, SIS Management provides a Revision History feature that you can use to manage
the revisions made for an entire SIL analysis. When you create an analysis, you link
records in multiple families to the SIL Analysis record, which represents the entire
analysis. When you complete an analysis, you will change the state of the SIL Analysis
record to Complete. When you do so, a snapshot is taken of the SIL Analysis record and
each record to which it is linked, either directly or indirectly.
When the SIL Analysis record state is changed to Complete, one record in the associated
Revision family for each family that participates in the SIS Management data model will
be created. In other words, one Revision record is created for each record that is linked to
the SIL Analysis record (with the exception of the Human Resource, Risk Assessment
Recommendation, and Risk Assessment families). Each Revision record stores a snapshot
of the source record as it appeared when the state of the SIL Analysis record was
changed. For details on how these families are related to one another, see the illustration
of the SIS Management data model.
If the analysis requires reassessment, after the reassessment takes place, the state of the
SIL Analysis record will be changed again to the Complete state and a second set of
Revision records will be created, and so on.
You can access the SIL Analysis Revision records via the Revision History link on the
Navigation menu.
Accessing SIL Analysis Revisions

The following instructions provide details on accessing the Analysis Revision History
page, where you can view the Revision records that exist for a given SIL Analysis.
To access the Analysis Revision History page:
1. Open the desired SIL Analysis.
2. On the Navigation menu, click the Revision History link.
The Analysis Revision History page appears.
Note: The Revision History link is enabled only if the SIL Analysis record for the current
analysis has ever been set to the Complete state.
Aspects of the Analysis Revision History

Page
The Analysis Revision History page contains the following panes:
1. Revisions pane: Contains a list of all SIL Analysis Revision records that have
been created for the SIL Analysis from which you accessed the Analysis Revision
History page. Each row in the list represents one SIL Analysis Revision record,
and each item in the list is labeled using the value that exists in the Revision Date
field in that SIL Analysis Revision record. The rows appear in the reverse order in
which they were created and are numbered, starting with 0, where 0 is the first
revision. In other words, the most recent revision will appear first in the list.
When you select a row in the list:
A hierarchical view of the SIL Analysis that existed at the time that
revision was created will appear in the Selected Revision pane.
The corresponding SIL Analysis revision record will be displayed in the

Datasheet pane.
2. Selected Revisions pane: Displays a hierarchical view of the records that belong
to the SIL Analysis whose revision is selected in the Revisions pane.
At the bottom of this section, the Show Changes button appears, which you can click to
view the changes that were made to the selected record during this revision. This button
is enabled only if the selected record contains values that were changed since the
previous revision.
3. Datasheet pane: Displays the SIL Analysis Revision record that is currently
selected in the Revisions pane or the Selected Revisions pane. Above the
datasheet, the Print button appears, which you can use to print the record that is
displayed in the Datasheet pane.
The following image shows the Analysis Revision History page, where callouts have been
provided to identify the numbered panes described above.
The Analysis Revision History page contains the following task menus:
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
The options that appear on these task menus is consistent with the options that appear on
that menu when you are viewing it on other pages in SIS Management.
On the Analysis Revision History page, you can:
View the Revision record for the desired record.

View the specific changes that were made to a given Revision record.
Common Tasks Menu

The Common Tasks menu on the Analysis Revision History page contains the following
links:
Definition page.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive help topic for the Analysis Revision History
page.
Viewing the Datasheet for a Revision

Record
To view the datasheet for a Revision record:
2. In the Revisions pane, select the row that represents the revision of the SIL
Analysis that you want to view.
The corresponding SIL Analysis Revision record appears in the Datasheet pane, and the
corresponding revisions appear in the Selected Revision pane.
3. In the Selected Revisions pane, select the Revision record whose datasheet you
want to view.
The Revision record for the selected record appears in the Datasheet pane.
Viewing Changes That Were Made

Between Revisions
To view changes that were made between revisions:
2. In the Revisions pane, select the revision for which you want to see the modified
values.
3. In the Selected Revisions pane, select the record for which you want to see the
modified values.
4. At the bottom of the Selected Revisions pane, click the Show Changes button.
The Changes dialog box appears.
5. Review the changes and click OK when you are finished.

The Changes dialog box closes.
About Risk Assessment

Recommendation Records and the SIL
Analysis
Risk Assessment Recommendation Records store recommendations for an action that you
should be taken on the item that is represented by the record to which the Risk
Assessment Recommendation record is linked. In SIS Management, you can link Risk
Assessment Recommendation records to records in the following families:
SIS Proof Test
You can manage Risk Assessment Recommendation records for individual records within
SIS Management via the Recommendations dialog box. Additionally, via
Recommendation Management, you can mange Risk Assessment Recommendation
records for:
One SIL Analysis
ALL SIL Analyses
The Risk Assessment Recommendation datasheet contains two tabs:
General Information: Contains fields that you can use to describe the
recommendation, assign the recommendation to a Meridium APM user, and
specify due dates for the recommendation.
Alert: Contains fields that you can use to schedule alerts to be sent to specified
recipients when a recommendation or reevaluation is due.
After you link a Risk Assessment Recommendation record to an individual record, the
Risk Assessment record is part of the SIL Analysis.
Accessing the Recommendations Dialog

Box
The Recommendations dialog box lets you manage Risk Assessment Recommendation
records that are linked to individual records within the SIL Analysis. Using the
Recommendations dialog box, you can:
View the Risk Assessment Recommendation records that are currently linked to a
record.
Create new Risk Assessment Recommendation records and link them to a record.
Link existing Risk Assessment Recommendation records to a record.
Remove Risk Assessment Recommendation records from the analysis.
The following instructions assume that you are viewing one of the following pages within
SIS Management and that the Recommendations link is enabled on a task menu on that
page:
Instrumented Functions (IFs)

Proof Tests
Proof Test Templates
Note: The Recommendations link should not be confused with the All Recommendations
link, which appears on the Navigation menu.
To access the Recommendations dialog box:
On the appropriate task menu, click the Recommendations link.
The Recommendations dialog box appears.
Aspects of the Recommendations Dialog

Box
The Recommendations dialog box displays a list of Risk Assessment Recommendation

records that are linked to the record that is currently selected. Each row in the list
represents one Risk Assessment Recommendation records. For each Risk Assessment
Recommendation record that appears in the list, the following information is displayed:
Recommendation ID: The ID for the recommendation as it appears in the

Recommendation ID field in the Risk Assessment Recommendation record.
Recommendation Headline: The description of the recommendation as it appears

in the Recommendation Headline field in the Risk Assessment Recommendation
record.
Below the list, the following buttons appear:
Add new Recommendation: Displays a new Risk Assessment Recommendation

record in a new window, where you can create a new Risk Assessment
Recommendation record. After you save the new record, it will appear in the list
on the Recommendations dialog box.
Add Existing Recommendations: Displays the Find Items window, where you can
search for an existing Risk Assessment Recommendation record to link to the
selected record.
Delete Recommendations: Displays a confirmation message, and then removes

the Risk Assessment Recommendation record from the SIL Analysis. This link is
enabled only if a Risk Assessment Recommendation record appears in the list.
Close: Closes the Recommendations dialog box, revealing the page from which it
was accessed.
Creating New Risk Assessment

The following instructions provide details on creating a new Risk Assessment
Recommendation record via the Recommendations dialog box. These instructions assume
that you are familiar with the fields in the Risk Assessment Recommendation family.
To create a new Risk Assessment Recommendation record:
2. Below the grid, click the Add New Recommendation button.

A new Risk Assessment Recommendation record appears in a new window.
3. On the General Information tab, in the Target Completion Date box, type or select
the date that corresponds to the date on which the recommended task should be
completed. This field is required.
4. On the General Information tab, provide values in the remaining fields as desired.
5. If desired, on the Alert tab, provide values in the fields to schedule an alert to be
sent to the assignee when the recommendation is due.
Note: On the Alert tab, you can also schedule an alert to be sent to a list of recipients
when the recommendation is due for reevaluation.
5. Click OK.
Adding Existing Risk Assessment

Recommendation Records to the SIL
Analysis
The following instructions provide details on searching for an existing Risk Assessment
Recommendation record to add to the SIL Analysis. When you add an existing Risk
Assessment Recommendation record to the SIL Analysis, you are linking the Risk
Assessment Recommendation record to an individual record within the SIL Analysis.
To add an existing Risk Assessment Recommendation record to the SIL Analysis:
2. Below the grid, click the Add Existing Recommendations button.
3. If desired, in the Look For text box, provide search criteria, and then click the
Find Now button.
4. In the search results list, select the desired record, and click the Open button.
Removing Risk Assessment

Recommendation Records from the SIL
Analysis
When you remove a Risk Assessment Recommendation record from the SIL Analysis, you
are deleting the link between the Risk Assessment Recommendation record and the
record to which it is linked that belongs to the SIL Analysis. After you delete this link, the
Risk Assessment Recommendation record is no longer part of the SIL Analysis.
To remove a Risk Assessment Recommendation record from the SIL Analysis:
2. In the grid, select the row containing the Risk Assessment Recommendation
record that you want to remove from the SIL Analysis.
3. Click the Delete Recommendations button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to remove the link between
the Risk Assessment Recommendation record and the record to which it is linked.
The selected Risk Assessment Recommendation record is removed from the
Recommendations list and the SIL Analysis.
Using the Status Field in

Recommendations
You can use the values in the Status list in a Risk Assessment Recommendation record to
facilitate a workflow to track the progress of the recommendation.
The Status list contains the following values:
Approved: You can use this status to indicate that the recommended action has
been approved and can be assigned to someone to implement in your facility.
Created: This status indicates that the Risk Assessment Recommendation record
and the associated recommendation are new. This is the default state.
Pending Review: You can use this status to indicate that the recommended action
is assigned to someone so that they can review it and obtain approval to
implement the suggested action.
Reviewed: You can use this status to indicate that the recommended action has
been reviewed and is waiting for approval.
Rejected: You can use this status to indicate that the recommended action has
been not been approved.
Cancelled: You can use this status to indicate that the previously approved or
reviewed action will no longer be implemented.
Superseded: You can use this status to indicate that the previously approved or
reviewed action will no longer be implemented because a different action
supersedes it.
Depending on the value that exists in the Status field, you will need to assign the Risk
Assessment Recommendation to an analysis team member or the individual within your
organization who is responsible for the current task associated with that recommendation.
Additionally, when the Status field contains a certain value, in order to change that value,
you must be logged in as the user to whom the record is assigned based on the current
value in the Status field. For example, only the person whose name appears in the
Reviewer Name field can change the value in the Status field to Reviewed.
The following diagram illustrates the workflow that you can use when working with the
Status field to track the progress of a given recommendation. The boxes represent a
Status value that appears in the Status field, and the arrows represent actions taken by the
current assignee.
About Scheduling Risk Assessment

Recommendation Alerts
The Alerts tab on the Risk Assessment Recommendation datasheet contains fields that
you can use to schedule an email message to be sent to a Meridium APM user (i.e., a user
who has a Human Resource record in the Meridium APM database). You can schedule
alerts to be sent when:
A recommendation is due.
A recommendation is due for reevaluation.
When you save a Risk Assessment Recommendation record that is in the Approved or In
Progress state and whose alert schedule has been defined on the Alerts tab, the following
items are automatically created in the Meridium APM database:
One Alert record that is linked to the Risk Assessment Recommendation record.
One Scheduled Item in the Meridium APM Schedule Manager.
After these items exist, the email message will be sent to the specified recipients
according to the schedule that is defined in the Risk Assessment Recommendation record.
Scheduling Alert to Notify an Assignee

When a Recommendation is Due
Via the Alert tab on the Risk Assessment Recommendation datasheet, you can schedule
an alert to be sent to an email address when a recommendation is due or when it is due
for reevaluation. The following instructions provide details on using the fields on the
Alert tab on the Risk Assessment Recommendation datasheet to schedule an alert to be
sent to a recipient when a recommendation is due.
These instructions assume that you are familiar with adding Risk Assessment
Recommendation records to an SIL Analysis.
To schedule an Alert to notify an assignee when a recommendation is due:
configure alerts.
3. If desired, select the Alert Assignee When Due? check box, and then click in a
different field.
Days Before Due Date to be Notified
Frequency of Alert After Due Date
4. In the Days Before Due Date to be Notified field, type a numeric value that
represents the number of days prior to the due date that the assignee should be
notified.
5. In the Frequency of Alert After Due Date list, select the value that represents the
frequency by which an assignee should be notified after the due date has passed.
6. In the Implementation Alert Text field, type the message that you want to appear
in the alert email message that is sent to the assignee.
Note: These instructions assume that you have specified a Meridium APM user as the
assignee on the General Information tab and that a valid email address stored in that
user's Human Resource record.
7. At the bottom of the Risk Assessment Recommendation datasheet, click OK.
Scheduling an Alert to Notify Assignees

When a Recommendation is Due for
Reevaluation
Via the Alert tab on the Risk Assessment Recommendation datasheet, you can schedule
an alert to be sent to an email address when a recommendation is due or when it is due
for reevaluation. The following instructions provide details on using the fields on the
Alert tab on the Risk Assessment Recommendation datasheet to schedule an alert to be
sent to a recipient when a recommendation is due for reevaluation.
To schedule an alert to notify assignees when a recommendation is due for reevaluation:

configure alerts.
3. If desired, select the Reevaluate? check box, and then click in a different field.
1.
4.
due.
Reevaluation Date
Reevaluation Alert Body Text
In the Reevaluation Date box, type or select the date on which the reevaluation is
4.
In the Reevaluation Notification List, select the check box to the left of the
Meridium APM user who will receive the reevaluation alert.
Note: A valid email address must be stored in this user's Human Resource record to
receive a reevaluation alert.
6. In the Reevaluation Alert body Text field, type the message that you want to
appear in the alert email message that is sent to the assignee.

Recommendation Records for the
Current SIL Analysis
Recommendation records that are associated with the current SIL Analysis. For details on
viewing a list of the Risk Assessment Recommendation records for ALL SIL Analyses,
click here.
To view the list of all Risk Assessment Recommendation records the current SIL
Analysis:
1. Open the desired SIL Analysis record.
2. On the Navigation menu, click the All Recommendations link.
The Recommendation Management page appears, displaying the results of the SIL
Analysis Recommendations query, which returns a list of all the Risk Assessment
Recommendation records that are associated with the SIL Analysis with which you are
currently working.

Recommendation Records for All SIL
Analyses
Recommendation records that are associated with ALL SIL Analyses in the Meridium
APM database. For details on viewing a list of all Risk Assessment Recommendation
records for the current SIL Analyses, click here.
To view the list of Risk Assessment Recommendation records all SIL Analyses:
On the SIS Management Start Page, click the Manage Recommendations link.
The Recommendation Management page appears, displaying the results of the All SIL
Analyses Recommendations query, which returns the list of Risk Assessment
Recommendation records that are currently associated with an SIL Analysis.
About Inspection Tasks Records
Inspection Task records store details on when a task should be performed on the item
represented by the record to which the Inspection Task record is linked, including the due
date for the task. For example, you can create an Inspection Task to perform a Proof Test.
In SIS Management, you can link Inspection Tasks records to records in the following
families:

You can manage Inspection Task records for individual records within SIS Management
via the View option on the Tasks submenu. Additionally, you can view a list of the
Inspection Task records for ALL SIL Analysis via Task Management. After you link an
Inspection Task record to an individual record, the Inspection Task record is part of the
SIL Analysis.
Creating Inspection Task Records

When you create an Inspection Task record, you are linking that record to the currently
selected record on the page from which you accessed the Inspection Task record. Doing
so automatically adds the Inspection Task record to the SIL Analysis. These instructions
assume that you are familiar with the fields in the Inspection Task family.
To create an Inspection Task record:
2. Access either the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page or the Safety Instrumented
Systems page, depending on the family to which you want to link the Inspection
Task record.
3. In the grid, select the row containing the record to which you want to link the
Inspection Task record.
4. On the Assessment Tasks menu, click the Tasks link.
A submenu appears with options that you can use to create a new Inspection Task record
or view a list of existing Inspection Task records that are already linked to the currently
selected record.
5. On the submenu, click the Create link.
A new Inspection Task record appears in the Task Builder.
Note: The Next button is disabled on this screen.

6. Provide values in the fields as desired. Note that the Task ID field is required.
Viewing the List of Inspection Task

Records that are Linked to an
Individual Record
The following instructions provide details on viewing the list of all the Inspection Task
records that are linked to an individual record. For details on viewing the list of
Inspection Task records for all SIL Analyses, click here.
To view the list of Inspection Task records that are linked to an individual record:
2. Access either the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page or the Safety Instrumented
Systems page, where you can locate the record whose Inspection Task records you
want to view.
3. In the grid, select the row containing the record to which you want to link the
Inspection Task record.
4. On the Assessment Tasks menu, click the Tasks link.
A submenu appears with options that you can use to create a new Inspection Task record
or view a list of existing Inspection Task records that are already linked to the currently
selected record.
The Task List page appears, displaying the list of existing Task records that are linked to
the currently selected record. At this point you can modify the records as desired by
clicking the hyperlinked Task ID in the Task ID cell.
Viewing the List of Inspection Task

Records for All SIL Analyses
The following instructions provide details on viewing the list of Inspection Task records
that are associated with ALL SIL Analyses. For details on accessing a list of Inspection
Task records that are linked to an individual record, click here.
To view the list of Inspection Task Records for all SIL Analyses:
On the SIS Management Start Page, click the Manage Tasks link.
The Tasks List page appears, displaying the results of the All SIL Analyses Tasks query,
which returns a list of Task records that are associated with all existing SIL Analyses. At
this point you can modify the Task records by clicking the hyperlinked Task ID in the
Task ID cell.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu appears throughout SIS Management and displays
Associated Pages that have been configured for the families that participate in the SIS
Management data model. The baseline Meridium APM database does not contain
Associated Pages for SIS Management families by default.
About the SIS Management Catalog

Folder Structure
The SIS Management Catalog folders contain queries, graphs, and reports that appear
throughout SIS Management and display information contained in the records that make
up an SIL Analysis. The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS Management
contains the following subfolders:
Dashboards: Contains the Asset Safety dashboard.

LOPA: Contains the following subfolders:
Queries: Contains queries that are used by a Layer of Protection Analysis.

Reports: Contains the LOPA Report and one subfolder, Subreports, which
contains the supporting reports for the LOPA Report.
PIF: Contains the following subfolders:
Queries: Contains queries that support the Proof Test Report, which is
stored in the Reports folder.
Reports: Contains the Proof Test Report.
Queries: Contains queries that support the Protective Instrument Loop

Report, which is stored in the Reports folder.
Reports: Contains the Protective Instrument Loop Report and one
subfolder, Subreports, which contains a report that supports the Protective
Instrument Loop Report.
Queries: Contains queries that appear on various pages throughout SIS

Management and are used to display search results for records in an individual
family and the following subfolder:
Reports: Contains the Proof Test Template Report.
Protective Instrument Loop: Contains the following subfolders:
Queries: Contains the Proof Test Template Query, which supports the
Proof Test Template Report, which is stored in the Reports folder.
Proof Tests: Contains the following subfolders:
Reports: Contains the reports that are available when you are viewing
Instrumented Function records on the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page.
Proof Test Templates: Contains the following subfolders:
Queries: Contains queries that support the reports in the Reports folder.
Dashboard Queries: Contains queries that are used to display results on the
Asset Safety dashboard.
SIL: Contains the following subfolders:
Graphs: Contains graphs that are available when you are viewing an SIL
Analysis record on the SIL Analysis Definition page.
Queries: Contains queries that support baseline SIL Analysis graphs.
Reports: Contains the SIL Analysis Report, which is available when you
are viewing an SIL Analysis record on the SIL Analysis Definition page.
SIS Trip Report: Contains the following subfolders:
Queries: Contains queries that support the SIS Trip Report, which is stored
in the Reports folder.
Reports: Contains the SIS Trip Report, which is available when you are
viewing an SIS Trip Report record on the SIS Trip Report page.
Dashboards Folder
The dashboard that is listed in the following table is stored in the Catalog location
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS Management\Dashboards. In this table, the value listed
in the Dashboard column refers to the dashboard name. The baseline caption is the same
as the dashboard name.
Dashboard
Behavior and Usage
Asset Safety Dashboard Displays the Asset Safety dashboard on the Dashboard page.
LOPA Folder
The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS Management\LOPA contains the
following subfolders:
Queries: The following table displays the queries that exist in the Queries
subfolder.
Query Name
Behavior and Usage
LOPA Consequence
Modifiers Search
A search that displays a prompt for the Entity Key for a

LOPA record and then displays a list of Consequence
Modifier records that are linked to the specified LOPA
record. The results of this query appear by default on the
LOPA ILP Search
A search that displays a prompt for the Entity Key for a

LOPA record and then displays a list of Independent Layer
of Protection records that are linked to the specified LOPA
record. The results of this query appear by default in the
Independent Protective Layers pane on the LOPA Definition
page.
LOPA_Analysis_Search
A search that displays a prompt for the Entity for a LOPA

record and then displays the LOPA records that are linked
to a given Instrumented Function record. The result of this
query appears by default in the Associated Risk
Assessments pane on the Instrumented Functions (IFs)
page.
Reports: The following table displays the items that exist in the Reports subfolder.
Item Name Behavior and Usage

LOPA
Report
Subreports
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key for a LOPA record and then displays
in the Report Viewer information about the Layer of Protection Analysis
that exists in the LOPA record and records that are linked to that LOPA
record.
A subfolder that contains the reports with the following names:
o
LOPA Consequence Modifiers Report: Supports the LOPA Report.
LOPA ILP Report: Supports the LOPA Report.
PIF Folder
The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS Management\PIF contains the
subfolder.
Query Name Behavior and Usage
PIF Query
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key for an Instrumented Function record
and then displays information that is stored in the fields in that
Instrumented Function record. The results of this query appear by default
on the Instrumented Functions (IFs) page.
PIF Risk
Matrix
Result
Query
and then displays the risk rank values that are linked to that Instrumented
Function record.
Reports: The following table displays the reports that exist in the Reports
subfolder.
Report
Name
Behavior and Usage
If Report
and then displays in the Report Viewer information about the Instrumented
Function that exists in the Instrumented Function record and records that
are linked to that Instrumented Function record.
If Risk
Matrix
Result
Report
Supports the IF Report.
Proof Test Template Folder

The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS Management\Proof Test Template
Queries: The following table displays the query that exists in the Queries
subfolder.
Query Name Behavior and Usage

Proof Test
Template
Query
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key for an SIS Proof Test Template
record and then displays information that is store in that SIS Proof Test
Template record. The results of this query appear by default on the
Proof Test Templates page.
Reports: The following table displays the report that exists in the Reports
subfolder.
Report Name
Behavior and Usage
Proof Test
Template
Report
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key for an SIS Proof Test Template
record and then displays in the Report Viewer summary information
that is stored in that SIS Proof Test Template record.
Proof Tests Folder

The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS Management\Proof Tests contains the
subfolder.
Query Name
Behavior and Usage
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key for an SIS Proof Test record and
SIS Proof Test
then displays information that is store in that SIS Proof Test record. The
Query
results of this query appear by default on the Proof Tests page.
SIS Proof Test
Supports the SIS Proof Test Query.
Query UNION
Report
Name
subfolder.
Behavior and Usage
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key for an SIS Proof Test record and then
Proof Test
displays in the Report Viewer summary information that is stored in that
Report
SIS Proof Test record.
Protective Instrument Loop Folder

The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS Management\Protective Instrument
Loop contains the following subfolders:
subfolder.
Query Name
Behavior and Usage
Protective
Instrument Loop
Query
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key for a Protective Instrument

Loop record and then displays information that is stored in that
Protective Instrument Loop record. This query supports the
Protective Instrument Loop Report that is stored in the Reports
folder.
Protective
Instrument Loop
Sensor System
Subquery

Loop record and then displays information that is stored in the
Protective Instrument Loop System records that are linked to the
Protective Instrument Loop record. This query supports the
Protective Instrument Loop Report that is stored in the Reports
folder.
Item Name
Behavior and Usage
Protective
Instrument Loop Loop record and then displays in the Report Viewer summary
Report
information that is stored in that Protective Instrument Loop record.
Subreports
A subfolder that contains the PIL Sensor System Report, which

supports the Protective Instrument Loop Report.
About The Queries Folder

The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS Management\Queries contains:
Queries that support various features with the SIS Management module, including
those that support the reports that make up the SRS Report.
A subfolder, Dashboard Queries, that contains queries that are used to display
content on the Asset Safety dashboard.
To simplify the documentation, the items that are stored in this folder are split up into the
following groups:
Queries that support modules-specific pages.

Queries that support the SRS Report.
Dashboard Queries folder.
Queries That Support Module-Specific

Pages
The following queries are stored in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS
Management\Queries and support module-specific pages within SIS Management.
Query Name
Behavior and Usage
Add_SIS_Trip_Report_Detail_Search
A search that displays prompts

for the Entity Key for a Safety
Instrumented System record
None
and an SIS Trip Report record
and then displays information
that is stored in both records.
ALL SIL Analyses Recommendations
Displays a list of all the Risk

Assessment Recommendation
None
records that are linked to any
SIL Analysis record.
Displays the following
prompts and then displays a
list of all the Task records that
The results of
meet the specified criteria.
this query appear
by default on the
Asset ID: The IDs for
Task List page
the Equipment and
when you access
Functional Location
it from an SIL
families in the
Analysis in SIS
Meridium APM
Management and
database.
display only
Inspection Task
Task Family: The
records that are
names of the Task
associated with
families that exist in
an SIL Analysis.
the Meridium APM
database.
ALL SIL Analyses Tasks
Notes
Export_SIL_Analysis_Search
Final_Element_Reference_Data_Search
IF_Safety_Loop_Search
Displays a prompt for the

record state of an SIL
Analysis, and then displays a
list of SIL Analysis records
that meet the specified criteria.
The State prompt contains a
list of record states that are
configured for the SIL
Analysis family. By default, This query is
this list contains the following used by the SIS
baseline values:
Management
Export Builder.
All
Active
Complete
Pending Approval
Planning
Review
The results of
A search that displays a
this query appear
prompt and then displays a list
by default on the
of Final Element records
Final Element
whose Is Reference Data field
Reference Data
value is set to True.
Search page.
prompt for the record state of The results of
a Protective Instrument Loop this query appear
record, and then displays a list by default on the
of Protective Instrument Loop Protective Loop
records that are linked to a
Search page
particular Instrumented
when you search
Function record. The State
for protective
prompt contains a list of
instrument loops
record states that are
associated with
configured for the Protective an instrumented
Instrument Loop family. By function.
default, this list contains the
All
Logic_Solver_Reference_Data_Search
Safety_Loop_Search
Approval
Design
In Service
Out of Service
Pending Approval
The results of
this query appear
by default on the
of Logic Solver records whose
Logic Solver
Is Reference Data field value
Reference Data
is set to True.
Search page.
prompt for the record state of The results of
a Protective Instrument Loop this query appear
record and then displays a list by default on the
of Protective Instrument Loop Protective Loop
records that meet the specified Search page.
criteria. The State prompt
contains a list of record states
that are configured for the
family. By default, the list
contains the following
baseline values:
All
Approval
Design
In Service
Safety_Loop_Template_Search
Out of Service
Pending Approval

prompt for the record state of
a Protective Instrument Loop
record, where the Is Template
field value in that record is
Yes, and then displays a list of
records that are specified as
templates and meet the
specified criteria.
The results of
this query appear
by default on the
Protective Loop
Template Search
page.
Sensor_Reference_Data_Search
The results of
this query appear
by default on the
of Logic Solver records whose
Sensor
Is Reference Data field value
Reference Data
is set to True.
Search page.
SIL Analysis Recommendations

Entity Key for an SIL Analysis
record and then displays a list
of Risk Assessment
None
Recommendation records that
are linked to the specified SIL
Analysis record.
A search that displays the
following prompts and then By default, this
displays a list of SIL Analysis query appears on
records that meet the specified the SIL Analysis
criteria.
Search page and
is used by the
State: The record states SIS Management
Import Builder.
that have been
configured fro the SIL
Analysis family. By
default, this list
contains the following
values:
SIL_Analysis_Search
All
Active
Complete
Pending
Approval
Planning
Review
SIL Analysis Owner:

The names of the users
whose names appear in
the Owner field in a
SIL Analysis record.
SIS Find ASM Actions for IF

Entity Key for an
Instrumented Function record
and is used to find ASM
None
Actions that were created
when the specified
was promoted to ASM.
SIS Find ASM Risk for IF

Entity Key for an
and is used to find ASM Risks
None
that were created when the
specified Instrumented
Function record was promoted
to ASM.
SIS_Trip_Report_IF_Search

prompt for the Entity Key for
a Safety Instrumented System
record and then displays
information that is stored in None
the SIS Trip Report record that
is linked to the specified
record.
SIS_Trip_Report_Search

prompt for the record state of
an SIS Trip Report record and
then displays a list of SIS Trip
Report records that meet the
specified criteria. The State
list contains a list of record
states that are configured for
the SIS Trip Report family. By The results of
default, this list contains the this query appear
by default on the
SIS Trip Report
All
Search page.
Active
Complete
Pending Approval
Review
Queries That Support The SRS Report

The following queries are stored in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS
Management\Queries and support the SRS Report and subreports stored in the
\SIL\Reports folder.
Query Name
SRS_Report_Query
Behavior and Usage

SIL Analysis record to which all the records
that make up an SIL Analysis are linked and
then displays values stored in fields that are
required in the following records:
SIL Analysis
This query supports the main SRS Report.
SIL_Analysis_Doc_Query

SIL Analysis record to which all the records
that make up an SIL Analysis are linked and
then displays all the Reference Document
records that are linked to that record. This
query supports the subreport SIL_Doc_Report.
SRS_SubReport_Query
Displays a prompt for the PIF ID for an

Instrumented Function record and then displays
values stored in records that make up a
protective instrument loop. This query supports
the subreport Loop_Report.
SRS_Sensor_Query

Final_Element_Query

Instrumented Function record to which SIF
Common Cause Failure records are linked and
then displays the values stored in the following
fields in the SIF Common Cause Failure
records that are linked to the specified
IF_Common_Cause_Failures
CCF ID
CCF Description
CCF Mitigation
This query supports the subreport IF Subreport.
Displays a prompt for the PIF ID for the

Instrumented Function record to which
Instrumented Function records are linked and
then displays the values stored in the following
fields in the Instrumented Function record:
IF_Concurrent_Safe_State
Concurrent Safe State Hazard

PIF Description
Safe State Description
PIF ID
This query supports the subreport IF Subreport.

Displays a prompt for the PIF ID for the
Final_Element_Hazardous_Event_Comb values stored in records that make up a
the subreport Final_Element_Subreport.
Dashboard Queries Folder

The queries listed in the following table are stored in the Catalog location
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS Management\Queries\Dashboard Queries. In this table,
the values listed in the Query column refer to the query names. The baseline query
captions are the same as the query names.
Query
Behavior and Usage
Analysis States
Used to return results that are displayed in the Hazards

Analysis Schedule section on the Asset Safety dashboard.
In the baseline database, this query is configured to return
Hazards Analysis records by state.
Calibration
Recommendations
Used to return results that are displayed in the Calibration

Recommendations section on the Asset Safety dashboard.
Calibration
Used by the Calibration Recommendations source query to
Recommendations - All
display content on the Asset Safety dashboard.
Calibration Results - Fail
Used by the Calibration Results for Graph source query to

Calibration Results - Pass

as Found

Calibration Results - Pass

as Left

Calibration Results All

Calibration Results for

Graph

Pass/Fail Results for Last 12 Months section on the Asset
Safety dashboard.
Calibration Tasks

Schedule section on the Asset Safety dashboard.
Calibration Tasks - All
Used by the Calibration Tasks source query to display

Filter Widget
Used to return results that are displayed in the Content

Filter section on the Asset Safety dashboard.
HAZOP Analyses
Used by one or more source queries to the Asset Safety

dashboard.
Last 5 Years

dashboard.
Overdue Hazards Analysis
Used to return results that are displayed in the Hazards

Analysis Schedule section on the Asset Safety dashboard.
Overdue Proof Test Tasks
Used to return results that are displayed in the Proof Test

Schedule section on the Asset Safety dashboard.
Proof Tests States

dashboard.
Proof Tests States by State

dashboard.
Proof Tests States for Graph

dashboard.
Proof Test States with

Functional Location

dashboard.
Used by the Quantity of Protective Instrumented Loops by

State for Graph source query to display content on the
States
Proven In Use Device
Types
Used by the Proven In Use Devices by Type for Graph

source query to display content on the Asset Safety
dashboard.
Proven In Use Devices by

Type
Used by the Proven In Use Devices by Type for Graph

source query to display content on the Asset Safety
dashboard.
Proven In Use Devices by

Type for Graph
Used to return results that are displayed in the Proven in

Use Devices by Type section on the Asset Safety
dashboard.
Quantity of Hazards
Analysis

dashboard.
Quantity of Protective
Instrumented Loops

Instrumented Loops by
State

Instrumented Loops by
State for Graph
Used to return results that are displayed in the Quantity of

Protective Instrumented Loops section on the Asset Safety
dashboard.
Used to display results that are displayed in the Quantity

of SIF Trips section on the Asset Safety dashboard.
Quantity of SIL Analysis

dashboard.
Quantity of SIL Analysis by Used by one or more source queries to the Asset Safety
State
dashboard.
SIF Spurious Trip Reports

dashboard.
SIF Trip Report Types
Used by the Quantity of SIF Trips source query to display

SIF Unsafe Trip Reports

dashboard.
SIL Analysis States

dashboard.
SIL Distribution
Used by the SIL Distribution for Graph source query to

SIL Distribution for Graph
Used to return results that are displayed in the View SIL

Distribution section on the Asset Safety dashboard.
SIS Proof Test Pass Fail
Used to return results that are displayed in the Proof Tests

Pass/Fail section on the Asset Safety dashboard.
SIS Proof Tests Failed
Used by the SIS Proof Test Pass Fail source query to

SIS Proof Tests Passed
Used by the SIS Proof Test Pass Fail source query to

What If Analyses

dashboard.
SIL Folder
The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS Management\SIL contains the
Graphs: The following table displays the graphs that exist in the Graphs subfolder.
Graph Name Behavior and Usage
Notes
A bar chart that displays a summary of the Risk

Rank values that are associated with each
Instrumented Function record that is linked to the
SIL Analysis specified SIL Analysis. When you open this graph
None
Risk Graph from the SIL Analysis Definition page, the value
for the SIL Analysis that you are currently
viewing is passed in to the ENTY_KEY prompt
to return the results for that analysis.
A pie chart that shows a breakdown of the
Selected SIL Level values in the Instrumented
Function records that are linked the specified SIL When you open this
Analysis. This graph is based upon the query SIL graph from the SIL
SIL
Assignment Summary Query, which is stored in Analysis Definition
Assignment
the folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS
page, the value for the
Summary
Management\SIL\Queries and returns a count for SIL Analysis that you
Graph
each Selected SIL Level value. For example, if
are currently viewing is
five Instrumented Function records that are linked passed in to the
to the SIL Analysis record contain the value 2 in ENTY_KEY prompt to
the Selected SIL Level field, the count for level 2 return the results for that
would be 5. Each count is displayed as a
analysis.
percentage in the SIL Assignment Summary
Graph.
subfolder.
Query Name
Behavior and Usage
SIL Analysis
Mitigated Risk
Query
Displays risk assessment details that are associated with all SIL
Analysis records.
SIL Analysis
Query
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key for an SIL Analysis record
and then displays information that is stored in the specified SIL
Analysis record.
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key for an SIL Analysis and then
SIL Analysis Risk
displays risk rank details for the Instrumented Functions that are
Query
linked to the specified SIL Analysis record.
SIL Assignment
Summary Query
Supports the graph SIL Assignment Summary Graph and returns a

count for each Selected SIL Level value in the Instrumented
Function records that are linked to the specified SIL Analysis.
Report
Name
Behavior and Usage
SIL
Analysis
Report
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key for an SIL Analysis record and then
displays in the Report Viewer summary information for the specified SIL
Analysis record.
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key for the SIL Analysis record to which
all the records that make up an SIL Analysis are linked and then displays
in the Report Viewer the Safety Requirement Specifications report for the
specified SIL Analysis. While you can run the report from the Catalog and
SRS Report
manually enter the Entity Key for the SIL Analysis record, we recommend
that you access the report only from within the SIS Management module.
You should not modify the SRS Report or any of the supporting queries
and subreports.
The SubReports folder stores the following reports that support the SRS
Report, and are supported by queries stored in the Queries folder:
Subreports
Final_Element_Subreport
IF Subreport
Loop_Report
SIL_Doc_Report
SIS Trip Report Folder

The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SIS Management\SIS Trip Report
subfolder.
Query Name
Behavior and Usage
SIS Trip Report

Recommendations
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key for an SIS Trip Report
record and then displays the list of Risk Assessment
Recommendation records that are linked to the specified SIS
Trip Report record.
SIS Trip Reports

Query
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key for an SIS Trip Report
record and then displays the list of SIS Trip Report records and
information that is stored in each record.
Report
Name
subfolder.
Behavior and Usage
Displays a prompt for the Entity Key for an SIS Trip Report record and then
SIS Trip displays in the Report Viewer summary information that is associated with
Report the specified SIS Trip Report record and the records that are linked to that
SIS Trip Report record.
Consequence Modifier
Consequence Modifier records store information about an event or action that can
increase the probability that a risk may occur if the risk is not mitigated and proceeds into
an undesirable event. The following table provides an alphabetical list and description of
the fields that exist for the Consequence Modifier family and appear on the Consequence
Modifier datasheet, unless otherwise specified. The information in the table reflects the
baseline state and behavior of these fields. This list is not comprehensive.
Field Caption
Consequence
Modifier ID
Data
Type
Description
Character The ID for the

consequence
modifier.
Behavior and Usage

You must type your own value manually.
This value appears in the Consequence
Modifier ID cell on the Consequence
Modifiers page and is used to distinguish the
Consequence Modifier record from other
Consequence Modifier records. This field is
required.
Description
Character The description You can type your own value manually.
of the
consequence
modifier.
Type

consequence
modifier.
You can type your own value manually.

Independent Layer of Protection records store details about a device, system, or action
that exists to prevent a risk and is independent of the event that initiates the scenario. The
following table provides an alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist for the
Independent Layer of Protection family and appear on the Independent Layer of
Protection datasheet, unless otherwise specified. The information in the table reflects the
baseline state and behavior of these fields.
Field Caption
Data
Type
Description
Description Character A description of the

independent layer of
protection.
Behavior and Usage

On the datasheet, this field
appears as a text box labeled
Description. When you select a
value in the Type list, this field is
populated automatically with the
value stored in the Description
field in the corresponding IPL
Type record.
The ID for the Equipment
record that is linked to the
Equipment
Character Protection record through the
ID
Safety Analysis Has
Equipment Relationship
family.

Equipment
Equipment record that is
Number
Entity Key
linked to the Independent
Functional
Location
The ID for the Functional

Location record that is linked
to the Independent Layer of
Character
Protection record through the
Has Functional Location
Relationship family.

Functional
Functional Location record
Location
Number that is linked to the
Entity Key
Protection record.
IPL ID
Character The ID for the independent

layer of protection (IPL).

disabled and contains a
search for the Equipment record
that you want to link to the
record.
The Meridium APM system uses
this value to populate the
record. This field does not appear
on the Independent Layer of
Protection datasheet by default.
search for the Functional
Location record that you want to
link to the Independent Layer of
Protection record.
The Meridium APM system uses
this value to populate the
Functional Location field. This
field does not appear on the
appears as a text box labeled IPL
ID, in which you can enter your
own value. This value appears in
the Independent Protective Layers
section on the LOPA Definition
page and is used to distinguish the
record from the other Independent
Layer of Protection records. This
field is required.
PFD. Depending upon the IPL
type that you select in the Type
list, the PFD field will be:
Disabled and populated

automatically with a
default value.
-or-
PFD
A number representing the

probability that the
Number independent layer of
protection will fail to mitigate
the risk.
Required. If the PFD field

is required. A rule is
applied to this field that
checks the value you enter
against a range that is
defined by the selected
IPL type.
If you do not select a value in the

Type list and type a custom value
in the Type text box, the PFD
field is required, but the
Meridium APM system will be
unable to prevent you from
entering an invalid PFD value.
Sequence
Number
Number A number indicating the order

in which the Independent
Layer of Protection record
must appear in the grid in
relation to the other
Independent Layers of
Protection records.

Sequence Number and is
populated automatically with a
number relative to the existing
records that are already linked to
the same LOPA record. For
example, if two Independent
Layer of Protection records are
already linked to a LOPA record,
when you create a third Layer of
Protection Analysis record and it
link it to the same LOPA record,
the Sequence Number field will
be populated automatically with
the value 3. You can modify this

value, if desired.
Type

appears as a list labeled Type and
contains the IPL Type records that
exist in the database. The IPL
Type record that you select in this
The type of independent layer list is used to determine the PFD
Character
of protection.
value that is associated with the
independent layer of protection
represented by the Independent
Alternatively, you can enter a
custom value in the Type field.
Instrumented Function records store details about a specific function of an SIS. The
Instrumented Function family. The information in this table reflects the baseline state and
behavior of these fields. This list is not comprehensive.
Field Caption
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet/Tab

appears as a list labeled
Abnormal States and contains
the following values:
Abnormal
State
A short
description of
the specific
Character
abnormal state
of the
operation.
Start-Up
Shutdown
Bypass
Maintenance
Emergency
Other
Safety
Requirement
Specification
datasheet
This field is enabled and

required only if ABNORMAL
is selected in the Operation
Modes list. Otherwise, this field
is disabled.
Concurrent
Safe State
Hazard
Text
A description
of the
hazardous
Potential
event that
Concurrent
could occur if
In the UI, this field is displayed Safe State
the safe state
without a field caption, and the Hazard
associated with
value is set by default. You can section on the
the
remove this text and enter your Concurrent
instrumented
own value. This field contains a Safe States tab
function
on the
occurs
<Record ID>
simultaneously
click to access the Text Editor. (Instrumented
with the safe
Function)
state of a
window
different
instrumented
function.
Concurrent
Safe State
Hazard?
Logical
A logical field
that stores the
value True or
False and
indicates
whether the
safe state
associated with
In the UI, this field appears as a
the
check box labeled Hazard for
instrumented
Concurrent Safe States?, which
function can
you can select to indicate that
cause a
the safe state for the
hazardous
instrumented function can lead
event if it
to a hazardous event if that safe
occurs
state occurs simultaneously
concurrently
with the safe state of a different
with a safe
state of a
different
instrumented
function. By
default, this
field contains
the value
False.
Concurrent
Safe States tab
on the <Record
ID>
(Instrumented
Function)
window
On the Instrumented Function

datasheet, this field appears as a
text box labeled Consequence
Consequence
Text
Description

A description access the Text Editor.
of the risk that
is associated If the value in the SIL
Assessment Method field is
with the
Instrumented
PHA - Internal, after you select Function
hazardous
a Risk Assessment record from datasheet
event that
a Hazards Analysis, this field is
exists in the
populated automatically with
Hazardous
the value in the Consequence
Event field.
Description field in the Hazards
that is linked to the Risk
Assessment record you
selected.
The demand
Demand
rate (i.e., Low
Character
Rate(Source)
demand or
High demand).

contains the text Low Demand
by default. You can remove this
text and enter your own values.
Safety
Requirement
Specification
datasheet

The ID of the
search for the desired
Equipment
Equipment record. After you
record whose
Instrumented
select an Equipment record, a
Equipment ID Character Entity ID is
Function
link is created between the
stored in the
datasheet
selected Equipment record and
Equipment
the Instrumented Function
Key field.
record. In addition, the
Equipment ID will appear
automatically in the Equipment
ID field.
The Entity Key

of the
The Meridium APM system
Equipment
uses this value to populate the
Equipment
record that is
Number
Equipment ID field that appears None
Key
linked to the
on the Instrumented Function
Instrumented
datasheet.
Function
record.
appears as a list labeled Failure
Rate UOM and contains the
following values:
The unit of
PFD Avg.
measure that is
associated with
PFH
the value in the
Instrumented
Required
Failure Rate
When the value in the SIL
Character
Function
Probability of Mode field is High Demand or
UOM
datasheet
Failure field. Continuous, this value is
automatically with PFH. When
the value in the SIL Mode field
is Low Demand, this value is
automatically with PFH.
Frequency of Initiating Event
(per yr), in which you can enter
your own value.
If the value in the SIL
The number of PHA - Internal, after you select
Frequency of
times per year a Risk Assessment record from Instrumented
Initiating
Number that the
a Hazards Analysis, this field is Function
Event (Per yr)
initiating event populated automatically with datasheet
occurs.
the value in the Cause
Frequency (per year) field in
the Hazards Analysis Cause
record that is linked to the Risk
selected.
The type of
Function Type Character instrumented
function.

Function Type and contains the
Instrumented
Function
Safety
datasheet
Protective
Functional
Location ID
The ID of the
Functional
Location
record whose
Character Entity Key is
stored in the
Functional
Location Key
field.

After you select a Functional Instrumented
Location record, a link is
Function
created between the Functional datasheet
Location record and the
In addition, the Functional
Location ID will appear
automatically in the Functional
Location ID field.
The Entity Key

of the
Functional
Location
Functional
Number record that is uses this value to populate the
Location Key
linked to the Functional Location ID field.
Instrumented
Function
record.
None

Hazardous Event, in which you
can enter your own value.
Hazardous
Event

A description
of the event for
PHA - Internal, after you select
which the
Instrumented
a Risk Assessment record from
Character instrumented
Function
function exists
datasheet
to prevent or
the value in the Consequence
mitigate risk.
Type field in the Hazards
that is linked to the Risk
selected.
Hazards
Date
Analysis Date
Hazards
Analysis
Reference
The date the

Hazards
Analysis
record to
which the
Instrumented
Function
record is
linked was last
modified.

automatically with the value
stored in the Last Modified
Instrumented
Date field in the Hazards
Function
Analysis record that is linked to
datasheet
record and whose ID appears in
the Hazards Analysis Reference
field.

The Record ID
of the Hazards
stored in the Hazards Analysis
Analysis
Reference field in the SIL
Instrumented
record that is
Character
Analysis record. There must be Function
linked to the
a value in this field before you datasheet
Instrumented
select the PHA - Internal option
Function
in the SIL Assessment field.
record.
Otherwise, an error message
will appear.
Hazards
Analysis
Reference
Key
The Entity Key This field is used by the

for the Hazards Meridium APM system to
Analysis
populate the Instrumented
record that is Function record with
Number
None
linked to the information from the Hazards
Instrumented Analysis record that is linked to
Function
record.
record.
I/O
Functional
Text
Relationship
Details
A description
of the
relationship
between the
inputs and
outputs for the
process,
including
details such as
logic and
mathematical
functions.

I/O Functional Relationship
Details and contains a
Safety
Requirement
Specification
datasheet

Initiating Event, in which you
Initiating
Event
A short
description of
the initiating
event whose
description
Character
exists in the
Initiating
Event
Description
field.

PHA - Internal, after you select
a Risk Assessment record from Instrumented
a Hazards Analysis, this field is Function
populated automatically with datasheet
the value in the Cause Type
field in the Hazards Analysis
Cause record that is linked to
Consequence record that is
linked to the Risk Assessment
record you selected.

Initiating Event Description and
Initiating
Event
Description
Text
contains a
button, which
A description you can click to access the Text
Editor.
of the event
which could
initiate a series If the value in the SIL
of events that Assessment Method field is
Instrumented
present the risk PHA - Internal, after you select
Function
a Risk Assessment record from
whose
datasheet
description
exists in the
Consequence the value in the Cause
Description field in the Hazards
Description
Analysis Cause record that is
field.
linked to the Hazards Analysis
Consequence record that is
linked to the Risk Assessment
record you selected.
The name of
Last Modified
the user who
Character
By
last modified
the record.

disabled and updated
automatically whenever the
record is modified.
Instrumented
Function
datasheet
Last Modified
Date
Date
The date on
which the
record was last
automatically.
modified.
Instrumented
Function
datasheet
Maintenance
and Test
Text
Requirements
A description
of the
requirements
for
maintenance
and testing
procedures for
the
instrumented
function.
Safety
Requirement
Specification
datasheet

Maintenance and Test
Requirements, and the value is
set by default. You can remove
this text and enter your own
values. This field contains a
Maintenance
Logical
Override
A logical field
that stores the
value True or
False and
indicates
whether the
None
process
requires
override
procedures for
maintenance
activities.
None
Manual
Shutdown
A logical field
that stores the
value True or
False and
indicates
None
whether the
process
requires
manual
shutdown.
None
Logical

A number
Max Process Variable, in which
representing
Max Process
you can enter your own value.
Number the upper value
Variable
This value combined with the
for the process
value stored in the Min Process
variable range.
Variable field make up the
process variable range.
Min Process
Variable
Safety
Requirement
Specification
datasheet

A number
Min Process Variable, in which Safety
representing
you can enter your own value. Requirement
Number the lower value
This value combined with the Specification
for the process
value stored in the Max Process datasheet
variable range.
Variable field make up the
process variable range.
Normal
Operation
Mode
Text

A description Normal Operation Mode, and
of the normal the values is set by default. You Safety
operating
can remove this text and enter Requirement
mode for the your own values. This field
Specification
instrumented
datasheet
contains a
button, which
function.
you can click to access the Text
Editor.
Operation Modes and contains
Operation
Mode
The mode of
operation for
Character the
instrumented
function.
NORMAL: This is the

value that is selected by
default.
ABNORMAL: If you
select this value, the
following fields are
enabled:
Operator
Interface
Text
Requirement
Safety
Requirement
Specification
datasheet
Abnormal States
Operation Mode
Description

Operator Interface
A description Requirement, and the value is
of the Operator set by default. You can remove
Interface
this text and enter your own
requirements. values. This field contains a
Safety
Requirement
Specification
datasheet
PIF ID

appears as a text box labeled IF
ID, in which you can enter your
An ID for the own value. This value will
Instrumented
Character instrumented appear in the list of
Function
function.
Instrumented Function records datasheet
on the Instrumented Functions
(IFs) page. This field is
required.
PIF
Description
Stores a
description of
the
instrumented
function. This
field is
Character
displayed on
the
Instrumented
Function
datasheet by
default.

Instrumented
appears as a text box labeled IF
Function
Description, in which you can
datasheet
enter your own value.
Pre Alarm
A number
representing
the point on
the process
Number variable range
at which the
pre-alarm
should be
triggered.

Pre Alarm, in which you can
Process
Service
Description
Text
Safety
Requirement
Specification
datasheet

Process Service Description,
A description
and the value is set by default. Safety
of the
You can remove this text and Requirement
specifications
Specification
enter your own values. This
for the process
datasheet
service.
field contains a
button,
which you can click to access
the Text Editor.
A number
representing
the time in
seconds that
the process for
Process Speed Number
which the
instrumented
function exists
takes to
complete.

Process Speed with an
Instrumented
additional label, (Seconds) to Function
the right of the field. You can datasheet
enter your own value directly
in the Process Speed cell.
If the value in the SIS

Risk Matrix - Internal, this field
is disabled and populated
automatically based on the SIL
requirements from the Risk
Matrix.
If the value in the SIS
Assessment field is Layer of
Protection Analysis Internal,
this field is disabled and
the difference between the
values in the Mitigated
Consequence Frequency field
and the Required Mitigated
Consequence Frequency field
on the LOPA datasheet.
For all other SIS Assessment
methods, you can type a value
directly into the Required
Probability of Failure cell. Note
that:
A number that
represents the
target
Required
probability that
Probability of Number an
Failure
instrumented
function
failure will
occur.
The value you type must

fall within a certain
range, which is
determined by the value
in the Selected SIL
Level field. If you
modify the value in the
Selected SIL Level
field, the value in this
field will be updated
automatically to fall
within the correct range
Instrumented
of values for that level.
Function
If you try to type a value
datasheet
into the Required
Probability of Failure
cell without first
selecting a value from
Required SIF
Text
Action
A description
of the action
that the
instrumented
function
performs in
response to a
triggered
alarm.
Reset
Text
Requirement

A description appears as a text box labeled
of the
Reset Requirement, and the
Safety
requirements value is set by default. You can
Requirement
for resetting a remove this text and enter your
Specification
process after it own values. This field contains
datasheet
has been
a
tripped.

Required SIF Action and
contains a
button, which
Editor.
Safety
Requirement
Specification
datasheet
A numeric
value that
represents the
time in
seconds that it appears as a text box labeled
takes for the Response Time with an
Instrumented
Response
Number instrumented additional label, (Seconds), to Function
Time
function to
the right of the field. You can datasheet
respond to the enter your own value directly in
initiating event the Response Time cell.
and bring the
process to a
safe state.
If the value in the SIL Mode
field is Low Demand and the Instrumented
Risk
Number A number
Reduction
representing value in the SIS Assessment
Function
Factor (RRF)
the factor by Method field is Layer of
datasheet
which the risk Protection Analysis - Internal or
Risk Matrix - Internal, this
should be
reduced for the value is disabled and populated
instrumented automatically with the inverse
of the value in the Required
function.
Probability of Failure field.
For all other SIS When the
value in the SIL Mode field is

Low Demand and the value in
the SIS Assessment Method
field is not Layer of Protection
Analysis - Internal or Risk
Matrix - Internal, this field is
enabled and you can type a
value directly into the Risk
Reduction Factor cell. Note
that:
The value you type must

fall within a certain
range, which is
determined by the value
in the Selected SIL
Level field. If you
modify the value in the
Selected SIL Level
field, the value in this
field will be updated
automatically to fall
within the correct range
of values for that level.
If you try to type a value
into the Risk Reduction
Factor cell without first
selecting a value from
the Selected SIL Level
list or you type a value
that is outside of the
acceptable range, an
error message will
appear.
If you type a value into
the Risk Reduction
Factor cell, the value in
the Required Probability
of Failure field will be
with the inverse of the
value that you type.
Likewise, if you type a
value into the Required
Probability of Failure
cell, the value in the
Risk Reduction field
will be populated
inverse of the value that
you type.
If the value in the SIL Mode
field is High Demand or
Continuous, this field is
disabled and does not contain a
value.
Safe State
Description
Text
A description
of the safe
state to which
the process
should be
taken via the
instrumented
function.

Safe State Description and
contains a
button, which
Editor.
Instrumented
Function
datasheet

automatically if the value in the
SIL Assessment Method field is
anything other than External.
If the SIL Assessment Method
field contains an External
value, this field is enabled and
A number
representing appears as a list that is
the SIL value populated with values from the Instrumented
Selected SIL
Number that is required MI_SAFETY_INDEX_LEVEL Function
Level
System Code Table. You can
for the
datasheet
instrumented select a value from the list.
function.
If a value exists in the Required
Probability of Failure field, and
you try to delete the value in
the Selected SIL Level field, an
error message appears, and you
will not be able to delete the
value.
The Entity Key

of the SIL
Analysis
record to
which the
Instrumented This field is used internally by
SIL Analysis
Number
None
Function
Key
the Meridium APM system.
record is
linked.
appears as a list labeled SIL
Assessment Method and
contains the following values:
SIL
Assessment
Method
The method
used to assess
the risk
Character associated with
the
instrumented
function.
Risk Matrix - Internal

Layer of Protection
Analysis Internal
PHA - Internal
ALARP - External
Event Tree
Fault Tree
LOPA - External
Risk Graph
Risk Matrix - External
If you select the PHA - Internal

option, there must be a value in
the Hazards Analysis Reference
field. Otherwise, an error
Instrumented
Function
datasheet
SIL Mode

appears as a list labeled SIL
The SIL mode
Mode and contains the
that is defined
for this
Character instrumented
Low Demand
function based
High Demand
on the code
IEC-61508.
Continuous
The ID of the
Safety
Instrumented
System record
SIS System ID Character to which the
Instrumented
Function
record is
linked.
Instrumented
Function
datasheet

appears as a list labeled SIS ID
and contains the values that
Instrumented
exist in the SIS ID field in the
Function
datasheet
records that are linked to the
SIL Analysis record with which
you are currently working.
Site
Description
A description
of the site that
Character is specified in None
the Site ID
field.
Site ID
The ID of the
site that is
Instrumented
associated with
Character
automatically with the value in Function
the
the Site ID field of the
datasheet
instrumented
associated SIL Analysis record.
function.
A number
representing
the number of
times per year
Spurious Trip
it is acceptable
Number
Limit (per yr)
for a spurious
trip to occur
for this
instrumented
function.
None

Spurious Trip Limit (per yr), in
which you can enter your own
Instrumented
value. This value is used to
Function
determine the value in the
datasheet
Meets STR Limit field in a
Startup And
Restart
Procedure
Text
Survival
Text
Requirement

A detailed
Startup and Restart Procedure,
description of and the value is set by default. Safety
the startup and You can remove this text and Requirement
restart
Specification
enter your own values. This
procedures for
datasheet
field contains a
button,
the process.
which you can click to access
the Text Editor.
A description
of the
requirements
for the
instrumented
function to
survive a
catastrophic
event, such as
an earthquake.

Survival Requirement, and the
Safety
value is set by default. You can
Requirement
remove this text and enter your
Specification
own values. This field contains
datasheet
a
Trip Mode
A short
description of
the trip mode
Character (i.e., energize
to trip or deenergize to
trip).

Safety
Trip Mode, and the values is set Requirement
to de-energize to trip by default. Specification
You can remove this text and datasheet
Trip Point
A number
representing
the point on
the process
Number variable range
at which the
trip alarm
should be
triggered.

Trip Point, in which you can
Unit
Description
A description
of the unit that
Character is specified in None
the Unit ID
field.
Safety
Requirement
Specification
datasheet
None
Unit ID
The ID for the On the datasheet, this field

Instrumented
unit where the appears as a text box labeled
Character
Function
instrumented Unit ID, in which you can enter
datasheet
function exists. your own value.
Functional Test Detail

The following table provides a list of the fields that exist in the Functional Test Detail
family. This list is not comprehensive.
Field
Caption
As Found
Travel
Time Limit
As Found
Trip Point
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
The maximum as-found travel

time allowed, in seconds. For This field is enabled only in
example, the value might
Functional Test Detail records that
Number
indicate the maximum amount are linked to records representing
of time it takes a switch to
final elements.
change from open to close.
A value that indicates the
performance of the proof test
Number
(i.e., the value you found in
the field).
You can type a value in this field

manually. This field is enabled
only in Functional Test Detail
records that are linked to records
representing sensors, final
elements, or logic solvers.
As Found
The error between the value
Trip Point
you found in the field (i.e., As
Error
Number Found Trip Point) and the
acceptable range (i.e., Trip
Point Error Limit).
This field is enabled only in

are linked to records representing
sensors, final elements, or logic
solvers.
As Left
Travel
The maximum as-left travel
Number
Time Limit
time allowed, in seconds.

final elements.
As Left
Trip Point
A value that indicates the final

performance of the proof test.
If the value in the As Found
Trip Point field is within the
Trip Point Error Limit, you You can type a value in this field
might not make adjustments, manually. This field is enabled
and the As Left Trip Point
only in Functional Test Detail
Number
will be the same. If the As
Found Trip Point is not within representing sensors, final
the Trip Point Error Limit,
elements, or logic solver.
you may make adjustments,
and will enter the new
adjusted trip point as the As
Left Trip Point.
As Left
The error between the value
Trip Point
you left in the field (i.e., As
Error
Number Left Trip Point) and the
acceptable range (i.e., Trip
Point Error Limit).

sensors, final elements, or logic
solvers.
Equipment
ID
You can select the associated

Equipment record by clicking the
Location ID
Pass/Fail

Equipment record against
Character
which the step should be
performed.
in the Equipment ID field.
You can select the associated

Functional Location record by
Functional Location record
Character
against which the step should
clicking the
in the Location
be performed.
ID field.
This value indicates the status of
the proof test step identified in the
Character The status of the proof test
Step Sequence Number and Step
step.
Type fields. This field will contain
one of the following values: Pass,
Fail, Skip, Complete. This field is
populated automatically based
upon other values in the record.
The value in this field will be set
automatically to Pass if any of the
following conditions is true:
The Trip Point, Trip Point

Error, and Travel Time
Result
Criteria
Step
Sequence
Number
Text
For final elements, the

value in the As Found
Travel Time is within the
range established by the
Travel Time Limit.
If the Trip Point and Trip

Point Error fields are
empty but the Travel Time
Limit field is not, the
pass/fail status will be
determined solely by
Travel Time Limit. The
opposite is true as well.

A description of an acceptable
automatically and cannot be
result of the test.
modified.
A number that represents the

order in which the step should This field is populated
Number
be performed, relative to other automatically.
steps.
Step Type
Character The type of step.
Test
Criteria
Limit fields are empty.

For logic solvers, sensors,
and final elements, the
value in the As Found Trip
Point field is within the
range established by the
Trip Point Limit field.
Text
The nature of the test.

automatically. When this field
contains the value Sensor or Final
Element, the following fields will
be enabled: Trip Point, Trip Point
Direction, Trip Point Error Limit,
and Trip Point Units. The Travel
Time Units field is also enabled
when this field contains the value
Final Element.
automatically and cannot be
modified.
Template
Detail ID
An alphanumeric value that This value is generated

Character identifies the Functional Test automatically and cannot be
Detail record.
modified.
Travel
Time Limit
Trip Point
The maximum acceptable

Number travel time for this step, in
seconds.

automatically with the value in the
Travel Time Limit field in the
associated SIS Proof Test Template
Detail record and disabled unless
the value in the Step Type field is
Final Element.
A value that defines when the

element will activate an SIS
shutdown. For example, a trip
Number
point on a water heater might
be 140 degrees, a temperature
that would scald someone.

Trip Point field in the associated
SIS Proof Test Template Detail
record and disabled unless the
value in the Step Type field is
Final Element.
Trip Point
Direction
Character
Trip Point
Error Limit
The trend of Trip Point

values.

Trip Point Direction field in the
Sensor or Final Element.
A number identifying the

range from the Trip Point,
plus or minus, within which This field is populated
the As Found Trip Point value automatically with the value in the
must fall to be acceptable. For Trip Point Error Limit field in the
Number example, if the Trip Point is 5, associated SIS Proof Test Template
and the Trip Point Error Limit Detail record and disabled unless
is 3, the As Found Trip Point the value in the Step Type field is
must fall within plus or minus Sensor or Final Element.
three of the Trip Point (i.e.,
from 2 to 8).
Trip Point Character The unit of measure

Units
associated with the value in
the Trip Point field.

Trip Point Units field in the

Sensor or Final Element.
LOPA
LOPA records store details about the Layer of Protection Analysis they represent. The
LOPA family and appear on the LOPA datasheet, unless otherwise specified. The
not comprehensive.
Field Caption
Data
Type
Analysis Type
The type of
Character analysis that you
are conducting.
Calculated SIL
The SIL value that This field is disabled

is required to
and populated
mitigate the risk automatically with the
that is associated SIL value that is
Number with the
associated with the
Instrumented
value in the Required
Function record to PIF PHD field.
which the LOPA
record is linked.
Comments
Text
Description
Additional
information about
the Layer of
Protection
Analysis.
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet/Tab
This field does not

appear on the datasheet
by default and is
with the value LOPA.
This field does

not appear on
the LOPA
datasheet.
This field does

not appear on
the LOPA
datasheet.
On the datasheet, this Definition tab

field appears as a text
box labeled Comments
and contains a
click to access the Text
Editor.
Description
Text

A description for box labeled Description
the Layer of
Definition tab
and contains a
Protection
Analysis.
Editor.

A description of
value in the Initiating
the initiating event
Description of
Event Description field
Character that is specified in
Details tab
Initiating Event
in the associated
the Initiating
Event field.
record. You can modify
this value if needed.
A description of
the event that will
allow the risk that
is associated with
the initiating
event, which is
Enabling
described in the You can type your own
Event/Condition Character
Details tab
Initiating Event value manually.
Description
field, to be
mitigated (e.g., the
equipment only
operates nine
months of the
year).
You can type your own
value manually. The
Enabling
Number A number that
Details tab
value must be greater
Event/Condition
represents the
Probability
probability value than 0 (zero) and less
that is associated than or equal to 1 (one).
with the enabling
event and the
This value is multiplied
initiating event. by the value in the
This value is used Frequency of Initiating
to determine the Event field to determine
probability of an the value in
Unmitigated
Consequence Frequency
unmitigated event field. If this field is
occurring.
empty, a default value
of 1 will be used in that
calculation.
This field is required
and is populated
value in the Frequency
of Initiating Event (per
yr) field in the
associated Instrumented
Function record.
You can modify this
value, but it must be
A number
greater than 0 (zero). If
representing the
you type a value less
number of times
than 0 (zero), a message
per year that the
will appear, and when
Frequency of
Number initiating event
Details tab
you click OK, the
Initiating Event
that is specified in
modified value will be
the Initiating
reverted back to its
Event field will
original value.
occur.
This value is multiplied
by the value in the
Enabling
Event/Condition
Probability field to
determine the value in
Unmitigated
field.
A brief description This field is populated
of the event that automatically with the
could cause the
value in the Initiating
risk that is
Event field in the
Initiating Event Character
Details tab
described in the associated Instrumented
Unacceptable
Function record. You
Consequence field can modify this value if
to be mitigated. needed.
LOPA ID
The ID for the

Layer of
Character
Protection
Analysis.

value manually. The
value will appear on the
(IFs) page and is used to Definition tab
distinguish the LOPA
record from other LOPA
records. This field is
required.
Mitigated
Consequence
Frequency
A number
representing the
mitigated
consequence
frequency, or the
Number
consequence
frequency after
layers of
protection have
been added.
This field is disabled

and populated
automatically. The value
is calculated by
multiplying the value in Definition tab
the Unmitigated
field by the value in the
Total IPL PFD field.
Required
Mitigated
Consequence
Frequency
Number The maximum

allowable
frequency at
which the
initiating event
can occur for the
risk that is
described in the
Unacceptable
Consequence
field.

On the datasheet, this Definition tab
field appears as a list
labeled Required
Mitigated Consequence
Frequency and contains
the following hardcoded values:
1E-04
1E-05
1E-06
You can select a value

from the list or type
your own value. If you
type your own value, it
must be greater than 0
(zero). If you modify
this value to be less than
0 (zero), a message will
appear, and when you
click OK, the modified
value will revert back to
its original value. If you

enter a value other than
the baseline values in
the list, it will then be
added to the list.
Required PIF
PFD

and populated
automatically. This
value is calculated
automatically as the
difference between the
A number
value in the Mitigated
representing the Consequence Frequency
Number target probability field and the value in
Details tab
that a failure will the Required Mitigated
occur.
Field. This value is used
to determine the values
in the Required PIF
Risk Reduction Factor
and Calculated SIL
Level fields.
Required PIF
Risk Reduction
Factor
A number
representing the
Number factor by which
the risk should be
reduced.
Title
A short
description for the
Character Layer of
Definition tab
value manually.
Protection
Analysis.
Total IPL PFD
Number The PFD value

associated with all
the IPLs in place
for this
consequence.

and populated
Details tab
inverse of the value in
the Required PIF PHD
field.

Details tab
and populated
is calculated by
multiplying the values
in the PFD fields of
each Independent Layer
of Protection record
associated with the

LOPA Analysis together.
Total CM
Probability
The sum of the

values that exist in and populated
the Probability
automatically. This field
fields in the
does not appear on the
Number
Consequence
LOPA datasheet by
Modifier records default.
that are linked to
the LOPA record.
Unacceptable
Consequence

A description of automatically with the
the risk for which value in the
you are
Consequence
Character conducting the
Description field in the Details tab
Layer of
associated Instrumented
Protection
Function record. You
Analysis.
can modify this value if
needed.
Unmitigated
Consequence
Frequency
A number
representing the
unmitigated
consequence
frequency, or the
Number
consequence
frequency before
layers of
protection have
been added.
This field does

not appear on
the LOPA
datasheet.

and populated
is calculated by
multiplying the value in
the Frequency of
Details tab
Initiating Event field by
the value in the
Enabling
Event/Condition
Probability field.

Protective Instrument Loop records store details about protective instrument loops for a
safety instrumented system. The following table provides an alphabetical list and
description of the fields that exist for the Protective Instrument Loop family and appear
on the Protective Instrument Loop datasheet by default. The information in this table
reflects the baseline state and behavior of these fields.
Field
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
This field appears as a list in the

Achieved SIL Number A number representing Calculated Results section on the
datasheet and contains the following
the overall SIL value
options:
for the protective
instrument loop.
0 (zero)
1
When the value in the SIL Validation

Method field is External Calculation,
the Achieved SIL field is enabled,
and you can select a value from the
list.
Method field is Internal Calculation,
the Achieved SIL field is disabled
and populated automatically with the
lowest value of the values stored in
the following fields:
Calculated SIL
Calculated SIL Architectural
Constraints
Calculated SIL Systematic

Capabilities
For example, if the value in each of

these fields was 2, the value in the
Achieved SIL field would be 2. If the
value in two of the fields was 2 and
the value in one of the fields was 1,
the value in the Achieved SIL field
would be 1.
Availability
This field appears as a text box,

Number A number representing which is displayed in the Calculated
the percentage of time Results section on the datasheet and
between proof tests that is enabled or disabled based upon the
following criteria:
the protective
instrument loop is
protecting the safety
instrumented system.
Validation Method field is
External Calculation, the
Availability field is enabled,
and you can type a value
directly into the Availability
cell.

Internal Calculation, the
Meridium APM system
calculates this value
automatically and displays
that value as read-only in the
Availability field.
This field appears as a text box,
Calculated SIL Number A number representing which is displayed in the Calculated
Results section on the datasheet and
the SIL value for the
protective instrument is enabled or disabled based upon the
loop, which is the value following criteria:
stored in the Loop PFD
Avg field.
Calculated SIL field is

enabled, and you can type a
value directly into the
Calculated SIL cell.
Meridium APM system
automatically, based on the
value in the Loop PFD Avg
field, and displays one of the
following values as read-only
in the Calculated SIL field:
o
0 (zero)
4
This field appears as a text box in
Calculated SIL Number The SIL value for the the Calculated Results section on
Architectural
protective instrument the datasheet and is enabled or
Constraints
loop, which is based on disabled based upon the following
architectural constraints criteria:
defined in the Test
Architecture
Constraints field.
Calculated SIL Architectural
Constraints field is enabled,
directly into the Calculated
SIL Architectural Constraints
cell.
Meridium APM system
o
value in the Test Architecture

Constraints field, and displays
one of the following values as
read-only in the Calculated
field:
o
0 (zero)
4
This field appears as a text box in the
Calculated SIL Number The SIL value for the Calculated Results section on the
Systematic
protective instrument datasheet and is enabled or disabled
Capabilities
loop, which is based on based upon the following criteria:
systematic capabilities
defined in the failure
rate data associated
with each protective
instrument loop
Calculated SIL Systematic
element.
Capabilities field is enabled,
directly into the Calculated
SIL Systematic Capabilities
cell.
Meridium APM system
systematic capabilities
defined in the failure rate data
associated with each
protective instrument loop
element, and displays one of
the following values as readonly in the Calculated SIL
Systematic Capabilities field:
o
Calculated
STR
0 (zero)
If the value in the Systematic

Capability Validation field is False,
this value is set to NA.
Number A number representing Calculated Results section on the
the spurious trip rate for datasheet and is enabled or disabled
based upon the following criteria:
the protective
instrument loop.
Calculated STR field is
Calculated STR cell.
Demand Mode Character A value that indicates

how frequently the
protective instrument
loop will be in demand.
In other words, how
frequently the
loop will be needed to
protect the safety
instrumented system as
a result of a failure.

Meridium APM system
Calculated STR field.
This field is disabled and populated

the SIL Mode field in the
Instrumented Function record that is
linked to the Protective Instrument
Loop record.
Description
Character A brief description of

the protective
instrument loop.
Final Element Number A percentage that

MCI
represents the
Maintenance
Capability Index.
You can type a value directly into the

Description cell.
This field appears as a list labeled
Final Element MCI and contains the
following options:
ID
MCI 0 (0%): Indicates that

repair actions are never
performed.
repair actions are effective 60
percent of the time.



repair actions are always
performed perfectly.
Character The ID of the protective You can type a value directly into the
instrument loop.
ID cell. This value is required and
must be unique. If you do not type a
unique value into the ID cell, you
will not be able to save the Protective
Last Modified Character The name of the user

By
who last modified the
record.

automatically with the name of the
Meridium APM Security User who
last modified the Protective
Last Modified Date

Date

automatically with the date on which
the Protective Instrument Loop
record was last modified.

record was last
modified.
Logic Solver
MCI
Number A percentage that

represents the
Maintenance
Capability Index.

Logic Solver MCI and contains the
following options:

performed.



Character A value that indicates Loop Class and contains the
whether the protective following options:
instrument loop is
designed to mitigate
Safety: Indicates that the
safety risks or
protective instrument loop is
commercial risks.
designed to mitigate risks
related to safety. For example,
a safety loop might prevent a
high motor current from
causing a fire.
Loop Class
Protective: Indicates that the

protective instrument loop is
designed to mitigate
commercial risks only. For
example, a protective loop
might prevent low lube
pressure from causing a
mechanical failure where
there is no safety risk
involved.
Loop PFD Avg Number A number representing

the probability that the
loop will fail.

Calculated Results section on the
datasheet, which is enabled or
disabled based upon the following
criteria:

Loop PFD Avg field is
value directly into the Loop
PFD Avg cell.

Meridium APM system
Loop PFD Avg field.
the probability per hour datasheet, which is enabled or
that the protective
criteria:
instrument loop will
fail.
Loop PFH field is enabled,
directly into the Loop PFH
field cell.
Loop PFH

Meridium APM system
Loop PFH field.
Loop Type

Character A value representing the Loop Type and contains the
following options:
category of the
loop, based on the type
Analysis
of data that the sensor is
Flow
measuring.
Level
Load
Pressure
Speed
Temperature
Meets
Character A value that indicates Meets Architectural Constraints in
Architectural
whether the protective the Calculated Results section on the
Constraints
instrument loop's
architectural constraints options:
meet the requirement
defined by the value in
Incomplete
the Required SIL field.
Yes
No
NA
This value is set to Incomplete by

default.
the Meets Architectural Constraints
field is enabled, and you can select a
value from the list.
the Meets Architectural Constraints
field is disabled and populated
automatically. After you calculate the
SIL Validation results, the Meets
Architectural Constraints field is
populated using the following logic:
If the value in the Calculated

field is greater than or equal
to the value in the Required
SIL field, this value is set to
Yes.
Otherwise, this value is set to
No.
If the value in the Test Architectural

Constraints field is Not Consider, this
value is set to NA.
Meets
Availability
Target

Character A value that indicates Meets Availability Target in the
whether the protective Calculated Results section on the
instrument loop's
availability meets the options:
availability requirement
defined in the
Incomplete
Yes
the Protective
No
NA
default.
the Meets Availability Target field is
enabled, and you can select a value
from the list.
the Meets Availability Target field is
disabled and populated automatically.
After you calculate the SIL
Validation results, the Meets

Availability field is populated using
the following logic:
Meets SIL
Requirement
If the value in the Demand

Mode field is Low Demand,
and the value in the
Availability field is greater
than or equal to the value
stored in the Availability
Target field in the
that is linked to the Protective
Instrument Loop record, this
value is set to Yes.
No.
If the value in the Demand Mode

field is High Demand or Continuous,
this value is NA.
Character A value that indicates Meets SIL Requirement in the
whether the protective Calculated Results section on the
instrument loop's SIL datasheet and contains the following
options:
value meets the SIL
requirement defined in
the Required SIL field.
Incomplete
Yes
No
NA

default.
the Meets SIL Requirement field is
enabled, and you can select a value
from the list.
the Meets SIL Requirement field is

disabled and populated automatically.
After you calculate the SIL
Validation results, the Meets SIL
Requirement field is populated using
the following logic:
If the value in the Achieved

SIL field is greater than or
equal to the value in the
Required SIL field, this value
is set to Yes.

No.
Meets STR
Limit

Character A value that indicates Meets STR Limit in the Calculated
whether the protective Results section on the datasheet and
contains the following options:
instrument loop's
spurious trip rate meets
the spurious trip rate
Incomplete
requirement defined in
Yes
the Instrumented
Function record that is
No
linked to the Protective
NA
default.
the Meets STR Limit field is enabled,
and you can select a value from the
list.
the Meets STR Limit field is disabled
and populated automatically. After
you calculate the SIL Validation
results, the Meets STR Limit field is
If the inverse of the value

stored in the MTTS field is
greater than or equal to the
value stored in the Spurious
Trip Limit (per yr) field in the
that is linked to the Protective
Instrument Loop record, the
value in the Meets STR Limit
field is set to No.
Otherwise, the value in the
Meets STR Limit field is set
to Yes.
If the Protective Instrument Loop

record is part of a protective
instrument loop template, this value
is set to NA.
Meets
Systematic
Capabilities
Character A value that indicates

whether the protective
instrument loop's
systematic capability
meets the systematic
capability requirement
defined in the Required
SIL field.

Meets Systematic Capabilities in the
options:
Incomplete
Yes
No
NA

default.
the Meets Systematic Capabilities
field is enabled, and you can select a
the Meets Systematic Capabilities
field is disabled and populated
automatically. After you calculate the
SIL Validation results, the Meets
Systematic Capabilities field is
If the value in the Calculated

SIL Systematic Capabilities
field is greater than or equal
to the value in the Required
SIL field, this value is set to
Yes.
No.
If the value in the Systematic

Capability Validation field is False,
this value is set to NA.
Mission Time Number A number that
represents in years the
You can type a value into this field

manually. This value is measured in
MTTFS
time that the protective years.

instrument loop will be
in use before it is
replaced.
represents Mean Time datasheet, which is enabled or
To Fail Safe (i.e., the
average amount of time criteria:
between protective
instrument loop failures
that occur during safe
scenarios).
MTTFS field is enabled, and
you can type a value directly
into the MTTFS cell.
Meridium APM system
MTTFS field.
This value is measured in years.
Required SIL Number A number representing

the SIL value that is
required for the
loop.
Risk
Reduction
Factor

the Selected SIL Level field in the
Instrumented Function record that is
linked to the Protective Instrument
Loop record.
the factor by which the datasheet and is enabled or disabled
risk should be reduced based upon the following criteria:
for the protective
instrument loop.
Risk Reduction Factor field is
value directly into the Risk
Reduction Factor cell.

Meridium APM system
Risk Reduction Factor field.
Number A value that represents Sensor MCI and contains the
following options:
the Maintenance
Capability Index.
performed.
Sensor MCI



SIL Validation Character A value that represents Loop Class and contains the
Method
the type of method used following options:
to calculate the SIL
Validation results for
Internal Calculation: Indicates
the protective
that the Meridium APM
instrument loop.
system will calculate the SIL
Validation results. When this
option is selected, the
Meridium APM system
calculates the values in all
cells in the Calculated Results
section automatically and
displays them as read-only.
External Calculation:
Indicates that you will type
SIL Validation results directly
into cells on the Protective
Instrument Loop datasheet.
When this option is selected,
all cells in the Calculated
Results section are enabled,
and you can type values
directly into those cells.
Startup Time Number A number representing You can type a value into this field
the amount of time
manually. This value is measured in
needed for the
hours.
loop to be restored after
a failure.
Systematic
Capability
Validation
Logical
A value that indicates

whether the SIL value
for the protective
instrument loop will
account for systematic
capabilities, which are
data for each protective
instrument loop
element.
Test
Architecture
Constraints
Character A value that indicates

the level of safety
certification that is
associated with the
elements in the
loop.
If this value is True, the protective

instrument loop will use systematic
capabilities. If this value is False, the
protective instrument loop will not
use systematic capabilities.

Test Architecture Constraints and
IEC 61508: Indicates that the

elements in the protective
instrument loop have been
certified according to the IEC
61508 standard.
IEC 61511: Indicates that the
elements in the protective
instrument loop have been
certified according to the IEC
61511 standard.
Not Consider: Indicates that

the architectural constraints
will not be considered in the
SIL calculation.
Protective Instrument Loop Final

Element
Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records store details about final elements for a
protective instrument loop. The following table provides an alphabetical list and
description of the fields that exist for the Protective Instrument Loop Final Element
family. The information in this table reflects the baseline state and behavior of these
Field Caption
Data
Type
Custom
PVST
Coverage
A numeric value
representing the
percentage of
Number possible failures that
could be detected by
the partial valve
stroke test.
Description
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet/Tab

box labeled Custom Final Element
PVST Coverage, in datasheet
which you can enter
your own value.

A description for the box labeled
Final Element
Description Character
final element.
Description, in which datasheet
you can enter your
own value.
Dangerous Logical
combination
of outputs?
Stores the value True In the UI, this field

or False indicating appears as a check
whether the output box labeled
associated with the Dangerous
Dangerous
Combination of
Outputs tab on the
<Record ID>
Combination of
Outputs?, which you
can select to indicate
final element can
that the final element
lead to a hazardous is associated with a
event if it occurs
combination of
simultaneously with outputs hazard. This
the output associated check box is clear by
with a different final default. When you
element.
select this check box,
the Hazardous Events
field is enabled and
required.
Final
An ID for the final
Character
Element ID
element.
Hazardous
Events
PVST
Interval
Text
(Protective
Instrument Loop
Final Element)
window

box labeled Final
Element ID, in which
you can enter your
Final Element
own value. This value datasheet
is displayed in the
diagram to identify the
final element. This
field is required.
In the UI, this field

Potential
appears as a text box
Dangerous
A description of the without a caption and
Combination of
hazardous event that
Outputs Description
contains a
button,
can occur if the
section on the
which you can click to
output associated
Dangerous
with the final
Combination of
When the Dangerous
element occurs
Outputs tab on the
simultaneously with Combination of
<Record ID>
Outputs? check box is
the output of a
(Protective
selected, this field is
different final
Instrument Loop
enabled and required.
element.
Final Element)
Otherwise, this field is
window
disabled.
Number A numeric value

representing the
frequency at which
the partial valve
stroke test should be
On the datasheet, this Final Element

field appears as a text datasheet
box labeled PVST
Interval, in which you
can enter your own
performed.
PVST
Interval
UOM
value. This field is

enabled only if the
Partial Valve Stroke
Testing check box is
selected.

labeled PVST Interval
The unit of measure
UOM. You can select
associated with the
Final Element
Character
a value in this list.
value stored in the
datasheet
This field is enabled
PVST Interval field.
only if the Partial
Valve Stroke Testing

Solver
Protective Instrument Loop Final Element records store details about logic solvers for a
protective instrument loop. The following table provides an alphabetical list and
description of the fields that exist for the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver family
and appear on the Protective Instrument Loop Logic Solver datasheet. The information in
this table reflects the baseline state and behavior of these fields. This list is not
comprehensive.
Field Caption
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet
Tab
This field appears as a check

box labeled Approved
Custom Device. This value is
automatically by the
Indicates whether or Meridium APM system with
not the logic solver one of the following values:
Approved
that is identified in
Logic
If this value is True, it Solver
Custom
Logical the Exida Name
indicates the device is Details tab
Device
field is approved for
an approved device.
use in the protective
instrument loop.
If this value is False, it
indicates that the
device is not an
approved device.
If the value in the Manual
Entry field is False, this value
is disabled and populated
automatically with one of the
following values based on the
device identified in the Exida
Indicates the level of
Name field:
safety certification
Logic
Architectural
of the logic solver
A
Character
Solver
Type
based on compliance
B
Details tab
with standard IEC
61508.
If the value in the Manual
Entry field is True, this field
is enabled, and you can type a
Architectural Type cell.
Availability
A number
representing the
percentage of time
between proof tests
Number
that the logic solver
is operating in the
protective
instrument loop.
Calculated
Results
This field appears as a text
box labeled Availability. The section on
the Logic
Meridium APM system
Solver
calculates this number
automatically and displays it Details tab
as read-only in the
Availability text box.
Calculated
PFD Avg
Calculated
PHF
Calculated
STR
Calculated
Results
section on
A number
box labeled Calculated PFD
the Logic
representing the
Avg. The Meridium APM
Solver
Number
probability that the system calculates this number
Details tab
logic solver will fail. automatically and displays it
as read-only in this cell.
Calculated
Results
A number
section on
representing the
box labeled Calculated PHF.
the Logic
calculated
Solver
Number
probability of failure calculates this number
Details tab
per hour for the
automatically and displays it
logic solver.
Calculated
Results
section on
A number
box labeled Calculated STR.
the Logic
representing the
Solver
Number
spurious trip rate for calculates this number
Details tab
the logic solver.
automatically and displays it
A brief description
of the logic solver.
Description
Character
Equipment
The Record ID of
the Equipment
record to which the
Character Protective
Instrument Loop
Logic Solver record
is linked.
Logic
Solver
You can type a value directly Details tab
into the Description cell.
This field contains an

Equipment record.
Logic
Solver
Details tab

Logic
The name of the
box labeled Device Name and
Exida Name Character
Solver
logic solver device. is disabled. This value is
Details tab
populated automatically.
Functional
Location
The Record ID of
the Functional
Location record to
Character which the Protective
Instrument Loop
Logic Solver record
is linked.
Tthis field contains an

Logic
button, which you can click to Solver
Details tab
Logic
You can type a value directly Solver
Logic Solver
An ID for the logic into the Logic Solver ID cell. Details tab
Character
ID
solver.
This value is required and
must be unique.
Manual Entry Logical
MTTFS
Indicates whether
you will enter data
in a Protective
Instrument Loop
Logic Solver
Channel record
manually or the
Meridium APM
system will populate
this value
automatically.
A number
representing Mean
Time To Fail Safe
for a logic solver
(i.e., the average
Number
amount of time
between logic solver
failures that occur
during safe
scenarios).
This field appears as a check

box labeled Manual Entry. If
this value is True, the Add
button in the
Channels/Modules section on
the Protective Instrument
Logic
Loop page is enabled. You
Solver
can use the Add button to add Details tab
a Protective Instrument Logic
Solver Channel record to the
Protective Instrument Loop. If
this value is False, the Add
button is disabled.
Calculated
Results
section on
box labeled MTTFS. The
the Logic
Meridium APM system
Solver
calculates this number
automatically and displays it Details tab
as read-only in this cell. This
value is measured in years.
MTTR
Proof Test
Coverage
Proof Test
Interval
Reference
Data Date
A number
representing Mean
Time To Repair, or
Number the time it takes to
repair the logic
solver after a failure
is detected.
You can type a number

directly into the MTTR cell.
Logic
The value that you enter must
Solver
be between 4 and 336.
Details tab
will appear. This value is
required.
A number
representing the
percentage of
failures that are
detected by the proof directly into the Proof Test
Coverage cell. The number
test (i.e., how
effectively the proof that you enter must be
Logic
between 0 and 100.
test identifies
Number
Solver
failures). For
Details tab
example, 100%
proof test coverage will appear. This value is
indicates that the
required.
proof test would
identify 100% of the
failures that
occurred.
A number
directly into the Proof Test
representing the
Interval cell. The number that Logic
monthly interevals at
Number
you enter must be between 1 Solver
which the proof test
and 360, or an error message Details tab
should be
will appear. This value is
performed.
required.
Date
The date on which box labeled Reference Data Failure Data
Date and displays the
that the reference
Reference
data was published Calendar feature.
tab
for the device that is
identified in the
When the value in the Manual
Exida Name field. Entry field is True, this field
is enabled, and you can select
a date manually. When the
value in the Manual Entry
field is False, this value is
automatically with the date on
which the reference data was

published for the device that
is identified in the Exida
Name field.
box labeled Reference Data
Reference.
Reference
Data
Reference
Reference
Data
Revision

Entry field is True, this value
The specific failure
data reference as it
Reference Data Reference
appears in the Exida
Failure Data
cell.
Character data source that is
Reference
identified in the
tab
Reference Data
Entry field is False, this field
Source field.
is populated automatically
with the data reference for the
device that is identified in the
Exida Name field and
displayed as read-only in this
cell.
Revision.
A number that
represents the
Failure Data
number of times the Reference Data Revision cell.
Character
Reference
reference data has
tab
been revised in the When the value in the Manual
Exida database.
with the data revision for the
Name field and is displayed

Source.
The source of the
Failure Data
Reference Data Source cell.
Reference
Character reference data (e.g.,
Reference
Data Source
Exida).
tab
with the data source for the
Name field and is displayed
A number that
represents the SIL
value for the logic
solver, which is
SIL
based on the
Architectural Number
architectural
Constraints
constraints that are
defined in the Test
Architecture
Constraints field.

box labeled SIL Architectural
Constriants. The Meridium
APM system calculates this
number automatically and
displays it as read-only in this
cell.
Calculated
Results
section on
the Logic
Solver
Details tab

box labaled SIL Systematic
Capabilities and is enabled or
disabled based upon the
following criteria:
o
SIL
Systematic
Capability
A number that
represents the SIL
value for the logic
solver which is
Number based on the
systematic
capabilities that are
rate data.
When the value in the

Manual Entry field is
True, the SIL
Sytematic Capabilities
field is enabled, and
you cant type a value
directly into the SIL
Systematic
Capabilities cell.
Manual Entry field is
False, the Meridium
APM system
calculates the number
automatically, based
on the systematic
capabilities that are
rate data associated
with the logic solver
device, and displays
one of the following
values as read-only in
the SIL Systematic
Capability field:
0 (zero)
Calculated
Results
section on
the Logic
Solver
Details tab

Safety Instrumented System records store details about the safety instrumented system
they represent. The following table provides an alphabetical list and description of the
fields that exist for the Safety Instrumented System family and appear on the Safety
Instrumented System datasheet, unless otherwise specified. The information in this table
reflects the baseline state and behavior of these fields. This list is not comprehensive.
Field Caption
Data
Type
Description
Abnormal Mode
Description
Behavior and Usage

text box labeled Abnormal Mode
Text
A detailed
description of the
abnormal mode of
operation.
Abnormal State
A short description
of the specific
Character
abnormal state of
the operation.

button,
which you can click to access the Text
Editor. This field is enabled only if
ABNORMAL is selected in the
Operation Modes list. Otherwise, this
field is disabled.
list labeled Abnormal State and contains
Start-Up
Shutdown
Bypass
Maintenance
Emergency
Other
This field is enabled and required only

if ABNORMAL is selected in the Plant
Operation Mode list. Otherwise, this
field is disabled.
Communication Character The type of
Links
communication link text box labeled Communication Links,
that exists between in which you can enter your own value.
components within
the logic solver and

any other network
device. For
example, Ethernet.
Is Default SIS
Indicates whether
the Safety
Logical Instrumented
System record is the
default.
Last Modified
By
The name of the

Character user who last
and updated automatically whenever the
modified the record. record is modified.
Last Modified
Date
Logic Solver ID
Logic Solver
Type
Date
The date on which

the record was last
and populated automatically.
modified.

text box labeled Logic Solver ID, in
The ID for the logic
which you can type your own value.
solver that is
This value should correspond to the
Character associated with the
value stored in the Logic Solver ID field
safety instrumented
in the Protective Instrument Loop Logic
system.
Solver record that represents the desired
logic solver.
list labeled Logic Solver Type and
contains the following baseline System
Codes in the
MI_LOGIC_SOLVER_TYPE System
Code Table :
The type of logic
Character
solver.
PLC
BPCS
Long
Description
Text
A statement
describing the
purpose of the
safety instrumented
system.
Relay

text box labeled Long Description and
contains a
Manual
Shutdown
Description
Text
A description of the
method by which
the safety
instrumented
system can be
manually shut
down.

text box labeled Manual Shutdown
button,
which you can click to access the Text
Editor.
Mission Time
A numeric value in On the datasheet, this field appears as a

years that represents text box labeled Mission Time with an
the time that the
additional label, Years, to the right of
safety instrumented the text box. You can enter your own
Number
system will be in
value directly in the Mission Time cell.
use before it is
This value should be equal to or greater
replaced or
than the length of time specified in the
remanufactured.
Target SIS Test Interval field.
On the datasheet ,this field appears as a
list labeled Plant Operation Mode and
Operation Mode
contains the following values:
NORMAL: This is the value that

is selected by default.
ABNORMAL: If you select this
value, the following fields are
enabled:
Abnormal State
Abnormal Mode Description
The mode of
operation for the
Character
safety instrumented
system.
Plant ID
The ID of the plant

in which the safety This field does not appear on the
Character
instrumented
system exists.
Power Source
power supply to the
Character
text box labeled Power Source, in which
safety instrumented
system.
Reset Procedure
Text
method by which
the safety
instrumented
system can be reset.

text box labeled Reset Procedure and
contains a
SIS Description
A description for
the safety
Character
instrumented
system.
SIS ID

text box labeled SIS ID, in which you
can enter your own value. This field is
required, and a rule exists on the field
that checks to see if the value that you
A name for the
enter is unique. If the value that you
Character safety instrumented
enter is already specified for an existing
system.
Safety Instrumented System record, a
message will appear, indicating that the
value is already in use. You will need to
specify a different value before you can
save the record.
Site Description
Character site that is specified
in the Site ID field.
Site ID
The ID of the Site

record associated
Character with the safety
instrumented
system.

value stored in the Site ID field in the
associated SIL Analysis record. You
should not modify this value.
Target SIS Test

Interval
A number that
represents the
interval in months
by which regular
Number
testing will be
performed on the
safety instrumented
system.

text box labeled Target SIS Test
Interval, in which you can enter your
own value.

text box labeled SIS Description, in
which you can enter your own value.
Unit Description
Character unit specified in the
Unit ID field.
Unit ID
area in which the
Character
text box labeled Unit ID, in which you
safety instrumented
system exists.
SIF Common Cause Failure

SIF Common Cause Failure records store details about a failure or a condition within a
plant that can affect the operation of multiple instrumented functions (i.e., common cause
failures). The following table provides an alphabetical list and description of the fields
that exist for the SIF Common Cause Failure family and appear on the SIF Common
Cause Failures datasheet. The information in the table reflects the baseline state and
behavior of these fields.
Field
Caption
Data
Type
Text
CCF
Description
Description
The description of This field is required. On the SIF Common

the common cause Cause Failure datasheet, you can click the
failure.
button to define this value manually via
the CCF Description dialog box.

common cause
failure.
CCF ID
Text
CCF
Mitigation
Behavior and Usage
This field is required. On the Common

Cause Failures tab on the <Record ID>
(Instrumented Function) window, this value
appears as a hyperlink, which you can click
to view the contents of the corresponding
SIF Common Cause Failure record in a new
window.
A brief description This field is required. On the SIF Common

of ways to mitigate Cause Failure datasheet, you can click the
the effect of the
button to define this value manually
common cause
via
the
CCF Mitigation dialog box.
failure.
SIL Analysis
SIL Analysis records store details about an SIL Analysis. The following table provides an
alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist for the SIL Analysis family. The
information in this table reflects the baseline state and behavior of these fields. This list is
not comprehensive.
Note: The field captions that are displayed in the following table may differ from the
datasheet captions.
Field Caption
Analysis
Description
Analysis End
Date
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet/Tab
Character A brief description You can type your own SIL Analysis tab
for the SIL
value manually.
on the SIL
Analysis.
Analysis
datasheet
You can type or select
Date
The date on which the desired date. The
SIL Analysis tab
the SIL Analysis start date must be later on the SIL
than the date in the
will end.
Analysis
Analysis Start Date
datasheet
field, or an error
When you copy a SIL
Analysis record, the
value in this field is not
copied to the new
record.
Analysis ID
Character The ID for the SIL You can type your own SIL Analysis tab
Analysis.
value manually. This
on the SIL
field is required, and the Analysis
value you enter must be datasheet
unique with respect to
the Analysis ID in other
SIL Analysis records.
Note that if you open an
existing SIL Analysis
record and delete the
value in the Analysis ID
field, if you then retype
that same value and try
to save the record, an
error message will
appear indicating that
Analysis Reevaluation
Analysis Start
Date
the Analysis ID already

exists.
Number A number
box that is labeled
indicating how
many years after Hazards Next
the completion of Reevaluation Interval
with an additional label,
the Hazards
Years, to the right of the
Analysis that is
associated with the text box. If the SIL
SIL Analysis that Analysis record is
linked to a Hazards
the Hazards
Analysis should be Analysis record, this
field is populated
re-evaluated.
value in the
Reevaluation Interval
field in the Hazards
Analysis record that is
linked to the SIL
Analysis record.
Date
If the SIL Analysis

record is not linked to a
Hazards Analysis
record, this field is
enabled and you can
populate it manually.
You can type or select
The date on which the desired date. The
the SIL Analysis analysis end date must
be earlier than the date
will begin.
in the Analysis Start
Date field, or an error
Equipment ID Character The ID for the
SIL Analysis tab

on the SIL
Analysis
datasheet
SIL Analysis tab

on the SIL
Analysis
datasheet
When you copy an SIL

Analysis record, this
field is populated
current date.
field is disabled and
SIL Analysis tab
button,
Equipment record contains a
that is linked to the which you can click to
search for an existing
SIL Analysis.
Equipment record to
link to the SIL Analysis
record. After you select
an Equipment record,
the Equipment ID field
is populated
ID stored in the
corresponding
Equipment record.
The Equipment ID
on the SIL
value appears as a
Analysis
hyperlink, which
datasheet
displays in a new
window the Equipment
record with that ID. The
selected Equipment
record should represent
the equipment for which
the SIS exists to
mitigate the risk of
failure on that
equipment.
copied.
EquipmentKey Number The Entity Key of
the Equipment
record that is
linked to the SIL
Analysis record.
Facilitator
Character The name of the

SIL Analysis team
member who is
specified as the
Facilitator on the
SIL Analysis Team
This field does not

appear on the SIL
Analysis datasheet by
default.
This field does not
appear on the SIL
default.
None
None
page.
Functional
Location ID

Functional
Location record
that is linked to the
SIL Analysis
record.

contains a
button,
search for an existing
Functional Location
record to link to the SIL
Analysis record. After
you select a Functional
Location record, the
field is populated
ID from the
corresponding
Functional Location
record.
SIL Analysis tab
on the SIL
The Functional
Analysis
Location ID appears as datasheet
a hyperlink, which
displays in a new
window the Functional
Location record with
that ID. The selected
Functional Location
record should represent
the location for which
the SIS exists to
mitigate the risk of
failure on that location.
copied.
Functional
Location Key
Number The Entity Key of

the Functional
Location record
SIL Analysis
record.
This field does not

appear on the SIL
default.
None
Hazards
Analysis Date
Hazards
Analysis
Reference
Date
The value that

If the SIL Analysis
SIL Analysis tab
exists in the Last record is linked to a
on the SIL
Modified Date
Hazards Analysis
Analysis
field in the Hazards record, this field is
datasheet
Analysis record
whose record ID with the value in the
appears in the
Last Modified Date
Hazards Analysis field in that Hazards
Reference field.
Analysis record. If the
SIL Analysis record is
not linked to a Hazards
field is enabled, and you
can populate it
manually.
Character The ID of the
SIL Analysis tab
Hazards Analysis
on the SIL
contains
a
button,
record that is
Analysis
linked to the SIL which you can click to datasheet
Analysis record. search for an existing
Hazards Analysis record
to link to the SIL
Analysis record. After
you select the Hazards
Hazards Analysis
Reference field is
with the Record ID
from the corresponding
Hazards Analysis
record.
The Hazards Analysis
ID appears as a
hyperlink, which opens
in a new window the
with that ID.
Note: In order to link a
to an SIL Analysis
record, you must have
at least View privileges

to the Hazards Analysis
family.
Hazards
Number The Entity Key for
Analysis
the Hazards
Reference Key
Analysis record
SIL Analysis
record.
Hazards
Analysis
Revision
Hazards
Reevaluation
Date
This field does not

appear on the SIL
default.
None
Character The numeric value If the SIL Analysis is

that exists in the
linked to a Hazards
Revision Number Analysis record, this
field in the Hazards field is populated
Analysis record
whose Record ID value in the Revision
SIL Analysis tab
appears in the
Number field in that
on the SIL
Hazards Analysis Hazards Analysis
Analysis
Reference field.
record. If the SIL
datasheet
Analysis record is not
linked to a Hazards
can populate it
manually.
Date
The date on which automatically with the SIL Analysis tab
output of the following on the SIL
the Hazards
calculation:
Analysis that is
Analysis
associated with the
datasheet
SIL Analysis
Hazards Reevaluation
should be reDate = Hazards
evaluated.
Analysis Date +
Analysis Re-evaluation
If the SIL Analysis
record is not linked to a
(i.e., the record from
which the values in the
calculation shown
above are mapped), this
can populate it
manually.
field is labeled
HAZOPS
Reevaluation Date.
HAZOP State
Character The current state of If the SIL Analysis

the Hazards
record is linked to a
Analysis record
Hazards Analysis
that is linked to the record, this field is
SIL Analysis
record.
with the state of that
SIL Analysis tab
Hazards Analysis
on the SIL
record. If the SIL
Analysis
Analysis record is not datasheet
linked to a Hazards
can populate it
manually.
Is Deleted
Logical
Last Modified
By

Meridium APM
Security User who
last modified the
record.
Last Modified
Date
Date
Specifies whether
the SIL Analysis
record has been
removed from the
SIL Analysis
Search page.
The value in this field is

used by the Meridium
APM system. You
should not modify this
None
value. This field does
not appear on the SIL
default.
and populated
name of the user who
was logged in when the
record was last
modified. When you
copy an SIL Analysis
record, the value in this
field is not copied.
The date on which This field is disabled

the record was last and populated
modified.
automatically. When
SIL Analysis tab

on the SIL
Analysis
datasheet
SIL Analysis tab

on the SIL
Analysis
you copy an SIL

datasheet
copied.
Long
Description
Text
Loss of SIS
Text
Energy Sources
A detailed
explanation of the
SIL Analysis that
you want to
conduct.
A description of
how the safety
instrumented
system responds to
a loss of energy.
On the datasheet, the

box labeled Loss of
Energy Sources, and the
value is set by default.
You can remove the
default text and type
your own values. This
field contains a
Editor.
SIL Analysis tab

on the SIL
Analysis
datasheet
General SIS
Requirements
tab on the SIL
Analysis
datasheet
field contains a
click to view the Text
Editor.
Normal
Operation
Requirement
Text
A description of the The value in this field is Safety

requirements for set by default. You can Requirement
the normal mode of remove the default
Specifications
the instrumented value and type your
tab on the SIL
function.
own values. This field Analysis
datasheet
contains a
button,
view the Text Editor.
Owner

SIL Analysis team
member who is
specified as the
Process Owner on
the SIL Analysis
Team Members
page.

and populated
first and last name of
the team member as it
appears in the First
Name and Last Name
fields in the user's
Human Resource
SIL Analysis tab

on the SIL
Analysis
datasheet
record.
Process Owner Character The name of the
SIL Analysis team
member who is
specified as the
Process Owner on
the SIL Analysis
Team Members
page.
This value is used to

populate the Owner
field and does not
appear on the SIL
default.
None
Requirement Text
for SRS Review

requirement for the set by default. You can Requirement
safety requirement remove the default
Specifications
review.
value and type your
tab on the SIL
datasheet
contains a
button,
view the Text Editor.
SIF Bypass
Requirements
A description of the The value in this field is General SIF

bypass
set by default. You can Requirements
requirements for remove the default
tab on the SIL
the instrumented value and type your
Analysis
function.
own values. This field datasheet
Text
contains a
button,
SIF Common Text
Cause Sources

sources for
common cause
remove the default
tab on the SIL
failures in
value and type your
Analysis
instrumented
functions.
contains a
button,
SIF Demand
Mode of
operation

demand mode
associated with an remove the default
tab on the SIL
instrumented
value and type your
Analysis
Text
function.
own values. This field
datasheet
contains a
button,
SIF Diagnostics Text
A description of
component
diagnostics for an
instrumented
function.
The value in this field is General SIF

remove the default
tab on the SIL
value and type your
Analysis
contains a
button,
Emergency
Requirement
Text

requirement for an set by default. You can Requirements
instrumented
remove the default
tab on the SIL
function in the case value and type your
Analysis
of emergency.
contains a
button,
SIF Failure
Modes
Text

configuration of
instrumented
remove the default
tab on the SIL
function failure
value and type your
Analysis
modes.
contains a
button,
SIF Manual
Shutdown
Text

manual shutdown set by default. You can Requirements
operation for an
remove the default
tab on the SIL
instrumented
value and type your
Analysis
function.
contains a
button,
SIF
Maintenance
Overrides
Text

manual override
procedures needed remove the default
tab on the SIL
for maintenance on value and type your
Analysis
an instrumented
function.
contains a
button,
SIF Pre-Alarms Text

pre-alarms for an set by default. You can Requirements
instrumented
remove the default
tab on the SIL
function.
value and type your
Analysis
contains a
button,
SIF Process
Interfaces
Text
A description of
process interfaces
for instrumented
functions.

remove the default
tab on the SIL
value and type your
Analysis
contains a
button,
SIF Proof Test Text

Procedures
SIF Protection Text

Mode
A detailed
description of the
proof test
procedures
associated with an
instrumented
function.

remove the default
tab on the SIL
value and type your
Analysis
contains a
button,

way in which the set by default. You can Requirements
instrumented
remove the default
tab on the SIL
function will
value and type your
Analysis
respond in
protection mode.
SIF Regulations Text

and Standards
SIF Spurious
Trip Rate
Txt
A description of all
the regulations and
standards
associated with an
instrumented
function.
contains a
button,
remove the default
tab on the SIL
value and type your
Analysis
contains a
button,

acceptable spurious set by default. You can Requirements
trip rate for an
remove the default
tab on the SIL
instrumented
value and type your
Analysis
function.
contains a
button,
SIF Trip Reset Text

reset procedures in set by default. You can Requirements
the case of a
remove the default
tab on the SIL
tripped
value and type your
Analysis
instrumented
function.
contains a
button,
SIS Design
Requirements

design
tab on the SIL
the safety
value and type your
Analysis
instrumented
system.
contains a
button,
Text
SIS Electrical
Power
Text

specific electrical set by default. You can Requirements
tab on the SIL
the safety
value and type your
Analysis
instrumented
system.
contains a
button,
SIS
Text
Environmental
Conditions

environmental
operating
remove the default
tab on the SIL
conditions of the value and type your
Analysis
safety instrumented own values. This field datasheet
system.
contains a
button,
SIS Interfaces

interfaces for the set by default. You can Requirements
safety instrumented remove the default
tab on the SIL
system.
value and type your
Analysis
Text
contains a
button,
Logic Solver
Failure
Response
Text
A description of
how the logic
solver responds to
a failure.

remove the default
tab on the SIL
value and type your
Analysis
contains a
button,
SIS Sequence of Text

Events
Recording
A description of
sequence of event
recordings that
exist for the safety
instrumented

automatically. You can
remove the default
value and type your
own values if needed.
General SIF
Requirements
tab on the SIL
Analysis
datasheet
system.

SIS Sequence of Events
Recording text box
contains a
button,
SIS Software
Requirements
Text
A description of the This field is populated

software
automatically. You can
programing
remove the default
languages that are value and type your
permitted for use. own values if needed.
SIS Software
Requirements text box
General SIF
Requirements
tab on the SIL
Analysis
datasheet
contains a
button,
Site Description Character A description of the This field does not
site specified in the appear on the SIL
Site ID field.
default.
Site ID
None
Character The ID of the site On the datasheet, this

SIL Analysis
associated with the field appears as a list
tab on the SIL
SIL Analysis.
labeled Site ID and
Analysis
contains IDs for
datasheet
existing Site Reference
records as they appear
in the Name field in the
associated Site
Reference record. The
record that you select
here is used to identify
which risk matrix to
display when you create
Risk Assessment
records in SIS
Management. If this
field is empty, the
default risk matrix will
be used.
SRS
Methodology
Text
A long description The value in this field is Safety

of the methodology set by default. You can Requirement
for the Safety
remove the default
Specifications
Requirement
value and type your
tab on the SIL
Specification
report.
datasheet
contains a
button,
SRS Purpose
and Scope
Text
A long description The value in this field is Safety

of the purpose and set by default. You can Requirement
scope of the Safety remove the default
Specifications
Requirement
value and type your
tab on the SIL
Specification report own values. This field Analysis
for the SIL
datasheet
contains a
button,
Analysis.
SRS Standards Text

Use

standards that are set by default. You can Requirement
used within the
remove the default
Specifications
Safety
value and type your
tab on the SIL
Requirement
Specification
datasheet
contains a
button,
report.
System
Definition
Text
A description of the The value in this field is

safety instrumented set by default. You can
General SIF
system.
remove the default
Requirements
value and type your
own values. This field tab on the SIL
Analysis
contains a
button, datasheet
Unit
Description
Character A description of the This field does not

unit that is
appear on the SIL
specified in the
Unit ID field.
default.
None
Unit ID
Character The ID for the unit

where the safety
instrumented
system for which
you are conducting
the SIL Analysis
exists.

box labeled Unit ID, in
which you can type
your own value.
SIL Analysis tab

on the SIL
Analysis
datasheet
SIS Proof Test

SIS Proof Test records store details about a proof test that is executed, including the
results of the proof test. The following table provides an alphabetical list and description
of the fields that exist for the SIS Proof Test family and appear on the SIS Proof Test
datasheet, unless otherwise specified. The information in the table reflects the baseline
state and behavior of these fields.
Field Caption
Cleared All
Bypasses and
Forced Logic
Data
Type
Indicates
whether or not
you have
cleared all
Logical bypasses and
forced logic
while
performing the
proof test.
Commencement
Date
Completion
Date
Description
Behavior and Usage

check box labeled Cleared All Bypasses and
Forced Logic, which you can select to
specify that you have cleared all bypasses
and forced logic while performing the proof
test.
Date
The date on
which you
began
box, where you can type or select the
performing the desired date and time.
proof test.
Date
The date on
which you
box, where you can type or select the
completed the
desired date and time.
proof test.

labeled Equipment Operating State and
contains the System Codes that exist in the
MI_EQUIP_OP_STATE System Code
Table. You can choose from the following
baseline values:
Equipment
Operating State
The current
state of the
Character
equipment that
you are testing.
Functional Test
Closed
A value that
indicates
whether or not
Logical
the proof test
has been
completed.
Functional Test
Status
Stores the
Character current status of
the proof test.
Functional Test
Template
The Record ID
of the SIS
Proof Test
Template
Character
record that was
used to create
the SIS Proof
Test record.
On-Line (ON-LINE)
Off-Line (OFF-LINE)
Not Applicable (NA)

check box labeled Functional Test Closed,
which you can select to specify that you are
finished with the proof test, meaning it is
closed. When you select this check box, all
fields on the SIS Proof Test datasheet
become disabled automatically.
labeled Functional Test Status and contains
the System Codes that exist in the
MI_FUNCTIONAL_TEST_STATUS
System Code Table. You can choose from
the following baseline values:
Active
Complete
Closed

labeled Functional Test Template and
contains a list of Record IDs for the existing
SIS Proof Test Template records. When you
create an SIS Proof Test record, this field is
required. After you select an SIS Proof Test
record in the list and save the record, the
field is disabled.
labeled SIS Tester Name and contains the
SIS Tester Name Character The name of
the user who is names of the:
responsible for
performing the
Security User who created the SIS
proof test.
Proof Test record.
-and
Task Addressed
Test Description
The Record ID
of the
Inspection Task
Number
record that is
addressed by
the proof test.
Character
Type of Test

labeled Task Addressed and contains the
Record IDs of the Inspection Task records
that are linked to the Instrumented Function
record or Safety Instrumented System
record to which the SIS Proof Test record is
linked.

A description of
Character
box labeled Test Description, in which you
the proof test.
Test ID
Test Summary
Members of the MI SIS

Administrator, MI SIS Engineer, or
MI SIS User Security Groups.

The ID for the
box labeled Test ID, in which you can enter
proof test.
your own value.

A summary of
box labeled Test Summary and contains a
the proof test
Text
that was
performed.
the Text Editor.
labeled Type of Test and contains the
The type of
Character proof test that
Functional Test
you performed.
System Validation
SIS Or PIF Key Number The Entity Key This field does not appear on the datasheet
of the
by default.
Instrumented
Function record
or Safety
Instrumented
System record
to which the
SIS Proof Test
record is
linked.

The following table provides a list of the fields that exist in the SIS Proof Test Template
family.
Field
Caption
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
Author

labeled Author and contains the names of
users who have an associated Human
Resource record in the Meridium APM
Character who defined the
database. When you create an SIS Proof
proof test.
Test Template record, by default, this field
contains the name of the user who is
currently logged.
Modified By

who was logged in
On the datasheet, this field is disabled and
Character when the SIS Proof
Test Template record
was last modified.
Modified
Date
Date
The date on which

the SIS Proof Test On the datasheet, this field is disabled and
Template record was populated automatically.
last modified.
Text
required conditions
of the equipment or
system on which the
proof test will be
performed.
Pre-Test
Conditions

box labeled Pre-Test Conditions and
contains a
Template
A brief description
Description Character
of the proof test.
Template ID

box labeled Template Description, in which

box labeled Template ID, in which you can
enter your own value. When you create an
The ID for the proof SIS Proof Test Template record, this field is
Character
test template.
populated automatically with PPT and the
current date and time. You can remove the
default value and enter your own value
directly in the Template ID cell.
SIS Proof Test Template Detail

The following table provides a list of the fields that exist in the SIS Proof Test Template
Detail family. This list is not comprehensive.
Field
Caption
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
Equipment
ID
The Record ID of the You can select the associated Equipment

Equipment record
Character
in the
against which the step record by clicking the
should be performed. Equipment ID field.
Location ID

Functional Location
Character record against which
the step should be
performed.
Result
Criteria
Text
You can select the associated Functional

Location record by clicking the
the Location ID field.
A description of what
is considered to be an
None
acceptable result of the
step.
in
Step
Sequence
Number
A number that
represents the order in
Number which the step should
be performed, relative
to other steps.
Step Type
Character The type of step.
When you create a new SIS Proof Test

Template Detail record this value is set
automatically based upon the values in
existing SIS Proof Test Template Detail
records. You can modify this value
manually in both new and existing
records.
On the datasheet, you can select the step
type from a list of the following options:
Pretest Setup
Sensor
Logic Solver
Final Element
Post Test Procedure
Template
Detail ID
An alphanumeric value
that identifies the SIS
Character
None
Proof Test Template
Detail record.
Travel Time
Limit
A number that
quantifies the
Number maximum acceptable
travel time for this
step, in seconds.
This field is enabled only in SIS Proof

Test Template Detail records that are
linked to records representing final
elements.
Trip Point
A number that defines

when the element will
Number
activate an SIS
shutdown.

Test Template Detail records that are
linked to records representing sensors,
final elements, or logic solvers.
Trip Point
Direction

The trend of Trip Point Test Template Detail records that are
Character
values.
linked to records representing sensors,
final elements, or logic solvers.
Trip Point Number A value that defines the This field is enabled only in SIS Proof
Error Limit
range, plus or minus, Test Template Detail records that are
within which the Trip linked to records representing sensors,
Point value must fall to final elements, or logic solvers.
be acceptable.
Trip Point
Units
This field is populated with a list of

System Codes that exist in the UOME
The unit of measure
System Code table. This field is enabled
associated with the
Character
only in SIS Proof Test Template Detail
value in the Trip Point
field.
representing sensors, final elements, or
logic solvers.
System Code Tables Used by SIS

Management
The following table provides and alphabetical list and description of the System Code
Tables that are used by the SIS Management module. This list is not comprehensive.
System Code
Table
Description
System Code Table ID
LOPA IPL TYPE MI_IPL_TYPE
Notes
Used to populate the Type field in
records.
Used to populate the SIL

SIL Assessment
MI_SIL_ASSESSMENT_METHOD Assessment Method field in
Method
Instrumented Function records.
SIL
FinalElement
Vote
MI_SIL_FINALELEMVOTE
SIL Sensor Vote MI_SIL_SENSORVOTE
Used to populate the Voting field

in Protective Instrument Loop
Group records when the group
type is Final Element.
Used to populate the Voting field
in Protective Instrument Loop
Group records when the group
type is Sensor.
Unit of Measure UOME
Used to populate Trip Point Units

field in SIS Proof Test Template
Detail record.
Parameters for the SIS Management

URL
There is one root URL associated with SIS Management: meridium://SIS. A link
constructed from the path alone will open the SIS Management Start Page. In addition,
you can use any of the parameters described in the following table. Click here for
examples of using these parameters to customize the SIS Management URL.
Parameter
Name
Description
Accepted Value(s) Notes
The Page parameter is required.

Use the following links to view
notes about each value that is
accepted by the Page parameter.
Search
Definition
Team
Documents
SIS
PIF
SILValidation
Page
Specifies the page

that you want to
view.
SILValidationView
LopaDefinition
LopaModifiers
HealthIndicator
PTTemplateList
ProofTestList
ReferenceDataList
ReferenceData
Admin
Search
Definition
Team
Documents
SIS
PIF
SILValidation
SILValidationView
LopaDefinition
LopaModifiers
HealthIndicator
PTTemplateList
ProofTestList
ReferenceDataList
ReferenceData
Admin
To see examples of URLs that
include these parameters, see the
topic Examples of SIS
Management URLs.
The Module parameter lets you

view records in families other
than the default SIL Analysis
family. In some cases, the
Module parameter is required if
the URL includes the Page
parameter.
SA
Module
SV
Specifies the family
of the records that
SVTP
you want to view on
the page specified by
PTTemplate
the Page parameter.
ProofTest
Use the following links to view

notes about each value that is
accepted by the Module
parameter.
SA
SV
SVTP
PTTemplate
ProofTest
To see examples of URLs that
include these parameters, see the
topic Examples of SIS
Management URLs.
The AnalysisType parameter
Lets you view records in the SIS
Trip Report family instead of the
default SIL Analysis family.
Specifies that you

want to view records
in the SIS Trip
AnalysisType
SISTripReport
Report family rather
than records in the
SIL Analysis family.
You can use the AnalysisType

parameter with any of the
following Page parameter values
to specify that SIS Trip Report
records should be displayed on
those pages instead of SIL
Analysis records:
Search
Definition
This parameter is required if:
Page=Definition and you

want to view a specific
record. You can use the
Module parameter,
EntyKey parameter or
AnalysisType parameter.
If you do not use the
EntyKey parameter in
this case, a new record
will appear according to
the Module parameter
value. I you do not use
one of these parameters,
a new SIL Analysis
record will appear on the
SIL Analysis Definition
page by default.
Page=Team
Page=Documents
Page=SIS
Page=PIF
Page=SILValidation
Page=SILValidationView
Page=HealthIndicator
EntyKey
Specifies the specific

A numeric Entity
record that you want
Key
to view.
Page=ReferenceDate
AnalysisKey Specifies the SIL

A numeric Entity
Analysis record that Key
is linked to the
records that you
want to view.
Page=LopaDefinition
Page=LopaModifiers
Page=HealthIndicator
Page=PTTemplateList
Page=ProofTestList
PIF Key
Specifies the
Instrumented
Function record that A numeric Entity
is linked to the
Key
to view.
This parameter is required if you

want to view a specific
that is linked to another record
specified in the URL. This
parameter can be used with the
AnalysisKey, AnalKey, or
EntyKey parameters. If
Module=PTTemplate or
Module=ProofTest, the EntyKey,
AnalysisKey, and PIF Key
parameters are required.
The AnalKey parameter is
required if:
AnalKey
SISKey
Specifies the SIL

Analysis record that
A numeric Entity
is linked to the
Key
records that you
want to view.
Module=ProofTest
Page=SILValdiation
Page=SILValidationView
and EntyKey=<Entity
Key value>
When you use the AnalKey

parameter, the PIFKey or
SISKey parameter is required.
You can use the PIFKey
parameter with the AnalysisKey
parameter, AnalKey parameter,
or EntyKey parameter. Where
you use the PIFKey parameter
depends upon the URL that you
want to construct.
Specifies the Safety A numeric

This parameter is required if you
Instrumented System EntityKey value want to view a specific record
record that is linked for an SIL Analysis that is linked to a Safety
to the record that you record.
Instrumented System record and
want to view.
can be used with the
AnalysisKey, AnalKey, or
EntyKey parameters.
LopaKey
Type
Specifies the LOPA

A numeric Entity
Key
to view.
FinalElement
Specifies the records
that you want to
LogicSolver
view in the
Validation Reference Sensor
Data feature.
Page=LopaDefinition
Page=LopaModifiers
When you use the LopaKey

parameter, the AnalysisKey and
PIFKey parameters are required.
You can use the PIFKey
parameter with the AnalysisKey
parameter, AnalKey parameter,
or EntyKey parameter. Where
you use the PIFKey parameter
depends upon the URL that you
want to construct.
The Type parameter is required if
Page=ReferenceDataList.
If Page=ReferenceData, you can
optionally use the following
Type parameter values to view a
record in a family other than the
default Sensor family:
Final Element: Displays

Final Element records.
Logic Solver: Displays
Logic Solver records.
Sensor: Displays Sensor
records.
If Page=ReferenceData and you

omit the Type parameter, a
Sensor record will be displayed
by default. If you include it, the
value can be set to either
FinalElement or LogicSolver.
In other words, omitting the
Type parameter when
Page=ReferenceDate has the
same effect as setting it to

Sensor.
Note that if Page=ReferenceData
and the Type parameter is
included, the EntyKey parameter
is required.
Examples of SIS Management URLs
meridium://SIS
Displays the SIS Management Start Page.
meridium://SIS?Page=Search
Displays the SIL Analysis Search page.
meridium://SIS?Page=Search&Module=SV
Displays the Protective Loop Search page.
meridium://SIS?Page=Search&AnalysisType=SISTripReport
Displays the SIS Trip Report Search page.
meridium://SIS?Page=Definition
Displays a new SIL Analysis record on the SIL Analysis Definition page.
meridium://SIS?
Page=Definition&Module=PTTemplate&AnalysisKey=123456&SISKey=7891
01
Displays on the Proof Test Template Definition page a new SIS Proof Test Template
record that will be linked to the Safety Instrumented System record with the Entity Key
123456 that is linked to the SIL Analysis record with the Entity Key 789101.
meridium://SIS?
Page=LopaModifiers&LopaKey=123456&AnalysisKey=789101&PIFKey=11121
3
Displays in the Consequence Modifiers page list of Consequence Modifier records that
are linked to the Instrumented Function record with the Entity Key 111213 that is linked
to the SIL Analysis record 789101.
meridium://SIS?
Page=SILValidation&EntyKey=123456&AnalKey=789101&PIFKey=111213
Displays the Protective Instrument Loop record with the Entity Key 123456 that is linked
to the Instrumented Function record with the Entity Key 111213, which is linked to the
SIL Analysis record with the Entity Key 789101.
meridium://SIS?Page=ReferenceDataList&Type=LogicSolver
Displays the Logic Solver Reference Data Search page.
A specific need required of a safety instrumented system to monitor the conditions of a
process.
Maintenance Capability Index (MCI)

A value 0 through 4 that measures the effectiveness of the repair processes for an element
in a protective instrument loop. The following list defines each MCI value:
MCI 0: Indicates that repair actions are never performed.

MCI 1: Indicates that repair actions are effective 60 percent of the time.
MCI 4: Indicates that repair actions are always performed perfectly.
Proof Test
A test that consists of a set of steps that you need to perform to test safety instrumented
systems and instrumented functions. The conditions under which the test is conducted
should represent the normal conditions under which the system is intended to operate.

A set of interconnected instruments that work together to serve a function that is defined
for the safety instrumented system in which they exist.
SIL Value
A numeric rating representing the overall level of protection that a safety instrumented
system provides.
Overview of Calibration Management
The Meridium APM Calibration Management module lets you track the performance of
certain equipment, such as instruments and analyzers, by evaluating the detailed results of
the calibration events associated with those pieces of equipment. Calibration event data
can be recorded manually, using Calibration Event records, or automatically, using an
automated data calibrator device or interface from an external system.
Calibration Management provides tools that you can use to:
Define the requirements of the calibration events. Calibration requirements are

stored in Calibration Template records. These records store the number of test
points, ranges, and the accuracy required for that defined calibration.
Define a schedule on which calibration events should occur and audit changes to
requirements and schedules. You can use Calibration Task records to schedule
calibration events on a regular basis or as a single event. You can integrate
Calibration Task records with an EAM system.
Record and evaluate calibration event data. Calibration results are recorded in
Calibration Event records. Calibration Event families are provided for the
following types of calibrations:
Analog
Discrete
Analyzers
Weight Scales
Functional Test
The calibration results that are stored in Calibration Event records can be used to assess
the overall performance of the piece of equipment and evaluate the optimal calibration
frequency for that piece of equipment. D
Calibration Management System

Requirements
The Calibration Management license is required to take advantage of Calibration

Management. In addition, your system must contain the basic Meridium APM system
architecture and the files that support the device(s) that you will use to perform
automated calibrations. The following devices are supported by Calibration Management:
Beamex MC5 Documenting Process Calibrator: You can install the supporting
files for this device using the Meridium APM Drivers installer, which is provided
in the Meridium APM 3rd party distribution package.
Fluke 74x Documenting Process Calibrator: The supporting files for this device
are installed automatically when you install the Meridium APM Framework
application using the Meridium APM Framework installer.
Meriam MFT4010 Documenting Process Calibrator: You can install the
supporting files for this device using the Meriam installer, which is provided in
the Meridium APM 3rd party distribution package.
perform some configuration tasks specifically for the Calibration Management module.
Current Calibration Model vs. Custom

Calibration Model
This documentation provides details on using Calibration Management with the current
Calibration Management model. A custom model was required in previous releases.
While the current version of the Calibration Management product is backwards
compatible with earlier versions, this documentation does not attempt to explain how the
current product will function if you have elected to continue using the former model. If
you are using a model that was available in previous versions, you will need to refer to
the documentation for that version.
IMPORTANT: Throughout this documentation, wherever we refer to baseline
functionality or families, we mean the baseline features within the current
Calibration Management model. If you are using the former model, you may see
baseline functionality that deviates from what is described in this documentation.
To enable the current Calibration Management model, on the Calibration Management
Administration page, you must select the Use the Base Calibration Management model
check box, and then specify the two queries that return data from the following families:
Equipment
Calibration Task
Calibration Management Data Model

Calibration Management leverages the fundamental Meridium APM entity and
relationship family infrastructure for storing data. The following diagram illustrates how
records are linked to one another within the Calibration Management module. The shaded
boxes represent entity families, and the arrows represent relationship families. You can
determine the direction of each relationship definition from the direction of the arrow
head: the box from which the arrow originates is the predecessor in that relationship
definition, and the box to which the arrow head points is the successor in that relationship
definition. For example, you can see that Calibration Task records are linked to
Equipment records through the Has Tasks relationship, where the Equipment family is the
predecessor.
While the Calibration Management module can be configured to work with the baseline
Functional Location family, this documentation assumes that you are using the baseline
Equipment family as defined in the preceding data model image.
Optional Calibration Management

Relationship and Entity Families
In addition to the entity and relationship families that appear in the Calibration
Management data model image, the following families exist in the baseline Meridium
APM database for use with Calibration Management. These families, however, are not
linked by default to any of the Calibration Management families shown in the data
model, and to simplify the data model image, these families were left out:
Standard Gas
Standard Gas Components
Has Standard Gas
Has Components
In the baseline Meridium APM database, the Standard Gas family is related to the
Standard Gas Components family through the Has Components relationship family.
Standard Gas records and Standard Gas Component records store information about gas
components that are associated with a piece of equipment or a location. If you want to
link Standard Gas records to Equipment records, you can define the relationship using the
Has Standard Gas relationship family.
Additionally, if you want to be able to link Calibration Task records to Calibration
Template records, you can link the Calibration Task family to the desired Calibration
Template families through the Has Template relationship family.
Calibration Family Reports

By default, the Calibration Event families are associated with reports so that records in
these families can be printed using a pre-defined report format. The following table
summarizes the family reports that are provided for use with Calibration and associated
by default with the Calibration Event families. Each of these reports is located in the
following Catalog folder: \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Calibration Management\Reports.
Family
Report
Calibration, Analog
Analog Calibration Report
Calibration, Analyzer MultiComponent
Analyzer MultiComponent Calibration Report
Calibration, Analyzer Single

Component
Analyzer SingleComponent Calibration Report
Calibration, Discrete
Discrete Calibration Report
Calibration, Functional Test
Functional Test Calibration Report
Calibration, Weight Scale
WeightScale Calibration Report
To use these reports, no additional configuration is necessary. You need to modify these
reports only if you want them to work differently than they do by default.
Calibration Management Workflow

The Calibration Management workflow consists of the following steps, which should be
completed in the order in which they are listed here:
1. Identify the pieces of equipment that require calibration.
2. Define the test equipment that you will use to perform the calibration. To do so,
for each piece of test equipment, you will need to create a Test Equipment record.
Test Equipment records store details about the piece of test equipment, including
whether or not the piece of test equipment is certified.
3. Using Calibration Management, define the type of calibration that should be
performed on those pieces of equipment. To do so, for each piece of equipment
that requires calibration, you will need to create one Calibration Template record.
Calibration Template records store details on the type of calibration that the piece
of equipment requires. You can create a Calibration Template record in the
Calibration Template family that corresponds to the type of calibration that should
be performed (e.g., Calibration Template, Analog records store data specific to an
analog calibration). Calibration Template records also store the information
required by the device so that you can perform an automated calibration, such as
the Asset ID of the piece of equipment that requires calibrating.
4. Using Calibration Management, define the schedule on which the calibrations
should be performed. To do so, for each piece of equipment that requires
calibration, you will need to create one Calibration Task record. Calibration Task
records store the schedule on which a calibration should be performed. You can
use a single Calibration Task record to represent a recurring schedule, or you can
create one Calibration Task record for each calibration. Throughout this
documentation, we assume that you have created a single recurring Calibration
Task record.
5. In your facility, calibrate pieces of equipment as needed per the defined schedule.
6. Transfer the calibration data to the Meridium APM system. You can do so in one
of two ways:
Transfer it automatically from an automated data collecting device. When

you transfer data from the device, Calibration Event records are created
automatically and populated with the details from that calibration event
and the test equipment used to perform the calibration. If you use this
approach, the Calibration Event record will be linked automatically to the
Equipment record that identifies the piece of equipment on which the
calibration was performed.
-or
Enter it manually into Calibration Event records. If you use this approach,
you will need to create each Calibration Event record manually, and link it
to the Equipment record that identifies the piece of equipment on which
the calibration was performed using a link on the Associated Pages menu.
You can also link it to the Test Equipment record that identifies the piece
of equipment used to perform the calibration using the Test Equipment tab
on the datasheet.
In both cases, for each calibration that is performed, one Calibration Event record will
need to exist to store data that represents a snapshot of that calibration, including the type
of calibration that was performed and the results of the calibration.
7. Evaluate the results. You can evaluate the results using the reports and graphs that
are delivered with Calibration Management and other Meridium APM modules.
8. Create and assign recommendations. You can create Calibration Recommendation
records to store recommendations and link them to Equipment records and
Calibration Event records.
Throughout the documentation, we assume that a Super User or a member of the MI
Calibration Administrator Security Group has configured the appropriate administrative
settings.
Accessing the Calibration Management

Functions Page
The Calibration Management Functions page serves as a starting point for all the tasks
that you can perform using Calibration Management.
To access the Calibration Management Functions page:
and then click Calibration Management.
The Calibration Management Functions page appears.
Aspects of the Calibration Management

Functions Page
The Calibration Management Functions page displays links that provide access to
commonly used Calibration Management features.
The following links are available on the Calibration Management Functions page:
Manage Instruments: Provides access records in the Equipment family, which

contains records representing the Instruments that you want to manage using
Calibration Management.
If a query has not been specified in the Manage Instruments Query Path
text box on the Calibration Administration page, when you click this link,
the Search page appears, where you can search for the desired Equipment
record.
If a query path has been specified in the Manage Instruments Query Path
text box on the Calibration Administration page, the query results will
appear.
Manage Calibration Tasks: Displays the Task Options dialog box, where you can
choose to create a new Calibration Task or search for an existing Calibration Task.
You should not use this option with the current Calibration Management model.
Instead, you can create Calibration Task records using Associated Pages that have
been configured for the Equipment family.
Manage Calibration Templates: Displays the Template Options dialog box, where
you can choose to create a new template or access an existing template. You
should not use this option with the current Calibration Management model.
Instead, you can create Calibration Template records using Associated Pages that
have been configured for the Equipment family.
Manage Standard Gas: Displays the Standard Gas Options dialog box, where you
can choose to create a new Standard Gas Cylinder record or search for existing
Standard Gas Cylinder records.
Manage Test Equipment: Displays the Test Equipment Options dialog box, where
you can choose to create a new Test Equipment record or search for existing Test
Equipment records.
Calibration Event Data Entry: Displays the Calibration Event Options dialog
box, where you can choose to create a new Calibration Event record using the
Event Builder or by running a stored query. You should not use this option with
the current Calibration Management model. Instead you can create Calibration
Event records using Associated Page links that have been configured for the
Equipment family.
Send To Calibration Data Collector: Displays the Select a Device and Properties
dialog box, which you can use to send Calibration data to a device.
Receive From Calibration Data Collector: Displays the Select a Device and
Properties dialog box, which you can use to receive Calibration data from a
device.

which allows you to create and view Calibration Recommendation records.
Calibration Administration: Displays the Calibration Administration page, where

you can configure settings for Calibration Management.

Deploying and configuring Calibration Management for the first time includes
completing multiple steps, which are outlined in the table in this topic. The steps in this
section of the documentation provide all the information that you need to deploy and
configure the Calibration Management module on top of the basic system architecture.

are marked as Required if you must perform the steps to take advantage of Calibration
Management functionality.
Step Task
Install the supporting files for the

Beamex MC5 device on all the
Meridium APM Framework machines
that will connect to the Beamex MC5
device.

Meriam MFT 4010 device on all the
Meridium APM Framework machines
that will connect to the Meriam MFT
4010 device.
Optional
This step is necessary

only if you will
perform automated
calibrations using a
Beamex MC5 device.
Optional

only if you will
perform automated
Meriam MFT4010
device.
If you have equipment or location data

in families outside of the baseline
Equipment and Functional Location
families, review the Calibration
Management data model to determine
Optional
which relationship definitions you will
need to modify to include your custom
definitions as needed via Configuration
Manager.

only if you will store
equipment or location
data in families other
than the baseline
Equipment and
Functional Location
families.
Assign the desired Security Users to the

Calibration Management Security
Required
Groups in Configuration Manager.
None
Configure the Has Standard Gas

relationship family to include the desired
Instrument families as predecessors to Required
the Standard Gas Cylinder family in
None
Specify the path to the Instruments

query.
Required
None
Select the Use the Base Calibration

Management model check box.
Required
None
Optional

only if you are using a
family other than the
baseline Equipment
family to store your
equipment data.
Specify the path to the Instrument Data

Required
query.
None
10
Specify the path to the Task query.
Required
None
11
Configure default values for Calibration

Template and Calibration Event
Required
Records.
None
Modify the Instrument Data query.
Upgrade Workflow
are upgrading:
V3.5.1
V3.5.0 SP1 LP
V3.5.0
V3.4.5
Upgrading Calibration Management

from V3.5.1 to V3.6.0.0.0
The following table lists the steps that are required to upgrade and configure Calibration
Step Task

Meridium APM Framework
machines that will connect to the
Beamex MC5 device.
Optional
This step is necessary only

if you will perform
automated calibrations
using a Beamex MC5
device.

Optional
Meriam MFT 4010 device.

if you will perform
using a Meriam MFT4010
device.

from V3.5.0 SP1 LP to V3.6.0.0.0
Step Task

Beamex MC5 device.
Optional

if you will perform
using a Beamex MC5
device.

Optional

if you will perform
device.

from V3.5.0 to V3.6.0.0.0
Step Task

Beamex MC5 device.
Optional

if you will perform
using a Beamex MC5
device.

Optional

if you will perform
device.

from V3.4.5 to V3.6.0.0.0
Step Task

Beamex MC5 device.
Optional

if you will perform
using a Beamex MC5
device.

Optional

if you will perform
device.
Calibration Management Security

Groups
The following baseline Security Groups are provided for Calibration Management:
MI Calibration Administrator: Provides users with administrative access to

Calibration Management.
MI Calibration User: Provides users with general access to Calibration

Management, including creating records for calibration events.
All Security Users who need to access Calibration Management functionality must be
assigned to one of these two groups. Family-level privileges alone are not enough to
allow a user to access Calibration Management.
Note: Any Security User that is a member of the MI Calibration Administrator Security
Group should also be added to MI Devices Administrators Security Group. Members of
the MI Calibration User Security Group should also be added to MI Devices Power Users
Security Group. This will allow Calibration users to perform automated Calibrations.
The following table summarizes the baseline privileges for these Security Groups.
Family
Alert
MI Calibration Administrator MI Calibration User

View, Update, Insert, Delete View, Update, Insert, Delete
Calibration Recommendation View, Update, Insert, Delete View, Update, Insert

Calibration Setup Defaults
View, Update, Insert, Delete View
Calibration Task
Calibration Template
Defaults
Calibration Template Detail View, Update, Insert, Delete View

Calibration Template Detail,
Analyzer
Calibration (Event)
Calibration Result
Equipment
View
View
Functional Location
View
View
SAP System
View
None
Task
View, Update, Insert, Delete None
Task Types
Test Equipment
Test Equipment History
Work History
View
View
Work History Detail
View
View
Equipment Has Equipment
View
View

Equipment
View
View

Functional Location(s)
View
View
Has Associated
Recommendation
Has Calibration
Has Calibration Results
Has Consolidated
Recommendations
Has Driving
Recommendation
Has Event Detail
View
Has Recommendations
Has Reference Documents
Has Standard Gas
Has Standard Gas Details
Has Superseded
Recommendations
Has Task Revision
View, Update, Insert, Delete None
Has Tasks
Has Templates
Has Template Detail
Has Test Equipment
Has Work History
View
View
View
Reference Document
Test Equip Has Equip
Test Equipment Has History View, Update, Insert, Delete View, Update, Insert, Delete
Note: As with all family-level security privileges, all privileges are automatically spread
to the subfamilies of the families listed in the table.
Configuring the Has Standard Gas

Relationship
The Has Standard Gas relationship family is used to link Standard Gas Cylinder records
to customer-defined instrument records. Because the baseline Meridium APM product
does not include instrument families, you will need to define this relationship yourself
after you have created the desired instrument families. After you have chosen the desired
families, you will need to create the following relationship definition:
Predecessor: Customer-defined instrument family

Predecessor Cardinality: Zero or many
Successor: Standard Gas Cylinder
Successor Cardinality: Zero or Many
Accessing the Calibration

Administration Page
The Calibration Administration page provides options that you can use to specify that
you are using the current Calibration Management model and the queries that will be
used to populate Calibration Template and Calibration Task records. An administrative
user must configure these settings before other Calibration users begin using Calibration
Management.
Note: To configure settings on the Calibration Administration page, you must be a Super
User or a member of the MI Calibration Administrator Security Group and have access to
the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Calibration Management.
To access the Calibration Administration page:
On the Calibration Management Functions page, click the Calibration

Administration link.
The Calibration Administration page appears.
Aspects of the Calibration

Administration Page
The Calibration Administration page contains three sections:
Instrument Loop: Contains the Manage Instruments Query Path option, which lets
you specify the path to the query that returns the records for the Equipment
family. If you specify a query for this setting, when you click the Manage
Instruments link on the Calibration Management Functions page, the query results
appear automatically. If you do not specify a query for this setting, when you click
the Manage Instruments link, the Search page will appear, and you will need to
specify the desired family and search for the records.
Model Configuration: Contains the following options:
Use the Base Calibration Model: Specifies that you want to use the current
Calibration Management model. This check box is cleared by default.
When this check box is selected, the Instrument Data Query Path and Task
Query Path options are enabled, and all other options in the Model
Configuration section are disabled.
Note: Throughout this documentation, we assume that the Use the Base Calibration
Model check box is selected.
Instrument Data Query Path: Lets you specify the path to the query that
returns the records for the Equipment family. This query is used to
populate equipment data in new Calibration Template records when you
create these records via a link on the Associated Pages menu when you are
viewing an Equipment record. This field is enabled only if the Use the
Base Calibration Model check box is selected. If desired, you can use the
baseline Instrument Data Query, which is stored in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Calibration Management\Queries.
Task Query Path: Lets you specify the path to the query that returns the
records for the Calibration Task family. This field is enabled only if the
Use the Base Calibration Model check box is selected. If desired, you can
use the baseline Task Query, which is stored in the Catalog folder
Function-Asset Relationship: This option is disabled when the Use the

Base Calibration Model check box is selected.
Asset Is Successor: This option is disabled when the Use the Base
Calibration Model check box is selected.
Asset Query Path: This option is disabled when the Use the Base
Default Single Model Is Asset: This option is disabled when the Use the
Base Calibration Model check box is selected.
Model Optimization Query: This option is disabled when the Use the Base
Manual Data Entry Queries: Contains the following options:
Catalog Folder Path: Lets you define the path to the Catalog folder that
will be used to store queries for manual Calibration data entry. You should
not use this option with the current Calibration Management model.
Use the calibration user's personal queries folder: This option is not
functional.
To the right of each of the sections in the preceding list, a Details link appears and
displays the context-sensitive help topic for the Calibration Administration page.
The Calibration Administration page contains the following task menus:
Preferences Tasks
Calibration Tasks
Preferences Tasks
The Preferences Tasks menu on the Calibration Administration page contains the
following options:

Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Calibration Administration
page.
Calibration Tasks
The Calibration Tasks menu on the Calibration Administration page contains the
following link:
Calibration Start Page: Displays the Calibration Management Functions

page. If there are unsaved changes on the Calibration Administration page, a
dialog box appears, asking if you want to save your changes, and then the
Calibration Management Functions page appears.
About the Instrument Data Query

The following description assumes that you are using the Base Calibration model and
creating Calibration Template records using the links on the Associated Pages menu in
the Record Manager. When you create a Calibration Template record in this way, the
Meridium APM system uses the Instrument Data Query to populate the Calibration
Template record with values from the Equipment record to which you are linking the
Calibration Template record.
The Instrument Data Query contains a prompt for the Entity Key of the Equipment record
to which you are linking the new Calibration Template record. When you create a
Calibration Template record and link it to an Equipment record, the Entity Key of the
Equipment record is passed into the query prompt automatically. Then, the query returns
values in the Equipment record with the provided Entity Key, and those values are used
to populate the corresponding fields in the Calibration Template record.
By default, the query returns values in the following fields in the baseline Equipment
family:
Equipment ID: Used to populate the Template ID and Tag Name fields in the
Equipment Short Description: Used to populate the Tag Description field in the
Manufacturer: Used to populate the Manufacturer field in the Calibration

Template record.
Model Number: Used to populate the Model Number field in the Calibration
Template record.
Serial Number: Used to populate the Serial Number field in the Calibration
Template record.
Specifying the Instruments Query

The query that you specify on the Calibration Administration page is used to display
query results for the Equipment family when you click the Manage Instruments link on
the Calibration Management Functions page.
Note: If the Manage Instruments Query Path setting is not defined, when you click the
Manage Instruments link on the Calibration Management Functions page, the Search
page will appear, and the Search In list will contain ALL Meridium APM families by
default.
To specify the Instruments query:
1. On the Calibration Administration page, in the Instrument Loop section, in the
Manage Instruments Query Path text box, type the Catalog path to the desired
query.
-ORClick the Browse button to search for the desired query. These instructions assume that
you have clicked this button.
The Save As dialog box appears, where you can navigate to the desired query.
2. Navigate to the desired query, and click the Open button.
The Catalog query path to the selected query appears in the Manage Instruments Query
Path text box.
Specifying the Path to the Instrument

Data Query
The following instructions provide details on specifying the path to the query that returns
the records for the Equipment family, which is used for storing information about the
instruments in your facility.
The baseline Instrument Data query is provided for this purpose and returns data in the
baseline Equipment family by default. If desired, you can use the baseline Instrument
Data Query, which is stored in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Calibration

Management\Queries. This query is used to automatically populate data from Equipment
records to a Calibration Template record, which you can use to send data to a device.
Using Calibration Template records, you can also specify information about the
calibration that you want to perform, and this information will be sent to a device for
automated calibrations and to the Calibration Event datasheet for manual calibrations.
To specify the path to the Instrument Data query:
1. On the Calibration Administration page, in the Model Configuration section, type
the Catalog path to the desired query.
The Catalog query path to the selected query appears in the Instrument Data Query Path
text box.
Specifying the Path to the Task Query

The following instructions provide details on specifying the path to the query that returns
records for the Calibration Task family. Meridium APM provides the baseline Task Query
that is stored in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Calibration
Management\Queries. The Calibration Task query is used to populate the Calibration
Task ID field in Calibration Template records so that calibration and equipment data can
be shared between these records.
These instructions assume that you have selected the Use the Base Calibration Model
check box.
To specify the path to the Task query:
1. On the Calibration Administration page, in the Model Configuration section, type
the Catalog path to the desired query.
The Catalog query path to the selected query appears in the Task Query Path text box.
About Managing Default Values for

Calibration Template and Calibration
Event Records
When you create a Calibration Template record or a Calibration Event record, some
values are populated in the record by default. The default values that appear are stored in
baseline Meridium APM records. Additionally, the data stored in these baseline Meridium
APM records is used when you send data to a device for an automated calibration. If
desired, you can modify the values in these baseline records so that the Calibration
Template and Calibration Event records are populated with the default values that you
specify.
Two baseline families are provided for this purpose:
Calibration Setup Defaults: Stores default values for the Calibration Template
families and Calibration Event families. One Calibration Setup Defaults record
with the Record ID My Template Defaults is provided in the baseline Meridium
APM database. You can modify the values in the baseline record if desired.
Calibration Template Defaults: Stores default values for the Calibration Template
families. Numerous baseline records exist in this family. When you send data to a
device, you are sending data that is stored in Calibration Template records and
Calibration Template Defaults records. You can modify the values in the baseline
records if desired.
Only Super Users and members of the MI Calibration Administrator Security Group can
modify the baseline records in these families.
Installing Supporting Files for the

Beamex MC5 Device on Meridium
APM Framework Machines
If you will use the Beamex MC5 device to perform automated calibrations, you must first
install supporting files on the Meridium APM Framework machines that will be
connected to the device. You can install these files using the Meridium APM Drivers
installer.
To install the supporting files for the Beamex MC5 Device on a Meridium APM
Framework machine:
1. On the Meridium APM Framework machine that will connect to the device, insert
the 3rd party DVD, and navigate to the folder \\Third Party Drivers for
APM\Meridium APM Drivers.
2. Double-click the file setup.exe.
A message appears, asking if you want to allow the installer to make changes to your
machine.
The Meridium APM Drivers installer appears, which contains a progress bar.
After the progress bar reaches the end, the Welcome screen appears.

The License Agreement screen appears.
5. Read the entire license agreement, and then select one of the following options:
o I accept the terms of the license agreement, if you agree to the terms of the
license agreement and want to continue. These instructions assume that
you want to continue.
o
I do not accept the terms of the license agreement. This option is selected
by default. If you do not agree to the terms of the license agreement and
do not want to continue, click the Cancel button to exit the installer.
The Next button becomes enabled.

The Ready to Install the Program screen appears.
7. Click the Install button.

The Installing Meridium APM Drivers screen appears, displaying a progress bar that
indicates the status of the installation process.
After the progress bar reaches the end, the InstallShield Wizard Completed screen
appears.

The Meridium APM Drivers installer closes. The supporting files for the Beamex MC5
device are now installed on the Meridium APM Framework machine.
Installing Supporting Files for the

Meriam MFT 4010 Device on
Meridium APM Framework Machines
If you will use the Meriam MFT 4010 device to perform automated calibrations, you
must first install supporting files on the Meridium APM Framework machines that will be
connected to the device. You can install these files using the Meridium APM Drivers
installer.
To install the supporting files for the Meriam MFT 4010 Device on a Meridium APM
Framework machine:
1. On the Meridium APM Framework machine that will connect to the device, insert
the 3rd party DVD, and navigate to the folder \\Third Party Drivers for
APM\Meriam Calibrator.
2. Double-click the file setup.exe.
A message appears, asking if you want to allow the installer to make changes to your
machine.
The MFT-DRV installer appears, which contains a progress bar.
After the progress bar reaches the end, the Welcome screen appears.

The License Agreement screen appears.
5. Read the entire license agreement, and then select one of the following options:
o I accept the terms of the license agreement, if you agree to the terms of the
license agreement and want to continue. These instructions assume that
you want to continue.
I do not accept the terms of the license agreement. This option is selected
by default. If you do not agree to the terms of the license agreement and
do not want to continue, click the Cancel button to exit the installer.
The Next button becomes enabled.

The Customer Information screen appears.
7. In the User Name or Organization text boxes, enter the desired user name and
organization. This step is optional.
8. Below the Install this application for: label, select the desired option.
The Ready to Install the Program screen appears.
10. Click the Install button.

The Installing MFT-DRV screen appears, displaying a progress bar that indicates the
status of the installation process.
After the progress bar reaches the end, the InstallShield Wizard Completed screen
appears.

The MFT-DRV installer closes. The supporting files for the Meriam MFT 4010 device
are now installed on the Meridium APM Framework machine.
About Identifying Equipment That

Require Calibration
The first step to using Calibration Management is to identify which equipment in your
facility require calibration. This documentation assumes that Equipment records already
exist in the Meridium APM database to represent these pieces of equipment.
To complete a calibration for a piece of equipment, you must first open that Equipment
record in the Record Manager, where you can create a record in the following families to
link to that Equipment record:
Calibration Task, which stores the schedule on which the calibration should be
performed for the piece of equipment.
Calibration Template, which stores the details of the calibration that should be
performed for the piece of equipment.
Once these records exist, you can perform calibrations for the pieces of equipment and
store the results in a Calibration Event record.
While you can use the standard Meridium APM Framework features to locate the
Equipment record, this documentation provides details on using the features within the
Calibration Management module to locate the desired record.
About Test Equipment Records

Test equipment refers to any equipment that is used to perform a calibration. Examples of
test equipment include documenting process calibrators, pressure gauges, and
thermometers. Test Equipment records store information about the test equipment that
you use to perform calibrations.
Before you perform a calibration, you should create Test Equipment records to represent
each piece of equipment you will use to perform the calibration. When you do so, you
will also need to provide certification information for each piece of test equipment.
After a Test Equipment exists, it will be used to:
Determine if a particular device is certified. Before a Security User can perform a

calibration, they will need to identify the device that will be used (i.e., the test
equipment) by entering the manufacturer and serial number of the device. The
Meridium APM system will use that information to identify the Test Equipment
record for that device, and then determine if the specified device is certified or not
according to the value stored in the Certification Status field in that record.
Provide test equipment information for a calibration event. Up to three Test
Equipment records can be linked to a Calibration Event record in order to provide
information about the test equipment that was used to perform a particular
calibration. The Test Equipment tab on the Calibration Event datasheet contains
three columns (i.e., Test Equip 1, Test Equip 2, and Test Equip 3), where each
column represents a single Test Equipment record, and each row represents a field
in the corresponding record. These fields are populated automatically when the
Test Equipment record is linked to the Calibration Event record.
About Test Equipment Certification

Test equipment certification is performed by a third-party organization in order to prove
that the standards used by the test equipment to perform calibrations are accurate and
valid with regards to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) or other
organization standards. For example, if you are using a piece of test equipment to
calibrate the clock on another piece of equipment, you would need to certify that the test
equipment clock is accurate with regard to the standard time for that time zone. The thirdparty organizations that perform these certifications should use a process that is in
compliance with the standard ISO/IEC 17025.
To ensure that the test equipment remains accurate, it should be recertified on a set time
interval (e.g., once a year). If the test equipment is not recertified within the defined time
interval, it will be considered out of certification. If you enter the most recent certification
date and certification interval in a Test Equipment record, it will automatically determine
whether that piece of equipment is currently certified and store that information in the
Certification Status field. Test Equipment History records store the certification history of
a piece of test equipment and are linked to the corresponding Test Equipment record for
that piece of equipment.
Although the Meridium APM system does not require you to use a certified device, it is
recommended that you use a certified device to perform automated calibrations.
Creating Test Equipment Records

To create a Test Equipment record:
1. On the Calibration Management Functions page, click the Manage Test
Equipment link.
The Test Equipment Options dialog box appears, and the Add new option is selected by
default.
2. Click OK.
A new Test Equipment record opens in Record Manager.
3. Use the datasheet to provide values in the appropriate fields. Note that some fields
are required.
The Test Equipment record is saved.
Opening Existing Test Equipment

Records
To open an existing Test Equipment record:
1. On the Calibration Management Functions page, click the Manage Test
Equipment link.
The Test Equipment Options dialog box appears, and the Add new option is selected by
default.
2. Select the Search for existing option, and then click OK.
The Search Tool appears, displaying the Test Equipment family in the Search In text box.
3. Click the Find Now button.
The search results display the existing Test Equipment records.
4. Select the row containing the Test Equipment record that you want to open, and
click the Open button.
5. The Test Equipment record you selected appears in Record Manager.
About Calibration Template Records

Calibration Template records contain the setup information for manual and automated
calibrations. They store the following information that you can use to define the
calibrations that should be performed for a piece of equipment:
Calibration strategy
Input/Output ranges
Maximum error limit
Parameters required by a device for automated calibration data collection.
For automated calibrations, a Calibration Template record must be linked to an

Equipment record to send the necessary data to a device. This relationship is not required
for manual calibrations, but you can use Calibration Template records to help eliminate
repetitive data entry. If you are using a manual data entry method, after you perform a
calibration, when you create the Calibration Event record, you can select in the
Calibration Template Key field the Template ID of the Calibration Template record that
contains the details of the calibration that was performed. When you select a Template ID
in this field, the Calibration Event record will be populated automatically with data from
the Calibration Template record. In this way, you only need to provide details about each
type of calibration that should be performed for a piece of equipment one time: when you
create the Calibration Template record.
The following baseline Calibration Template families are provided and let you store
information for a specific type of calibration:
Calibration Template, Analog

Calibration Template, Discrete
Calibration Template, Weight Scale
Calibration Template, Analyzer Multi-Component
Calibration Template, Analyzer Single Component
You can create a Calibration Template record using the Create Template link on the
Associated Pages menu in the Record Manager. When you do so:
The Calibration Template record will be automatically linked to the currently

selected Equipment record.
The Instrument Data Query is used to automatically populate Equipment
information in the Calibration Template record.
Each Calibration Template record can be linked to multiple Calibration Template Detail
records through the Has Template Detail relationship. This relationship is defined in the
baseline Meridium APM database. When you create a new Calibration Template record,
the Calibration Template Detail records will be created and linked to the Calibration
Template record automatically, based on the value you select in the Calibration Strategy
field.
Only members of the Calibration Administrator Security Group can create, modify, copy,
or delete Calibration Template records and Calibration Template Detail records. Members
of the Calibration User Security Group can view and print these records.
Creating a New Calibration Template

Record
To create a new Calibration Template record, you must be a Super User or a member of
the MI Calibration Administrator Security Group. Calibration Template records can be
created via a link on the Associated Pages menu when you are viewing an Equipment
record in the Record Manager.
To create a new Calibration Template record:
1. Open in the Record Manager the Equipment record to which you want to link the
2. On the Associated Pages menu, click the Create Template link.
A submenu appears and contains the following options:
1.
o
Create Analog Calibration Template
Create Discrete Calibration Template
Create Multi-Component Analyzer Template
Create Single-Component Analyzer Template
Create Weight Scale Calibration Template
Create Functional Test Template
3. Click the option that corresponds to the type of Calibration Template record that
you want to create.
A new record for the selected family appears in a separate window, and the following
fields are populated automatically with data from the Equipment record:
1.
o
Tag Name
Tag Description
Manufacturer
Model Number
Serial Number
4. Enter values in the remaining fields as desired, and then click OK.
The window closes, and the record is saved and linked to the Equipment record that you
are currently viewing.
About Calibration Template, Functional

Test Records
Calibration Template, Functional Test records are specific types of Calibration Template
records that allow you to perform functional tests on a piece of equipment. A functional
test consists of questions and possible responses to that question.
For example, assume you want to record information about the physical condition of the
wires that are attached to a boiler. In this case, you might create the following functional
test:
What is the condition of the wires?
1. Rusted
2. Stripped
3. Loose
4. Dirty
5. Acceptable
The following image shows what the Calibration Template, Functional Test record would
look like for this functional test.
Like other Calibration Template records, Calibration Template, Functional Test records
contain setup information for manual and automated functional tests. They are linked to
Calibration Template Detail, Functional Test records, which store the following
information that you can use to define a custom functional test for a piece of equipment:
Instructions that describe the steps you should perform.

Responses that correspond with each instruction.
The sequence in which the instructions should be carried out.
Together, the combination of one Calibration Template, Functional Test record and one
or more Calibration Template Detail, Functional Test records make up a single functional
test.
Although Calibration Template, Functional Test records store different information than
other Calibration Template records, they function the same way. You can perform an
automated functional test in the same way you perform an automated calibration. You can
also perform a manual functional test in the same way you perform a manual calibration,
except that you should use a printed copy of the Functional Test Calibration Field Report
to perform the specified functional test and write the results of the test on the printed
report.
Defining a Functional Test

To define a functional test:
1. Create a new Calibration Template, Functional Test record.
A new Calibration Template Detail, Functional Test record appears below the Calibration
Template, Functional Test record on the Functional Test Setup datasheet.
2. In the Sequence Number list, select a number 1 through 25 to indicate the order in
which the instruction in that row should be executed in relation to the other
instructions.
3. In the Instruction cell, type a description of the step that you are performing
during the functional test (e.g., What is the condition of the wires?).
4. In the Response Type list, select the type of answer you should give to the
question defined in the Instruction cell (e.g., Selection).
o
If you select the Selection option in the Response Type cell, the Condition
cells are enabled. In each Condition cell, type the possible responses to the
step defined in the Instruction cell. (e.g., Rusted, Stripped, Loose). You
can define up to 10 responses for each instruction with the response type
selection.
-oro
If you did not select the Selection option in the Response Type cell, the
Condition cells remain disabled, and you can continue to the next step.
5. If you want to define additional steps for the functional test, repeat the preceding
steps. You can define up to 25 steps for each functional test.
6. Click OK.
The record closes, and both the Calibration Template, Functional Test record and the
Calibration Template Detail, Functional Test records are saved. The Calibration Template
Detail, Functional Test record is linked to the Calibration Template, Functional Test
record automatically.
About Calibration Task Records

Calibration Task records store details about a calibration task that should be performed
by a given user for Calibration Management. Specifically, these records store scheduled
dates for the next time calibrations should be performed.
Calibration Task records are linked to Equipment records and related to Calibration
Template records and Calibration Event records through the link between those records
and the Equipment record to which the Calibration Task record is linked.
After a calibration is performed and the Calibration Event record that is linked to the
Equipment record is closed, the Calibration Task record is updated automatically to
reflect the date on which the calibration event was performed and the next date on which
the calibration is due for that piece of equipment. You can use Calibration Task records
whether you are performing manual or automated calibrations.
You can create a Calibration Task record via a link on the Associated Pages menu when
you are viewing an Equipment record. After a Calibration Task record exists, you will be
able to view and manage those records along with any other existing Task records via
Task Management. Throughout these instructions, we assume that you are familiar with
using the Record Manager and Task Management. For the purposes of this
documentation, we limit our discussion to features that are unique to Calibration
Management.
If you delete a Calibration Task record, the link between the Calibration Task record and
the Equipment record will also be deleted. Additionally, if you delete an Equipment
record that is linked to a Calibration Task record, the Calibration Task record and the link
that exists between them will also be deleted.
Creating Calibration Task Records

To create a Calibration Task record:
1. Open in the Record Manager the Equipment record to which you want to link the
Calibration Task record.
2. On the Associated Pages menu, click the Create Task link.
The Task Builder appears, displaying the Task Datasheet screen.
Note: The Next button is disabled. If desired, you can click the Back button to specify a
different task family or to search for an existing task. However, these instructions assume
that you want to create a new Calibration Task record.
3. Provide values in the fields as desired. Note that the Task ID field is required.
The Calibration Task record is saved to the Meridium APM database and linked
automatically to the currently selected Equipment record.
About Devices in Calibration

Management
The Meridium APM Devices functionality allows for the collection and transfer of data
between a Meridium APM database and a device. The Meridium APM Devices interface
enables direct communication between supported data-collection devices, the Meridium
APM Framework machine, and the Meridium APM database. This is accomplished by
defining a device and associating with it a mapping, which defines the data that is to be
sent to and received from the data-collection device.
In Calibration Management, devices are used to perform automated calibrations on a
piece of equipment. The following devices are supported by Calibration Management:
Beamex MC5 Documenting Process Calibrator

Fluke 74x Documenting Process Calibrator
Meriam MFT4010 Documenting Process Calibrator
Much of the functionality that is used by Calibration Management for automated

calibrations is explained in the documentation for the standard Meridium APM
Framework Devices feature. For example, you can use the Devices functionality to
automate thickness measurement collection in Thickness Monitoring. For the purposes of
this documentation, we limit our discussion to devices functionality that is specific to
Calibration Management. These instructions assume that you are already familiar with
Devices functionality and that your devices are already set up and properly configured to
work with Meridium APM.
About Performing Automated

Calibrations
An automated calibration is one that is performed using a device such as a Fluke. When
you perform an automated calibration, you will:
1. Determine whether or not the device is currently certified.
2. Send to the device information about the type of calibration that should be
performed on a specific piece of equipment. The data that is sent to the device is
stored in a Calibration Template record.
Note: Only Analog, Discrete, and Functional Test template types can be sent to a Fluke
device. Only Analog template types can be sent to Meriam and Beamex devices.
3. Perform the specified calibration event, and record the results on the device.
4. Receive the results of the calibration back into the Meridium APM system for
review. When you receive the results of the calibration and save it to the
Meridium APM database, Calibration Event records are created automatically and
populated with the results.
Preconfigured Beamex Device Mappings

The Meridium APM product is shipped with preconfigured device mappings that define
the data that is to be sent to and received from the Beamex device. The following baseline
Device Mapping records are available for the Beamex MC5 device. You should not
modify these records:
Send, Beamex MC5, 02 An Pts_01

Send, Beamex MC5, 03 An Pts, SqRt Press_01
Send,Beamex MC5, 21 An Pts_01
Send, Beamex MC5, Single Switch_01
Receive, Beamex MC5, 02 An Pts_01
Receive, Beamex MC5, 03 An Pts, SqRt Press_01
Receive, Beamex MC5, Single Switch_01
Preconfigured Fluke Device Mappings

the data that is to be sent to and received from the Fluke device. The following baseline
Device Mapping records are available for the Fluke 74x_3.4.0 device. You should not
Send, Fluke 74x, 02 An Pts, CUM_01

Send, Fluke 74x, 02 An Pts, CUS_01
Send, Fluke 74x, 02 An Pts, CUSM_01
Send, Fluke 74x, 02 An Pts_01
Send, Fluke 74x, 03 An Pts, SqRt Press, CUM_01
Send, Fluke 74x, 03 An Pts, SqRt Press_01
Send, Fluke 74x, Double Switch_01
Send, Fluke 74x, Single Switch_01
Send, Fluke 74x, Double Switch,CUS_01
Send, Fluke 74x, Single Switch,CUS_01
Send, Fluke 74x, 01 S Func_01
Receive, Fluke 74x, 02 An Pts, CUM_01
Receive, Fluke 74x, 02 An Pts, CUS_01
Receive, Fluke 74x, 02 An Pts, CUSM_01
Receive, Fluke 74x, 02 An Pts_01
Receive, Fluke 74x, 03 An Pts, SqRt Press, CUM_01
Receive, Fluke 74x, 03 An Pts, SqRt Press_01
Receive, Fluke 74x, Double Switch_01
Receive, Fluke 74x, Single Switch_01
Receive, Fluke 74X, Double Switch, CUS_01
Receive, Fluke 74x, Single Switch,CUS_01
Receive, Fluke 74x, 01 S Func_01
Receive,Fluke 74x, 02 S Func_01
Preconfigured Meriam Device

Mappings
the data that is to be sent to and received from the Meriam device. The following baseline
Device Mapping records are available for the Meriam MFT4010 device. You should not
Send, Meriam MFT4010, 02 An Pts_01

Send, Meriam MFT4010, 03 An Pts, SqRt Press_01
Send, Meriam MFT4010, Single Switch_01
Receive, Meriam MFT4010, 02 An Pts_01
Receive, Meriam MFT4010, 03 An Pts, SqRt Press_01
Receive, Meriam MFT4010, Single Switch_01
About Sending Calibration Data to a

Device
When you send calibration data to a device, you are exporting information about the type
of calibrations that should be performed for specific pieces of equipment. This
information is stored in Calibration Template records, which are linked to the Equipment
records that represent the pieces of equipment for which calibration measurements should
be collected. The following records will appear on the Devices page when you send
calibration data to a device:
Calibration Template records in which the Enable Automated Calibrations check

box is selected.
Calibration Template, Analog records that contain a value other than AnalogManual in the Calibration Type field.
When you send calibration data to a device, you can select from a list of supported
devices the device that you want to use to record the calibration data. With the current
Calibration Management model, you should select one of the following devices:
Beamex MC5
Fluke 74x_3.4.0
Meriam MFT4010
After you select a device, you can enter the manufacturer and serial number of the device
to determine whether or not the device is currently certified. While the Meridium APM
system does not prevent you from using a device that is out of certification, we
recommend that you use a certified device to perform calibrations.
Sending Calibration Data to Devices
To send calibration data to a device:

1. On the Calibration Management Functions page, click the Send to Calibration
Data Collector link.
The Select a Device and Properties dialog box appears.
2. In the Device ID list, select the device that you will use to collect calibration data.
The name of the device that was used last is selected by default.
Note: The Beamex MC5 device, Fluke 74x_3.4.0 device, and Meriam MFT4010 device
are the only devices supported within the current Calibration Management model.
3. In the Data Transfer Direction section, accept the default selection Send To
Device.
Note: Super Users and members of the MI Device Administrators Security Group can
click the Show Advanced Options link to configure the selected device and its mappings.
For other users, this link is disabled.
4. Click OK.
The Validate Test Equipment dialog box appears.
Note: The Validate Test Equipment dialog box appears only when you select a device that
is supported by Calibration Management.
5. In the Manufacturer text box, type the manufacturer name of the specific device
(e.g., Fluke) that you are using.
6. In the Serial Number text box, type the serial number of the specific device (e.g.,
Fluke) that you are using.
7. Click OK.
A message appears, indicating whether or not the specified device is certified. Note that if
the device is not certified, you can still perform the calibration, but we recommend that
you use only certified devices to perform calibrations.
8. Click OK.
The query runs, and then the Devices page appears, displaying a list of values that are
available to be sent to the device.
Note: If the Send query contains prompt(s), the prompt(s) for the query parameter values
will appear. If a query has been used previously, the Meridium APM system will
automatically display the values that were entered last by the user who is currently logged
in. If you see a prompt, you will need to provide the desired parameters.
The following image shows an example of what the Devices page looks like. Note that
the column headers are based on the Device Query for the selected device.
Note: If an appropriate device mapping could not be found for a given row, a message
will appear in that row, explaining the problem. Additionally, the row will be disabled and
the data that is associated with that row will not be sent to the device.
9. In the Send? column for each Calibration Task you want to send, select the Send?
check box. For rows of data that you do not want to send to the device, clear the
Send? check box.
10. On the Device Tasks menu, click the Send Data link.
A confirmation message appears, asking you to check that the device is connected.
If a connection to the device cannot be found, a message will appear,
explaining the problem, and you will be unable to send data to the device
until the problem is corrected.
If a connection to the device is found, the Meridium APM system attempts

to send the data to the selected device, and a status message appears,
indicating that:
The send action has been completed and displaying the number of
items that were sent successfully.
The send action failed and displaying the items that were not sent
to the device. If the send action fails, you will need to correct the
issue and try again.
About Receiving Calibration Data from

a Device
When you receive calibration data from a device, you are importing the results of an
automated calibration from the device into the Meridium APM system. After the data is
imported into the Meridium APM system, you can choose to save the results to the
Meridium APM database, which will automatically create one Calibration Event record
for each calibration that was performed. The Calibration Event records are then populated
automatically with values that you entered in the device when you performed the
calibration.
If you sent calibration data to a device and some calibrations were not performed, only
those calibrations that were performed will be received. You must determine if any
calibrations were not performed and then take the necessary action to complete those that
were skipped.
Receiving Calibration Data from

Devices
To receive calibration data from a device:
1. On the Calibration Management Functions page, click the Receive from
Calibration Data Collector link.
The Select a Device and Properties dialog box appears.
2. In the Device ID list, select the desired device. The name of the devices that was
used last is selected by default.
3. In the Data Transfer Direction section, accept the default option Receive from
Device.
Note: Only Super Users and members of the MI Device Administrators Security Group
can click the Show Advanced Options link to configure the selected device and its
mappings. For other users, this link is disabled.
4. Click OK.
The Devices page appears, displaying a blank grid.
5. On the Device Tasks menu, click the Receive Data link.

A confirmation message appears, asking you to check that the device is connected.
6. Click the Yes button to verify that the device is connected and ready to send data
to Meridium APM.
If a connection to the device cannot be found, a message will appear,

explaining the problem, and you will be unable to receive data from the
device until the problem is corrected.
If a connection to the device is found, the Meridium APM system attempts

to receive the data from the selected device, and a status message appears,
indicating that:
The receive operation was successful and displaying the number of items
that were received successfully. Additionally, the data that was received is
displayed on the Devices page, where you can evaluate the data and save it
to the Meridium APM database.
The receive operation failed and displaying the list of items that were not
received.
Saving Data Received from a Device to

the Meridium APM Database
After you receive Calibration data from a device, you can save the data directly to the
Meridium APM database in Calibration Event records, which will be created
automatically. The following instructions assume that you are viewing on the Devices
page the data that was received from a device. To save data that is received from a device,
you must be a member of the MI Devices Power Users Security Group.
To save data received from a device to the Meridium APM database:
1. In the list of received data, select the Save? check box for each row of data that
you want to save.
Hint: If you want to select all the received data that is displayed, right-click the list, and
then click Select All Records. You can clear all the selections using the Deselect All
Records option.
2. On the Devices page, on the Common Tasks menu, click the Save Data link.
One Calibration Event record is created per row that appears in the results. If a
Calibration Event record was not created for an event, that event will appear in the grid
on the Devices page. Otherwise, the grid will be empty. Additionally, the Calibration
Event List window appears, displaying the list of Calibration Event records that were
created as a result of the data you saved to the Meridium APM database.
If desired, you can open a Calibration Event record from this list by clicking the
hyperlinked record ID of that record. When you do so, the record contents will appear in
a separate window. At this point, you can close a Calibration Event record.
Note: If saving the records to the database is unsuccessful, an error message will appear,
indicating that the data could not be saved. You can access the error log via the error
message.
Saving Data Received from a Device to a

Meridium APM Dataset
After you receive data from a device, if desired, you can save the data as a Meridium
APM dataset.
To save received data as a Meridium APM dataset:
1. In the list of received data, select the Save? check box for each row of data that
you want to flag for saving.
Note that this selection does not affect which rows of data are actually included in the
dataset. Regardless of your selection, ALL rows of received data will be saved to the
dataset. Your Save? designation will be saved with each row of data and will serve to
indicate which rows you think are valid and should be saved to the database. When an
administrative user later reviews the dataset, he or she can determine which information
to commit to the database, based upon your recommendation.
Hint: If you want to flag all the received data, right-click the list, and then click Select All
Records. Note that choosing Deselect All Records clears all your selections.
2. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Save To Dataset link.
The Save Results As Dataset dialog box appears.
3. Navigate to the Catalog location where you want to save the dataset.
4. Type a name for the dataset and a description, if desired.
The dataset is saved to the Catalog. If the operation is unsuccessful, an error message will
appear, indicating that the data could not be saved. From the error message, you can
access the error log.
Viewing the Error Log When the Save Is

Unsuccessful
When you attempt to save data that you received from a device to the Meridium APM
database or as a dataset and the save is unsuccessful, a message appears, indicating that
the data was not saved. If you see this message, you can click OK to view an error log
with the details of the error.
The specific error message that you see will vary depending on:
The type of device you are using.

Whether the Meridium APM system failed to save all or only some of the data.
Where you are saving the data (i.e., in Calibration Event records or as a dataset).
Regardless of the message that appears, when you click OK, the Devices Log will appear,
displaying a list of the data that could not be saved to the Meridium APM system.
On the Devices Log dialog box, you can double-click any row in the grid to view the
details of the error.
About Performing Manual Calibrations

A manual calibration is one in which calibration data is recorded by hand and typed
manually into Calibration Event records. When you perform a manual calibration you
will:
Perform the specified calibration event.

Create one Calibration Event record per calibration that was performed, and type
the results in the records.
About Performing Manual Functional

Tests
A manual functional test is similar to a manual calibration, except that you will record
data for the functional test that you have defined using a Calibration Template, Functional
Test record. You should use the following workflow to perform a manual functional test:
1. Print a Functional Test Calibration Field Report.
2. Perform the specified functional test.
3. Create a Calibration, Functional Test record for the functional test that was
performed, and type the results into the record manually.
About the Functional Test Field

Calibration Report
The Functional Test Field Calibration Report displays the information that you defined
in a Calibration Template, Functional Test record. You can print the report and use it to
manually record the results of the functional test in the field, and then you can transfer
the results from the report to a Calibration, Functional Test record in the Meridium APM
Framework.
The Functional Test Field Calibration Report contains the following sections:
Calibration Details
Functional Test Calibration Results as Recorded in the Field
Test Equipment Used in Calibration
Accessing the Functional Test Field

Calibration Report
To access the Functional Test Field Calibration Report:
1. Open in Record Manager the Calibration Template, Functional Test record that
contains the functional test information you want to use for the Functional Test
Field Calibration Report.
2. On the Associated Pages menu, click the Calibration Reports link.
A submenu appears.
3. Click the Functional Test Calibration Field Report option.
The report appears on the Meridium APM Report Viewer page.
Aspects of the Calibration Details

Section
The Calibration Details section in the Functional Test Field Calibration Report displays
information about the piece of equipment on which you are performing the functional
test.
The following table lists each item that appears in the Calibration Details section and the
corresponding record in which the underlying value is stored, if applicable.
Record in
Field in which
Report Item which the value the value is
is stored
stored
Notes
Calibration
Type
N/A
Calibration
Template ID
Calibration
Template,
Template ID
Functional Test
None
Tag ID
Calibration
Template,
Tag Name
Functional Test
None
Tag
Description
Calibration
Template,
Tag Description None
Functional Test
N/A
Calibration
Manufacturer Template,
Manufacturer
Functional Test
This value is populated automatically

with Functional - Manual.
None
Calibration
Model Number Template,
Model Number None
Functional Test
Calibration
Serial Number Template,
Serial Number
Functional Test
None
Physical
Location
An empty space appears for this item

by default. You can write the physical
location value directly onto the printed
Functional Test Field Calibration
Report.
N/A
N/A
Aspects of the Functional Test

Calibration Results Section
The Functional Test Calibration Results section in the Functional Test Field Calibration
Report contains a table, where you can manually write the results of the functional test on
the printed report.
The following table lists each column in the Functional Test Calibration Results section
and the corresponding record in which the value is stored, if applicable.
Report
Column
Step
Record in
Field in
which the value which the
is stored
value is
stored
Notes
Calibration
Template
Detail,
None
Sequence
Number
Functional Test
Calibration
Template
Instruction
Instruction
Detail,
Functional Test
None
The values that appear in this field depend
upon the value stored in the Response Type
field in the Calibration Template Detail,
Functional Test record. If the value stored in
that field is:
Response
N/A
N/A
Yes/No: The text Yes and No will

appear in this column in the report.
You can circle the appropriate
response.
Number: The column will not contain
a value. You can write a numeric value
in the Number cell.
Text: The column will not contain a

value. You can write a numeric value
in the Text cell.
Selection: A list of the options that

you entered in each Condition field in
the Calibration Template, Functional
Test record will appear in this column
in the report. You can circle the
appropriate response.
Aspects of the Test Equipment Used in

Calibration Section
The Test Equipment Used in Calibration section of the Functional Test Field
Calibration Report allows you to manually write on the printed report information about
the test equipment you used to perform the functional test, which you can later type into a
Test Equipment record in the Meridium APM Framework.
Printing the Functional Test Field

Calibration Report
To print the Functional Test Field Calibration Report:
Access the Functional Test Field Calibration Report, and then use the Report Tool
to print the report.
Creating Calibration Event Records

Manually
The following instructions provide details on creating a Calibration Event record
manually via a link that appears on the Associated Pages menu when you are viewing an
Equipment record. This step is necessary only if you are performing manual calibrations.
You do not need to complete this step if you are performing automated calibrations.
To create a Calibration Event record manually:
1. Open in the Record Manager the Equipment record to which the Calibration
Event record should be linked.
2. On the Associated Pages menu, click the Create Calibration link.
A submenu appears with the following options, which you can use to create records in the
associated Calibration Event family:
Create Analog Calibration
Create Discrete Calibration
Create Multi-Component Analyzer Calibration
Create Single Component Analyzer Calibration
Create Weight Scale Calibration
Create Functional Test Calibration
3. Click the option that corresponds to the type of Calibration Event record that you
want to create.
A new record in the selected Calibration Event family appears in a separate window. Note
that:
The Event ID field is populated automatically.
If the Equipment record to which you are linking the Calibration Event
record is already linked to ONE Calibration Template record, other fields
are populated automatically based on the information in the Calibration
Template record.
If the Equipment record to which you are linking the Calibration Event
record is already linked to multiple Calibration Template records, in the
Calibration Template Key field, you can select the Calibration Template
record whose data you want to use for populating the Calibration Event
record. These instructions assume that the template data is populated in the
Calibration Event record.
4. Provide values in the remaining fields. Depending on the type of Calibration

Event record that you are creating, the required fields will vary.
5. When you are finished, click OK.
The Calibration Event record is saved and linked automatically to the currently selected
Equipment record.
About Calibration Event Records
Calibration Event records store information about calibrations that are performed in your
facility. Calibrations can be performed using an automated method or a manual method.
Regardless of the method that you use, Calibration Event records will exist to store a
snapshot of the current condition of the piece of equipment that is calibrated.
The difference between an automated calibration and a manual calibration is the method
that is used to perform the calibration and create the Calibration Event record:
When you enter calibration results into a device and then save to the Meridium
APM database the data received from that device, Calibration Event records are
created automatically.
When you perform a calibration by hand, you will manually create Calibration
Event records and type the results into the record by hand.
In the baseline Meridium APM database, the Calibration family appears below the root
level Event family. Throughout this documentation, we refer to these records and all the
records for the families that appear below the Calibration family as Calibration Event
records.
The baseline Meridium APM database contains the following Calibration Event families
that store information that is specific to a type of calibration:
Calibration, Analog: Stores information for linear or square root calibrations that
have a single input signal, a primary output, and an optional secondary output.
Examples of analog calibrations include gauges, flow, pressure, and temperature.
Calibration, Discrete: Stores information for single- or dual- switch instruments.
Examples of discrete calibrations include flow, level, pressure, temperature,
vibration, and position switches.
Calibration, Analyzer Single Component: Stores information for single

component calibrations. Examples of singlecomponent analyzer calibrations
include calibrating pH, in-situ oxygen, toxic gas, and combustible gas.
Calibration, Analyzer Multi-Component: Stores information for comparing

standard gas values to test results from the analyzer. Examples of multicomponent analyzer calibrations include Mass Spectrometers and Process Gas
Chromatographs.
Calibration, Weight Scale: Stores information for weight scale calibrations.
Calibration, Functional Test: Stores information for functional test calibrations,

which allow you to perform custom functional tests on a piece of equipment. An
example of an instruction in a functional test is Describe the wires on the piece of
equipment.
About Calibration Event Records and

Test Equipment
Information about the test equipment that was used to perform a calibration is stored in
the Calibration Event record for the following families and is displayed on the Test
Equipment tab on the family's datasheet:
Calibration, Analog
Calibration, Analyzer Single Component
The Test Equipment tab on the Calibration Event datasheet contains three columns:
Test Equip 1
Test Equip 2
Test Equip 3
...where each column represents one Test Equipment record, and each row contains
information about that piece of test equipment. In other words, a given calibration event
can be associated with up to three pieces of equipment.
The values on the Test Equipment tab are populated differently depending upon whether
you perform an automated calibration or a manual calibration.
Automated calibration: The following fields are populated automatically from the
device (i.e., these values are stored only in the Calibration Event record and not in
the Test Equipment record):
Test Equipment Manufacturer 1
Test Equipment Model 1
Test Equipment Serial 1
Manual calibration: When you perform a calibration manually, after you link a
Test Equipment record to the Calibration Event record using the Test Equipment
ID No 1 field, the remaining fields on the Test Equipment tab are populated
automatically with values from the Test Equipment record.
In addition, the Test Equipment Status 1 field in the Test Equipment record indicates
whether or not the test equipment is certified. While the Meridium APM system does not
prevent you from using uncertified test equipment to perform calibrations, we
recommend that you perform calibration using only certified test equipment.
Note: If you are performing an automated calibration and want to provide more
information about the test equipment than the values populated automatically from the
device, you can link a Test Equipment record to the Calibration Event record manually in
the same way you would for a manual calibration, and the additional information will be
populated automatically in the Calibration Event record.
Closing a Calibration Event

When you close a calibration event, you are indicating that the results of that event have
been reviewed and do not require further review. A member of the Calibration
Administrator Security Group can close an event record by selecting the Calibration
Close check box in the Calibration Event record representing that calibration event. When
you close a Calibration Event record, all fields in the Calibration Event records is
disabled, an only a member of the Calibration Administrator Security Group can clear the
check box to enable the datasheet. Additionally, the following fields are updated
automatically in the Calibration Task record that is linked to the Equipment record to
which the Calibration Event record is linked:
Last Date: Populated with the date and time on which the Calibration Close
check box in the Calibration Event record is selected.
Next Date: Populated with the next date on which a calibration event should be
performed for the equipment, based on the schedule that is defined in that
To close a Calibration Event:

1. Open the Calibration Event record that you want to close.
2. In the Calibration Close cell, select the Calibration Close check box.
The fields on the Calibration Event record are disabled, and the fields in the Last Date
and Next Date fields in the Calibration Task record are updated automatically.
About Calibration Event Graphs

Meridium APM Calibration Management includes various predefined graphs, which
provide a visual representation of the data that exists in the Calibration Event records.
These graphs are stored by default in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Calibration Management\Graphs.
When you are viewing a Calibration Event record in the Record Manager, these graphs
are available via links on the Calibration submenu of the Associated Pages menu. The
following tables list by Calibration Event family the graphs that are available for each
and the name of link on the Associated Pages menu that you can use to access the graph.
Calibration, Analog
Graph Name
Associated Pages link
Analog Calibration Error Graph
View Error Graph
Analog Calibration Measure Graph
View Measure Graph
Calibration Error Trend Graph
View Error Trend
Calibration Pass Fail Trend Graph
View Pass/Fail Trend
Graph Name
View Error Trend
Calibration, Analyzer Multi-Component

Graph Name
Analyzer Multi-Component Calibration

Error Graph
View Error Graph
View Error Trend

Graph Name
Analyzer SingleComponent Calibration

Error Graph
View Error Graph
Analyzer SingleComponent Calibration

Measure Graph
View Measure Graph
View Error Trend

Graph Name
WeightScale Calibration Error Graph
View Error Graph
WeightScale Calibration Measure Graph
View Measure Graph
View Error Trend
Accessing Reports for Calibration Event

Records
Meridium APM Calibration Management includes the following pre-configured
Calibration reports (i.e., one for each baseline Calibration Event family):
Analog Calibration Report

Analyzer MultiComponent Calibration Report
Analyzer SingleComponent Calibration Report
Discrete Calibration Report
WeightScale Calibration Report
Functional Test Calibration Report
These reports are stored in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Calibration

Management\Reports.
When you are viewing a Calibration Event record in the Meridium APM Record
Manager, you can access the associated Calibration report via the View Report link on the
Calibration submenu, which appears as a link on the Associated Pages menu. When you
click the View Report link, the report for the current Calibration Event family will
appear. For example, when you are viewing a Calibration, Analog record, the View
Report link will display the Analog Calibration Report.
Note: When you are viewing a Calibration, Functional Test record in Record Manager,
you can access the Functional Test Calibration Report via the Functional Test Calibration
Report link on the Calibration submenu instead of the View Report link.
To view the report for a Calibration event record:
1. Open the desired Calibration Event record in the Record Manager.
2. On the Associated Pages menu, click Calibration, and then click View Report.
The report appears on the Meridium APM Report Viewer page, where all the standard
Report Viewer functionality is available to you. You can click the Print Report link on the
Common Tasks menu to print the report.
About Calibration Recommendation

Records
Based on the results of a calibration, you might need to propose a recommendation that
further action be taken. For example, if you perform a calibration that fails, you may want
to recommend that a more thorough inspection be conducted on the piece of equipment
with failed calibration results.
You can create a new Calibration Recommendation record to store the details of the
recommendation. There are two ways that Calibration Recommendation Records can be
created:
From the Recommendation Management page. If you want to link a Calibration

Recommendation record to more than one Equipment record or Functional
Location record, you should use this workflow.
From an Associated Page for an Equipment record or Calibration Event record in
Record Manager. If you want to link a Calibration Recommendation record to a
one specific Equipment record, you should use this workflow.
Accessing the Recommendation

Management Page From Calibration
Management
To access the Recommendation Management page:
On the Calibration Management Functions page, click the Manage

Recommendations link.
The Recommendation Management page appears, displaying a list of all the Calibration
Recommendation records that exist.
From the Recommendation Management page, you can manage the states of the
Calibration Recommendation records.
Aspects of the Recommendation

Management Page when Accessed from
When you access Recommendation Management from Calibration Management, the
Recommendation Management page contains a grid that displays Calibration
Recommendation records only. The following image shows an example of the
Recommendation Management page when accessed via Calibration Management.
When accessed from Calibration Management, the Recommendation Management page

contains the following additional items:
A grid that displays Calibration Recommendation records, which contains the

following columns:
o Current State: Displays the current state of the Calibration
Recommendation record.
o
Recommendation ID: Displays the value stored in the Recommendation

ID field of the Calibration Recommendation record as a hyperlink, which
you can use to open the Calibration Recommendation record in Record
Manager.
Recommendation Headline: Displays the value stored in the

Recommendation Headline field of the Calibration Recommendation
record.
Recommendation Description: Displays the value stored in the

Recommendation Description field of the Calibration Recommendation
record.
Asset ID: Displays the value stored in the Equipment ID field of the
Calibration Recommendation record.
The following task menus:

o
Recommendation Tasks menu: Provides access to State Configuration

operations that are available for the selected Calibration
Recommendation records. This menu works the same way as it does if
you access Recommendation Management from the Go To menu,
Note: If you are a member of the Calibration User Security Group, on the
Recommendation Tasks menu, the Consolidate link, Promote to Action link, and
Supersede link will be disabled.
o
Common Tasks Menu: Provides standard functionality. This menu

works the same way as it does if you access Recommendation
Management from the Go To menu, except that the New
Recommendation link is labeled New Calibration Recommendation and
allows you to create a Calibration Recommendation record instead of
a Meridium General Recommendation record.
You can customize the appearance of the grid (e.g., sort the results), if desired.
Creating Calibration Recommendations

from Recommendation Management
To create a Calibration Recommendation record from Recommendation Management:
1. Access the Recommendation Management page via Calibration Management.
2. On the Recommendation Management page, on the Common Tasks menu, click

the New Calibration Recommendation link.
The New Calibration Recommendation window appears.
3. Use the fields on the datasheet to provide the information that is necessary for the
recommendation. Note that while the Equipment ID and Functional Location ID
fields are not required, we recommend that you use those fields to link the
Calibration Recommendation record to Equipment and Functional Location
records.
4. Click OK.
The Calibration Recommendation record closes, and your changes are saved.
Note: If you did not link the Calibration Recommendation record to at least one
Equipment record or Functional Location record, a message will appear, indicating that
no Equipment or Functional Location records were selected. If this is intentional, click
OK. If this is not intentional, click OK, and then reopen the Calibration Recommendation
record to link it to an Equipment or Functional Location record.
Creating Calibration Recommendations

from an Associated Page
To create a Calibration Recommendation from an Associated Page:
1. In Record Manager, open the Equipment record or Calibration Event record for
which you want to create a Calibration Recommendation record.
2. If you are viewing an Equipment record, on the Associated Pages menu, click the
Create Calibration link.
-orIf you are viewing a Calibration Event record, on the Associated Pages menu, click the
Calibration link.
A submenu appears.
3. If you are viewing an Equipment record, click the Create Calibration

Recommendation link.
-orIf you are viewing a Calibration Event record, click the New Calibration
Recommendation link.
A new record for the Calibration Recommendation family appears in a separate window,
and the following fields are populated automatically with data from the Equipment or
Calibration Event record:
Calibration Type
Calibration Recommendation Basis
Equipment ID
4. Enter values in the remaining fields as desired, and click OK.

The window closes, and the record is saved and linked to the Equipment record or
Calibration Event record that you are currently viewing. If you are viewing a Calibration
Event record that is also linked to an Equipment record, the Calibration Recommendation
record is linked to both the Calibration Event record and the Equipment record.
Calibration, Analog Associated Pages

The following Associated Pages are configured in the baseline Meridium APM database
for the Calibration, Analog family.
Note: To see the underlying URL for each Associated Page, you can use the URL
Manager application.
Caption
Description
Displays the Calibration Management Functions page.
Start Page
This Associated Page appears on the Calibration submenu.
New Calibration Task
Displays the Task Builder, which you can use to create a

new Task record.
Displays a new Calibration Recommendation record.
New Calibration
Recommendation
Enter Calibration Data

Displays the Event Builder, which you can use to create a
new Event record.
View Report

Launches the Report Viewer, which displays the Calibration
Event record data in a pre-formatted report.
View Error Graph

Launches the Graph Viewer, which displays the Error graph
for the Calibration Event record.
View Measure Graph

Launches the Graph Viewer, which displays the Measure
graph for the Calibration Event record.
View Error Trend

Launches the Graph Viewer, which displays the Error Trend

Launches the Graph Viewer, which displays the Pass/Fail
Trend graph for the Calibration Event record.

Associated Pages
for the Calibration, Analyzer Multi-Component family.
Caption
Description
Start Page

new Task record.
New Calibration
Recommendation

new Event record.
View Report

Event data in a preformatted report.
View Error Graph

View Error Trend



Associated Pages
for the Calibration, Analyzer Single Component family.
Caption
Description
Start Page

new Task record.
New Calibration
Recommendation

new Event record.
View Report

View Error Graph

View Measure Graph

View Error Trend


Calibration, Discrete Associated Pages

for the Calibration, Discrete family.
Caption
Description
Start Page

new Task record.
New Calibration
Recommendation

new Event record.
View Report

View Error Trend


Calibration, Weight Scale Associated

Pages
for the Calibration, Weight Scale family.
Caption
Description
Start Page

new Task record.
New Calibration
Recommendation

new Event record.
View Report

View Error Graph

View Measure Graph

View Error Trend



The following Associated Page is configured in the baseline Meridium APM database for
the Calibration, Functional Test family.
Note: To see the underlying URL for this Associated Page, you can use the URL Manager
application.
Caption
Description
New Calibration
Recommendation
Functional Test Calibration
Report
This Associated Page appears on the Calibration

submenu.
Displays the Functional Test Report in the Report
Viewer.
This Associated Page appears on the Calibration
submenu.
Calibration Template Associated Pages

for the Calibration Template family.
Caption
Start Page
Description

Lets you link the current Calibration Template record to an
Link to Equipment equipment or location record.
Unlink from
Equipment

Lets you unlink the current Calibration Template record from an
equipment or location record.
Calibration Template Detail Associated

Pages
the Calibration Template Detail family:
Start Page: Displays the Calibration Management Functions page. This

Associated Page appears on the Calibration submenu.
application.
Calibration Template, Functional Test

the Calibration Template, Functional Test family.
Functional Test Calibration Field Report: Displays the Functional Test Calibration
Field Report in the Report Viewer. This Associated Page appears on the
Calibration Reports submenu.
application.
Calibration Task Associated Pages

for the Calibration Task family.
Caption
Description
Start Page
Link to Template
Unlink From
Template

Lets you link the current Calibration Task record to a Calibration
Template record.
Lets you unlink the current Calibration Task record from a
Calibration Results, Analog Associated

Pages
the Calibration Results, Analog family:

application.
Calibration Results, Analyzer Associated

Pages
The following Associated Page is configuredin the baseline Meridium APM database for
the Calibration Results, Analyzer family:

application.
Calibration Results, Discrete Associated

Pages
the Calibration Results, Discrete family:

application.
Equipment Associated Pages
for the Equipment family for use with Calibration Management.
Caption
Create Calibration
Recommendation
Description
This Associated Page appears on the Create
Calibration submenu.
Displays a new Calibration, Analog record.

Displays a new Calibration, Discrete record.
Create Multi-Component
Analyzer Calibration
Create Single Component

Analyzer Calibration

Displays a new Calibration, Analyzer MultiComponent record.
Displays a new Calibration, Analyzer Single
Component record.
Displays a new Calibration, Weight Scale record.
Create Weight Scale Calibration

Displays a new Calibration, Functional Test record.
Create Functional Test
Calibration
Create Task

Displays the Task Builder, which you can use to
create a new Calibration Task record.
Template submenu.
Displays a new Calibration Template, Analog record.
Template
Template
Create Multi-Component
Analyzer Template
Create Single Component

Analyzer Template

Template submenu.
Displays a new Calibration Template, Discrete
record.
Template submenu.
Displays a new Calibration Template, Analyzer
Multi-Component record.
Template submenu.
Displays a new Calibration Template, Analyzer
Single Component record.

Template submenu.
Displays a new Calibration Template, Weight Scale
Create Weight Scale Calibration record.
Template
Template submenu.
Displays a new Calibration Template, Functional
Create Functional Test Template Test record.
Template submenu.
Standard Gas Components Associated

Pages
the Standard Gas Components family:

application.
About the Calibration Management

Catalog Folder Structure
The Calibration Management Catalog folders contain graphs, queries, and reports that are
used by Calibration Management to display information contained in records that
participate in the Calibration Management data model. The Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Calibration Management contains the following subfolders:
Graphs: Contains graphs that display calibration data and summary information.
Queries: Contains queries that support graphs and reports and are used by
Calibration Management to identify your equipment families.
Reports: Contains SQL Server Reporting Services reports that display calibration
data and summary information.
SSRS: This folder is not used by the Meridium APM system.
The Graphs Folder

The following table lists the items that are stored in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Calibration Management\Graphs.
Item Name
Behavior and Usage
Analog Calibration
Error Graph
Displays the EventKey prompt for the Entity Key of the

Calibration, Analog record, and then displays in a line graph a
summary of the as-found, as-left, negative, and positive error
limit data for the specified record.
Analog Calibration
Measure Graph

Calibration, Analog record, and then displays in a line graph a
summary of the output as-found, output as-left, and expected data
for the specified record.
Analyzer MultiComponent
Calibration Error
Graph

Calibration, Analyzer Multi-Component record, and then displays
in a bar graph the positive error, negative error, as-found error,
and as-left error limit values for the specified record.
Analyzer
SingleComponent
Calibration Error
Graph

Calibration, Analyzer Single Component record, and then
displays in a line graph the positive error, negative error, as-found
error, and as-left error limit values for the specified record.
Analyzer
SingleComponent
Calibration Measure
Graph

displays in a line graph the primary output as-found and primary
output as-left values for the specified record.
Displays the following prompts, and then displays in a line graph
the overall as found max error, overall as-found RMS error,
overall as-left max error, and overall as-left RMS error values for
the specified record.
Calibration Error
Trend Graph
Range: Lets you specify the time span in which the

calibration events whose results you want to include in the
graph took place. You can choose from the following
values:
Last 1 month
Last 3 months
Last 1 year
Last 3 years
All
Family: Lets you specify the Calibration Event family

whose record you want to include in the graph. The
Family list contains the family captions for the Calibration
Event families (except the Calibration, Discrete family) as
they appear in the database. You can choose from the
following values:
MI_EVCAANLG: The Calibration, Analog family

caption.
MI_EVCAANMC: The Calibration, Analyzer

Multi-Component family caption.
MI_EVCAANSC: The Calibration, Analyzer Single

Component family caption.
EventPred: Lets you specify the Entity Key for the

Equipment record to which Calibration Event records are
linked.
Calibration Pass Fail

Trend Graph
Displays the following prompts, and then displays in a line graph

the overall as found max error, overall as found RMS error,
overall as-left max error, and overall as-left RMS error values for
the specified record.
Range: Lets you specify the time span in which the

calibration events whose results you want to include in the
graph took place. You can choose from the following
values:
Last 1 month
Last 3 months
Last 1 year
Last 3 years
All
Family: Lets you specify the Calibration Event family

whose record you want to include in the graph. The
Family list contains the family captions for the Calibration
Event families (except the Calibration, Discrete family) as
they appear in the database. You can choose from the
following values:
MI_EVCAANLG: The Calibration, Analog family

caption.
MI_EVCAANMC: The Calibration, Analyzer

Multi-Component family caption.
MI_EVCAANSC: The Calibration, Analyzer Single

Component family caption.
EventPred: Lets you specify the Entity Key for the

Equipment record to which Calibration Event records are
linked.
Calibration Summary This graph is not used by the baseline Calibration Management
module.
WeightScale
Calibration Error
Graph

Calibration, Weight Scale record, and then displays in a line graph
a summary of the as-found, as-left, negative, and positive error
limit data for the specified record.
WeightScale
Calibration Measure
Graph

Calibration, Weight Scale record and then displays in a line graph
a summary of the primary output as-found, primary output as-left,
and expected data for the specified record.
The Queries Folder

The following table lists the items that are stored in the Catalog folder
Item Name
Behavior and Usage
Beamex Receive Query
Displays the data that is received from a

Beamex device. This query appears on
the Devices page after you receive data
from a Beamex device.
Beamex Send Query
Displays the data that is sent to a Beamex

device. This query appears on the
Devices page when you send data to a
Beamex device.
Calibration Totals Query
Displays by Asset ID the number of

calibrations that have taken place for that
piece of equipment, based on the number
of closed Calibration Event records that
are linked to that Equipment record.
Device Mapping Query
Displays the Select Mapping ID prompt,

which contains the list of mapping types,
and then displays the mappings that exist
for the selected type.
Fluke Receive Query

Fluke device. This query appears on the
Devices page after you receive data from
a Fluke.
Fluke Send Query
Displays the data that is sent to a Fluke

Fluke.
Instrument Data Query
Displays the Asset_Key prompt for the

Entity Key of an Equipment record, and
then displays data stored in the specified
record. This query is used to populate
newly created Calibration Template
records with equipment data from the
Equipment record to which it is linked.
IsAssetQuery
This query is not used by the current
Calibration Management model.
Meriam Receive Query

Meriam device. This query appears on the
Devices page after you receive data from
a Meriam device.
Meriam Send Query
Displays the data that is sent to a Meriam

Meriam device.
Model Optimization Query
Supports the Event Builder, which you

should not use with the current
Calibration Management model.
Query For AnalogCalibrationGraphs
Supports the Analog Calibration Error

Graph and the Analog Calibration
Measure Graph, which are stored in the
Graphs folder.
Query For AnalogCalibrationReport
Supports the Analog Calibration Report,

which is stored in the Reports folder.
Query For
AnalyzerMultiComponentCalibrationGraphs
Supports the Analyzer Multi-Component

Calibration Error Graph, which is stored
in the Graphs folder.
Query For
AnalyzerMultiComponentCalibrationReport
Supports the Analyzer MultiComponent

Calibration Report, which is stored in the
Reports folder.
Query For
Supports the Analyzer SingleComponent
AnalyzerSingleComponentCalibrationGraphs Calibration Error Graph and the Analyzer
SingleComponent Calibration Measure
Graph, which are stored in the Graphs
folder.
Query For
Supports the Analyzer SingleComponent
AnalyzerSingleComponentCalibrationReport Calibration Report, which is stored in the
Reports folder.
Query For CalibrationErrorTrendGraphs
Supports the Calibration Error Trend

Graph, which is stored in the Graphs
folder.
Query For CalibrationPassFailTrendGraphs
Supports the Calibration Pass Fail Trend

Graph, which is stored in the Graphs
folder.
Query For DiscreteCalibrationReport
Supports the Discrete Calibration Report,

which is stored in the Reports folder.
Query For
FunctionalTestCalibrationFieldReport
Supports the Functional Test Calibration

Field Report, which is stored in the
Reports folder.
Query For FunctionalTestCalibrationReport
Support the Functional Test Calibration

Report, which is stored in the Reports
folder.
Query For WeightScaleCalibrationGraphs
Supports the WeightScale Calibration

Error Graph and the WeightScale
Calibration Measure Graph, which are
stored in the Graphs folder.
Query For WeightScaleCalibrationReport
Supports the WeightScale Calibration

Report, which is stored in the Reports
folder.
Task Query
Displays the Asset_Key prompt for the

Entity Key for the Equipment record, and
then displays the Calibration Tasks
records for the specified record.
A subfolder that contains the items with
the following names:
Data Entry Queries
Promptable Query: This query

supports the Event Builder, which
you should not use with the
current Calibration Management
model.
Promptable Query By Due Date:
This query supports the Event
Builder, which you should not use
with the current Calibration
Management model.
Promptable Query By Technician:
This query supports the Event
Builder, which you should not use
with the current Calibration
Management model.
The Reports Folder

The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Calibration Management\Reports
contains the following items, which you can access via a link on the Associated Pages
menu when you are viewing a Calibration Event record.
Report Name
Behavior and Usage
Analog Calibration
Report

Calibration, Analog record, and then displays in the Report
Viewer the details for the specified Calibration Event record,
including a results summary and equipment information.
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration Report

Calibration, Analyzer Multi-Component record, and then
displays in the Report Viewer the details for the specified
Calibration Event record, including a results summary and
equipment information.
Analyzer
SingleComponent
Calibration Report

displays in the Report Viewer the details for the specified
Calibration Event record, including a results summary and
Discrete Calibration
Report

Calibration, Discrete record, and then displays in the Report
Functional Test
Calibration Field
Report

Calibration Template, Functional Test record, and then displays
in the Report Viewer the details for the specified Calibration
Template, Functional Test record including a blank results
section and a blank test equipment section.
Functional Test
Calibration Report

Calibration, Functional Test record, and then displays in the
Report Viewer the details for the specified Calibration,
Functional Test record including a results summary and test
WeightScale
Calibration Report

Calibration, Weight Scale record, and then displays in the Report
Calibration Task
Calibration Task records store details about a calibration task that should be performed by
a given user for Calibration Management. Specifically, these records store scheduled
dates for the next time calibrations should be performed. The following table provides an
alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist for the Calibration Task family.
The information in the table reflects the baseline state and behavior of these fields. The
list is limited, however, to details that are specific to Calibration Task records. If a field in
the Calibration Task family works the same way as it does in the root Task family, that
field is excluded from the table.
Field
Task
Type
Data
Type
Description
The type of task the record

represents. By default, this
Character
field contains the value
CALIBRATION.
Behavior and Usage

a list labeled Task Type and contains
a list of values from the Task Type
family that correspond to types of
calibrations, such as CALIBRATION:
AUTOMATED, ANALOG, 11
UP/DN, LINEAR, DCV/DCV.
You can select a value other than the
default.
a list labeled Task State and contains
a list of states.
Task
State
The state associated with the

Calibration Task record. By
Character
After you save a new Calibration Task
default this field contains the
record, this value is changed
value Proposed.
automatically from Proposed to
Scheduled without change.
The Entity ID of the record to

which the Calibration Task On the datasheet, this field is disabled
Related
record is linked (i.e., the
and populated automatically if you
Character
Entity ID
record that is selected when create the record using the Associated
you create the Calibration
Pages link.
Task record).
Last
Date
Date

associated Calibration Event
record is closed. By default,
this field contains the date on
which the Calibration Task
record is created.

date on which the associated
Calibration Event record is closed.
Route
Character A value that represents a
Number
route or group of tasks. By a text box. You can remove the
default, this field contains the default value and type your own value
value None.
in the Route Number cell. You can
use this field in a query to view the
tasks that are assigned to a particular

route or group of tasks.
Calibration Template, Analog

Calibration Template, Analog records store details on the analog calibration that should
be performed for a specific piece of equipment. The following table provides an
alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist for the Calibration Template,
Analog family. The information in the table reflects the baseline state and behavior of
these fields. This list is not comprehensive.
Field
Asset Key
Calibration
Strategy
Data
Type
Description
Number The Entity

Key of the
Equipment
record to
which the
Calibration
Template
record is
linked. This
field is used
by the
Meridium
APM system
and should
not be
modified.
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet/Tab
This field does not appear on a

None
datasheet by default. This value is
used to execute the Instrument
Data query that is specified on the
Calibration Administration page,
so that equipment data can be
populated in the Calibration
Template record.

Character The strategy appears as a list labeled
for the analog Calibration Strategy and contains
calibration. a list of strategies for the analog
calibration. This field is required.
You can choose from the
following strategies:
2 Up
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Analog
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.
2 Down
2 Up then 2 Down
3 Up
3 Down
3 Up then 3 Down
5 Up
5 Down
5 Up then 5 Down
5 Up then 1 Down
11 Up
11 Down
11 Up then 11 Down
After you save the Calibration

Template, Analog record, this
field is disabled.
Calibration
Task ID

Calibration
Task record
that is linked
to the
Equipment
record to
which the
Calibration
Template
record is
linked.
Calibration
Type

calibration
you will
perform (i.e.,
manual or

appears as a list which contains
the IDs of the Calibration Task
record that are linked to the
Equipment record to which the
Calibration Template record is
linked. You can select the desired
Calibration Task record from the
list. If the Equipment record is
not linked to a Calibration Task
record, this list will be empty.
Calibration Type and is required.
You can choose from the
following options:
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Analog
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Analog
Calibration
Template
automatic)
and the type
of device
used to
perform the
calibration, if
applicable.
Analog-Manual: Indicates Setup

datasheet.
that you will perform a
manual calibration. When
this option is selected, the
fields on the Automated
Calibration Parameters tab
are disabled.
Fluke 74x: Indicates that
you will perform an
automatic calibration
using a Fluke device.
Meriam MFT4010:
Indicates that you will
perform an automatic
calibration using a
Meriam device.
Beamex MC5: Indicates

that you will perform an
automatic calibration
using a Beamex device.
appears as a text box labeled Low
Custom Input Number A number
Lower Range
representing and is grouped with the following
other fields under the label
the lower
range value Custom Input Values:
for the
custom input
Custom Input Upper
range.
Range
Custom Input Range
UOM
Automated
Calibration
Parameters tab
on the Analog
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.
This field is enabled and required

only when the Custom Input
Values check box is selected.
Custom Input Character The UOM for appears as a list labeled UOM and Automated
is grouped with the following
Range UOM
the custom
Calibration
input range. other fields under the label
Parameters tab
Custom Input Values:
on the Analog
Calibration
Custom Input Lower
Template
Setup
Range
datasheet.
Custom Input Upper
Range
appears as a text box labeled High Automated
Upper Range
representing and is grouped with the following Calibration
the upper
Parameters tab
on the Analog
for the
Calibration
custom input
Custom Input Lower
Template
range.
Setup
Range
datasheet.
Custom Input Range
UOM
Custom Input Logical

Values
Indicates that
you will enter
custom input
values for the
calibration.

appears as a check box labeled
Automated
Custom Input Values. This field is Calibration
enabled only when the value
Parameters tab
stored in the Calibration Type
on the Analog
field is Fluke 74x. When you
Calibration
select the Custom Input Values
Template
check box:
Setup
datasheet.
The following fields are
enabled:
Number A number
Custom Input
Upper Range
Custom Input
Range UOM
The Manual Entered Input

Values check box is
automatically selected and
disabled.
appears as a text box labeled Low Automated
Custom
Custom Input
Lower Range
Output Lower
Range Value
and is grouped with the following

representing other fields under the label
Custom Output Values:
the lower
range value
for the
Custom Output Upper
custom output
Range
range.
Custom Output Range
UOM
Calibration
Parameters tab
on the Analog
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.

Custom
Character The UOM for appears as a list labeled UOM and Automated
Output Range
the custom
Calibration
UOM
output range. other fields under the label
Parameters tab
Custom Output Values:
on the Analog
Calibration
Custom Output Lower
Template
Setup
Range
datasheet.
Custom Output Upper
Range
Custom
Number A number
Output Upper
Range Value
the upper
Parameters tab
range value Custom Output Values:
on the Analog
for the
Calibration
custom output
Custom Output Lower
Template
range.
Setup
Range
datasheet.
Custom Output Range
UOM
Custom
Logical
Output Values

Indicates
whether you Custom Output Values. This field
is enabled only when the value
will enter
custom output stored in the Calibration Type
values for the field is Fluke 74x. When you
Automated
Calibration
Parameters tab
on the Analog
Calibration
calibration.
select the Custom Output Values

check box:
Template
Setup
The following fields are datasheet.
enabled:
Character Indicates
whether this
setting should
be on or off.
Input Min
Max Mode
Character Indicates
whether this
setting should
be on or off.
Input Type
Character The input

type for the
analog
calibration.
Custom Output
Upper Range
Custom Output
Range UOM
The Manual Entered Input

Values check box is
automatically selected and
disabled.
This field appears as a list and
contains the following options: Auxiliary
Automated
On
Calibration
Parameters
datasheet.
Off
Automated
On
Calibration
Parameters
datasheet.
Off
appears as a list labeled Input
Calibration
Type and contains a list of input Setup tab on
types that are stored in the
the Analog
MI_CALIBRATION_IO_TYPES Calibration
System Code Table. This field is Template
required.
Setup
datasheet.
The options that appear in the list
depend on the value stored in the
Calibration Type field. If the
value in the Calibration Type field
is Meriam MFT4010, you can
choose from the following
Input
Damping
Setting
Custom Output
Lower Range
options:
Pressure
Temperature
Voltage
Current
If the value in the Calibration

Type field is Beamex MC5, the
list includes all of the options
listed for a Meriam device and the
following additional options:
Frequency
Resistance

Type field is Fluke 74x or
Analog-Manual, the list includes
all of the options listed for a
Beamex device and the following
additional options:
Flow
Level
Weight
Other
Number A number
Automated
representing Linear TC LRV. This field is
Calibration
enabled only when the TC Linear Parameters tab
the lower
value on the check box is selected. This field is on the Analog
linear
Calibration
thermocouple values from the following fields Template
based on the value that exists in Setup
range.
the Output Type field and Input datasheet.
Type field:
Linear TC
LRV
Primary Input Range LRV

if the value in the Output
Type field is not
Temperature and the value

in the Input Range field is
Temperature.
Primary Output Range
LRV is the value in the
Output Type field is
Temperature.
Number A number
Automated
representing Linear TC URV. This field is
Calibration
enabled
only
when
the
TC
Linear
upper value
Parameters tab
on the linear check box is selected. This field is on the Analog
thermocouple populated automatically with
Calibration
values from the following fields Template
range.
based on the value that exists in Setup
the Output Type field:
datasheet.
Linear TC
URV
Primary Input Range URV

Type field is not
Temperature.

URV if the value in the
Temperature.
Loop Power Character Indicates the appears as a list labeled Loop
Automated
loop power Power and contains the following Calibration
values:
that is
Parameters tab
enabled or
on the Analog
disabled. This
Disabled
Calibration
field contains
Template
Enabled 24V
the value
Setup
Disabled by
datasheet.
Enabled 28V
default.
This field is disabled if the value
stored in the Calibration Type
field is Analog-Manual.
Manual
Logical Indicates
Automated
Entered Input
whether you Manual Entered Input Values and Calibration
Values
is cleared by default. Selecting

will manually the Manual Entered Input Values Parameters tab
check box indicates that you will on the Analog
enter the
input value manually enter the input value
Calibration
into the device during the
into the
Template
device during automated calibration.
Setup
the automated
datasheet.
calibration. The state of this field is
dependent upon the state of other
fields. Specifically, this check box
is:
Enabled only when the

value stored in the
Calibration Type field is
Beamex MC5 or Fluke
74x.
Disabled and selected
automatically if the
Custom Input Values
Disabled automatically if
the Performs Square Root
Yes (Y).
Manual Entered Output Values
and is cleared by default.
Selecting this check box indicates
that you will manually enter the
output value into the device
during the automated calibration.
Manual
Logical
Entered
Output Values
Indicates
Automated
whether you
Calibration
will manually
Parameters tab
enter the
on the Analog
output value
Calibration
into the
Template
device during
Setup
the automated
datasheet.
calibration. The state of this field is
is:

value stored in the
Beamex MC5 or Fluke
74x.
Selected and disabled

automatically if the
Custom Output Values
Manufacturer Character The

Calibration
manufacturer appears as a text box labeled
Setup tab on
of the piece of Manufacturer and is populated
the Analog
equipment, automatically with the value
Calibration
which is
stored in the Manufacturer field Template
represented in the Equipment record to which Setup
by the
the Calibration Template record is datasheet.
Equipment
linked.
record to
which the
Calibration
Template
record is
linked.
appears as a text box labeled Max Calibration
Max Error
Number A number
Limit
representing Error Limit and includes an
Setup tab on
the maximum additional label PCT to the right. the Analog
amount of
Calibration
error in
Template
percent that is automatically with the value 3 by Setup
allowed
default, as specified in the Analog datasheet.
before a
Error Limit field in the
calibration
Calibration Setup Defaults record.
event is
You can modify this value if
considered
desired. This field accepts
failed.
numeric values between 0 and 10.
This value is used in the
Calibration Event record to
calculate whether a calibration
event is failed or passed.
Model
Number
Character The model

Calibration
number of the appears as a text box labeled
Setup tab on
piece of
Model Number and is populated the Analog
equipment, automatically with the value
Calibration
which is
stored in the Model Number field Template
represented in the Equipment record to which Setup
by the
the Calibration Template record is datasheet.
Equipment
record to
which the
Calibration
Template
record is
linked.
linked.

Character Indicates
whether this
setting should
On
be on or off.
Off
appears as a list labeled Output
Output Type Character The output
type for the Type and contains a list of input
analog
calibration. MI_CALIBRATION_IO_TYPES
System Code Table. This field is
required.
Output
Damping
Setting
The options that appear in the list

Calibration Type field. If the
value in the Calibration Type field
is Meriam MFT4010, you can
options:
Voltage
Current

Type field is Beamex MC5, the
list includes all of the options
listed for a Meriam device and the
following additional options:
Pressure
Temperature
Frequency
Resistance
Auxiliary
Automated
Calibration
Parameters
datasheet.
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Analog
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.

Type field is Fluke 74x or
Analog-Manual, the list includes
all of the options listed for a
Beamex device and the following
additional options:
Flow
Level
Weight
Other
appears as a list labeled Performs
Square Root and contains the
values Yes (Y) and No (N). This
field is disabled or enabled based
upon the state of other fields on
the datasheet:
Performs
Square Root
Character Indicates
whether or
not a square
root
calculation
will be
performed on
the values in
the Input
Measure AF
and Input
Measure AL
fields.
You can select the value

Yes (Y) only if the value
in the Input Type field is
Pressure or Flow.
Calibration Strategy field
is 2 Down or 2 Up then 2
Down, this field is
disabled and displays the
value No (N).
If the value in the Input

Type field is Flow, the
value in the Calibration
Type field must be
Analog-Manual. Only
pressure input values can
be used with automated
calibrations.
When the Manual Entered

Input Values check box on
the Automated Calibration
Parameters tab is selected,
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Analog
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.
Primary
Input LRV
this field will be disabled

an populated
value No (N).
appears as a text box labeled LRV Calibration
Number A number
representing and is grouped with the following Setup tab on
the lower
the Analog
range value Primary Input Range:
Calibration
for the
Template
primary input
Primary Input URV
Setup
range.
datasheet.
Primary Input Range
Units
The value stored in the Primary
Input LRV field combined with
the value stored in the Primary
Input URV field define the
primary input range for the
calibration.
Primary
Input Range
Units

Character The UOM for appears as a list labeled UOM and Calibration
the primary is grouped with the following
Setup tab on
input.
the Analog
Primary Input Range:
Calibration
Template
Primary Input LRV
Setup
datasheet.
Primary Input URV
This list contains a list of UOMs
that is filtered based on the value
in the Input Type field and the
Calibration Type field. This
means that only the UOM values
that are relevant for that input
type and calibration type will
appear in the list. After you select
a value in this list, the Meridium
APM system checks to see if the
UOM is compatible with the
device. If the selected value is not
compatible, an error message will
Primary
Input URV
appear, indicating the problem.

Number A number
representing URV and is grouped with the
following other fields under the
the upper
range value label Primary Input Range:
for the
primary input
Primary Input LRV
range.
Primary Input Range
Units
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Analog
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.

Input URV field combined with
Input LRV field define the
calibration.
Primary
Output LRV

Number A number
the lower
the Analog
range value Primary Output Range:
Calibration
for the
Template
primary
Primary Output URV
Setup
output range.
datasheet.
Units
Output LRV field combined with
Output URV field define the
primary output range for the
calibration.

Primary
Output Range
Setup tab on
Units
input.
the Analog
Primary Output Range:
Calibration
Template
Primary
Output URV
Primary Output LRV

Primary Output URV
Setup
datasheet.

in the Output Type field and the
Calibration Type field. This
type and calibration type will
appear in the list. After you select
a value in this list, the Meridium
APM system checks to see if the
UOM is compatible with the
device. If the selected value is not
compatible, an error message will
appear, indicating the problem.
Number A number
Calibration
Setup tab on
following other fields under the the Analog
the upper
range value label Primary Output Range:
Calibration
for the
Template
primary
Primary Output LRV
Setup
output range.
datasheet.
Units
Output URV field combined with
Output LRV field define the
primary ouput range for the
calibration.
Refresh
Equipment
Data
Logical
Indicates
None
whether or
datasheet by default. This value
not
tells the Asset Key field to
information in execute the Instrument Data
the
query so that the equipment data
Equipment
in the Calibration Template
record that is record is updated or not.
linked to the
Calibration
Template
record has
been updated.
This field is
used by the
Meridium
APM system
and should
not be
modified.
appears as a list labeled RTD
RTD Wiring Character The RTD
Wiring Configuration and is
Configuration
wiring
configuration enabled if:
associated
with the
The value stored in the
calibration.
Beamex MC5 or Fluke
74x.
The value stored in the
Temperature.
The Temperature Element

Type field contains an
value that is an RTD type
(i.e., the value ends in
RTD).
If the value stored in the

Calibration Type field is Beamex
MC5, the following options
appear in the RTD Wiring
Configuration list:
2 Wire RTD
3 Wire RTD
4 Wire RTD

Calibration Type field is Fluke
74x, the RTD Wiring
Configuration list includes all of
Automated
Calibration
Parameters tab
on the Analog
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.
the options listed for a Beamex

device and the following
additional options:
2 Wire Ohms
3 Wire Ohms
4 Wire Ohms
Character The serial
Calibration
number of the Serial Number and is populated Setup tab on
piece of
the Analog
equipment, stored in the Serial Number field Calibration
in the Equipment record to which Template
which is
represented the Calibration Template record is Setup
linked.
by the
datasheet.
Equipment
record to
which the
Calibration Type field is Meriam
Calibration MFT4010, this value is required.
Template
record is
linked.
Serial
Number
Tag
Description
Tag Name
Character The
description of
the piece of
equipment,
which is
represented
by the
Equipment
record to
which the
Calibration
Template
record is
linked.
Character
The ID of the
Equipment
record to
which the
Calibration
Template

appears as a text box labeled Tag
Description. This field is
value stored in the Equipment
Short Description field in the
linked.
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Analog
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.

Name. This field is populated
automatically with the value in
the Equipment field in the
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Analog
Calibration
Template
Setup
record is
linked.
TC Linear
Logical

linked.
Indicates
whether you
want to
provide a
value in the
Linear TC
LRV and
Linear TC
URV fields.
datasheet.

TC Linear. This check box is
cleared by default and enabled
only if the value in the
Calibration Type field is Fluke
74x and the Temperature Element
Type field contains a
Thermocouple value (i.e., the
value ends in Thermocouple).
The type of On the datasheet, this field
Temperature Character temperature appears as a list labeled
element used Temperature Element Type and
Element Type
for the
contains a list of temperature
calibration. element types.
Automated
Calibration
Parameters tab
on the Analog
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.
Template ID
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Analog
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.
Automated
Calibration
Parameters tab
on the Analog
Calibration
The Temperature Element Type Template
field is enabled and required only Setup
if the value in the Calibration
datasheet.
Type field is not Analog-Manual
and if the Input Type or Output
Type fields contain the value
Temperature. The temperature
element types that are listed
Calibration Type field (i.e.,
Beamex MC5, Meriam
MFT4010, or Fluke 74x).

Calibration
Template
record.

Template ID and displays the
value in the format <Tag
Name><Calibration
Type><Calibration
Strategy><Primary Input Range
Units><Primary Output Range
Units>, where the values in
brackets represent the values that
are stored in the fields with the
same names.
Template
State

Character The state of appears as a list labeled Template
State and contains the following
the
Calibration values:
Template
record. By
Development
default, this
Approved
field contains
the value
Obsolete
Development.
You can select a value in this list.
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Analog
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.
Calibration Template, Discrete

Calibration Template, Discrete records store details on the discrete calibration that should
be performed for a specific piece of equipment or a location. The following table
provides an alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist for the Calibration
Template, Discrete family. The information in the table reflects the baseline state and
Field
Activate
Switch 1
Activate
Switch 2
Data
Type
Description
Character The direction

in which the
input value
will be
travelling
when switch
1 changes
states (i.e.,
when the
value in the
SW 1
Setpoint field
is reached).
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet/Tab

appears as a list labeled Activate Calibration
Switch 1 and contains the
Setup tab on
the Discrete
Calibration
Increase
Template
Setup
Decrease
datasheet.
This field is enabled only when a
value exists in the Calibration
Strategy field.

Character The direction appears as a list labeled Activate Calibration
in which the Switch 2 and contains the
Setup tab on
input value
the Discrete

will be
travelling
Increase
when switch
Decrease
2 changes
states (i.e.,
This field is enabled only when
when the
the value in the Calibration
value in the Strategy field is Double Switch.
SW 2
Setpoint field
is reached).
Asset Key
Calibration
Strategy
Number The Entity

Key of the
Equipment
record to
which the
Calibration
Template
record is
linked. This
field is used
by the
Meridium
APM system
and should
not be
modified.
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.

None
datasheet by default. This value is
used to execute the Instrument
Data query that is specified on the
Calibration Administration page,
so that equipment data can be
Template record.

Character The strategy appears as a list labeled
Calibration
Calibration Strategy and contains Setup tab on
for the
discrete
the Discrete
calibration.
Calibration
Single Switch: Specifies Template
that you are inspecting a Setup
single switch. When you datasheet.
select this value, the SW 1
Setpoint field is required.
Double Switch: Specifies
that you are inspecting a
double switch. When you
select this value, the SW 1
Setpoint and SW 2
Setpoint fields are
required.

Calibration
Task ID

Calibration
Task record
that is linked
to the
Equipment
record to
which the
Calibration
Template
record is
linked.

appears as a list which contains
the IDs of the Calibration Task
record that are linked to the
linked. You can select the desired
Calibration Task record from the
list. If the Equipment record is
not linked to a Calibration Task
record, this list will be empty.

appears as a text box labeled Low
Lower Range
representing and is grouped with the following
the lower
for the
custom input
Custom Input Upper
range.
Range
Custom Input Range
UOM
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Discrete
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.
Automated
Calibration
Parameters tab
on the
Discrete
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.

Custom Input Character The UOM for appears as a list labeled UOM and Automated
Range UOM
the custom
Calibration
input range. other fields under the label
Parameters tab
on the
Discrete
Custom Input Lower
Calibration
Template
Range
Setup
Custom Input Upper
datasheet.
Range
Upper Range

the upper
range value
for the
Custom Input Lower
custom input
Range
range.
Custom Input Range
UOM
Parameters tab
on the
Discrete
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.

Enable
Automated
Calibrations
Engineering
Units Error
Limit
Logical
Indicates
whether or
not you want
to use this
template with
automated
calibrations.

Calibration
Setup tab on
Enable Automated Calibrations the Discrete
and is cleared by default. If you Calibration
want to use this template with
Template
automated calibrations, select the Setup
Enable Automated Calibrations datasheet.
check box. When this check box
is selected, the fields on the
Automated Calibration
Parameters tab are enabled and
the data in this record will be
available to send to a device.
Number A number
Calibration
representing Engineering Units Error Limit. Setup tab on
the maximum The state of this field is
the Discrete
dependent upon the stat of other Calibration
amount of
fields. Specifically, if the:
error in
Template
engineering
Setup
units that is
Error Assessment field in datasheet.
allowed
the Calibration Setup
before a
Defaults record contains
calibration
the value Engineering
event is
Units, this field populated
considered
failed.
default value from the
record.
Error Assessment field in
the value Percent of
Range, this field is

automatically based on the
values in the Primary
Input Range and the Error
Limit fields, using the
following calculation:
(<Max Error Limit>/100)
x (<URV> - <LRV>)
...where:
<Max Error Limit> is the

value in the Max Error
Limit field.
<URV> is the value in the
field.
<LRV> is the value in the
field.
You can modify the default value

if desired. This field accepts
numeric values between 0 and
100. This field is required.
Input
Damping
Setting
Character Indicates
whether this
setting should
be on or off.
Input Min
Max Mode
Character Indicates
whether this
setting should
be on or off.
The value stored in this field is

the value that will be sent to the
device. If you modify this value,
the value in the Max Error Limit
(PCT) field will be updated
automatically.
Automated
On
Calibration
Parameters
datasheet.
Off
Automated
On
Calibration
Parameters
datasheet.
Off
Input Type
Linear TC
LRV
Character The input

type for the
discrete
calibration.

appears as a list labeled Input
Type and contains the input types
that are stored in the
MI_CALIBRATION_IO_TYPES
choose from the following input
types:
Pressure
Temperature
Flow
Level
Voltage
Current
Frequency
Resistance
Other
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Discrete
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.

Number A number
Automated
representing Linear TC LRV. This field is
Calibration
enabled only when the TC Linear Parameters tab
the lower
value on the check box is selected. This field is on the
linear
Discrete
thermocouple values from the following fields Calibration
based on the value that exists in Template
range.
the Output Type field and Input Setup
Type field:
datasheet.

Type field is not
Temperature.
Linear TC
URV
LRV is the value in the

Temperature.
Number A number
Automated
representing Linear TC URV. This field is
Calibration
upper value enabled only when the TC Linear Parameters tab
on the linear check box is selected. This field is on the
thermocouple populated automatically with
Discrete
values from the following fields Calibration
range.
based on the value that exists in Template
the Output Type field:
Setup
datasheet.
Type field is not
Temperature.
URV if the value in the
Temperature.
Indicates
whether you appears as a check box labeled
Automated
will manually Enable Automated Calibrations Calibration
enter the
and is cleared by default.
Parameters tab
input value Selecting this check box indicates on the
into the
that you will manually enter the Discrete
device during input value into the device during Calibration
the automated the automated calibration.
Template
calibration.
Setup
The state of this field is
datasheet.
is:
Manual
Logical
Entered Input
Values

Enable Automated
Calibrations check box is
selected.
Selected and disabled

automatically when the
Max Error
Limit
Custom Input Values

appears as a text box Max Error Calibration
Number A number
representing Limit and includes an additional Setup tab on
label PCT to the right.
maximum
the Discrete
amount of
Calibration
error in
This state of this field is
Template
percent that is dependent upon the state of other Setup
allowed
fields. Specifically, if the:
datasheet.
before a
calibration
event is
considered
failed.
the value Engineering
Units, this field is disabled
and populated
automatically based on the
values in the Primary
Input Range fields, using
the following calculation:
(<Engineering Units Error
Limit>/100) x (<URV> <LRV>)
...where:
<Engineering
Units Error Limit
is the value in the
Engineering Units
Error Limit field.
<URV> is the
value in the
Primary Input
Range URV field.
<LRV> is the
value in the
Primary Input
Range LRV field.

the value Percent of
Range, this field is
with a default value from
Defaults record.
This value is used in the
Calibration Event record to
calculate whether the calibration
event is failed or passed.
You can modify the default value
if desired. This field accepts
numeric values between 0 and 10.
If you modify this value, the
value in the Engineering Units
Error Limit field will be updated
automatically.
Output
Damping
Setting
Character Indicates
whether this
setting should
be on or off.

On
Off
appears as a list labeled Output
Type and contains the list of
output types that are stored in the
choose from the following output
types:
Output Type Character The output

type for the
discrete
calibration.
Trip Cont: The output will

be resistance, measured in
ohms.
Trip DCV: The output will
be power, measured in DC
volts.
Auxiliary
Automated
Calibration
Parameters
datasheet.
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Discrete
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.
Primary
Input LRV
Trip ACV: The output will

be power, measured in AC
volts.

Number A number
the lower
the Discrete
range value Primary Input Range:
Calibration
for the
Template
primary input
Primary Input URV
Setup
range.
datasheet.
Primary Input Range
Units
Input LRV field combined with
Input URV field define the
calibration.
Primary
Input Range
Units

Setup tab on
input.
the Discrete
Calibration
Template
Primary Input LRV
Setup
datasheet.
Primary Input URV
in the Input Type field. This
type will appear in the list. After
you select a value in this list, the
Meridium APM system checks to
see if the UOM is compatible
with the Fluke device. If the
selected values is not compatible,
an error message will appear,
indicating the problem.
Primary
Input URV
Number A number
representing
the upper
range value
for the
primary input
range.

URV and is grouped with the
label Primary Input Range:
Primary Input LRV
Primary Input Range

Units
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Discrete
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.

Input URV field combined with
Input LRV field define the
calibration.
Primary
Output LRV

Number A number
the lower
the Discrete
range value Primary Output Range:
Calibration
for the
Template
primary
Primary Output URV
Setup
output range.
datasheet.
Units
Output LRV field combined with
Output URV field define the
primary output range for the
calibration.

Primary
Output Range
Setup tab on
other
fields
under
the
label
Units
input.
the Discrete
Calibration
Template
Primary Output LRV
Setup
datasheet.
Primary
Output URV
Primary Output URV

in the Output Type field. This
that are relevant for that output
type will appear in the list. After
you select a value in this list, the
Meridium APM system checks to
see if the UOM is compatible
with the Fluke device. If the
selected values is not compatible,
an error message will appear,
indicating the problem.
Number A number
the upper
range value label Primary Output Range:
for the
primary
Primary Output LRV
output range.
Units
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Discrete
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.

Output URV field combined with
Output LRV field define the
primary ouput range for the
calibration.
appears as a list labeled RTD
RTD Wiring Character The RTD
Wiring Configuration and is
Configuration
wiring
configuration populated automatically if...
associated
with the
The Enable Automated
calibration.
Calibrations check box is
selected.
Automated
Calibration
Parameters tab
on the
Discrete
Calibration
Template
Setup
The Temperature Element datasheet.
Type field contains an
value that is an RTD type
Specified
Maximum
Dead Band
Switch 1
(i.e., the value ends in

RTD).
Number A number
Calibration
representing Maximum Dead Band and is
Setup tab on
grouped with the following fields: the Discrete
the upper
value on the
Calibration
dead band
Specified Minimum Dead Template
range,* where
Setup
Band Switch 1
the value in
datasheet.
Validate Deadband
the SW 1
Setpoint field This field is populated
is the
automatically using the following
reference
calculation: <Set point> x
point on that <Default Max Deadband>
range. The
maximum
...where:
dead band
value
<Set point> is the value in
represent the
the SW 1 Setpoint field.
amount of
<Default Max Deadband>
allowable
is the default value in the
error above
Discrete Max Deadband
the value in
field in the Calibration
the setpoint
Setup Defaults record.
value that can
occur for a
For example, if the value in the
calibration to SW 1 Setpoint field is 80, by
be considered default, and the value in the
passed.
Discrete Max Deadband field in
the Calibration Setup Defaults
record is 10%, the Maximum
Dead Band field will contain the
value 8, which indicates that the
calibration can still be considered
passed if the output value is
higher than 80 by a value of 8. In
other words, if the output value is
89, the calibration will be
considered failed. If the output
value is 88, the calibration will be
considered passed.
The Meridium APM system will
include the dead band values in
the pass/fail validation process

only if the Validate Deadband
check box is selected on the
Discrete Calibration Template
Setup datasheet. If this check box
is not selected, only the values in
the Max Error Limit and SW 1
Setpoint fields will be used to
determine whether a calibration is
passed or failed.
dependent upon other fields.
Specifically, if the Calibration
Strategy field contains the value
Single Switch or Double Switch,
this field is enabled. Otherwise,
this field is disabled.
Specified
Maximum
Dead Band
Switch 2

desired.
Number A number
representing Maximum Dead Band and is
grouped with the following fields:
the upper
value on the
dead band
Specified Minimum Dead
range,* where
Band Switch 2
the value in
Validate Deadband
the SW 2
Setpoint field This field is populated
is the
reference
point on that <Default Max Deadband>
range. The
maximum
...where:
dead band
value
represent the
amount of
<Default Max Deadband>
allowable
is the default value in the
error above
Discrete Max Deadband
the value in
the setpoint
Setup Defaults record.
value that can
occur for a
calibration to
be considered
passed.

SW 2 Setpoint field is 80, by
default, and the value in the
Discrete Max Deadband field in
record is 10%, the Maximum
Dead Band field will contain the
value 8, which indicates that the
passed if the output value is
higher than 80 by a value of 8. In
other words, if the output value is
89, the calibration will be
considered failed. If the output
value is 88, the calibration will be
considered passed.
passed or failed.
Double Switch, this field is
enabled. Otherwise, this field is
disabled.
Specified
Minimum
Dead Band
Switch 1

Number A number
Calibration
representing Minimum Dead Band and is
Setup tab on
grouped with the following fields: the Discrete
the lower
range value
Calibration
on the dead
Specified Maximum Dead Template
band range*,
where the
value in the
SW 1
Setpoint field
is the
reference
point on that
range. The
minimum
dead band
value
represents the
amount of
allowable
error below
the value in
the setpoint
value that can
occur for the
calibration
can be
considered
passed.
Band Switch 1
Validate Deadband

<Default Min Deadband>
...where:

is the value in the Discrete
Min Deadband field in the
record.

SW 1 Setpoint field is 80, by
Discrete Min Deadband field in
record is 1%, the Minimum Dead
Band field will contain the value .
8, which indicates that the
passed if the measurement is
lower than 80 by a value of .8. In
other words, if the measurement
is 78.9, the calibration will be
considered failed. If the
measurement is 79.2, the
calibration will be considered
passed.
Setup
datasheet.

passed or failed.
Single Switch or Double Switch,
this field is enabled. Otherwise,
Specified
Minimum
Dead Band
Switch 2

desired.
Calibration
Setup tab on
Number A number
the Discrete
representing Minimum Dead Band and is
grouped with the following fields: Calibration
the lower
Template
range value
on the dead
Specified Maximum Dead Setup
datasheet.
band range1,
Band Switch 2
where the
Validate Deadband
value in the
SW 2
Setpoint field automatically using the following
is the
reference
point on that
range. The
...where:
minimum
dead band
value
represents the
amount of
is the value in the Discrete
allowable
Min Deadband field in the
error below
the value in
record.
the setpoint
value that can For example, if the value in the
occur for the SW 2 Setpoint field is 80, by
calibration
can be
Discrete Min Deadband field in
considered
passed.
record is 1%, the Minimum Dead
Band field will contain the value .
8, which indicates that the

passed if the measurement is
lower than 80 by a value of .8. In
other words, if the measurement
is 78.9, the calibration will be
considered failed. If the
measurement is 79.2, the
calibration will be considered
passed.
passed or failed.
Double Switch, this field is
enabled. Otherwise, this field is
disabled.
desired.
SW 1 Contact Character The contact appears as a list labeled SW 1
Contact State and contains the
State
position in
which switch following baseline values:
1 will appear
before it
Normally Open (0)
changes states
Normally Closed (1)
(i.e., when the
value in the This field is enabled only when a
SW 1
value exists in the Calibration
Setpoint field Strategy field.
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Discrete
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.
is reached).
SW 1 Setpoint Number A number
representing appears as a text box. You can
the output
enter your own value in the SW 1
value where Setpoint cell. This field is
you want
required.
switch 1 to
trip.
The contact On the datasheet, this field
appears as a list labeled SW 2
SW 2 Contact Character position in
which switch Contact State and contains the
State
1 will appear following baseline values:
before it
changes states
Normally Open (0)
(i.e., when the
Normally Closed (1)
value in the
SW 2
This field is enabled only when
Setpoint field the value in the Calibration
is reached). Strategy field is Double Switch.
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Discrete
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Discrete
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.

appears as a text box. You can
SW 2 Setpoint Number A number
Calibration
representing enter your own value in the SW 2 Setup tab on
Setpoint cell.
the output
the Discrete
value where
Calibration
you want
When the Calibration Strategy
Template
switch 2 to
field contains the value Double Setup
trip.
Switch, this field is required.
datasheet.
Otherwise, this field is disabled.
Tag
Description
Character The
description of
the piece of
equipment,
which is
represented
by the
Equipment
record to
which the
Calibration
Template
record is

Description. This field is
value stored in the Equipment ID
field in the Equipment record to
which the Calibration Template
record is linked.
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Discrete
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.
linked.
Template
State
TC Linear
Validate
Deadband

Character The state of appears as a list labeled Template
State and contains the following
the
Calibration values:
Template
record. By
Development
default, this
Approved
field contains
the value
Obsolete
Development.
Logical
Logical
Indicates
whether you
want to
provide a
value in the
Linear TC
LRV and
Linear TC
URV fields.
Indicates
whether or
not you want
the Meridium
APM system
to include the
dead band
range values
in the
pass/fail
validation
process.

TC Linear. This check box is
cleared by default and enabled
only if the Temperature Element
Type field contains a
Thermocouple value (i.e., the
value ends in Thermocouple).
Calibration
Setup tab on
the Discrete
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.
Automated
Calibration
Parameters tab
on the
Discrete
Calibration
Template
Setup
datasheet.

Calibration
Validate Deadband and is grouped Setup tab on
with the following fields:
the Discrete
Calibration
Specified Maximum Dead Template
Setup
Band Switch 1
Specified Minimum Dead datasheet.
Band Switch 1
Specified Minimum Dead

Band Switch 2
Specified Maximum Dead

Band Switch 2
Selecting this check box indicates

that you want the Meridium APM
system to include the dead band
range values in the pass/fail
validation process. When this
check box is cleared, the
Meridium APM system will use
ONLY the values in the Max

Error Limit and SW 1 Setpoint or
SW 2 Setpoint fields in the
pass/fail validation process.
1. The dead band range specifies the allowable amount of variation from the setpoint
value (stored in the SW 1 Setpoint or SW 2 Setpoint fields) that can occur before a
calibration is considered failed. The dead band range includes a maximum value (stored
in the Maxmimum Dead Band field) and a minimum value (stored in the Minimum Dead
Band field).
Calibration Template, Weight Scale

Calibration Template, Weight Scale records store details on the weight scale calibration
that should be performed for a specific piece of equipment. The following table provides
an alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist for the Calibration Template,
Weight Scale family and appear on the Calibration Weight Scale Template Setup
datasheet. The information in the table reflects the baseline state and behavior of these
Field Name
Asset Key
Calibration
Strategy
Data
Type
Description
The Entity Key of

the Equipment
record to which the
Calibration
Template record is
Number
linked. This field is
used by the
Meridium APM
system and should
not be modified.
Behavior and Usage
This field does not appear on a datasheet

by default. This value is used to execute
the Instrument Data query that is specified
on the Calibration Administration page, so
that equipment data can be populated in
the Calibration Template record.

Character The strategy for the labeled Calibration Strategy and contains
weight scale
calibration.
2 Up
2 Down
2 Up then 2 Down
3 Up
3 Down
3 Up then 3 Down
5 Up
5 Down
5 Up then 5 Down
5 Up then 1 Down
11 Up
11 Down
11 Up then 11 Down

Calibration
Task ID
Input Type

The ID of the
which contains the IDs of the Calibration
Calibration Task
Task record that are linked to the
record that is linked
Equipment record to which the Calibration
to the Equipment
Character
Template record is linked. You can select
record to which the
the desired Calibration Task record from
Calibration
the list. If the Equipment record is not
Template record is
linked to a Calibration Task record, this
linked.
list will be empty.
Character The input type for labeled Input Type and contains the input
the weight scale
MI_CALIBRATION_IO_TYPES System
calibration.
following input types:
Weight
Voltage
Current
Other

labeled Output Type and contains the list
of output types that are stored in the
following output types:
Output Type
The output type for

Character the weight scale
calibration.
Pressure
Temperature
Flow
Level
Weight
Voltage
Current
Frequency
Resistance
Other

Manufacturer
Max Error
Limit
The manufacturer
of the piece of
equipment, which
is represented by
Character the Equipment
record to which the
Calibration
Template record is
linked.

text box labeled Manufacturer and is
populated automatically with the value
stored in the Manufacturer field in the
Template record is linked.

represents the
text box Max Error Limit and includes an
maximum amount additional label PCT to the right. This field
of error in percent
that is allowed
before a calibration
event is considered
failed.
Model
Number
The model number

of the piece of
equipment, which
is represented by
record to which the
Calibration
Template record is
linked.
is populated automatically with the value

specified in the Weight Scale Error Limit
field in the Calibration Setup Defaults
record. You can modify this value if
desired. This field accepts numeric values
between 0 and 10.

text box labeled Model Number and is
stored in the Model Number field in the
text box labeled LRV and is grouped with
the following other fields under the label
Primary Input
LRV
Primary Input URV

A number
representing the
Primary Input Range Units
Number lower range value
for the primary
The value stored in the Primary Input LRV
input range.
field combined with the value stored in the
Primary Input URV field define the
primary input range for the calibration.
Primary Input Character The UOM for the

Range Units
primary input.

labeled UOM and is grouped with the
following other fields under the label
Primary Input LRV

Primary Input URV
This list contains a list of UOMs that is

filtered based on the value in the Input
Type field. This means that only the UOM
values that are relevant for that input type
will appear in the list. After you select a
value in this list, the Meridium APM
system checks to see if the UOM is

compatible with the Fluke device. If the
selected values is not compatible, an error
message will appear, indicating the
problem.
text box labeled URV and is grouped with
Primary Input
URV
Primary Input LRV

A number
representing the
Number upper range value
for the primary
The value stored in the Primary Input URV
input range.
Primary Input LRV field define the

Primary
Output LRV
Primary Output URV
A number
Primary Output Range Units
representing the
for the primary
The value stored in the Primary Output
output range.
LRV field combined with the value stored
in the Primary Output URV field define
the primary output range for the
calibration.
Primary
Character The UOM for the
Output Range
primary input.
Units

Primary Output LRV

Primary Output URV
filtered based on the value in the Output

values that are relevant for that output type
problem.
Primary
Output URV
Primary Output LRV

A number
representing the
Number upper range value
for the primary
output range.
URV field combined with the value stored
in the Primary Output LRV field define the
primary ouput range for the calibration.

Refresh
Equipment
Data
Indicates whether
or not information
in the Equipment
record that is linked This field does not appear on a datasheet
to the Calibration by default. This value tells the Asset Key
Template record
field to execute the Instrument Data query
Logical
has been updated. so that the equipment data in the
This field is used Calibration Template record is updated or
by the Meridium not.
APM system and
should not be
modified.
Serial
Number
Character The serial number

of the piece of
equipment, which
is represented by
the Equipment
record to which the

text box labeled Serial Number and is
stored in the Serial Number field in the
Calibration
Template record is
linked.
Tag
Description
The description of
the piece of
equipment, which
is represented by
record to which the
Calibration
Template record is
linked.
Tag Name
The ID of the
Equipment record
to which the
Character
Calibration
Template record is
linked.
Template
State
The state of the

Calibration
Template record.
Character By default, this
field contains the
value
Development.

text box labeled Tag Description. This
field is populated automatically with the
value stored in the Equipment ID field in
the Equipment record to which the
Calibration Template record is linked.

text box labeled Tag Name. This field is
populated automatically with the value in
the Equipment field in the Equipment
record to which the Calibration Template
record is linked.
labeled Template State and contains the
following values:
Development
Approved
Obsolete
Calibration Template, Multi-Component

Analyzer
Calibration Template, Analyzer Multi-Component records store details on the multicomponent analyzer calibration that should be performed for a specific piece of
equipment. The following table provides an alphabetical list and description of the fields
that exist for the Calibration Template, Multi-Component Analyzer family. The
not comprehensive.
Field Name
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet/Tab
Asset Key
The Entity Key of

This field does not appear
the Equipment
on a datasheet by default.
record to which
This value is used to
the Calibration
execute the Instrument
Template record
Data query that is specified
Number is linked. This
None
on the Calibration
field is used by
Administration page, so
the Meridium
that equipment data can be
APM system and
should not be
Template record.
modified.
Calibration
Task ID

appears as a list which
Calibration
contains the IDs of the
Setup section on
The ID of the
Calibration Task record that
the MultiCalibration Task are linked to the Equipment
Component
record that is
record to which the
Analyzer Setup
linked to the
and MultiCharacter Equipment record record is linked. You can
Component
to which the
select the desired
Analyzer
Calibration
Calibration Task record
datasheets.
Template record from the list. If the
is linked.
Equipment record is not
linked to a Calibration Task
record, this list will be
empty.
Manufacturer
The manufacturer
of the piece of
equipment, which
is represented by
record to which
the Calibration
Template record
is linked.
Max Error
Number A number
On the datasheet, this field Calibration

Setup section on
labeled Manufacturer and is the Multipopulated automatically
Component
with the value stored in the Analyzer Setup
Manufacturer field in the and MultiEquipment record to which Component
the Calibration Template Analyzer
record is linked.
datasheets.
appears as a text box Max Calibration
Error Limit and includes an

additional label PCT to the
right.
Limit
representing the
maximum amount
of error in percent
value specified in the
that is allowed
Weight Scale Error Limit
before a
calibration event
Setup Defaults record. You
is considered
failed.
desired. This field accepts
numeric values between 0
and 10.
Setup section
on the MultiComponent
Analyzer Setup
and MultiComponent
Analyzer
datasheets.
Model
Number
The model
number of the
piece of
equipment, which
is represented by
Character
the Equipment
record to which
the Calibration
Template record
is linked.
Refresh
Equipment
Data
Indicates whether
or not information
in the Equipment
This field does not appear
record that is
on a datasheet by default.
linked to the
This value tells the Asset
Calibration
Key field to execute the
Logical Template record
None
Instrument Data query so
has been updated.
that the equipment data in
This field is used
the Calibration Template
by the Meridium
record is updated or not.
APM system and
should not be
modified.
Serial
Number
Character The serial number On the datasheet, this field

of the piece of
equipment, which labeled Serial Number and
is represented by is populated automatically
the Equipment
with the value stored in the
record to which Serial Number field in the

labeled Model Number and
with the value stored in the
Model Number field in the
Equipment record to which
record is linked.
Calibration
Setup section on
the MultiComponent
Analyzer Setup
and MultiComponent
Analyzer
datasheets.
Calibration
Setup section on
the MultiComponent
Analyzer Setup
and Multi-
the Calibration
Template record
is linked.
Equipment record to which Component

the Calibration Template Analyzer
record is linked.
datasheets.
Tag Name

The ID of the
labeled Tag Name. This
Equipment record field is populated
to which the
Character
Calibration
value in the Equipment
Template record field in the Equipment
is linked.
record to which the
record is linked.
Calibration
Setup section on
the MultiComponent
Analyzer Setup
and MultiComponent
Analyzer
datasheets.
Tag
Description

The description of
the piece of
labeled Tag Description.
equipment, which
is represented by
value stored in the
record to which
the Calibration
Equipment record to which
Template record
is linked.
record is linked.
Calibration
Setup section on
the MultiComponent
Analyzer Setup
and MultiComponent
Analyzer
datasheets.
Template ID
Calibration
Setup section on
On the datasheet, this field the Multiappears as a text box. You Component
The ID for the
Character
can enter your own value in Analyzer Setup
record.
the Template ID cell. This and Multifield is required.
Component
Analyzer
datasheets.
Character The state of the appears as a list labeled
Calibration
Template State and
Calibration
Setup section on
Template record. contains the following
the MultiBy default, this values:
Component
field contains the
Analyzer Setup
value
Development
and MultiDevelopment.
Component
Approved
Analyzer
datasheets.
Template
State
Obsolete
You can select a value in

this list.
Calibration Template, Single

Component Analyzer
Calibration Template, Analyzer Single Component records store details on the single
component analyzer calibration that should be performed for a specific piece of
equipment. The following table provides an alphabetical list and description of the fields
that exist for the Calibration Template, Single Component Analyzer family and appear
both the Single Component Analyzer and Single Component Analyzer Setup datasheets
with a few exceptions. The information in the table reflects the baseline state and
Field Name
Asset Key
Calibration
Strategy
Data
Type
Description
The Entity Key of

the Equipment
record to which the
Calibration
Template record is
Number
linked. This field is
used by the
Meridium APM
system and should
not be modified.
Behavior and Usage

by default. This value is used to execute
the Instrument Data query that is specified
on the Calibration Administration page, so
that equipment data can be populated in
the Calibration Template record.
On the datasheet, this field appears a list

Character The strategy for the labeled Calibration Strategy and contains
the following strategies:
analyzer single
component
calibration.
2 Up
2 Down
2 Up then 2 Down
3 Up
3 Down
3 Up then 3 Down
5 Up
5 Down
5 Up then 5 Down
5 Up then 1 Down
11 Up
11 Down
11 Up then 11 Down
Calibration
Task ID
Input Type
The ID of the
Calibration Task
record that is
linked to the
Character Equipment record
to which the
Calibration
Template record is
linked.

which contains the IDs of the Calibration
Task record that are linked to the
Template record is linked. You can select
the desired Calibration Task record from
the list. If the Equipment record is not
linked to a Calibration Task record, this list
will be empty.
Character The input type for labeled Input Type and contains the input
the analyzer single types that are stored in the
component
calibration.
following input types:
Analyzer
Current
Resistance
Voltage
Other

The manufacturer
of the piece of
equipment, which
is represented by
Manufacturer Character the Equipment
record to which the
Calibration
Template record is
linked.

text box labeled Manufacturer and is
stored in the Manufacturer field in the
Max Error
Limit

text box Max Error Limit and includes an
The maximum
additional label PCT to the right. This
amount of error
that is allowed in
Number
value specified in the SC Analyzer Error
percent before a
Limit field in the Calibration Setup
calibration event is
Defaults record. You can modify this value
considered failed.
if desired. This field accepts numeric
values between 0 and 10.
Model
Number
The model number

of the piece of
equipment, which
is represented by
record to which the
Calibration
Template record is
linked.

text box labeled Model Number and is
stored in the Model Number field in the

Output Type Character The output type for labeled Output Type and contains the list
the analyzer single of output types that are stored in the
component
calibration.
following output types:
Analyzer
Current
Resistance
Voltage
Other

Primary Input URV
A number
representing the
Primary Input
LRV
for the primary
The value stored in the Primary Input LRV
input range.
Primary Input URV field define the

Primary Input LRV

Primary Input URV

filtered based on the value in the Input
values that are relevant for that input type
problem.
Primary Input Number A number
URV
representing the
upper range value Primary Input Range:
for the primary
input range.
Primary Input LRV
Primary Input
The UOM for the
Character
Range Units
primary input.
The value stored in the Primary Input URV

Primary Input LRV field define the
Primary Output URV
A number
representing the
Primary
Output LRV
for the primary
output range.
LRV field combined with the value stored
in the Primary Output URV field define the
primary output range for the calibration.

Primary
The UOM for the
Output Range Character
primary input.
Units
Primary
Number A number
Output URV
representing the
Primary Output LRV

Primary Output URV

filtered based on the value in the Output
values that are relevant for that output type
problem.
Primary Output LRV
upper range value

for the primary
output range.
URV field combined with the value stored
in the Primary Output LRV field define the
primary ouput range for the calibration.
Refresh
Equipment
Data
Indicates whether
or not information
in the Equipment
record that is
linked to the
Calibration
Logical Template record
has been updated.
This field is used
by the Meridium
APM system and
should not be
modified.

by default. This value tells the Asset Key
field to execute the Instrument Data query
so that the equipment data in the
Calibration Template record is updated or
not.
Serial
Number
The serial number

of the piece of
equipment, which
is represented by
record to which the
Calibration
Template record is
linked.

text box labeled Serial Number and is
stored in the Serial Number field in the
Tag
Description
The description of
the piece of
equipment, which
is represented by
record to which the
Calibration
Template record is
linked.

text box labeled Tag Description. This
value stored in the Equipment ID field in
the Equipment record to which the
Tag Name
The ID of the
Equipment record
to which the
Character
Calibration
Template record is
linked.
Template
State
The state of the

Calibration
Template record.
Character
By default, this
field contains the
value Development.

text box labeled Tag Name. This field is
populated automatically with the value in
the Equipment field in the Equipment
record to which the Calibration Template
record is linked.
labeled Template State and contains the
following values:
Development
Approved
Obsolete
Calibration Template, Functional Test

Calibration Template, Functional Test records store information about a functional test
that should be performed on a piece of equipment. The following table provides an
alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist for the Calibration Template,
Functional Test family and appear on both the Functional Test and Functional Test Setup
datasheets by default. The information in the table reflects the baseline state and behavior
of these fields.
Field Name
Calibration
Task ID
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage

Calibration Task ID, which contains the
IDs of all the Calibration Task records
The ID of the
that are linked to the Equipment record
to which the Calibration Template
record is linked. You can select a
Character Equipment record to
Calibration Task record from the list.
which the Calibration
Template record is
If the Equipment record is not linked to
linked.
any Calibration Task records, this list
will be empty.
Enable
Automated
Calibrations
Indicates whether or
not you want to use
Logical
this template with
automated calibrations.
This field appears as a check box

labeled Enable Automated Calibrations
and is cleared by default. If you want to
use this template with automated
calibrations, select the Enable
Automated Calibrations check box.
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of
the piece of equipment
(represented by the
Template record is
linked).
This field appears as a text box labeled

Manufacturer and is populated
the Manufacturer field in the
Model
Number
The model number of

(represented by the
Template record is
linked).

Model Number and is populated
the Model Number field in the
Serial Number
The serial number of

(represented by the
Template record is
linked).

Serial Number and is populated
the Serial Number field in the
Tag
Description
The description of the

piece of equipment
(represented by the
Template record is
linked).

Tag Description. This field is populated
the Equipment Short Description field
in the Equipment record to which the
The ID of the
Equipment record to
Character which the calibration
Template record is
linked.

Tag Name. This field is populated
Equipment field in the Equipment
record to which the Calibration
Tag Name

Template ID. This field is required and
appropriate value, depending on the
state of the Enable Automated
Calibrations check box:
Template ID
Character
The ID of the
Calibration record.
If the check box is selected, this

field will be populated
automatically <Tag Name>,
Automated, Functional Test_01.
If the check box is cleared, this
automatically with <Tag
Name>, Manual, Functional
Test_01.
...where <Tag Name> is the value

stored in the Tag Name field. Note that
the value 01 will increase incrementally
by one each time a new Calibration
Template, Functional Test record is
created (i.e., 01, 02, 03, and so on).
Template State and contains the
following values:
Template State
The state of the
Character record. By default, this
Development.
Development
Approved
Obsolete
Calibration Template Detail, Functional

Test
Calibration Template Detail, Functional Test records store details about a functional test
that should be performed on a piece of equipment. The following table provides an
alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist for the Calibration Template
Detail, Functional Test family and appear on the Functional Test Setup datasheet by
default. The information in the table reflects the baseline state and behavior of these
fields.
Field
Name
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
Condition
1
A possible answer to
an instruction that has
the response type list.
Character You can define up to
10 conditions (i.e.,
options) for each list
response type.
This field is enabled only if the value stored

in the Response Type field is List. In this
case, you can type a value directly into the
Condition 1 cell.
Condition
2
response type.

Condition 2 cell.
Condition
3
response type.

Condition 3 cell.
Condition
4
response type.

Condition 4 cell.
Condition Character A possible answer to

5
You can define up to

Condition 5 cell.
response type.
Condition
6
response type.

Condition 6 cell.
Condition
7
response type.

Condition 7 cell.
Condition
8
response type.

Condition 8 cell.
Condition
9
response type.

Condition 9 cell.
Condition
10
response type.

Condition 10 cell.
Instruction Text
The step you are

You can type a value directly into the
performing during the Instruction cell. Alternatively, you can click
functional test (e.g.,
Response
Type
Describe the condition

the
button to type a value into the Text
of the wires).
Editor.
This value appears as a list labeled
Response Type, from which you can select
one of the following values:
The type of answer

you should give to the
Character
question defined in the
Instruction field.
Sequence
Number

which the step
identified in the
Number
Instruction field
should be executed in
relation to the other
steps.
Yes/No: The response will be either

Yes or No.
Number: The response will be a
numeric value.
Text: The response will be a text

value.
Selection: The response will be one

or more of the options provided in
the Condition fields.
This field appears as a list labeled Sequence

Number and contains numeric values 1
through 25. We recommend that you select
values in sequential order (e.g., select the
value 1 in the first record, select the value 2
in the second record), but if you do not,
when you save the records, they will be
sorted automatically according to the values
stored in the Sequence Number fields. This
field is required.
Calibration, Analog
Calibration, Analog records store information for linear or square root calibrations that
have a single input signal, a primary output, and an optional secondary output. The
Calibration, Analog family. The information in this table reflects the baseline state and
behavior of these fields. Unless the information indicates otherwise, the behavior and
usage for these fields is the same for both manual and automated calibrations. This list is
not comprehensive.
Field
Data
Type
Description
Asset ID

Equipment
record that is
linked to the
Calibration,
Analog record.
Asset Short
Description
Character A description
of the
equipment
represented by
the Equipment
record that is
linked to the
Calibration,
Analog record.
Asset Type

equipment
represented by
the Equipment
record that is
linked to the
Calibration,
Analog record.
Calibration
Character The name and
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet/Tab
The
On the datasheet, this Identification/Details
field appears as a text tab on the following
box labeled Equipment datasheets:
ID, which is disabled
and populated
Calibration,
Analog
value stored in the
Calibration,
Equipment ID field in
Analog MDF
the Equipment record
to which the
Calibration,
Calibration, Analog
Analog SAP
record is linked.
Integration
The
Short Description,
which is disabled and
Calibration,
populated
Analog
Calibration,
value stored in the
Analog MDF
Equipment Short
Description field in the
Calibration,
Equipment record to
Analog SAP
which the Calibration,
Integration
Analog record is
linked.
The
Type, which is disabled
and populated
Calibration,
Analog
value stored in the
Calibration,
Object Type field in the
Analog MDF
Equipment record to
Calibration,
Analog record is
Analog SAP
linked.
Integration
The
Approval By
Calibration
Closed
User ID of the
user who
approved the
calibration.
Logical
Indicates
whether or not
the calibration
even is closed.
By default, this
field contains
the value
False.
tab on the following

field appears as a list datasheets:
labeled Calibration
Approval By and
Calibration,
contains a list of user
Analog
names. You can select
Calibration,
the desired user from
Analog MDF
the list.
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
On the datasheet, this The
field appears as a check Identification/Details
box labeled Calibration tab on the following
Close. The state of this datasheets:
check box affects the
state of other fields in
Calibration,
other records.
Analog
Specifically, if this
Calibration,
check box is selected:
Analog MDF
The date and

time on which
the check box
was selected is
used to populate
the Last Date
field in the
Calibration
Task record
whose Record
ID appears in
the Tasks
Addressed cell.
If your database
has been
configured
correctly, a
Task Execution
record will be
created and
linked to the
Calibration
Event record
and the
Calibration
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
Task record
whose Entity ID
appears in the
Tasks
Addressed cell.
Calibration
Error Limit
The value in the

Date Executed
field in the Task
Execution
record will be
set
automatically to
the date that the
Calibration
Close check
box was
selected.

only for Super Users
and members of the
Calibration
Administrator Security
Group.
On the datasheet, this Calibration Summary
Number A number
indicating the box labeled Calibration datasheets:
Error Limit which
maximum
percentage of appears below the
Calibration,
column labeled % of
acceptable
Analog
error before the Scale.
Calibration,
calibration is
Analog MDF
considered to If the Equipment record
be failed.
to which the
Calibration,
Calibration, Analog
Analog SAP
record is linked is
Integration
linked to a Calibration
Template, Analog
populated
value stored in the Max
Error Limit field of that
Calibration Template,
Analog record.
Otherwise, you can

type a value directly
into the Calibration
Error Limit cell.
Calibration
Strategy
If the value in the

Calibration Type field
is anything other than
Analog-Manual or the
Calibration Close
check box is selected,
Character The number of field appears as a list
test points and labeled Calibration
the direction of Strategy and contains
the input signal the following values:
that will be
recorded for
2 Up
the calibration.
2 Down
2 Up then 2
Down
3 Up
3 Down
3 Up then 3
Down
5 Up
5 Down
5 Up then 5
Down
5 Up then 1
Down
11 Up
11 Down
The
Identification/Details
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analog
Calibration,
Analog MDF
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
Calibration
Task ID
11 Up then 11
Down
You can select this

value from the list. If,
however, the
Equipment record to
Analog record is linked
is linked to a
Analog record, this
field is populated
value in the Calibration
Strategy field of that
Analog record.
Character The ID of the field appears as a list
labeled Calibration
Calibration
Task ID and contains
Task record
that is linked to the list of Calibration
the Equipment Task records that are
record to which linked to the
the Calibration, Equipment record to
Analog record which the Calibration,
Analog record is
is linked.
linked.
from this list, or if the
ID field contains a
record that contains a
reference to a
Calibration Task
record, the Calibration
Task ID field will be
populated
Record ID of that
Calibration Task
record.
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analog
Calibration,
Analog MDF
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
Calibration
Technician
After the Calibration

Task ID field contains
the ID of a Calibration
Task record, the Tasks
Addressed field will be
populated
Entity Key of that
Calibration Task
record.
Character The name of field appears as a list
the person who labeled Calibration
is responsible Technician.
for performing
the calibration. If you performed a
manual calibration or
an automated
calibration using a
Meriam device, this
field is populated
name and User ID of
the user who created
the record.
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analog
Calibration,
Analog MDF
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
If you perform an
automated calibration
using a Fluke or
Beamex device, this
field is populated
automatically from the
device.
Calibration
Number The ID of the
Template Key
Calibration
Template
record that is
linked to the
You can change this

value by clicking in the
cell and selecting the
desired value from the
list.
labeled Calibration
Template ID and
contains the Record
IDs of the Calibration
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Template records that

are linked to the
Equipment
record to which Equipment record to
the Calibration, which the Calibration
Analog record Event record is linked.
is linked.
If only one Calibration
Template record is
linked to the
Equipment record, this
field is populated
Record ID of that
record. If a Calibration
Template is not linked
to the Equipment
record, this field will be
empty.
Calibration
Type

calibration
event.
Analog
Calibration,
Analog MDF
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
After a Calibration
Template record is
specified in this field,
other fields on the
Calibration Event
datasheet will be
populated
automatically with
equipment data from
the specified
record. Additionally,
the Calibration Task ID
and Tasks Addressed
fields are populated
Record ID and Entity
Key of the Calibration
Task record that is
referenced in the
record.
field appears as a text Identification/Details
box labeled Calibration tab on the following
Type and is disabled.
datasheets:
This value is disabled

and populated
automatically with
Analog - Manual.
If, however, the

Equipment record to
Analog record is linked
is linked to a
Analog record, this
field is populated
value stored in the
Calibration Type field
of that Calibration
Template, Analog
record.
Calibration,
Analog
Calibration,
Analog MDF
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
The
Equipment
Character The
Manufacturer
manufacturer field appears as a text tab on the following
of the
box labeled Instrument datasheets:
instrument that Manufacturer, which is
is being
populated
Calibration,
calibrated.
Analog
value stored in the
Calibration,
Manufacturer field in
Analog MDF
to which the
Calibration,
Calibration, Analog
Analog SAP
record is linked. You
Integration
needed.
The
Equipment
Character The model
Model Number
number of the field appears as a text tab on the following
instrument that box labeled Instrument datasheets:
is being
Model Number, which
calibrated.
is populated
Calibration,
Analog
value stored in the
Calibration,
Model Number field in
Analog MDF
to which the
Calibration, Analog
record is linked. You
needed.
Equipment
Serial Number
number of the
instrument that
is being
calibrated.
Event End
Date
Date
The date on
which the
calibration
event was
completed.

box labeled Instrument
Serial Number, which
is populated
value stored in the
Equipment Serial
Number field in the
Equipment record to
Analog record is
linked. You can modify
box labeled Calibration
End Date.
If you perform a
manual calibration or
an automated
calibration using a
Meriam device, this
field is populated
date and time that the
Calibration, Analog
record was created.
If you perform an
automated calibration
using a Fluke or
Beamex device, this
field is populated
data and time that the
calibration was
performed on the
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analog
Calibration,
Analog MDF
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analog
Calibration,
Analog MDF
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
device.
You can modify this
value if needed.
Event Long
Description
Character Additional
comments
about the
calibration
event.
The
box labeled Comments datasheets:
and contains a
Editor.
Calibration,
Analog
Calibration,
Analog MDF
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
The
box labeled Calibration datasheets:
Start Date. By default,
this field is populated
Calibration,
Analog
date and time that the
Calibration,
Calibration, Analog
Analog MDF
record was created. You
Calibration,
needed.
Analog SAP
Integration
field appears as a list Identification/Details
Input
Character The
Characteristic
characteristics labeled Input
Characteristic Curve datasheets:
Curve
of the input
and contains the
signal to the
instrument that following values:
Calibration,
you are
Analog
calibrating.
Linear
Calibration,
Percent
Analog MDF
Event Start
Date
Date
The date on
which the
calibration
event is
initiated.
Square Root
None
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
Maintenance
Type
from the list.

maintenance labeled Maintenance
performed by Type and contains the
this calibration following values:
event. By
default, this
Scheduled
field contains
Repair
the value
Scheduled.
Unscheduled
The
datasheets:
New
Installation
Calibration,
Analog
Calibration,
Analog MDF
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration

from the list.
Off Line
Duration
Overall AF
Error Max
Number A number
representing
the amount of box labeled Off Line
time in hours Duration, in which you
that passed
can enter your own
between the
value.
time the
calibration was
initiated and
the time that it
was completed.

corresponds to
the highest
error value
recorded from
all the as found
values in all
existing
records in the
current family.

populated
automatically. If you
perform an automated
calibration, the
Meridium APM system
calculates the value in
this field based on data
received from the
device. If the calculated
value contains more
than six digits, it will
be rounded.
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analog
Calibration,
Analog MDF
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
Calibration Summary
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analog
Calibration,
Analog MDF
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
Overall AF
Pass/Fail
Overall AL
Error Max
Overall AL
Pass/Fail
Scheduled
Calibration
Date
Calibration Summary
Character A value that
On the datasheet, this tab on the following
datasheets:
indicates
whether the
populated
calibration
automatically. If the
Calibration,
passed or failed value in the Overall AF
Analog
based on
Error Max field is
Calibration,
whether the as greater than the value
Analog MDF
found values stored in the
fall within the Calibration Error Limit
Calibration,
range values field, this value is Fail.
Analog SAP
specified in the Otherwise, this value is
Integration
record.
Pass.
Calibration Summary
Number The highest
datasheets:
error value
recorded for all populated
the As left
automatically. If you
Calibration,
values in all the perform an automated
Analog
existing
calibration, the
Calibration,
records in the Meridium APM system
Analog MDF
Calibration,
calculates the value in
Analog family. this field based on data
Calibration,
received from the
Analog SAP
device. If the calculated
Integration
value contains more
than six digits, it will
be rounded.
Calibration Summary
Character A value that
datasheets:
indicates if the field is disabled and
calibration
populated
passed or failed automatically. If the
Calibration,
based on
value in the Overall AL
Analog
whether the as Error Max field is
Calibration,
left values fall greater than the value
Analog MDF
within the
in the Calibration Error
range values Limit field, this value is
Calibration,
specified in the Fail. Otherwise, this
Analog SAP
Calibration,
value is Pass.
Integration
Analog record.
The
Date
The date on
which the
field appears as a box tab on the following
datasheets:
calibration is labeled Scheduled
scheduled to be Date, where you can
executed.
type or select the

desired date.
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
The Test Equipment
Date
The date on
This field appears as a tab on the following
datasheets:
which the
text box labeled
certification of Calibration Expire and
the test
is populated
Calibration,
equipment
Analog
expires.
value stored in the Next
Calibration,
Certification field in
Analog MDF
the Test Equipment
record that is identified
Calibration,
in the corresponding
Analog SAP
Test Equipment ID No
Integration
field.
This field appears as a The Test Equipment
Character The ID of the text box labeled ID No tab on the following
datasheets:
Test Equipment
record that is and contains the
linked to the button, which you can
Calibration,
use to select a Test
Calibration,
Analog
Analog record. Equipment record.
Calibration,
Analog MDF
If you select a
Test Equipment
Calibration,
record that is
Analog SAP
certified, this
Integration
cell will be
shaded green.
If you select a
Test Equipment
record that is
not certified, a
message
appears
indicating that
the Test
Equipment is
out of
Test
Equipment
Cal. Expire 1,
Test
Equipment
Cal. Expire 2,
Test
Equipment
Cal. Expire 3
Test
Equipment ID
No 1, Test
Equipment ID
No 2, Test
Equipment ID
No 3
Calibration,
Analog
Calibration,
Analog MDF
certification,
and the cell will
be shaded red.
If you try to select the
same Test Equipment
record more than once
(i.e., if you try to select
it the Test Equipment
ID No 1 and in the Test
Equipment ID No 2
fields), an error
message appears.
Test
Equipment
Last Cal. 1,
Test
Equipment
Last Cal. 2,
Test
Equipment
Last Cal. 3
Date
The date on
which the test
equipment was
most recently
certified.
Test
Character The
Equipment
manufacturer
Manufacturer
of the test
1, Test
equipment.
Equipment
Manufacturer
2, Test
Equipment
Manufacturer
3
Test
Character The model of
This field appears as a

text box labeled Last
Calibration Date and is
populated
value stored in the Last
Certification Date field
in the Test Equipment
field.
text box labeled
Manufacturer and is
populated
value stored in the
the Test Equipment
field.
The Test Equipment

datasheets:
Calibration,
Analog
Calibration,
Analog MDF
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
The Test Equipment

datasheets:
Calibration,
Analog
Calibration,
Analog MDF
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
If you perform an
automated calibration,
device.
text box labeled Model tab on the following
Equipment
Model Number
1, Test
Equipment
Model Number
2, Test
Equipment
Model Number
3
the test
equipment.
Number and is
datasheets:
populated
Calibration,
value stored in the
Analog
Calibration,
the Test Equipment
Analog MDF
Calibration,
Analog SAP
field.
Integration
If you perform an
device.
text box labeled Serial tab on the following
Test
datasheets:
Equipment
number of the Number and is
populated
Serial Number
test equipment.
1, Test
Calibration,
value stored in the
Equipment
Analog
Serial Number field in
Serial Number
Calibration,
the Test Equipment
2, Test
Analog MDF
Equipment
Serial Number
Calibration,
3
Analog SAP
field.
Integration
If you perform an
device.
Test
Equipment
Status 1, Test
Equipment
Status 2, Test
Equipment
Status 3
Character The
certification
status of the
test equipment.
The Test Equipment

text box labeled Status datasheets:
and is populated
Calibration,
value stored in the
Analog
Certification Status
Calibration,
field in the Test
Analog MDF
is identified in the
Calibration,
corresponding Test
Analog SAP
Equipment ID No field.
Integration
The
WO Reference Character The work order On the datasheet, this Identification/Details
(Event)
number
datasheets:
associated with box labeled WO
the calibration Reference, in which
event.
you can type your own
Calibration,
value.
Analog
Calibration,
Analog MDF
Calibration,
Analog SAP
Integration
Calibration, Discrete records store information for single- or dual- switch instruments.
The following table provides an alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist
for the Calibration, Discrete family. The information in this table reflects the baseline
Field
Data
Type
Asset ID
The
box labeled
datasheets:
Equipment ID, which
The ID for the
is disabled and
Calibration,
Equipment
populated
Discrete
record that is
Character
automatically with
Calibration,
linked to the
the value stored in the
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Discrete record.
Calibration,
to which the
Discrete SAP
Integration
record is linked.
Description
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet/Tab
Asset Short
Description
Asset Type
Calibration
Approval By

field appears as a text Identification/Details
box labeled
A description Equipment Short
datasheets:
of the
Description, which is
equipment
disabled and
Calibration,
represented by populated
Discrete
Character the Equipment automatically with
Calibration,
record that is the value stored in the
Discrete MDF
linked to the
Equipment Short
Calibration,
Description field in
Calibration,
Discrete record. the Equipment record
Discrete SAP
to which the
Integration
record is linked.
The
The type of
equipment
Calibration,
represented by and populated
Discrete
the Equipment automatically with the
Character
Calibration,
record that is value stored in the
linked to the
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Equipment record to
Discrete record. which the Calibration,
Calibration,
Discrete record is
Discrete SAP
linked.
Integration
The
On the datasheet, this datasheets:
The name and
Calibration,
labeled Calibration
User ID of the
Discrete
Approval By and
Character user who
Calibration,
approved the
Discrete MDF
calibration.
the list.
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration

field appears as a
check box labeled
Calibration Close. The
state of this check box
affects the state of
other fields in other
records. Specifically, if
this check box is
selected...
Calibration
Closed
Logical
Indicates
whether or not
the calibration
even is closed.
By default, this
field contains
the value False.
The date and

time on which
the check box
was selected is
used to
populate the
Last Date field
in the
Calibration
Task record
whose Record
ID appears in
the Tasks
Addressed cell. The
If your database Identification/Details
has been
datasheets:
configured
correctly, a
Calibration,
Task Execution
Discrete
record will be
Calibration,
created and
Discrete MDF
linked to the
Calibration
Event record
Calibration,
and the
Discrete SAP
Calibration
Integration
Task record
whose Entity
ID appears in
the Tasks
Addressed cell.
-andThe value in the
Date Executed
field in the Task
Calibration
Error Limit

Error Limit which
appears below the
column labeled % of
Scale. You can enter
the desired value
directly in the
Calibration Error Limit
cell. If the Error
Assessment field
contains the value
Percent of Range, this The Calibration
field is enabled and
Summary tab on the
populated
following datasheets:
A number
indicating the automatically with the
Calibration,
maximum
Discrete
percentage of Discrete Error Limit
Calibration,
Number acceptable
error before the Setup Defaults record.
Discrete MDF
calibration is
considered to This field is disabled
Calibration,
if:
be failed.
Discrete SAP
Integration
The Calibration
Type field
contains a
device name
(i.e., for an
automated
calibration).
-OR
The Calibration
Close check
box is selected.

labeled Calibration
Strategy and contains
Calibration
Strategy
The
Single Switch
Double Switch
datasheets:
The number of
test points and You can select this
the direction of value from the list. If,
Character the input signal however, the
that will be
Equipment record to
recorded for the which the Calibration,
calibration.
Discrete record is
linked is linked to a
populated
automatically based on
the strategy that is
defined in the template.
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration

labeled Calibration
the list of Calibration
Task records that are
linked to the
Equipment record to
Event record is
linked.
Calibration
Task ID

The
The ID of the ID field contains a
datasheets:
Calibration
Task record
Calibration,
that is linked to reference to a
Discrete
Character the Equipment Calibration Task
Calibration,
record to which record, the
Discrete MDF
the Calibration, Calibration Task ID
Discrete record field will be populated
Calibration,
automatically with
is linked.
Discrete SAP
the Record ID of that
Integration
Calibration Task
record.
populated
Entity Key of that
Calibration Task
record.
Calibration
Technician
The
field appears as a list tab on the following
labeled Calibration
datasheets:
Technician. This field
The name of is populated
Calibration,
the person who automatically with the
Discrete
Character is responsible name and User ID of
Calibration,
for performing the user who created
Discrete MDF
the calibration. the record. You can
change this value by
Calibration,
clicking in the cell and
Discrete SAP
selecting the desired
Integration

Calibration
Number The ID of the field appears as a list
labeled Calibration
Template Key
Calibration
Template ID and
Template
record that is contains the Record
linked to the
Equipment
record to which are linked to the
Discrete record which the Calibration
Event record is linked.
is linked.
Template record is
linked to the
field is populated
Record ID of that
to the Equipment
record, this field will
be empty.
After a Calibration
Template record is
other fields on the
Calibration Event
datasheet will be
populated
automatically with
equipment data from
the specified
and Tasks Addressed
Task record that is
referenced in the
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
record.
The
datasheets:
Calibration
Type
The type of
Character calibration
event.

populated
automatically with
Switch - Manual.
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration

box labeled
Engineering Units
Error Limit, which
appears below the
column labeled % of
Scale. The value
stored in this field is
the value that is sent to
the device. This field
default value from the
Calibration Setup
Defaults record, if the
Error Assessment field
in the Calibration
Setup Defaults record
contains the value
Engineering Units. You
can modify the default
value if desired. This
field accepts numeric
values between 0 and
100. If you modify this
value, the value in the
Error Limit field will
be updated
automatically.
Engineering
Units Error
Limit
If the Error Assessment

Setup Defaults record
contains the value
Percent of Range, this
The Calibration
populated
Summary tab on the
The maximum automatically based on following datasheets:
amount of error the values in the
Calibration,
in engineering Primary Input Range
and the Error Limit
Discrete
units that is
fields.
This
field
is
Calibration,
Character allowed before
populated using the
a calibration
Discrete MDF
following
calculation:
event is
(<Max Error
considered
Calibration,
Limit>/100)
x
(<URV>
failed.
Discrete SAP
The
manufacturer
Equipment
of the
Character
Manufacturer
instrument that
is being
calibrated.

box labeled
Instrument
Manufacturer, in
which you can enter
your own value.

The model
number of the box labeled
Equipment
Character instrument that Instrument Model
Model Number
is being
Number, in which
calibrated.
you can enter your
own value.
The serial
number of the
Equipment
Character instrument that
Serial Number
is being
calibrated.

box labeled
Instrument Serial
Number, in which
you can enter your
own value.
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration

and contains the
following values:
Error
Assessment
The
measurement
type that you
Character will use to
enter the
calibration
results.
Percent of
Range: When
this value is
selected, the
Error Limit
field is enabled,
and the
Engineering
Units Error
Limit field is
disabled.
The Calibration
Engineering
Summary tab on the
Units: When
this value is
selected, the
Calibration,
Engineering
Discrete
Units Error
Calibration,
Limit field is
Discrete MDF
enabled, and
the Error Limit
Calibration,
field is
Discrete SAP
disabled.
Integration
This field is disabled if

the:
Calibration
Type field
contains a
device name
(i.e., for an
automated
calibration)
Calibration
Close check
box is selected,
this field will
be disabled.
The
datasheets:
Event End
Date
Date
The date on
which the
calibration
event was
completed.

field appears as a box
labeled Calibration
End Date, where you
can type or select the
desired date.
Event ID
Event Long
Description
The ID of the
event.
Additional
comments
Character about the
calibration
event.

automatically
populated with a
sequential value in
relation to all
Calibration Event
families.
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
The
On the datasheet, this datasheets:
box labeled
Calibration,
Comments and
Discrete
contains a
click to access the
Text Editor.
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
Event Start Date Date
The date on
which the
calibration
event is
initiated.

labeled Calibration
Start Date, where
you can select the
desired date.
The
characteristics
Input
of the input
Characteristic Character signal to the
Curve
instrument that
you are
calibrating.
Maintenance
Type
The type of
maintenance
performed by
this calibration
Character event. By
default, this
field contains
the value
Scheduled.

labeled Input
Characteristic Curve
and contains the
following values:
Linear
Percent
Square Root
None
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration

from the list.
The
labeled Maintenance
Type and contains the
following values:
datasheets:
Scheduled
Repair
Unscheduled
New
Installation

from the list.
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
Off Line
Duration
Overall AF
Error Max
Overall AF
Pass/Fail
A number
representing
the amount of
time in hours
that passed
Number between the
time the
calibration was
initiated and
the time that it
was completed
The
datasheets:
box labeled Off Line
Duration, in which you
can enter your own
value.
A number that
corresponds to
the highest
error value
recorded from field is disabled and
Number
all the as found populated
values in all
automatically.
existing records
in the current
family.
A value that
indicates
whether the
calibration
passed or failed On the datasheet, this
based on
Character
whether the as populated
found values automatically.
fall within the
range values
specified in the
record.
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
The Calibration
Summary tab on the
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
The Calibration
Summary tab on the
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
Overall AL
Error Max
Overall AL
Pass/Fail
The highest
error value
recorded for all
the As left
Number values in all the
populated
existing records
automatically.
in the
Calibration,
Discrete family.
A value that
indicates if the
calibration
passed or failed
based on
whether the as field is disabled and
Character
left values fall populated
within the
automatically.
range values
specified in the
Calibration,
Discrete record.
The Calibration
Summary tab on the
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
The Calibration
Summary tab on the
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
Scheduled
Calibration
Date
Date

The date on
which the
labeled Scheduled
calibration is
Date, where you can
scheduled to be
type or select the
executed.
desired date.
Calibration,
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
Test
Equipment
Cal. Expire 1,
Test
Equipment
Cal. Expire 2,
Test
Equipment
Cal. Expire 3
Test
Equipment ID
No 1, Test
Equipment ID
No 2, Test
Equipment ID
No 3
The Test Equipment

text box labeled
datasheets:
Calibration Expire and
The date on
is populated
Calibration,
which the
Discrete
certification of value stored in the
Calibration,
Date
the test
Next Certification field
Discrete MDF
equipment
expires.
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
field.
datasheets:
Test Equipment
linked to the
Calibration,
Calibration,
Discrete
Equipment
record.
Discrete record.
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
If you select a
Test Equipment
Calibration,
record that is
Discrete SAP
certified, this
Integration
cell will be
shaded green.
If you select a
Test Equipment
record that is
not certified, a
message
appears
indicating that
the Test
Equipment is
out of
certification,
and the cell will
be shaded red.
same Test Equipment

Equipment ID No 2
fields), an error
message appears.
Test
Equipment
Last Cal. 1,
Test
Equipment
Last Cal. 2,
Test
Equipment
Last Cal. 3
Date
The Test Equipment

datasheets:
populated
Calibration,
The date on
Discrete
which the test
Calibration,
equipment was
most recently
Discrete MDF
certified.
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration
field.
Test
Equipment
Manufacturer
1, Test
The
Equipment
manufacturer
Character
Manufacturer
of the test
2, Test
equipment.
Equipment
Manufacturer
3
Test
Equipment
Model Number
1, Test
The model of
Equipment
Character the test
Model Number
equipment.
2, Test
Equipment
Model Number
3

text box labeled
Manufacturer and is
The Test Equipment
populated
automatically with the tab on the following
datasheets:
value stored in the
Calibration,
the Test Equipment
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
field.
Calibration,
If you perform an
Discrete SAP
Integration
device.
text box labeled Model
Number and is
The Test Equipment
populated
datasheets:
value stored in the
Calibration,
the Test Equipment
Discrete
Calibration,
Discrete MDF
field.
Calibration,
If you perform an
Discrete SAP
Integration
device.

text box labeled Serial
Number and is
The Test Equipment
populated
Test
datasheets:
value stored in the
Equipment
Serial Number
Calibration,
the Test Equipment
1, Test
Discrete
The serial
Equipment
Calibration,
Character number of the in the corresponding
Serial Number
test equipment. Test Equipment ID No
Discrete MDF
2, Test
field.
Equipment
Calibration,
Serial Number
If you perform an
Discrete SAP
3
Integration
device.
The Test Equipment
text box labeled Status datasheets:
and is populated
Test
Calibration,
Equipment
The
value stored in the
Discrete
Status 1, Test
certification
Calibration,
Equipment
Character
status of the
field in the Test
Status 2, Test
Discrete MDF
test equipment. Equipment record that
Equipment
Status 3
Calibration,
corresponding Test
Discrete SAP
Equipment ID No
Integration
field.
The
datasheets:
The work order
Calibration,
number
Discrete
WO Reference
box labeled WO
Calibration,
(Event)
Reference, in which
the calibration
you can type your
Discrete MDF
event.
own value.
Calibration,
Discrete SAP
Integration

Calibration, Functional Test records store information about functional test calibrations.
The following table provides an alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist
for the Calibration, Functional Test family. The information in the table reflects the
Field
Asset ID
Asset Short
Description
Asset Type
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage

text box labeled
The ID for the Equipment ID, which is
Equipment
record that is automatically with the
Character linked to the value stored in the
Calibration,
Functional Test the Equipment record to
record.
Functional Test record is
linked.

text box labeled
A description
Equipment Short
of the
equipment
represented by
the Equipment
Character
value stored in the
record that is
Equipment Short
linked to the
Calibration,
Equipment record to
Functional Test
record.
linked.
Datasheet/Tab
The Default tab on
the following
datasheets:
Calibration,
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
The Default tab on
the following
datasheets:
Calibration,
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
The Default tab on
the following
datasheets:
text box labeled
equipment
Equipment Type, which
represented by is disabled and populated
the Equipment automatically with the
record that is value stored in the
linked to the Object Type field in the
Calibration,
Equipment record to
Functional Test which the Calibration,
record.
linked.
Calibration
Approval By
Calibration
Closed

The name and list labeled Calibration
User ID of the Approval By and
Character user who
approved the names. You can select
functional test. the desired user from the
list.
Logical

check box labeled
Indicates
whether or not Calibration Close. The
the calibration state of this check box
event is closed. affects the state of other
By default, this fields in other records.
field contains Specifically, if this check
box is selected:
the value
False.
The date and time
on which the
check box was
selected is used to
populate the Last
Date field in the
Calibration Task
record whose
Record ID
Calibration,
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
The Default tab on
the following
datasheets:
Calibration,
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
The Default tab on
the following
datasheets:
Calibration,
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
Calibration
Strategy
Character The number of

steps that will
be performed
for the
functional test.
appears in the
Tasks Addressed
cell.
If your database
has been
configured
correctly, a Task
Execution record
will be created
and linked to the
Calibration Event
record and the
Calibration Task
record whose
Entity ID appears
in the Tasks
Addressed cell.
The value in the
Date Executed
field in the Task
Execution record
will be set
automatically to
the date that the
Calibration Close
check box was
selected.
This field is enabled only

for Super Users and
members of the
Calibration
Group.
This field appears as a The Default tab on
list labeled Calibration the following
Strategy and contains the datasheets:
values in the following
format <#> Step, where
Calibration,
<#> is a number. These
Functional
values start with 1 and
Test
span through 25. You can
Calibration,
select a value from the
Functional
list.
Test MDF
Calibration
Task ID
If the Equipment record

(to which the
Calibration, Functional
Test record is linked is
linked) is linked to a
Calibration,
Functional
Functional Test record,
Test SAP
Integration
number of Calibration
Template Detail,
Functional Test records
that exist.
Character The ID of the list labeled Calibration the following
Task ID and contains the datasheets:
Calibration
list of Calibration Task
Task record
that is linked to records that are linked to
Calibration,
the
Equipment
record
to
the Equipment
Functional
record to
Test
which the
Calibration,
linked.
Calibration,
Functional
Functional Test
Test MDF
record is
linked.
Calibration,
Calibration Template ID
Functional
field contains a
Test SAP
Integration
reference to a Calibration
Task record, the
Calibration Task ID field
will be populated
Record ID of that
with the Entity Key of
that Calibration Task
record.
list labeled Calibration
Technician.
If you performed a
The Default tab on
manual functional test,
the following
datasheets:
name and User ID of the
Calibration,
user who created the
Functional
The name of record.
Test
the person who
Calibration,
Calibration
Character is responsible If you perform an
Technician
Functional
for performing automated calibration
Test MDF
the calibration. functional test, this field
is populated
Calibration,
Functional
device.
Test SAP
Integration
You can change this
value by clicking in the
cell and selecting the
list.
Calibration
Number The ID of the list labeled Calibration the following
Template ID and
datasheets:
Template Key
Calibration
contains the Record IDs
Template
record that is of the Calibration
Calibration,
linked to the Template records that are
Functional
linked to the Equipment
Equipment
Test
record to which the
record to
Calibration,
Calibration Event record
which the
Functional
is linked.
Calibration,
Test MDF
Functional Test
record is
Calibration,
linked.
Template record is linked
Functional
to the Equipment record,
Test SAP
Integration
Record ID of that
Template is not linked to
the Equipment record,

this field will be empty.
After a Calibration
Template record is
other fields on the
Calibration Event
datasheet will be
with equipment data
from the specified
record. Additionally, the
Calibration Task ID and
Tasks Addressed fields
are populated
Task record that is
referenced in the
record.
The Default tab on
text box labeled
the following
Calibration Type and is
datasheets:
disabled.
Calibration
Type
The type of
event.
If you perform a manual

functional test, this field
is populated
automatically with
Functional - Manual.
If you perform an
automatically with Fluke
74x.
Equipment
Character The
Manufacturer
manufacturer
of the
instrument on

text box labeled
Instrument
Manufacturer, which is
Calibration,
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
The Default tab on

the following
datasheets:
Calibration,
with the value stored in
which the
the Manufacturer field in
functional test the Equipment record to
is being
performed.

text box labeled
Instrument Model
The model
Number, which is
number of the
instrument on
Equipment
Character which the
Model Number
the Model Number field
functional test
in the Equipment record
is being
to which the Calibration,
performed.

text box labeled
Instrument Serial
The serial
Number, which is
number of the populated automatically
instrument on with the value stored in
Equipment
Character which the
the Equipment Serial
Serial Number
functional test Number field in the
is being
Equipment record to
performed.
Event End
Date
Date

text box labeled
Calibration End Date.
The date on
which the
functional test
was
If you perform a manual
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
The Default tab on
the following
datasheets:
Calibration,
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
The Default tab on
the following
datasheets:
Calibration,
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
The Default tab on
the following
datasheets:
Calibration,
calibration, this field is

with the date and time
that the Calibration,
Functional Test record
was created.
completed.
If you perform an
data and time that the
functional test was
performed on the device.
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
You can modify this

value if needed.
The Default tab on
the following
datasheets:
Event Long
Description
Event Start
Date
Additional
comments
Character about the
calibration
event.
Date
The date on
which the
calibration
event is
initiated.

text box labeled
Comments and contains
a
button, which you
can click to access the
Text Editor.

text box labeled
Calibration Start Date.
By default, this field is
with the date and time
that the Calibration,
Functional Test record
was created. You can
modify this value if
needed.
Calibration,
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
The Default tab on
the following
datasheets:
Calibration,
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Maintenance
Type
Off Line
Duration
Scheduled
Calibration
Date
Test SAP
Integration
The Default tab on
the following
list labeled Maintenance
datasheets:
following values:
The type of
Calibration,
maintenance
Functional
Scheduled
performed by
Test
Repair
this functional
Calibration,
Character test. By
Functional
Unscheduled
default, this
Test MDF
field contains
the value
New Installation
Calibration,
Scheduled.
Functional
Test SAP
from the list.
Integration
The Default tab on
the following
datasheets:
A number
representing
Calibration,
the amount of
Functional
time in hours
Test
that passed
text box labeled Off Line
Calibration,
between the
Number
time the
Functional
can enter your own
functional test
Test MDF
value.
was initiated
and the time
Calibration,
that it was
Functional
completed.
Test SAP
Integration
The Default tab on
Date
The date on
This field appears as a the following
which the
box labeled Scheduled datasheets:
functional test Date, where you can type
is scheduled to or select the desired date.
Calibration,
be executed.
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test
Equipment
Cal. Expire 1,
Test
Equipment
Cal. Expire 2,
Test
Equipment
Cal. Expire 3
Date

text box labeled
Calibration Expire and is
The date on
which the
certification of
the Next Certification
the test
field in the Test
equipment
expires.
identified in the
corresponding Test

Test
Character The ID of the text box labeled ID No
Equipment ID
Test
and contains the
No 1, Test
Equipment
Equipment ID
record that is button, which you can
No 2, Test
linked to the use to select a Test
Equipment record.
Equipment ID
Calibration,
No 3
Functional Test
If you select a
record.
Test Equipment
record that is
certified, this cell
will be shaded
green.
If you select a
Test Equipment
record that is not
certified, a
message appears
indicating that the
Test Equipment is
out of
certification, and
the cell will be
shaded red.
same Test Equipment
Test SAP
Integration
The Test Equipment
datasheets:
Calibration,
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
The Test Equipment
datasheets:
Calibration,
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration

(i.e., if you try to select it
the Test Equipment ID
No 1 and in the Test
Equipment ID No 2
fields), an error message
appears.
Test
Equipment
Last Cal. 1,
Test
Equipment
Last Cal. 2,
Test
Equipment
Last Cal. 3
Date

The date on
which the test with the value stored in
equipment was the Last Certification
most recently Date field in the Test
certified.
identified in the
corresponding Test
Test
Equipment
Manufacturer
1, Test
The
Equipment
manufacturer
Character
Manufacturer
of the test
2, Test
equipment.
Equipment
Manufacturer
3
The Test Equipment

datasheets:
Calibration,
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration

The Test Equipment
text box labeled
Manufacturer and is
datasheets:
Calibration,
the Manufacturer field in
Functional
the Test Equipment
Test
Calibration,
in the corresponding Test
Functional
Test MDF
If you perform an
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
device.
Test
Character The model of text box labeled Model tab on the following
Number and is populated datasheets:
Equipment
the test
Model Number
equipment.
value stored in the Model
1, Test
Calibration,
Number field in the Test
Equipment
Functional
Model Number
Test
identified in the
corresponding Test
2, Test
Equipment
Model Number
3
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
If you perform an
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
device.
The Test Equipment
text box labeled Serial
Number and is populated
datasheets:
Test
value stored in the Serial
Calibration,
Equipment
Number field in the Test
Functional
Serial Number
Test
1, Test
identified in the
The serial
Calibration,
Equipment
Character number of the corresponding Test
Serial Number
Functional
test equipment. Equipment ID No field.
2, Test
Test MDF
Equipment
If you perform an
Serial Number
Calibration,
3
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
device.
The Test Equipment
datasheets:
text box labeled Status
Calibration,
Test
and is populated
Functional
Equipment
Test
The
Status 1, Test
value stored in the
Calibration,
certification
Equipment
Character
status of the
Functional
Status 2, Test
field in the Test
test equipment.
Test MDF
Equipment
Status 3
identified in the
Calibration,
corresponding Test
Functional
Test SAP
Integration
The Default tab on
WO Reference Character The work
This field appears as a the following
datasheets:
(Event)
order number text box labeled WO
associated with Reference, in which you
the functional can type your own value.
Calibration,
test.
Functional
Test
Calibration,
Functional
Test MDF
Calibration,
Functional
Test SAP
Integration

Calibration, Analyzer Single Component records store information about single
component calibrations. Examples of singlecomponent analyzer calibrations include
calibrating pH, in-situ oxygen, toxic gas, and combustible gas. The following table
provides an alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist for the Calibration,
Analyzer Single Component family. The information in the table reflects the baseline
Field
Asset ID
Data
Type
Description

Equipment
record that is
linked to the
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
record.
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet/Tab
The
datasheets:
box labeled
Equipment ID, which
is disabled and
Calibration,
populated
Analyzer
Single
value stored in the
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
to which the
Single
Calibration, Analyzer
Component
Single Component
MDF
record is linked.
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
Asset Short
Description
Asset Type
The
datasheets:
box labeled
Equipment Short
Calibration,
disabled and
Analyzer
populated
Single
Component
value stored in the
Calibration,
Equipment Short
Analyzer
Single
Component
to which the
MDF
Single Component
Calibration,
record is linked.
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
The
equipment
represented by box labeled Equipment datasheets:
the Equipment Type, which is disabled
record that is and populated
Calibration,
linked to the automatically with the
Analyzer
Calibration,
value stored in the
Single
Analyzer
Component
Single
Equipment record to
Calibration,
Component
Analyzer
record.
Analyzer Single
Single
Component record is
Component
linked.
Character A description
of the
equipment
represented by
the Equipment
record that is
linked to the
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
record.
MDF

User ID of the
user who
approved the
calibration.
Calibration
Approval By
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
labeled Calibration
Approval By and
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
the list.
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
Calibration
Closed
Logical

field appears as a check Identification/Details
Indicates
whether or not box labeled Calibration tab on the following
the calibration Close. The state of this datasheets:
even is closed. check box affects the
By default, this state of other fields in
Calibration,
field contains other records.
Analyzer
Specifically, if this
the value
Single
False.
Component
Calibration,
The date and
Analyzer
time on which
Single
the check box
Component
was selected is
MDF
used to populate
the Last Date
Calibration,
field in the
Analyzer
Calibration Task
Single
record whose
Component
Record ID
SAP Intgtn
appears in the
Tasks
Addressed cell.
If your database
has been
configured
correctly, a Task
Execution
record will be
created and
linked to the
Calibration
Event record
and the
Calibration Task
record whose
Entity ID
appears in the
Tasks
Addressed cell.
Date Executed
field in the Task
Execution record
will be set
automatically to
the date that the
Calibration Close
check box was
selected.
and members of the
Calibration
Group.
Calibration
Error Limit
Number A number
indicating the
maximum
percentage of
acceptable
error before
the calibration
is considered
to be failed.

box labeled Calibration datasheets:
Error Limit which
appears below the
Calibration,
column labeled % of
Analyzer
Scale. You can enter the
Single
desired value directly in
Component
the Calibration Error
Calibration,
Limit cell.
Analyzer
Single
This field is disabled if:
Component
MDF
The Calibration
Type field
Calibration,
contains a
Analyzer
device name
Single
(i.e., for an
Component
automated
SAP Intgtn
calibration).
-OR
Calibration
Strategy
The Calibration
Close check box
is selected.

Character The number of field appears as a list
test points and labeled Calibration
the direction of Strategy and contains
the input signal the following values:
that will be
recorded for
2 Up
the calibration.
2 Down
2 Up then 2
Down
3 Up
3 Down
3 Up then 3
Down
5 Up
5 Down
5 Up then 5
Down
5 Up then 1
Down
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
11 Up
11 Down
11 Up then 11
Down
You can select this

value from the list. If,
however, the
Equipment record to
Analyzer Single
Component record is
linked is linked to a
based on the strategy
that is defined in the
template.
Calibration
Task ID

Character The ID of the field appears as a list Identification/Details
labeled Calibration
Calibration
Task ID and contains datasheets:
Task record
that is linked the list of Calibration
to the
Calibration,
linked to the
Equipment
Analyzer
Equipment
record
to
record to
Single
which the
Component
Calibration,
Calibration,
Analyzer
Analyzer
Single
Single
Component
Component
record is
MDF
linked.
ID field contains a
Calibration,
Analyzer
reference to a
Single
Calibration Task
Component
record, the
SAP Intgtn
Calibration Task ID

Record ID of that
Calibration Task
record.
record.
Calibration
Technician
Character The name of On the datasheet, this

the person who field appears as a list
is responsible labeled Calibration
for performing Technician. This field is
the calibration. populated automatically
with the name and User
ID of the user who
created the record. You
can change this value
by clicking in the cell
and selecting the
list.
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
Number The ID of the

Calibration
Template
record that is
linked to the
Equipment
record to
which the
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
record is
linked.
Calibration
Template Key

field appears as a list Identification/Details
labeled Calibration
Template ID and
datasheets:
contains the Record IDs
of the Calibration
Calibration,
Analyzer
are linked to the
Single
Equipment record to
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
Template record is
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
with the Record ID of
Single
that Calibration
Component
Template record. If a
SAP Intgtn
Calibration Template is
not linked to the
field will be empty.
After a Calibration
Template record is
other fields on the
Calibration Event
datasheet will be
with equipment data
from the specified
and Tasks Addressed
Task record that is
referenced in the
record.

calibration
event.
Calibration
Type
The
populated automatically datasheets:
with Analyzer - Single
Component.
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
The
Character The
manufacturer field appears as a text tab on the following
datasheets:
of the
box labeled
instrument that Instrument
is being
Manufacturer, in
Calibration,
calibrated.
which you can enter
Analyzer
your own value.
Single
Component
Calibration,
Equipment
Analyzer
Manufacturer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
The
Character The model
datasheets:
instrument that box labeled
is being
Instrument Model
calibrated.
Number, in which you
Calibration,
can enter your own
Analyzer
value.
Single
Component
Calibration,
Equipment
Analyzer
Model Number
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
instrument that box labeled
is being
Instrument Serial
calibrated.
Calibration,
can enter your own
Analyzer
value.
Single
Component
Calibration,
Equipment
Analyzer
Serial Number
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
Date
Event End
Date
The date on
which the
calibration
event was
completed.
The
datasheets:
labeled Calibration
End Date, where you
Calibration,
desired date.
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Event ID
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
The
Character The ID of the On the datasheet, this Identification/Details
calibration
event.
automatically populated datasheets:
with a sequential value
in relation to all
Calibration,
Calibration Event
Analyzer
families.
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
Character Additional
comments
about the
calibration
event.
Event Long
Description
The
datasheets:
box labeled
Comments and
Calibration,
contains a
button,
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Date
Event Start Date
The date on
which the
calibration
event is
initiated.
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
labeled Calibration
Start Date, where you
Calibration,
desired date.
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
Maintenance
Type

maintenance
performed by
this calibration
event. By
default, this
field contains
the value
Scheduled.

labeled Maintenance
following values:
Scheduled
Repair
Unscheduled
New Installation

from the list.
Off Line
Duration
The
datasheets:
Number A number
representing field appears as a text
the amount of box labeled Off Line
time in hours Duration, in which you
that passed
can enter your own
between the
value.
time the
calibration was
initiated and
the time that it
was completed
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
Overall AF
Error Max
Number A number that On the datasheet, this

corresponds to field is disabled and
the highest
populated
error value
automatically.
recorded from
all the as found
values in all
existing
records in the
current family.
Calibration Summary
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
Calibration Summary
datasheets:
Overall AF
Pass/Fail
Character A value that On the datasheet, this

indicates
whether the
populated
calibration
automatically.
passed or
failed based on
whether the as
found values
fall within the
range values
specified in the
record.
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
Overall AL
Error Max
Number The highest

error value
recorded for all populated
the As left
automatically.
values in all
the existing
records in the
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
family.
Calibration Summary
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
Calibration Summary
datasheets:
Overall AL
Pass/Fail
Character A value that On the datasheet, this

indicates if the field is disabled and
calibration
populated
passed or
automatically.
failed based on
whether the as
left values fall
within the
range values
specified in the
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
record.
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
Date
Scheduled
Calibration
Date
The date on
which the
calibration is
scheduled to
be executed.
The
datasheets:
labeled Scheduled
Date, where you can
type or select the
Calibration,
desired date.
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
The Test Equipment
datasheets:
Test
Equipment
Cal. Expire 1,
Test
Equipment
Cal. Expire 2, Date
Test
Equipment
Cal. Expire 3

text box labeled
The date on
is populated
which the
certification of
value stored in the Next
the test
Certification field in the
equipment
Test Equipment record
expires.
that is identified in the
corresponding Test
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
Test
datasheets:
Equipment ID
Test
and contains the
No 1, Test
Equipment
Equipment ID
record that is button, which you can
Calibration,
use
to
select
a
Test
No 2, Test
linked to the
Analyzer
Equipment record.
Equipment ID
Calibration,
Single
Analyzer
Single
Component
record.
No 3
If you select a
Test Equipment
record that is
certified, this
cell will be
shaded green.
If you select a
Test Equipment
record that is
not certified, a
message
appears
indicating that
the Test
Equipment is
out of
certification,
and the cell will
be shaded red.

same Test Equipment
Equipment ID No 2
fields), an error
message appears.
Test
Equipment
Last Cal. 1,
Test
Equipment
Last Cal. 2,
Test
Equipment
Last Cal. 3
Date
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
The Test Equipment

The date on
which the test text box labeled Last datasheets:
equipment was Calibration Date and is
most recently populated automatically
Calibration,
certified.
Analyzer
the Last Certification
Single
Date field in the Test
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
corresponding Test
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
The Test Equipment
datasheets:
text box labeled
Manufacturer and is
Calibration,
Analyzer
Test
Single
the Manufacturer field
Equipment
Component
Manufacturer
Calibration,
record
that
is
identified
1, Test
The
Equipment
manufacturer in the corresponding
Analyzer
Character
Manufacturer
of the test
Single
field.
2, Test
equipment.
Component
Equipment
MDF
Manufacturer
If you perform an
3
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
device.
Component
SAP Intgtn
The Test Equipment
text box labeled Model datasheets:
Number and is
Calibration,
Analyzer
Test
the Model Number
Single
Equipment
field in the Test
Component
Model Number
Calibration,
1, Test
The model of
Equipment
Analyzer
Character the test
corresponding Test
Model Number
Single
equipment.
2, Test
Component
Equipment
MDF
Model Number
If you perform an
3
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
device.
Component
SAP Intgtn
Test
datasheets:
Equipment
Serial Number
test equipment. populated automatically
1, Test
Equipment
Serial Number
2, Test
Equipment
Serial Number
3
Test
Equipment
Status 1, Test
Equipment
Status 2, Test
Equipment
Status 3

the Serial Number field
field.
If you perform an
device.

and is populated
The
value stored in the
certification
Character
status of the
field in the Test
test equipment.
corresponding Test
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
The Test Equipment
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn
The
Character The work
order number field appears as a text tab on the following
datasheets:
associated with box labeled WO
the calibration Reference, in which
event.
you can type your
Calibration,
own value.
Analyzer
Single
Component
Calibration,
WO Reference
Analyzer
(Event)
Single
Component
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
SAP Intgtn

Calibration, Analyzer Multi-Component records store information for comparing
standard gas values to test results form the analyzer. Examples of multi-component
analyzer calibrations include Mass Spectrometers and Process Gas Chromatographs. The
Calibration, Analyzer Multi-Component family. The information in the table reflects the
baseline state and behavior of these fields. This list is not comprehensive.
Field
Asset ID
Data
Type
Description

Equipment
record that is
linked to the
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet/Tab
The
datasheets:
box labeled
Equipment ID, which
is disabled and
Calibration,
populated
Analyzer
Multi-
Component
record.
Asset Short
Description
Asset Type
A description
of the
equipment
represented by
the Equipment
record that is
Character
linked to the
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
record.

equipment
represented by
the Equipment
record that is
linked to the
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
record.
value stored in the

to which the
Single Component
record is linked.
Component
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
box labeled
Calibration,
Equipment Short
Analyzer
Multidisabled and
Component
populated
Calibration,
Analyzer
value stored in the
MultiEquipment Short
Component
MDF
Equipment record to
Calibration,
Analyzer Single
Analyzer
Component record is
Multilinked.
Component
SAP Intgtn
The
and populated
Calibration,
Analyzer
value stored in the
MultiObject Type field in the
Component
Equipment record to
Calibration,
Analyzer
Analyzer Single
MultiComponent record is
Component
MDF
linked.
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:

The name and
labeled Calibration
User ID of the
Calibration
Approval By and
Character user who
Approval By
approved the
calibration.
the list.
Calibration
Closed
Logical

field appears as a check
Indicates
whether or not box labeled Calibration
the calibration Close. The state of this
even is closed. check box affects the
By default, this state of other fields in
field contains other records.
the value False. Specifically, if this
The date and

time on which
the check box
was selected is
used to populate
the Last Date
field in the
Calibration Task
record whose
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Record ID
appears in the
Tasks Addressed
cell.
If your database
has been
configured
correctly, a Task
Execution record
will be created
and linked to the
Calibration
Event record and
the Calibration
Task record
whose Entity ID
appears in the
Tasks Addressed
cell. -and-
SAP Intgtn
The value in the

Date Executed
field in the Task
Execution record
will be set
automatically to
the date that the
Calibration Close
check box was
selected.
Calibration
Error Limit

and members of the
Calibration
Group.
Number A number
Error Limit which
maximum
Calibration,
column
labeled
%
of
acceptable
Analyzer
error before the Scale. You can enter the
Multicalibration is desired value directly in
Component
the Calibration Error

Limit cell.
This field is disabled if:
considered to
be failed.
The Calibration
Type field
contains a
device name
(i.e., for an
automated
calibration).
-OR-
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The Calibration
Close check box
is selected.
Character The ID of the field appears as a list Identification/Details
labeled Calibration
Calibration
Task ID and contains datasheets:
Task record
that is linked to the list of Calibration
the Equipment Task records that are
Calibration,
record to which linked to the
Analyzer
Multiwhich the Calibration
Analyzer
Component
Multi Calibration,
Component
Analyzer
record is
Multilinked.
Component
MDF
ID field contains a
Calibration,
Analyzer
reference to a
MultiCalibration Task
Component
record, the Calibration
SAP Intgtn
Task ID field will be
populated
Record ID of that
Calibration Task
record.
Calibration
Task ID

record.
The
datasheets:
Calibration
Technician
The name of
the person who
Character is responsible
for performing
the calibration.

labeled Calibration
Technician. This field is
with the name and User
ID of the user who
created the record. You
can change this value by

Calibration
labeled Calibration
Template Key
Calibration
Template ID and
Template
record that is contains the Record IDs
linked to the of the Calibration
Equipment
Analyzer
Single
Component
record is
linked.
Template record is
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
with the Record ID of

that Calibration
Template record. If a
Calibration Template is
not linked to the
field will be empty.
After a Calibration
Template record is
other fields on the
Calibration Event
datasheet will be
with equipment data
from the specified
record. Additionally, the
Calibration Task ID and
Tasks Addressed fields
are populated
Task record that is
referenced in the
record.
Cylinder ID
Character The Record ID

of the Standard
Gas Cylinder
record that
represents the
standard gas
cylinder used
to perform the
calibration.
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
and contains the Record datasheets:
IDs of the existing
Standard Gas Cylinder
Calibration,
records. You can select
Analyzer
a value in the list.
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
Calibration
Type
The type of
event.

with Analyzer - MultiComponent.
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
Cylinder
Expiration
Date
Date
The expiration
date of the
standard gas
cylinder

based upon the value
stored in the Cylinder
ID field.
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
The
manufacturer
Equipment
of the
Character
Manufacturer
instrument that
is being
calibrated.

box labeled
Instrument
Manufacturer, in
which you can enter
your own value.
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
Equipment
Model
Number
The model
number of the
is being
calibrated.

box labeled
Instrument Model
can enter your own
value.
Equipment
Serial Number
number of the
instrument that
is being
calibrated.
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
box labeled
Instrument Serial
Calibration,
can enter your own

value.
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
Event End
Date
Date
The date on
which the
calibration
event was
completed.

labeled Calibration End
Date, where you can
type or select the
desired date.
Event ID

calibration
event.
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
automatically populated datasheets:
with a sequential value
in relation to all
Calibration,
Calibration Event
Analyzer
families.
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
Event Long
Description
Additional
comments
Character about the
calibration
event.

box labeled Comments
and contains a
Editor.
Event Start
Date
Date
The date on
which the
calibration
event is
initiated.
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
labeled Calibration
Calibration,
desired date.
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The type of
maintenance
performed by
this calibration
Maintenance
Character event. By
Type
default, this
field contains
the value
Scheduled.

labeled Maintenance
following values:
Scheduled
Repair
Unscheduled
New Installation

from the list.
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:
Off Line
Duration
Overall AF
A number
representing
the amount of
time in hours
that passed
Number between the
time the
calibration was
initiated and
the time that it
was completed

box labeled Off Line
can enter your own
value.
Number A number that On the datasheet, this
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
Calibration Summary
datasheets:
Error Max
Overall AF
Pass/Fail
Overall AL
Error Max
corresponds to
the highest
error value
recorded from
all the as found
values in all
existing
records in the
current family.
A value that
indicates
whether the
calibration
passed or failed
based on
Character
whether the as
found values
fall within the
range values
specified in the
record.
Number The highest

error value
recorded for all populated automatically.
the As left
values in all
the existing
records in the
Calibration,
Analyzer
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
Calibration Summary
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
Calibration Summary
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Single
Component
family.
Overall AL
Pass/Fail
Scheduled
Calibration
Date
A value that
indicates if the
calibration
passed or failed
based on
whether the as
left values fall On the datasheet, this
Character within the
range values populated automatically.
specified in the
Calibration,
Analyzer
Single
Component
record.
Date
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
Calibration Summary
datasheets:
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn
The
The date on
which the
calibration is box labeled Scheduled datasheets:
scheduled to be Date, where you can
executed.
type or select the
Calibration,
desired date.
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
Multi-
Component
SAP Intgtn
The
datasheets:

The work order
number
WO Reference
box labeled WO
(Event)
Reference, in which
the calibration
you can enter your
event.
own value.
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
MDF
Calibration,
Analyzer
MultiComponent
SAP Intgtn

Calibration, Weight Scale records store information about weight scale calibrations. The
Calibration, Weight Scale family. The information in the table reflects the baseline state
and behavior of these fields. This list is not comprehensive.
Field
Asset ID
Data
Type
Description

Equipment
record that is
linked to the
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet/Tab
The
datasheets:
box labeled
Equipment ID, which
is disabled and
Calibration,
populated
Weight Scale
record.
Asset Short
Description
A description
of the
equipment
represented by
the Equipment
Character
record that is
linked to the
Calibration,
Weight Scale
record.
Asset Type
The type of
equipment
represented by
the Equipment
Character record that is
linked to the
Calibration,
Weight Scale
record.
Calibration
Approval By

User ID of the
user who
approved the
calibration.
automatically with
to which the
Calibration, Weight
Scale record is linked.
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The
box labeled
datasheets:
Equipment Short
Calibration,
disabled and
Weight Scale
populated
Calibration,
automatically with
Weight Scale
MDF
Equipment Short
Calibration,
Weight Scale
to which the
SAP
Calibration, Weight
Integration
Scale record is linked.
The
field appears as a text datasheets:
box labeled Equipment
Calibration,
Weight Scale
and populated
Calibration,
value stored in the
Weight Scale
MDF
Equipment record to
Calibration,
Weight Scale record is
Weight Scale
linked.
SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
labeled Calibration
Approval By and
Calibration,
Weight Scale

the list.
Calibration
Closed
Logical

field appears as a
Indicates
whether or not check box labeled
the calibration Calibration Close. The
even is closed. state of this check box
By default, this affects the state of
field contains other fields in other
the value False. records. Specifically, if
this check box is
selected:
The date and

time on which
the check box
was selected is
used to
populate the
Last Date field
in the
Calibration
Task record
whose Record
ID appears in
the Tasks
Addressed cell.
If your database
has been
configured
correctly, a
Task Execution
record will be
created and
linked to the
Calibration
Event record
and the
Calibration
Task record
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
whose Entity
ID appears in
the Tasks
Addressed cell.
Date Executed
field in the Task
Execution record
will be set
automatically to
the date that the
Calibration
Close check box
was selected.
Calibration
Error Limit

and members of the
Calibration
Group.
Number A number
Error Limit which
maximum
Calibration,
acceptable error column labeled % of
Weight Scale
Scale. You can enter
before the
Calibration,
calibration is the desired value
Weight Scale
considered to directly in the
MDF
Calibration Error Limit
be failed.
cell.
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
if:
Integration
The Calibration
Type field
contains a
device name
(i.e., for an
automated
calibration).
-ORThe Calibration
Close check
box is selected.
labeled Calibration
the list of Calibration
linked to the
Equipment record to
Event record is
linked.
Calibration
Task ID
The
datasheets:
The ID of the
ID field contains a
Calibration,
Calibration
Weight Scale
Task record
Calibration,
that is linked to
reference to a
the Equipment
Weight Scale
Calibration Task
Character
record to which
MDF
record, the
the Calibration,
Calibration Task ID
Weight Scale
Calibration,
record is
Weight Scale
automatically with
linked.
SAP
the Record ID of that
Integration
Calibration Task
record.
populated
Entity Key of that
Calibration Task
record.
Calibration
Character The name of
The

labeled Calibration
Technician. This field
is populated
the person who automatically with the
is responsible name and User ID of
Technician
for performing the user who created
the calibration. the record. You can
change this value by
Calibration
labeled Calibration
Template Key
Calibration
Template ID and
Template
record that is contains the Record
linked to the
Equipment
Weight Scale which the Calibration
record is
linked.
Template record is
linked to the
field is populated
Record ID of that
to the Equipment
record, this field will
be empty.
After a Calibration
Template record is
other fields on the
Calibration Event
datasheet will be
populated

datasheets:
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
automatically with
equipment data from
the specified
and Tasks Addressed
Task record that is
referenced in the
record.
The
datasheets:
Calibration
Type
The type of
event.

populated
automatically with
Analog - Manual.
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
The
manufacturer
Equipment
of the
Character
Manufacturer
instrument that
is being
calibrated.

box labeled
Instrument
Manufacturer, in
which you can enter
your own value.
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
The model
number of the box labeled
Equipment
Character instrument that Instrument Model
Model Number
is being
Number, in which
calibrated.
you can enter your
own value.
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
The serial
number of the
Equipment
Serial Number
is being
calibrated.

box labeled
Instrument Serial
Number, in which
you can enter your
own value.
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
Event End
Date
Date
The date on
which the
calibration
event was
completed.

labeled Calibration
End Date, where you
can select the desired
date.
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
Event ID
Event Long
Description
The ID of the
event.
Additional
comments
Character about the
calibration
event.

automatically
populated with a
sequential value in
relation to all
Calibration Event
families.

box labeled
Comments and
contains a
click to access the
Text Editor.
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:
Event Start Date Date
The date on
which the
calibration
event is
initiated.

labeled Calibration
can select the desired
date.
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The
characteristics
Input
of the input
Characteristic Character signal to the
Curve
instrument that
you are
calibrating.
Maintenance
Type
The type of
maintenance
performed by
this calibration
Character event. By
default, this
field contains
the value
Scheduled.

labeled Input
and contains the
following values:
Linear
Percent
Square Root
None

from the list.
labeled Maintenance
following values:
Scheduled
Repair
Unscheduled
New
Installation
The
datasheets:
Number A number
representing
the amount of
time in hours
that passed
between the
time the
calibration was
initiated and
the time that it
was completed.
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The
datasheets:

from the list.
Off Line
Duration
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The
box labeled Off Line datasheets:
can enter your own
Calibration,
value.
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The type of
output signal to
Output
the piece of
Characteristic Character
equipment
Curve
being
calibrated.

labeled Output
and contains the
following values:
Linear
Percent
Square Root
None
The
datasheets:

from the list.
Overall AF
Error Max
Overall AF
Pass/Fail
A number that
corresponds to
the highest
error value
recorded from field is disabled and
Number
all the as found populated
values in all
automatically.
existing records
in the current
family.
A value that
indicates
whether the
calibration
passed or failed On the datasheet, this
based on
Character
whether the as populated
found values automatically.
fall within the
range values
specified in the
record.
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
Calibration Summary
datasheets:
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
Calibration Summary
datasheets:
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
Overall AL
Error Max
Overall AL
Pass/Fail
The highest
error value
recorded for all
the As left
values in all the field is disabled and
Number
existing records populated
in the
automatically.
Calibration,
Weight Scale
family.
A value that
indicates if the
calibration
passed or failed
based on
whether the as
Character left values fall
populated
within the
automatically.
range values
specified in the
Calibration,
Weight Scale
record.
Calibration Summary
datasheets:
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
Calibration Summary
datasheets:
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The Test Equipment
datasheets:
Test
text box labeled
Equipment
Calibration,
Cal. Expire 1,
is populated
The date on
Weight Scale
Test
which the
Calibration,
Equipment
value stored in the
certification of
Cal. Expire 2, Date
Next Certification
Weight Scale
the test
field in the Test
MDF
equipment
Test
expires.
Equipment
Calibration,
Cal. Expire 3
corresponding Test
Weight Scale
Equipment ID No
SAP
field.
Integration
Test
datasheets:
Equipment ID
Test Equipment
No 1, Test

Equipment record.
Equipment ID
No 2, Test
Equipment ID
No 3
linked to the
Calibration,
Weight Scale
record.
If you select a
Test Equipment
record that is
certified, this
cell will be
shaded green.
If you select a
Test Equipment
record that is
not certified, a
message
appears
indicating that
the Test
Equipment is
out of
certification,
and the cell will
be shaded red.
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration

same Test Equipment
Equipment ID No 2
fields), an error
message appears.
Test
Equipment
Last Cal. 1,
Test
Equipment
Last Cal. 2,
Test
Equipment
Last Cal. 3
Date
The Test Equipment

The date on
which the test text box labeled Last datasheets:
equipment was Calibration Date and is
most recently populated
Calibration,
certified.
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
field.
SAP
Integration
text box labeled
The Test Equipment
Manufacturer and is
populated
automatically with the datasheets:
Test
value stored in the
Equipment
Calibration,
Manufacturer
Weight Scale
the Test Equipment
1, Test
The
Calibration,
Equipment
manufacturer
Character
Weight Scale
Manufacturer
of the test
MDF
2, Test
equipment.
field.
Equipment
Calibration,
Manufacturer
If you perform an
Weight Scale
3
SAP
Integration
device.
text box labeled Model
The Test Equipment
Number and is
populated
automatically with the datasheets:
Test
value stored in the
Equipment
Calibration,
Model Number
Weight Scale
the Test Equipment
1, Test
Calibration,
The model of record that is identified
Equipment
Character the test
Weight Scale
Model Number
equipment.
MDF
2, Test
field.
Equipment
Calibration,
Model Number
If you perform an
Weight Scale
3
SAP
Integration
device.
Test
datasheets:
Equipment
Serial Number
test equipment. populated
1, Test
Calibration,
value stored in the
Equipment
Weight Scale
Serial Number
Calibration,
the Test Equipment
2, Test
Weight Scale

field.
Equipment
Serial Number
3
Test
Equipment
Status 1, Test
Equipment
Status 2, Test
Equipment
Status 3
MDF
If you perform an
device.
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
The Test Equipment

datasheets:
and is populated
Calibration,
Weight Scale
The
value stored in the
Calibration,
certification
Character
Weight Scale
status of the
field in the Test
MDF
test equipment. Equipment record that
Calibration,
corresponding Test
Weight Scale
Equipment ID No
SAP
field.
Integration
The
datasheets:
The work order

number
WO Reference
(Event)
the calibration
event.

box labeled WO
Reference, in which
you can type your
own value.
Calibration,
Weight Scale
Calibration,
Weight Scale
MDF
Calibration,
Weight Scale
SAP
Integration
Calibration Results, Functional Test
Calibration Results, Functional Test records store information about the results of a
functional test calibration. The following table provides an alphabetical list and
description of the fields that exist for the Calibration Results, Functional Test family and
appear on the Calibration Results, Functional Test datasheet by default. Each row
displayed on the datasheet represents a different Calibration Results, Functional Test
record. The information in the table reflects the baseline state and behavior of these
fields.
Field
Name
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
This field behaves differently

depending upon the value in the
Response 1 Character The response associated
with the step defined in the Response Type field. If the value in
the Response Type field is:
Instructions field.
Number: The Response field

appears as a text box and
accepts only a numeric value.
If you type a value other than
a number, an error message
will appear.
Yes/No: The Response field
will appear as a list from
which you can select one of
the following options:
o
Yes
No
Text: The Response field

appears as a text box, and you
can type any value directly
into the cell.
Selection: The Response field

appears as a list containing the
options that you defined in the
Condition fields in the
Calibration Template Details,
Functional Test record that is
linked to the Calibration
Template, Functional Test
record to which the
record is linked.
Response 2
A possible answer to an
instruction that has the
response type list. The
number of response fields
that appear is the same as
Character
the number of Condition
fields that are defined for
the associated Calibration
Template Details,
Functional Test record.
This field is enabled only if the value

stored in the Response Type field is
List. In this case, the field appears as
a list that contains the options you
defined in the Condition fields in the
Functional Test record that is linked
to the Calibration Template,
Functional Test record to which the
Calibration, Functional Test record is
linked.
Character
Template Details,

linked.
Character
Template Details,

linked.
Response 5 Character A possible answer to an


Response 3
Response 4
Response 6
Response 7
Response 8

Template Details,

linked. .
Character
Template Details,

linked.
Character
Template Details,

linked.
Character
Template Details,

linked.
Response 9
Response
10
Character
Template Details,

linked.
Character
Template Details,

linked.
Instruction
Text
Response
Type

The question you are
the Instruction field in the Calibration
answering during the
Template Details, Functional Test
functional test (e.g., What is record that is linked to the Calibration
the current temperature?). Template, Functional Test record to
which the Calibration, Functional
Test record is linked.

the Response Type field in the
The type of answer you
should give to the question
Character
defined in the Instruction
field.
linked.
Calibration
Sequence
Number

the Sequence Number field in the
which the step identified in
Number
the Instruction field was
performed in relation to
other steps.
linked.
Calibration Recommendation
Calibration Recommendation records store information about recommendations that were
created for Calibration Event records or Equipment records after a calibration. The
Calibration Recommendation family. The information in the table reflects the baseline
Field
Alert Assignee
When Due?
Data
Type
Logical
Description
Behavior and Usage
Datasheet/Tab

check box labeled Alert
Assignee When Due. If
this value is True, an email
Indicates whether
message will be sent to the
or not you want
user identified in the
to send an email
Assigned to Name field on
message to the
the date defined in the
Alert tab on the
person who is
Target Completion Date Calibration
responsible for
field. If this value is False, Recommendation
implementing the
no alert will be sent.
datasheet
recommendation
when the
In order for an email
recommendation
message to be sent, the
is due.
value in the Status field
must be Approved or In
Progress.
Assigned to Name Character The name of the This field appears as a list Calibration
labeled Assigned to Name,

which contains a list of
Recommendation
person who is
Security Users that are
tab on the
responsible for
members of the MI
Calibration
implementing the
Calibration User Security Recommendation
recommendation.
Group. You can select a datasheet
This value appears as a list
labeled Author Name,
which contains list of
Security Users that are
members of the MI
Calibration
Calibration User Security
The name of the
Recommendation
Group.
person proposing
tab on the
Author Name
Character
the
Calibration
recommendation.
Recommendation
with the name of the
datasheet
Security User who created
the Calibration
Recommendation record
by default.
This field appears as a list
Business Impact Character The impact to the labeled Business Impact Calibration
and contains a list of
facility if the
Recommendation
System Codes that exist in tab on the
recommended
the
action is
Calibration
MI_BUSINESS_IMPACT Recommendation
performed.
System Code Table. You datasheet
can choose from the
following values:
Facility Shutdown
(FACILITY
SHUTDOWN)
Facility Slowdown
(FACILITY
SLOWDOWN)
Unit Shutdown
(UNIT
SHUTDOWN)
Unit Slowdown
(UNIT
SLOWDOWN)
System Shutdown
(SYSTEM
SHUTDOWN)
System Slowdown
(SYSTEM
SLOWDOWN)
Product
Degradation
(PRODUCT
DEGRADATION)
None (NONE)

The type of
and populated
Calibration
Calibration Event automatically with the
Recommendation
record for which value stored in the
tab on the
Calibration Type Character
the
Calibration Type field in Calibration
recommendation the Calibration Event
Recommendation
was created.
record to which the
datasheet
Calibration
Recommendation record is
linked.
Recommendation Basis,
The ID of the
Calibration
Calibration Event
Recommendation
Calibration
record for which
tab on the
Recommendation Character
the
Calibration
Basis
the Event ID field in the
recommendation
Recommendation
Calibration Event record
was created.
datasheet
to which the Calibration
linked.
Logical
Create Work
Indicates whether This field appears as a
Calibration
Request?
not an SAP
check box labeled Create Recommendation
Notification or Work Request. If this
tab on the
Oracle EBS eAM value is True, and SAP
Calibration
Work Request
should be created
from this
Notification or Oracle
Recommendation
Calibration
EBS eAM Work Request
datasheet
Recommendation will be created.
record when it is
saved.
Creation Date
Completion
Comments
Date

box labeled Creation Date, Calibration
Recommendation
The date that the
populated automatically tab on the
recommendation
with the date on which the Calibration
was created.
Calibration
Recommendation
Recommendation record datasheet
was created.
Text
You can type a value

directly into the
Details about the Completion Comments
completed
cell. This field is required
recommendation. if the value in the Status
field is Rejected,
Superseded, or Cancelled.
Calibration
Recommendation
tab on the
Calibration
Recommendation
datasheet

Specifies how
Alert Assignee When Due
many days before
field is True, this field is
the value in the
Alert tab on the
Days Before Due
enabled and required, and
Target
Calibration
Date to be
Number
you can type a number
Completion Date
Recommendation
Notified
directly into the Days
field that an
datasheet
Before Due Date to be
email message
Notified cell. Otherwise,
will be sent.
box labeled Equipment ID. Calibration
Equipment ID
If the Calibration
Equipment
Recommendation
record to which Recommendation record is tab on the
the Calibration created from an
Calibration
Recommendation Equipment record, this
Recommendation
record is linked. field is disabled and
datasheet
the Equipment ID field in
that Equipment record.

If the Calibration
created from a Calibration
Event record, this field is
value stored in the
Equipment record to
which that Calibration
If the Calibration
created from the
Recommendation
Management page, you
can click the
button
to select one or more
Equipment records to link
to the Calibration
labeled Final Approver
The name of the
Name, which contains a
person who
list of Security Users that
should approve
Calibration
are members of the MI
the information
Recommendation
Calibration Administrator
Final Approver
in the Calibration
tab on the
Character
Security Group. You can
Name
Recommendation
Calibration
select a value from the list.
record after the
Recommendation
Note that only the user
recommended
datasheet
identified in the Final
action has been
Approver field can set the
performed.
value in the Status field to
Approved.
Logical
Final State Lock
Indicates whether This field appears as a
Calibration
or not the
check box labeled Final Recommendation
Calibration
State Lock. If this value is tab on the
Recommendation True, the recommendation Calibration
record has
has been completed and Recommendation
reached a final the Calibration
datasheet
state.
Frequency of
Alert After Due
Date
Functional
Location ID
in a final state. If this
value is False, the
recommendation has not
yet been finalized.
labeled Frequency of Alert
After Due Date. You can
choose from a list of the
following options:
Specifies how
Never
often email
Daily
messages will be
sent to the person
Weekly
Alert tab on the
who is
Calibration
Character responsible for
Recommendation
Monthly
implementing the
datasheet
recommendation
Yearly
after the
completion date
has passed.
required when the value in
the Alert Assignee When
Due field is True.
Otherwise, this field is
disabled.
box labeled Functional
Calibration
Location ID and is
Functional
Recommendation
populated
automatically
Location record
tab on the
to which the
Calibration
the Functional Location Recommendation
Equipment
record identified field in the Functional
datasheet
in the Equipment Location record to which
ID field is linked. the Equipment record
identified in the
Equipment ID field is
linked.
If the Calibration
created from the
Recommendation
Management page, you
can click the

button
to select one or more
Functional Location
records to link to the
Calibration
Implementation
Text
Alert Text
The date on
which the
recommended
action was
performed.
Implemented
Date
The date the

recommendation
directly into the
was
Implemented Date cell.
implemented.
Calibration
Recommendation
tab on the
Calibration
Recommendation
datasheet
The date by
which the
recommended
action must be You can type a value
completed if it directly into the
was not
Mandatory Date cell.
completed by the
target completion
date.
Calibration
Recommendation
tab on the
Calibration
Recommendation
datasheet

A description of
directly into the
the recommended
Recommendation
action.
Description cell.
Calibration
Recommendation
tab on the
Calibration
Recommendation
datasheet
Date
Mandatory Date Date
Recommendation
Text
Description
Recommendation Character A brief

Headline
description of the
recommended
action.

directly into the
Implementation Alert Text
cell.

directly into the
Recommendation
Headline cell. If the value
in the Alert Assignee
When Due field is True,
the text that you type in
Alert tab on the

Calibration
Recommendation
datasheet
Calibration
Recommendation
tab on the
Calibration
Recommendation
datasheet
the Recommendation
Headline field will
become the subject of the
email.
box labeled
Calibration
A value that
Recommendation ID,
Recommendation
identifies the
Recommendation
tab on the
Character Calibration
ID
populated automatically Calibration
Recommendation
with an ID generated by Recommendation
record.
the Meridium APM
datasheet
system.
labeled Recommendation
Priority, which contains a
list of System Codes that
exist in the
MI_PRIORITY System Calibration
Code Table. You can
Recommendation
The priority of
choose from the following tab on the
Recommendation
Character the recommended
baseline values:
Priority
Calibration
action.
Recommendation
High (HIGH)
datasheet
Medium
(MEDIUM)
Low (LOW)
check box labeled
Reevaluate. If the value is
set to True, an email
message will be sent to
users specified in the
Indicates whether
Reevaluation Notification
or not you want
List field. If this value is Alert tab on the
to send an email
False, the recommendation Calibration
message
does not need to be reRecommendation
suggesting a reevaluated.
datasheet
evaluation of the
recommendation.
In order for an email
message to be sent, the
value in the Status field
must be Approved or In
Progress.
Logical
Reevaluate?
Reevaluation
Alert Body Text
Reevaluation
Date
Text

The text that will the Reevaluate field is
be included in the True, and you can type a
re-evaluation
email message. Reevaluation Alert Body
Text cell. Otherwise, this
field is disabled.
Alert tab on the

Calibration
Recommendation
datasheet
Date

the Reevaluate field is
True, and you can select a
date manually. Otherwise,
Alert tab on the

Calibration
Recommendation
datasheet
The date that a

re-evaluation
email message
will be sent.
The users to
whom the reReevaluation
Character evaluation email
Notification List
message will be
sent.
Required
Equipment
Status

Alert tab on the
Calibration
the Reevaluate field is
Recommendation
True. Otherwise, this field
datasheet
is disabled.
This field contains a list of
System Codes that exist in
the MI_STATUS System
Code Table. You can
The state in
Calibration
baseline values:
which the
Recommendation
equipment should
tab on the
On-line (ONCharacter exist before
Calibration
LINE)
performing the
Recommendation
Off-line (OFFrecommended
datasheet
action against it.
LINE)
Reviewer Name
Not Applicable
(N/A)

labeled Review Name and Calibration
The name of the
contains a list of Security Recommendation
person
Users that are a member of tab on the
Character responsible for
the MI Calibration
Calibration
reviewing the
Recommendation
recommendation.
Group. You can select a datasheet
You can choose from a list

of the following values:
Status
Character
The status of the

recommendation.
Approved
Created
Pending Review
Reviewed
Rejected
Cancelled
Superseded
In Progress
Implemented
Calibration
Recommendation
tab on the
Calibration
Recommendation
datasheet
When the record is

created, the field set
automatically to Created,
but can be modified if
needed. This field is
required.
Target
Date
Completion Date
Technical
Number
Work Request
Equipment
The date by
which the
You can select a date
recommended
manually. This value is
action should be required.
completed.
Calibration
Recommendation
tab on the
Calibration
Recommendation
datasheet
The technical
number
associated with
You can type a value into
this field manually.
record identified
in the Equipment
ID field.
Calibration
Recommendation
tab on the
Calibration
Recommendation
datasheet

Equipment
associated with
the SAP
Calibration
Recommendation
tab on the
Calibration
If the value in the Create

Work Request field is
True, this field is disabled
and populated
Notification or automatically with the ID

Oracle EBS eAM of the SAP or Oracle EBS
Work Request
eAM Equipment that is
Recommendation
created from the associated with the SAP
datasheet
Calibration
Notification or Oracle
Recommendation EBS eAM Work Request
record.
that was created.
Work Request
Functional
Location
The ID of the
Functional
Location
associated with
and populated
the SAP
automatically with the ID
Notification or
Character
of the SAP or Oracle EBS
Oracle EBS eAM
eAM Functional Location
Work Request
that is associated with the
created from the
SAP Notification or
Calibration
Oracle EBS eAM Work
Recommendation
Request that was created.
record.
Calibration
Recommendation
tab on the
Calibration
Recommendation
datasheet
Work Request
Reference
The ID of the
SAP Notification
or Oracle EBS
eAM Work
and populated
Character Request that was
automatically with the ID
created from the
of the SAP Notification or
Calibration
Oracle EBS eAM Work
Recommendation
Request that was created.
record.
Calibration
Recommendation
tab on the
Calibration
Recommendation
datasheet
Test Equipment
Test Equipment records store details about a piece of test equipment that is used to
perform calibrations. The following table provides an alphabetical list and description of
the fields that exist for the Test Equipment family and appear on the Test Equipment MDI
and Test Equipment datasheets by default. The information in the table reflects the
Field
Data
Type
Assigned To
The person to which the

test equipment is
assigned. In other
You can type a value directly into
Character
words, the person who is the Assigned To cell.
responsible for the test
equipment.
Category
Character
Certification
Interval
A number that, along

This field appears as a text box
with the unit of measure
labeled Certification Interval and is
stored in the
populated with 1 by default. You
Number Certification Units field,
must type a number into this field.
represents the amount of
Otherwise, an error message will
time that is required
appear.
between certifications.
Certification
Status
This value appears as a text box

labeled Certification Status and is
disabled. If the date stored in the
Next Certification field has passed,
automatically with Out of Cert to
indicate that the test equipment is
no longer certified. If the date in
the Next Certification has not yet
passed, this field is populated
automatically with Certified.
Description
Behavior and Usage
The category of the test You can type a value directly into
equipment.
the Category cell.
A value that indicates

whether or not the test
Character
equipment is currently
certified.
Indicates that the

organization that
Certification
certified the device uses You can type a value directly into
Supplier is
Character a work process that is in the Certification Supplier is
ISO/IEC 17025
compliance with the
ISO/IEC 17025 Certified cell.
Certified
certification standard
ISO/IEC 17025.
Certification
Character The time unit associated Certification Units and contains the
following options:
Units
with the certification
interval identified in the
Certification Interval
Minutes
field.
Hours
Days
Weeks
Months
Years
This field is populated with Years

by default.
A number that, along
with the unit of measure
stored in the Check
the Check Interval cell. You must
Interval Units field,
Check Interval Number
type a numeric value into this field.
represents the amount of
Otherwise, an error message will
time that is required
appear.
between test equipment
checks.
labeled Check Interval Unit and
The time unit associated

Check Interval
with the check interval
Character
Units
identified in the Check
Interval field.
Minutes
Hours
Days
Weeks
Months
Years
This field is populated with Years

by default.
Class
Character
The class of the test

equipment.

the Class cell.
Description
Character
A description of the test You can type a value directly into

equipment.
the Description cell.
Equipment ID
Last
Certification
Date
The ID of the test

Character
equipment.
Date
Last Check Date Date

labeled Test Equipment ID. This
field is required and must be
unique.

The most recent date on
labeled Last Certification Date and
which the test
displays the Calendar feature. This
equipment was certified.
field is required.
The most recent date on This field appears as a text box
which the test
labeled Last Check Date and
equipment was checked. displays the Calendar feature.
Maintenance
Plant
The plant to which the

test equipment is
assigned. In other
Character
words, the plant where
the test equipment is
located.
Manufacturer

The manufacturer of the
Character
the Manufacturer cell. This field is
test equipment.
required.

the Maintenance Plant cell.

the Model Number cell. This field
is required.
The date on which the labeled Certification Due, which is
next certification of the disabled and populated
test equipment is due. automatically with the next
certification date.
The model number of

Model Number Character
the test equipment.
Next
Certification
Date
This value is calculated by adding

the value stored in the Certification
Interval field to the value stored in
the Last Certification Date field.
For example, if the Last
Certification Date field contains
the date 4/1/2013, the Certification
Interval field contains the value 1,
and the Certification Units field
contains the value Years, the value
stored in the Next Certification
field will be 4/1/2014.
NIST
Traceability
Required
Purchase Date
Indicates that the test

equipment performs
standard that can be
Character traced back to a valid
the NIST Traceability Required
standard with regards to cell.
the National Institute of
Standards and
Technology (NIST).
Date
The date the test

equipment was
purchased.

labeled Purchase Date and displays
the Calendar feature.
The order number that

Purchase Order
Character was used to purchase the
Number
the Purchase Order Number cell.
test equipment.
Serial Number
Character

The serial number of the
the Serial Number cell. This field is
test equipment.
required.
Type
Character
The type of test

equipment.
Vendor
The vendor from which

Character the test equipment was
the Vendor cell.
purchased.

the Type cell.
Test Equipment History

Test Equipment History records store details about the certification history of a piece of
test equipment. The following table provides an alphabetical list and description of the
fields that exist for the Test Equipment History family and appear on the Test Equipment
History datasheet by default. The information in the table reflects the baseline state and
behavior of these fields.
Field
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage

labeled Certification Date and
displays the Calendar feature.
The date on which that the This field is required.
Certification
Date
test equipment was
Date
certified.
After the Test Equipment History
record is saved, this field becomes
disabled.
You can type a value directly in
the Certification Number field.
The certification number
that is assigned to the test This field is required.
Certification
equipment by the
Character
Number
certification organization
identified in the Supplier
field.
disabled.
Entered By
Supplier
This field is disabled and

The user ID of the Security
user ID of the Security User who
Character User that created the Test
was logged in when the Test
Equipment History record.
Equipment History record was
created.
the Supplier cell. This field is
required.
The third party organization
Character that certified of the piece of
test equipment.
disabled.
System Code Tables Used by Calibration

Management
The following System Code Tables are used by Calibration Management.
Table ID
Table Description
MI_CALIBRATION_CHECKLIST_TYPE
MI Calibration, Check List

Type
MI_CALIBRATION_ERROR_ASSESSMENT
MI Calibration Error
Assessment
MI_CALIBRATION_FUNCTION
MI Calibration, Calibration
Function
Calibration Input/Output Types
MI_CALIBRATION_MODE
Mode
MI_CALIBRATION_REFERENCES
List of References
MI_CALIBRATION_STRATEGIES
MI Calibration, Strategies
MI_CALIBRATION_TEMPERATURE_SOURCE
MI Calibration Temperature
Source
MI_CALIBRATION_TYPE
Type
MI_CALIBRATION_YES_OR_NO
MI Calibration, Yes or No
MI_CHARACTERISTIC_CURVE
MI Calibration, Characteristic
Curve
MI_CHEMICAL_COMPONENTS
Calibration, Chemical
Components
MI_DAMPING_TYPE
MI Calibration, Damping Type
MI_ERROR_BASIS
MI Calibration, Percent Error

Basic Calculation
MI_FLUKE_ERROR_MODES
MI Calibration, Fluke Error

Modes
MI_GAS _CYLINDER_CONNECTION_NUMBER
MI Calibration, Gas Cylinder

Connection Number
MI_GAS_CYLINDER_SIZE

Size
MI_GAS_CYLINDER_TYPE

Type
MI_MAINTENANCE_TYPE
MI Calibration, Maintenance
Type
MI_POWER_SOURCE
MI Calibration, Power Source
MI_RTD_TYPE
MI Calibration, RTD Type
MI_SENSOR_TYPE
MI Calibration, Sensor Type
MI_STATUS
Status Codes - CORE
MI_SWITCH_CONTACT_STATE
MI Calibration, Switch Contact

State
MI_TASK_TYPE_REFERENCE
CORE, Reference values to

limit task type lists when
creating tasks
MI_TEMPERATURE_MEASUREMENT_STANDARD
MI Calibration, Temperature
Measurement Standard
MI_THERMOCOUPLE_TYPE
MI Calibration, Thermocouple
Type
MI_YES_NO
MI Core, Yes-No
URL Paths for Calibration Features

The following table lists and describes the paths for the Meridium APM Calibration
Management features. Note that to construct a valid URL, you must prepend meridium://
to the path. In some cases, you must define parameters following the path.
Feature
Calibration
Start Page
Calibration
Devices
Calibration
Events
Calibration
Graphs
URL Path
Description
Calibration
Displays the Calibration Management

Functions page.
Calibration/Devices
Displays the Select a Device and Properties

dialog box. This path accepts parameters that
let you specify whether to send or receive data.
Calibration/Events
Displays the Calibration Event Options dialog

box, where you can choose to create a new
event or search for an existing event. This path
accepts a parameter that allows you to launch
the Event Builder for the purpose of creating a
Calibration event.
Calibration/Graphs
Serves as the path for URLs that open

Calibration graphs. This path accepts
parameters that allow you to specify which
graph to open.
Displays the Calibration Administration page,

Calibration
Calibration/Preferences where you can configure administrative
Administration
settings for Calibration Management.
Calibration
Reports
Calibration/Reports
Serves as the path for URLs that open

Calibration reports.
Calibration
Tasks
Calibration/Tasks
Serves as the path for accessing and building

Calibration Tasks. This path accepts
parameters that let you supply details about the
task that you want to access.
Calibration
Templates
Calibration/Templates
Serves as the path for accessing Calibration

templates.
Parameters for the Calibration Devices

URL
The URL for accessing Devices in Calibration, meridium://Calibration/Devices, accepts

the parameter described in the following table. Note that a link created from the path with
NO parameters open the Select a Device and Properties dialog box.
Parameter
Name
Action
Description
Accepted Notes
Value(s)
Send
Specifies the
action that you
want to take: send Receive
or receive.
When you specify Send, the Send to Device

option will be selected by default on the
Select a Device and Properties dialog box.
Specifying Receive will cause the Receive
from Device option to be selected by
default.
Examples of the Calibration Devices

URL
meridium://Calibration/Devices
Opens the Select a Device and Properties dialog box.
meridium://Calibration/Devices?Action=Send
Opens the Select a Device and Properties dialog box with the Send to Device option
selected by default.
meridium://Calibration/Devices?Action=Receive
Opens the Select a Device and Properties dialog box with the Receive from Device
option selected by default.
Parameters for the Calibration Events

URL
The URL for accessing Devices in Calibration, meridium://Calibration/Events, accepts
the parameter described in the following table. Note that a link created from the path with
NO parameters open the Calibration Event Options dialog box.
Parameter
Name
Mode
Description
Accepted Notes
Value(s)
Specifies to
use the Event Build
Builder.
Specifying this parameter launches the Event

Builder, where you can create a new Calibration
Event record. Note that this URL is different
from the Event Builder URL, as it supplies
Calibration-specific selections to the builder
automatically without requiring you to specify
additional parameters.
Examples of the Calibration Events

URL
meridium://Calibration/Events
Opens the Calibration Event Options dialog box.
meridium://Calibration/Events?Mode=Builder
Launches the Event Builder, which guides you through the process of creating a
Calibration Event record.
Parameters for the Calibration Graphs

URL
The URL for accessing Calibration graphs, meridium://Calibration/Graphs, accepts the
parameters described in the following table. This URL is designed to display a specific
type of graph for a specific Calibration Event. Therefore, both parameters are required for
the URL to work.
Parameter
Name
EventKey
Description
Accepted Value(s)
Specifies the Calibration Event

The Entity Key of the Calibration
record for which you want to access a
Event record.
graph.
Analog
AnalogError
GraphType
Specifies which graph you want to

access for the specified Entity Key.
AnalogMeasure
AnalyzerMultiComponent
Note: By default, Calibration graph URLs are configured as links on the Associated
Pages menu for each of the baseline Calibration Event families.
Examples of the Calibration Graphs

URL
meridium://Calibration/Graphs?EventKey=1234567&GraphType=AnalogError
Displays the Analog Error graph for the Calibration Event record with the Entity Key
1234567.
Parameters for the Calibration Reports

URL
The URL for accessing Calibration reports, meridium://Calibration/Reports, accepts
the parameters described in the following table. This URL is designed to display a
specific type of report for a specific Calibration Event record. Therefore, both parameters
are required for the URL to work.
Parameter
Name
EventKey
Description
Accepted Value(s)
Specifies the Calibration Event

The Entity Key of the Calibration
record for which you want to access a
Event record.
report.
Analog
ReportType
Specifies which report you want to
access for the specified Entity Key.
AnalyzerMultiComponent
Functional
Examples of the Calibration Reports

URL
meridium://Calibration/Reports?EventKey=1234567&ReportType=Analog
Displays the Analog report for the Calibration Event record the Entity Key 1234567.
Parameters for the Calibration Tasks

URL
The URL for accessing Calibration Task records, meridium://Calibration/Tasks, accepts
the parameters described in the following table. Note that a link constructed from the path
with NO parameters will open the Task Options dialog box, where you can choose to
create a new task or access an existing Task record.
Parameter Name
EntityKey
Description
Specifies the Entity

Key of the Task
record that you
want to link to a
Calibration
Template record.
Accepted
Value(s)
The Entity
Key of the This parameter is used in
desired
conjunction with the Mode and
Calibration FamilyKey parameters.
Task record.
Specifies the piece

of equipment for
The Entity
which to create a
Key of the
EquipmentEntityKey new Task record.
appropriate
piece of
equipment.
FamilyKey
Mode
Notes
Specifies the Family

The Family
Key of the family to
Key of the
which the specified
appropriate
Task record
family.
belongs.
Link
Specifies whether
you want to link the Unlink
Calibration Task
record to a
Calibration
Template record or
unlink the
Calibration Task
record from a
Calibration
Use this parameter in

conjunction with the
UseTaskBuilder parameter to
pass in the Entity Key of the
piece of equipment for which
you are creating a new Task
record.
This parameter is used in

EntityKey parameters.
FamilyKey and EntityKey
parameters.
Link: Launches the

Link Calibration Task to
Builder, which lets you
link a specific Calibration
Task record (as
determined by the
EntityKey) to a
record.
UseTaskBuilder
Template record
Unlink: Removes the

link between a given
and the Calibration
Template record to which
it is currently linked.
Specifies that you

want to use the Task
True
Builder for creating
a new Task record.
When you use this parameter,

you can also use the
EquipmentEntityKey
parameter to specify the piece
of equipment for which you
are creating the new Task
record.
Examples of the Calibration Tasks URL
meridium://Calibration/Tasks
Opens the Task Options dialog box, where you can choose to create a new Task record or
access an existing Task record.
meridium://Calibration/Tasks?
Mode=Link&EntityKey=[ENTY_KEY]&FamilyKey=[FMLY_KEY]
Launches the Link Calibration Task to Calibration Template Builder, which lets you link
a specific Calibration Task record (as determined by the EntityKey) to a Calibration
Template record.
Mode=Unlink&EntityKey=[ENTY_KEY]&FamilyKey=[FMLY_KEY]
Removes the link between a given Calibration Task record and the Calibration Template
record to which it is currently linked.
Note: The Link and Unlink URLs are pre-configured as links on the Associated Pages
menu for the Calibration Task family.
meridium://Calibration/Tasks?UseTaskBuilder=True
Launches the Task Builder, where you can create a new Calibration Task record.
UseTaskBuilder=True&EquipmentEntityKey=[ENTY_KEY]
Launches the Task Builder and automatically selects the Equipment record indicated by
the EquipmentEntityKey so that you can create a new Calibration Task for that piece of
equipment.
Hint: You can use this URL to create links for equipment families that can have
Calibration Tasks. In this way, when you are viewing Equipment records in the Record
Manager, you will be able to click the link to create a Calibration Task record that is
linked to the current Equipment record.
Parameters for the Calibration

Templates URL
The URL for accessing Calibration Template records, meridium://Calibration/Templates,
requires the parameters described in the following table. To construct a valid URL from
the path, you must define all three parameters. Click here for examples of using these
parameters.
Parameter
Name
EntityKey
Description
Accepted
Value(s)
Specifies the Entity Key

of the Calibration
Template record that you
want to link to an
Equipment record.
The Entity Key

of the desired This parameter is used in
Calibration
Template
FamilyKey parameters.
record.
FamilyKey Specifies the Family Key The Family

of the family to which the Key of the
Notes

specified Calibration
appropriate
Template record belongs. family.
EntityKey parameters.
FamilyKey and EntityKey
parameters.
Mode
Specifies whether you

want to link the
record to an Equipment
record or unlink the
from an Equipment
record.
Link: Launches the Link

builder, which lets you link
a specific Calibration
Template record (as
determined by the
EntityKey) to an
Equipment record.
Unlink: Removes the

link between a given
record and the Equipment
record to which it is
currently linked.
Link
Unlink
Examples of the Calibration Templates

URL
meridium://Calibration/Templates?
EntityKey=1234567&FamilyKey=1234567&Mode=Link
Launches the Link Calibration Template builder, where you can link the Calibration
Template record with the Entity Key 1234567 to a selected Equipment record.
meridium://Calibration/Templates?
EntityKey=1234567&FamilyKey=1234567&Mode=Unlink
Unlinks the Calibration Template record with the Entity Key 1234567 from the
Equipment record to which it is currently linked.
Automated Calibration
A calibration performed using a device such as a Fluke.
Manual Calibration
A calibration in which calibration data is recorded by hand and typed manually into
Calibration Event records.

ASFTY

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ASFTY

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

About the Asset Safety Work Process

Schedule reevaluations, audits, and redesigns of the safety

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Asset Safety System Requirements

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

First-Time Deployment Workflow

Configure the Hazards Analysis module.

Configure the SIS Management module.

Configure the Calibration Management

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Asset Safety User Instructions

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Accessing the Asset Safety Dashboard

The Dashboard page appears, displaying the Asset Safety dashboard.

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Aspects of the Asset Safety Dashboard

Calibration Pass/Fail Results for Last 12 Months

Hazard Analysis Schedule

Proof Tests Pass/Fail

Proof Test Schedule

Proven in Use Devices by Type

Quantity of Protective Instrument Loops

Quantity of SIF Trips

View SIL Distribution

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

The Content Filter section contains the following lists:

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Hazards Analysis Schedule

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

View SIL Distribution

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Quantity of Protective Instrumented

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Proven in Use Devices by Type

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Proof Test Schedule

Task ID: Displays a hyperlink for each Task record whose:

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Proof Tests Pass/Fail

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Headline: Displays a hyperlink for each Calibration Recommendation record

The following image shows an example of the Calibration Recommendations section.

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

The following image shows an example of the Calibration Schedule section.

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Calibration Pass/Fail Results for Last 12

Contain the value PASS in the Overall AL Pass/Fail field.

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Quantity of SIF Trips

Unsafe Demand (Unsafe).

Spurious Trip (Spurious).

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

About Asset Safety Catalog Items

Hazards Analysis Catalog Folder Structure

Calibration Management Catalog Folder Structure

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Overview of Hazards Analysis

Assess the likelihood of the risks in each Scenario actually occurring.

Identify ways to prevent the risk in each Scenario from occurring.

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Hazards Analysis System Requirements

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Components in Hazards Analyses